Scripture · Sanskrit Bible with the King James Version · the Pāli Canon

Chapters on Legal Topics 6 खन्धक 6

Chapter: 1 2 3 4 567 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

1. Pañcabhesajjakathā

Pāli in Devanagari; under each word its Roman pronunciation, syllable by syllable (ṃ = nasal hum). Tap a Pāli word for its meaning (PTS Pāli-English Dictionary); tap again to open it in the Pāli dictionary.

Verse: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 771 772 773 774 775 776 777 778 779 780 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 789 790 791 792 793 794 795 796 797 798 799 800 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 842 843 844 845 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 865 866 867 868 869 870 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 881 882 883 884 885 886 887 888 889 890 891 892 893 894 895 896 897 898 899 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 920 921 922 923 924 925 926 927 928 929 930 931 932 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 950 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 958 959 960 961 962 963 964 965 966 967 968 969 970 971 972 973 974 975 976 977 978 979 980 981 982 983 984 985 986 987 988 989 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 997 998 999 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 1081 1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 1087 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 1140 1141 1142 1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 1148 1149 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 1160 1161 1162 1163 1164 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 1170 1171 1172 1173 1174 1175 1176 1177 1178 1179 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 1185 1186 1187 1188 1189 1190 1191 1192 1193 1194 1195 1196 1197 1198 1199 1200 1201 1202 1203 1204 1205 1206 1207 1208 1209 1210 1211 1212 1213 1214 1215 1216 1217 1218 1219 1220 1221 1222 1223 1224 1225 1226 1227 1228 1229 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 1240 1241 1242 1243 1244 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 1250 1251 1252 1253 1254 1255 1256 1257 1258 1259 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 1280 1281 1282 1283 1284 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 1290 1291 1292 1293 1294 1295 1296 1297 1298 1299 1300 1301 1302 1303 1304 1305 1306 1307 1308 1309 1310 1311 1312 1313 1314 1315 1316 1317 1318 1319 1320 1321 1322 1323 1324 1325 1326 1327 1328 1329 1330 1331 1332 1333 1334 1335 1336 1337 1338 1339 1340 1341 1342 1343 1344 1345 1346 1347 1348 1349 1350 1351 1352 1353 1354 1355 1356 1357 1358 1359 1360 1361 1362 1363 1364 1365 1366 1367 1368 1369 1370 1371 1372 1373 1374 1375 1376 1377 1378 1379 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 1385 1386 1387 1388 1389 1390 1391 1392 1393 1394 1395 1396 1397 1398 1399 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 1410 1411 1412 1413 1414 1415 1416 1417 1418 1419 1420 1421 1422 1423 1424 1425 1426 1427 1428 1429 1430 1431 1432 1433 1434 1435 1436 1437 1438 1439 1440 1441 1442 1443 1444 1445 1446 1447 1448 1449 1450 1451 1452 1453 1454 1455 1456 1457 1458 1459 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 1465 1466 1467 1468 1469 1470 1471 1472 1473 1474 1475 1476 1477 1478 1479 1480 1481 1482 1483 1484 1485 1486 1487 1488 1489 1490 1491 1492 1493 1494 1495 1496 1497 1498 1499 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 1505 1506 1507 1508 1509 1510 1511 1512 1513 1514 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 1520 1521 1522 1523 1524 1525 1526 1527 1528 1529 1530 1531 1532 1533 1534 1535 1536 1537 1538 1539 1540 1541 1542 1543 1544 1545 1546 1547 1548 1549 1550 1551 1552 1553 1554 1555 1556 1557 1558 1559 1560 1561 1562 1563 1564 1565 1566 1567 1568 1569 1570 1571 1572 1573 1574 1575 1576 1577 1578 1579 1580 1581 1582 1583 1584 1585 1586 1587 1588 1589 1590 1591 1592 1593 1594 1595 1596 1597 1598 1599 1600 1601 1602 1603 1604 1605 1606 1607 1608 1609 1610 1611 1612 1613 1614 1615 1616 1617 1618 1619 1620 1621 1622 1623 1624 1625 1626 1627 1628 1629 1630 1631 1632 1633 1634 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 1640 1641 1642 1643 1644 1645 · Hide pronunciation

1

थेरवादthe·ra·vā·da विनयपिटकvi·na·ya·pi·ṭa·ka

Theravāda Vinayapiṭaka

Theravāda Collection on Monastic Law
2

महावग्गma·hā·vag·ga

Mahāvagga

The Great Division
3

6। भेसज्जक्खन्धकbhe·saj·jak·khan·dha·ka

6. Bhesajjakkhandhaka

The chapter on medicines
4

1। पञ्चभेसज्जकथाpañ·ca·bhe·saj·ja·ka·thā

1. Pañcabhesajjakathā

1. Discussion of the five tonics
5

तेनte·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na बुद्धोbud·dho भगवाbha·ga·vā सावत्थियंsā·vat·thi·yaṃ विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti जेतवनेje·ta·va·ne अनाथपिण्डिकस्सa·nā·tha·piṇ·ḍi·kas·sa आरामे।ā·rā·me

Tena samayena buddho bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme.

At one time the Buddha was staying at Sāvatthī in the Jeta Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s Monastery.
6

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ सारदिकेनsā·ra·di·ke·na आबाधेनā·bā·dhe·na फुट्ठानंphuṭ·ṭhā·naṃ यागुपिyā·gu·pi पीताpī·tā उग्गच्छति,ug·gac·cha·ti भत्तम्पिbhat·tam·pi भुत्तंbhut·taṃ उग्गच्छति।ug·gac·cha·ti

Tena kho pana samayena bhikkhūnaṁ sāradikena ābādhena phuṭṭhānaṁ yāgupi pītā uggacchati, bhattampi bhuttaṁ uggacchati.

At that time the monks were afflicted with autumn illness, and they could keep down neither congee nor other food.
7

तेte तेनte·na किसाki·sā होन्ति,hon·ti लूखा,lū·khā दुब्बण्णा,dub·baṇ·ṇā उप्पण्डुप्पण्डुकजाता,up·paṇ·ḍup·paṇ·ḍu·ka·jā·tā धमनिसन्थतगत्ता।dha·ma·ni·san·tha·ta·gat·tā

Te tena kisā honti, lūkhā, dubbaṇṇā, uppaṇḍuppaṇḍukajātā, dhamanisanthatagattā.

As a result, they became thin, haggard, and pale, with veins protruding all over their bodies.
8

अद्दसाad·da·sā खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū किसेki·se लूखेlū·khe दुब्बण्णेdub·baṇ·ṇe उप्पण्डुप्पण्डुकजातेup·paṇ·ḍup·paṇ·ḍu·ka·jā·te धमनिसन्थतगत्ते,dha·ma·ni·san·tha·ta·gat·te दिस्वानdis·vā·na आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ आनन्दंā·nan·daṃ आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

Addasā kho bhagavā te bhikkhū kise lūkhe dubbaṇṇe uppaṇḍuppaṇḍukajāte dhamanisanthatagatte, disvāna āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi—

The Buddha noticed this and asked Venerable Ānanda
9

“किंkiṃ नुnu खो,kho आनन्द,ā·nan·da एतरहिe·ta·ra·hi भिक्खूbhik·khū किसा,ki·sā लूखा,lū·khā दुब्बण्णा,dub·baṇ·ṇā उप्पण्डुप्पण्डुकजाता,up·paṇ·ḍup·paṇ·ḍu·ka·jā·tā धमनिसन्थतगत्ता”ति?dha·ma·ni·san·tha·ta·gat·tā

“kiṁ nu kho, ānanda, etarahi bhikkhū kisā, lūkhā, dubbaṇṇā, uppaṇḍuppaṇḍukajātā, dhamanisanthatagattā”ti?

why they were looking so sickly.
10

“एतरहि,e·ta·ra·hi भन्ते,bhan·te भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ सारदिकेनsā·ra·di·ke·na आबाधेनā·bā·dhe·na फुट्ठानंphuṭ·ṭhā·naṃ यागुपिyā·gu·pi पीताpī·tā उग्गच्छति,ug·gac·cha·ti भत्तम्पिbhat·tam·pi भुत्तंbhut·taṃ उग्गच्छति।ug·gac·cha·ti

“Etarahi, bhante, bhikkhūnaṁ sāradikena ābādhena phuṭṭhānaṁ yāgupi pītā uggacchati, bhattampi bhuttaṁ uggacchati.

Ānanda told him.
11

तेte तेनte·na किसाki·sā होन्ति,hon·ti लूखा,lū·khā दुब्बण्णा,dub·baṇ·ṇā उप्पण्डुप्पण्डुकजाता,up·paṇ·ḍup·paṇ·ḍu·ka·jā·tā धमनिसन्थतगत्ता”ति।dha·ma·ni·san·tha·ta·gat·tā

Te tena kisā honti, lūkhā, dubbaṇṇā, uppaṇḍuppaṇḍukajātā, dhamanisanthatagattā”ti.

(Pāli only)
12

अथa·tha खोkho भगवतोbha·ga·va·to रहोगतस्सra·ho·ga·tas·sa पटिसल्लीनस्सpa·ṭi·sal·lī·nas·sa एवंe·vaṃ चेतसोce·ta·so परिवितक्कोpa·ri·vi·tak·ko उदपादि—u·da·pā·di

Atha kho bhagavato rahogatassa paṭisallīnassa evaṁ cetaso parivitakko udapādi—

Then, while reflecting in private, the Buddha thought,
13

“एतरहिe·ta·ra·hi खोkho भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ सारदिकेनsā·ra·di·ke·na आबाधेनā·bā·dhe·na फुट्ठानंphuṭ·ṭhā·naṃ यागुपिyā·gu·pi पीताpī·tā उग्गच्छति,ug·gac·cha·ti भत्तम्पिbhat·tam·pi भुत्तंbhut·taṃ उग्गच्छति।ug·gac·cha·ti

“etarahi kho bhikkhūnaṁ sāradikena ābādhena phuṭṭhānaṁ yāgupi pītā uggacchati, bhattampi bhuttaṁ uggacchati.

(Pāli only)
14

तेte तेनte·na किसाki·sā होन्ति,hon·ti लूखा,lū·khā दुब्बण्णा,dub·baṇ·ṇā उप्पण्डुप्पण्डुकजाता,up·paṇ·ḍup·paṇ·ḍu·ka·jā·tā धमनिसन्थतगत्ता।dha·ma·ni·san·tha·ta·gat·tā

Te tena kisā honti, lūkhā, dubbaṇṇā, uppaṇḍuppaṇḍukajātā, dhamanisanthatagattā.

(Pāli only)
15

किंkiṃ नुnu खोkho अहंa·haṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ भेसज्जंbhe·saj·jaṃ अनुजानेय्यं,a·nu·jā·ney·yaṃ यंyaṃ भेसज्जञ्चेवbhe·saj·jañ·ce·va अस्सas·sa भेसज्जसम्मतञ्चbhe·saj·ja·sam·ma·tañ·ca लोकस्स,lo·kas·sa आहारत्थञ्चā·hā·rat·thañ·ca फरेय्य,pha·rey·ya नna चca ओळारिकोo·ḷā·ri·ko आहारोā·hā·ro पञ्ञायेय्या”ति?pañ·ñā·yey·yā

Kiṁ nu kho ahaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ bhesajjaṁ anujāneyyaṁ, yaṁ bhesajjañceva assa bhesajjasammatañca lokassa, āhāratthañca phareyya, na ca oḷāriko āhāro paññāyeyyā”ti?

“What tonics might I allow the monks that are generally regarded as tonics, would serve as nourishment, but aren’t considered substantial food?”
16

अथa·tha खोkho भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

Atha kho bhagavato etadahosi—

It then occurred to him,
17

“इमानिi·mā·ni खोkho पञ्चpañ·ca भेसज्जानि,bhe·saj·jā·ni सेय्यथिदं—sey·ya·thi·daṃ

“imāni kho pañca bhesajjāni, seyyathidaṁ—

“There are these five tonics—
18

सप्पि,sap·pi नवनीतं,na·va·nī·taṃ तेलं,te·laṃ मधु,ma·dhu फाणितं;phā·ṇi·taṃ

sappi, navanītaṁ, telaṁ, madhu, phāṇitaṁ;

ghee, butter, oil, honey, and syrup—
19

भेसज्जानिbhe·saj·jā·ni चेवce·va भेसज्जसम्मतानिbhe·saj·ja·sam·ma·tā·ni चca लोकस्स,lo·kas·sa आहारत्थञ्चā·hā·rat·thañ·ca फरन्ति,pha·ran·ti नna चca ओळारिकोo·ḷā·ri·ko आहारोā·hā·ro पञ्ञायति।pañ·ñā·ya·ti

bhesajjāni ceva bhesajjasammatāni ca lokassa, āhāratthañca pharanti, na ca oḷāriko āhāro paññāyati.

that are generally regarded as tonics, serve as nourishment, but aren’t considered substantial food.
20

यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ इमानिi·mā·ni पञ्चpañ·ca भेसज्जानिbhe·saj·jā·ni अनुजानेय्यं,a·nu·jā·ney·yaṃ कालेkā·le पटिग्गहेत्वाpa·ṭig·ga·het·vā कालेkā·le परिभुञ्जितुन्”ति।pa·ri·bhuñ·ji·tun

Yannūnāhaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ imāni pañca bhesajjāni anujāneyyaṁ, kāle paṭiggahetvā kāle paribhuñjitun”ti.

Why don’t I allow them these five tonics, to be received and consumed before midday?”
21

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā सायन्हसमयंsā·yan·ha·sa·ma·yaṃ पटिसल्लानाpa·ṭi·sal·lā·nā वुट्ठितोvuṭ·ṭhi·to एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ निदानेni·dā·ne एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ पकरणेpa·ka·ra·ṇe धम्मिंdham·miṃ कथंka·thaṃ कत्वाkat·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

Atha kho bhagavā sāyanhasamayaṁ paṭisallānā vuṭṭhito etasmiṁ nidāne etasmiṁ pakaraṇe dhammiṁ kathaṁ katvā bhikkhū āmantesi—

In the evening, when the Buddha had come out from seclusion, he gave a teaching and then told the monks what he had thought, adding:
22

“इधi·dha मय्हं,may·haṃ भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve रहोगतस्सra·ho·ga·tas·sa पटिसल्लीनस्सpa·ṭi·sal·lī·nas·sa एवंe·vaṃ चेतसोce·ta·so परिवितक्कोpa·ri·vi·tak·ko उदपादि—u·da·pā·di

“idha mayhaṁ, bhikkhave, rahogatassa paṭisallīnassa evaṁ cetaso parivitakko udapādi—

(Pāli only)
23

‘एतरहिe·ta·ra·hi खोkho भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ सारदिकेनsā·ra·di·ke·na आबाधेनā·bā·dhe·na फुट्ठानंphuṭ·ṭhā·naṃ यागुपिyā·gu·pi पीताpī·tā उग्गच्छति,ug·gac·cha·ti भत्तम्पिbhat·tam·pi भुत्तंbhut·taṃ उग्गच्छति।ug·gac·cha·ti

‘etarahi kho bhikkhūnaṁ sāradikena ābādhena phuṭṭhānaṁ yāgupi pītā uggacchati, bhattampi bhuttaṁ uggacchati.

(Pāli only)
24

तेte तेनte·na किसाki·sā होन्ति,hon·ti लूखा,lū·khā दुब्बण्णा,dub·baṇ·ṇā उप्पण्डुप्पण्डुकजाता,up·paṇ·ḍup·paṇ·ḍu·ka·jā·tā धमनिसन्थतगत्ता।dha·ma·ni·san·tha·ta·gat·tā

Te tena kisā honti, lūkhā, dubbaṇṇā, uppaṇḍuppaṇḍukajātā, dhamanisanthatagattā.

(Pāli only)
25

किंkiṃ नुnu खोkho अहंa·haṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ भेसज्जंbhe·saj·jaṃ अनुजानेय्यं,a·nu·jā·ney·yaṃ यंyaṃ भेसज्जञ्चेवbhe·saj·jañ·ce·va अस्सas·sa भेसज्जसम्मतञ्चbhe·saj·ja·sam·ma·tañ·ca लोकस्स,lo·kas·sa आहारत्थञ्चā·hā·rat·thañ·ca फरेय्य,pha·rey·ya नna चca ओळारिकोo·ḷā·ri·ko आहारोā·hā·ro पञ्ञायेय्या’ति।pañ·ñā·yey·yā

Kiṁ nu kho ahaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ bhesajjaṁ anujāneyyaṁ, yaṁ bhesajjañceva assa bhesajjasammatañca lokassa, āhāratthañca phareyya, na ca oḷāriko āhāro paññāyeyyā’ti.

(Pāli only)
26

तस्सtas·sa मय्हं,may·haṃ भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

Tassa mayhaṁ, bhikkhave, etadahosi—

(Pāli only)
27

‘इमानिi·mā·ni खोkho पञ्चpañ·ca भेसज्जानि,bhe·saj·jā·ni सेय्यथिदं—sey·ya·thi·daṃ

‘imāni kho pañca bhesajjāni, seyyathidaṁ—

(Pāli only)
28

सप्पि,sap·pi नवनीतं,na·va·nī·taṃ तेलं,te·laṃ मधु,ma·dhu फाणितं;phā·ṇi·taṃ

sappi, navanītaṁ, telaṁ, madhu, phāṇitaṁ;

(Pāli only)
29

भेसज्जानिbhe·saj·jā·ni चेवce·va भेसज्जसम्मतानिbhe·saj·ja·sam·ma·tā·ni चca लोकस्स,lo·kas·sa आहारत्थञ्चā·hā·rat·thañ·ca फरन्ति,pha·ran·ti नna चca ओळारिकोo·ḷā·ri·ko आहारोā·hā·ro पञ्ञायति।pañ·ñā·ya·ti

bhesajjāni ceva bhesajjasammatāni ca lokassa, āhāratthañca pharanti, na ca oḷāriko āhāro paññāyati.

(Pāli only)
30

यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ इमानिi·mā·ni पञ्चpañ·ca भेसज्जानिbhe·saj·jā·ni अनुजानेय्यं,a·nu·jā·ney·yaṃ कालेkā·le पटिग्गहेत्वाpa·ṭig·ga·het·vā कालेkā·le परिभुञ्जितुन्’ति।pa·ri·bhuñ·ji·tun

Yannūnāhaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ imāni pañca bhesajjāni anujāneyyaṁ, kāle paṭiggahetvā kāle paribhuñjitun’ti.

(Pāli only)
31

अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve तानिtā·ni पञ्चpañ·ca भेसज्जानिbhe·saj·jā·ni कालेkā·le पटिग्गहेत्वाpa·ṭig·ga·het·vā कालेkā·le परिभुञ्जितुन्”ति।pa·ri·bhuñ·ji·tun

Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, tāni pañca bhesajjāni kāle paṭiggahetvā kāle paribhuñjitun”ti.

“I allow these five tonics, to be received and consumed before midday.”
32

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na भिक्खूbhik·khū तानिtā·ni पञ्चpañ·ca भेसज्जानिbhe·saj·jā·ni कालेkā·le पटिग्गहेत्वाpa·ṭig·ga·het·vā कालेkā·le परिभुञ्जन्ति।pa·ri·bhuñ·jan·ti

Tena kho pana samayena bhikkhū tāni pañca bhesajjāni kāle paṭiggahetvā kāle paribhuñjanti.

The monks then received and consumed the five tonics before midday.
33

तेसंte·saṃ यानिपिyā·ni·pi तानिtā·ni पाकतिकानिpā·ka·ti·kā·ni लूखानिlū·khā·ni भोजनानिbho·ja·nā·ni तानिपिtā·ni·pi नच्छादेन्ति,nac·chā·den·ti पगेवpa·ge·va सेनेसितानि।se·ne·si·tā·ni

Tesaṁ yānipi tāni pākatikāni lūkhāni bhojanāni tānipi nacchādenti, pageva senesitāni.

But even ordinary food did not agree with them, let alone greasy food.
34

तेte तेनte·na चेवce·va सारदिकेनsā·ra·di·ke·na आबाधेनā·bā·dhe·na फुट्ठा,phuṭ·ṭhā इमिनाi·mi·nā चca भत्ताच्छादकेन,bhat·tāc·chā·da·ke·na तदुभयेनta·du·bha·ye·na भिय्योसोbhiy·yo·so मत्तायmat·tā·ya किसाki·sā होन्ति,hon·ti लूखा,lū·khā दुब्बण्णा,dub·baṇ·ṇā उप्पण्डुप्पण्डुकजाता,up·paṇ·ḍup·paṇ·ḍu·ka·jā·tā धमनिसन्थतगत्ता।dha·ma·ni·san·tha·ta·gat·tā

Te tena ceva sāradikena ābādhena phuṭṭhā, iminā ca bhattācchādakena, tadubhayena bhiyyoso mattāya kisā honti, lūkhā, dubbaṇṇā, uppaṇḍuppaṇḍukajātā, dhamanisanthatagattā.

As a result of both the autumn illness and the food not agreeing with them, they became even more thin, haggard, and pale.
35

अद्दसाad·da·sā खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū भिय्योसोbhiy·yo·so मत्तायmat·tā·ya किसेki·se लूखेlū·khe दुब्बण्णेdub·baṇ·ṇe उप्पण्डुप्पण्डुकजातेup·paṇ·ḍup·paṇ·ḍu·ka·jā·te धमनिसन्थतगत्ते,dha·ma·ni·san·tha·ta·gat·te दिस्वानdis·vā·na आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ आनन्दंā·nan·daṃ आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

Addasā kho bhagavā te bhikkhū bhiyyoso mattāya kise lūkhe dubbaṇṇe uppaṇḍuppaṇḍukajāte dhamanisanthatagatte, disvāna āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi—

Once again the Buddha noticed this and asked Venerable Ānanda
36

“किंkiṃ नुnu खो,kho आनन्द,ā·nan·da एतरहिe·ta·ra·hi भिक्खूbhik·khū भिय्योसोbhiy·yo·so मत्तायmat·tā·ya किसा,ki·sā लूखा,lū·khā दुब्बण्णा,dub·baṇ·ṇā उप्पण्डुप्पण्डुकजाता,up·paṇ·ḍup·paṇ·ḍu·ka·jā·tā धमनिसन्थतगत्ता”ति?dha·ma·ni·san·tha·ta·gat·tā

“kiṁ nu kho, ānanda, etarahi bhikkhū bhiyyoso mattāya kisā, lūkhā, dubbaṇṇā, uppaṇḍuppaṇḍukajātā, dhamanisanthatagattā”ti?

why they were looking even worse.
37

“एतरहि,e·ta·ra·hi भन्ते,bhan·te भिक्खूbhik·khū तानिtā·ni चca पञ्चpañ·ca भेसज्जानिbhe·saj·jā·ni कालेkā·le पटिग्गहेत्वाpa·ṭig·ga·het·vā कालेkā·le परिभुञ्जन्ति।pa·ri·bhuñ·jan·ti

“Etarahi, bhante, bhikkhū tāni ca pañca bhesajjāni kāle paṭiggahetvā kāle paribhuñjanti.

Ānanda told him.
38

तेसंte·saṃ यानिपिyā·ni·pi तानिtā·ni पाकतिकानिpā·ka·ti·kā·ni लूखानिlū·khā·ni भोजनानिbho·ja·nā·ni तानिपिtā·ni·pi नच्छादेन्ति,nac·chā·den·ti पगेवpa·ge·va सेनेसितानि।se·ne·si·tā·ni

Tesaṁ yānipi tāni pākatikāni lūkhāni bhojanāni tānipi nacchādenti, pageva senesitāni.

(Pāli only)
39

तेte तेनte·na चेवce·va सारदिकेनsā·ra·di·ke·na आबाधेनā·bā·dhe·na फुट्ठा,phuṭ·ṭhā इमिनाi·mi·nā चca भत्ताच्छादकेन,bhat·tāc·chā·da·ke·na तदुभयेनta·du·bha·ye·na भिय्योसोbhiy·yo·so मत्तायmat·tā·ya किसा,ki·sā लूखा,lū·khā दुब्बण्णा,dub·baṇ·ṇā उप्पण्डुप्पण्डुकजाता,up·paṇ·ḍup·paṇ·ḍu·ka·jā·tā धमनिसन्थतगत्ता”ति।dha·ma·ni·san·tha·ta·gat·tā

Te tena ceva sāradikena ābādhena phuṭṭhā, iminā ca bhattācchādakena, tadubhayena bhiyyoso mattāya kisā, lūkhā, dubbaṇṇā, uppaṇḍuppaṇḍukajātā, dhamanisanthatagattā”ti.

(Pāli only)
40

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ निदानेni·dā·ne एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ पकरणेpa·ka·ra·ṇe धम्मिंdham·miṃ कथंka·thaṃ कत्वाkat·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

Atha kho bhagavā etasmiṁ nidāne etasmiṁ pakaraṇe dhammiṁ kathaṁ katvā bhikkhū āmantesi—

The Buddha then gave a teaching, and addressed the monks:
41

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve तानिtā·ni पञ्चpañ·ca भेसज्जानिbhe·saj·jā·ni पटिग्गहेत्वाpa·ṭig·ga·het·vā कालेपिkā·le·pi विकालेपिvi·kā·le·pi परिभुञ्जितुन्”ति।pa·ri·bhuñ·ji·tun

“anujānāmi, bhikkhave, tāni pañca bhesajjāni paṭiggahetvā kālepi vikālepi paribhuñjitun”ti.

“I allow the five tonics to be received and consumed both before and after midday.”
42

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na गिलानानंgi·lā·nā·naṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ वसेहिva·se·hi भेसज्जेहिbhe·saj·je·hi अत्थोat·tho होति।ho·ti

Tena kho pana samayena gilānānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ vasehi bhesajjehi attho hoti.

At that time the sick monks needed fat as a tonic.
43

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

They told the Buddha.
44

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve वसानिva·sā·ni भेसज्जानि—bhe·saj·jā·ni

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, vasāni bhesajjāni—

“I allow these fats as tonics:
45

अच्छवसं,ac·cha·va·saṃ मच्छवसं,mac·cha·va·saṃ सुसुकावसं,su·su·kā·va·saṃ सूकरवसं,sū·ka·ra·va·saṃ गद्रभवसं—gad·ra·bha·va·saṃ

acchavasaṁ, macchavasaṁ, susukāvasaṁ, sūkaravasaṁ, gadrabhavasaṁ—

bear fat, fish fat, alligator fat, pig fat, and donkey fat.
46

कालेkā·le पटिग्गहितंpa·ṭig·ga·hi·taṃ कालेkā·le निप्पक्कंnip·pak·kaṃ कालेkā·le संसट्ठंsaṃ·saṭ·ṭhaṃ तेलपरिभोगेनte·la·pa·ri·bho·ge·na परिभुञ्जितुं।pa·ri·bhuñ·ji·tuṃ

kāle paṭiggahitaṁ kāle nippakkaṁ kāle saṁsaṭṭhaṁ telaparibhogena paribhuñjituṁ.

They should be received, melted, and mixed with oil before midday, and then used.
47

विकालेvi·kā·le चे,ce भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve पटिग्गहितंpa·ṭig·ga·hi·taṃ विकालेvi·kā·le निप्पक्कंnip·pak·kaṃ विकालेvi·kā·le संसट्ठं,saṃ·saṭ·ṭhaṃ तञ्चेtañ·ce परिभुञ्जेय्य,pa·ri·bhuñ·jey·ya आपत्तिā·pat·ti तिण्णंtiṇ·ṇaṃ दुक्कटानं।duk·ka·ṭā·naṃ

Vikāle ce, bhikkhave, paṭiggahitaṁ vikāle nippakkaṁ vikāle saṁsaṭṭhaṁ, tañce paribhuñjeyya, āpatti tiṇṇaṁ dukkaṭānaṁ.

If you receive, melt, and mix them with oil after midday, and then use them, you commit three offenses of wrong conduct.
48

कालेkā·le चे,ce भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve पटिग्गहितंpa·ṭig·ga·hi·taṃ विकालेvi·kā·le निप्पक्कंnip·pak·kaṃ विकालेvi·kā·le संसट्ठं,saṃ·saṭ·ṭhaṃ तञ्चेtañ·ce परिभुञ्जेय्य,pa·ri·bhuñ·jey·ya आपत्तिā·pat·ti द्विन्नंdvin·naṃ दुक्कटानं।duk·ka·ṭā·naṃ

Kāle ce, bhikkhave, paṭiggahitaṁ vikāle nippakkaṁ vikāle saṁsaṭṭhaṁ, tañce paribhuñjeyya, āpatti dvinnaṁ dukkaṭānaṁ.

If you receive them before midday, but melt and mix them with oil after midday, and then use them, you commit two offenses of wrong conduct.
49

कालेkā·le चे,ce भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve पटिग्गहितंpa·ṭig·ga·hi·taṃ कालेkā·le निप्पक्कंnip·pak·kaṃ विकालेvi·kā·le संसट्ठं,saṃ·saṭ·ṭhaṃ तञ्चेtañ·ce परिभुञ्जेय्य,pa·ri·bhuñ·jey·ya आपत्तिā·pat·ti दुक्कटस्स।duk·ka·ṭas·sa

Kāle ce, bhikkhave, paṭiggahitaṁ kāle nippakkaṁ vikāle saṁsaṭṭhaṁ, tañce paribhuñjeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassa.

If you receive and melt them before midday, but mix them with oil after midday, and then use them, you commit one offense of wrong conduct.
50

कालेkā·le चे,ce भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve पटिग्गहितंpa·ṭig·ga·hi·taṃ कालेkā·le निप्पक्कंnip·pak·kaṃ कालेkā·le संसट्ठं,saṃ·saṭ·ṭhaṃ तञ्चेtañ·ce परिभुञ्जेय्य,pa·ri·bhuñ·jey·ya अनापत्ती”ति।a·nā·pat·tī

Kāle ce, bhikkhave, paṭiggahitaṁ kāle nippakkaṁ kāle saṁsaṭṭhaṁ, tañce paribhuñjeyya, anāpattī”ti.

If you receive, melt, and mix them with oil before midday, and then use them, there is no offense.”
51

2। मूलादिभेसज्जकथाmū·lā·di·bhe·saj·ja·ka·thā

2. Mūlādibhesajjakathā

2. Discussion of root medicines, etc.
52

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na गिलानानंgi·lā·nā·naṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ मूलेहिmū·le·hi भेसज्जेहिbhe·saj·je·hi अत्थोat·tho होति।ho·ti

Tena kho pana samayena gilānānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ mūlehi bhesajjehi attho hoti.

At that time the sick monks needed medicinal roots.
53

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
54

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve मूलानिmū·lā·ni भेसज्जानि—bhe·saj·jā·ni

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, mūlāni bhesajjāni—

“I allow these medicinal roots:
55

हलिद्दिं,ha·lid·diṃ सिङ्गिवेरं,siṅ·gi·ve·raṃ वचं,va·caṃ वचत्तं,va·cat·taṃ अतिविसं,a·ti·vi·saṃ कटुकरोहिणिं,ka·ṭu·ka·ro·hi·ṇiṃ उसीरं,u·sī·raṃ भद्दमुत्तकं,bhad·da·mut·ta·kaṃ यानिyā·ni वाvā पनञ्ञानिपिpa·nañ·ñā·ni·pi अत्थिat·thi मूलानिmū·lā·ni भेसज्जानि,bhe·saj·jā·ni नेवne·va खादनीयेkhā·da·nī·ye खादनीयत्थंkhā·da·nī·yat·thaṃ फरन्ति,pha·ran·ti नna भोजनीयेbho·ja·nī·ye भोजनीयत्थंbho·ja·nī·yat·thaṃ फरन्ति,pha·ran·ti तानि—tā·ni

haliddiṁ, siṅgiveraṁ, vacaṁ, vacattaṁ, ativisaṁ, kaṭukarohiṇiṁ, usīraṁ, bhaddamuttakaṁ, yāni vā panaññānipi atthi mūlāni bhesajjāni, neva khādanīye khādanīyatthaṁ pharanti, na bhojanīye bhojanīyatthaṁ pharanti, tāni—

turmeric, ginger, sweet flag, white sweet flag, atis root, black hellebore, vetiver root, nut grass, and whatever other medicinal roots there are that don’t serve as fresh or cooked food.
56

पटिग्गहेत्वाpa·ṭig·ga·het·vā यावजीवंyā·va·jī·vaṃ परिहरितुं;pa·ri·ha·ri·tuṃ

paṭiggahetvā yāvajīvaṁ pariharituṁ;

After receiving them, you may keep them for life
57

सतिsa·ti पच्चयेpac·ca·ye परिभुञ्जितुं।pa·ri·bhuñ·ji·tuṃ

sati paccaye paribhuñjituṁ.

and use them when there’s a reason.
58

असतिa·sa·ti पच्चयेpac·ca·ye परिभुञ्जन्तस्सpa·ri·bhuñ·jan·tas·sa आपत्तिā·pat·ti दुक्कटस्सा”ति।duk·ka·ṭas·sā

Asati paccaye paribhuñjantassa āpatti dukkaṭassā”ti.

If you use them when there’s no reason, you commit an offense of wrong conduct.”
59

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na गिलानानंgi·lā·nā·naṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ मूलेहिmū·le·hi भेसज्जेहिbhe·saj·je·hi पिट्ठेहिpiṭ·ṭhe·hi अत्थोat·tho होति।ho·ti

Tena kho pana samayena gilānānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ mūlehi bhesajjehi piṭṭhehi attho hoti.

Soon afterwards the sick monks needed medicinal root flour.
60

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
61

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve निसदंni·sa·daṃ निसदपोतकन्”ति।ni·sa·da·po·ta·kan

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, nisadaṁ nisadapotakan”ti.

“I allow a grinding stone.”
62

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na गिलानानंgi·lā·nā·naṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ कसावेहिka·sā·ve·hi भेसज्जेहिbhe·saj·je·hi अत्थोat·tho होति।ho·ti

Tena kho pana samayena gilānānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ kasāvehi bhesajjehi attho hoti.

The sick monks needed bitter medicines.
63

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
64

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve कसावानिka·sā·vā·ni भेसज्जानि—bhe·saj·jā·ni

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, kasāvāni bhesajjāni—

“I allow bitter medicines from these plants:
65

निम्बकसावं,nim·ba·ka·sā·vaṃ कुटजकसावं,ku·ṭa·ja·ka·sā·vaṃ पटोलकसावं,pa·ṭo·la·ka·sā·vaṃ फग्गवकसावं,phag·ga·va·ka·sā·vaṃ नत्तमालकसावं,nat·ta·mā·la·ka·sā·vaṃ यानिyā·ni वाvā पनञ्ञानिपिpa·nañ·ñā·ni·pi अत्थिat·thi कसावानिka·sā·vā·ni भेसज्जानिbhe·saj·jā·ni नेवne·va खादनीयेkhā·da·nī·ye खादनीयत्थंkhā·da·nī·yat·thaṃ फरन्ति,pha·ran·ti नna भोजनीयेbho·ja·nī·ye भोजनीयत्थंbho·ja·nī·yat·thaṃ फरन्ति,pha·ran·ti तानि—tā·ni

nimbakasāvaṁ, kuṭajakasāvaṁ, paṭolakasāvaṁ, phaggavakasāvaṁ, nattamālakasāvaṁ, yāni vā panaññānipi atthi kasāvāni bhesajjāni neva khādanīye khādanīyatthaṁ pharanti, na bhojanīye bhojanīyatthaṁ pharanti, tāni—

neem tree, arctic snow, pointed gourd, white fig, Indian beech, and whatever other bitter medicines there are that don’t serve as fresh or cooked food.
66

पटिग्गहेत्वाpa·ṭig·ga·het·vā यावजीवंyā·va·jī·vaṃ परिहरितुं;pa·ri·ha·ri·tuṃ

paṭiggahetvā yāvajīvaṁ pariharituṁ;

After receiving them, you may keep them for life
67

सतिsa·ti पच्चयेpac·ca·ye परिभुञ्जितुं।pa·ri·bhuñ·ji·tuṃ

sati paccaye paribhuñjituṁ.

and use them when there’s a reason.
68

असतिa·sa·ti पच्चयेpac·ca·ye परिभुञ्जन्तस्सpa·ri·bhuñ·jan·tas·sa आपत्तिā·pat·ti दुक्कटस्सा”ति।duk·ka·ṭas·sā

Asati paccaye paribhuñjantassa āpatti dukkaṭassā”ti.

If you use them when there’s no reason, you commit an offense of wrong conduct.”
69

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na गिलानानंgi·lā·nā·naṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ पण्णेहिpaṇ·ṇe·hi भेसज्जेहिbhe·saj·je·hi अत्थोat·tho होति।ho·ti

Tena kho pana samayena gilānānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ paṇṇehi bhesajjehi attho hoti.

The sick monks needed medicinal leaves.
70

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
71

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve पण्णानिpaṇ·ṇā·ni भेसज्जानि—bhe·saj·jā·ni

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, paṇṇāni bhesajjāni—

“I allow medicinal leaves from these plants:
72

निम्बपण्णं,nim·ba·paṇ·ṇaṃ कुटजपण्णं,ku·ṭa·ja·paṇ·ṇaṃ पटोलपण्णं,pa·ṭo·la·paṇ·ṇaṃ सुलसिपण्णं,su·la·si·paṇ·ṇaṃ कप्पासपण्णं,kap·pā·sa·paṇ·ṇaṃ यानिyā·ni वाvā पनञ्ञानिपिpa·nañ·ñā·ni·pi अत्थिat·thi पण्णानिpaṇ·ṇā·ni भेसज्जानि,bhe·saj·jā·ni नेवne·va खादनीयेkhā·da·nī·ye खादनीयत्थंkhā·da·nī·yat·thaṃ फरन्ति,pha·ran·ti नna भोजनीयेbho·ja·nī·ye भोजनीयत्थंbho·ja·nī·yat·thaṃ फरन्तिpha·ran·ti …

nimbapaṇṇaṁ, kuṭajapaṇṇaṁ, paṭolapaṇṇaṁ, sulasipaṇṇaṁ, kappāsapaṇṇaṁ, yāni vā panaññānipi atthi paṇṇāni bhesajjāni, neva khādanīye khādanīyatthaṁ pharanti, na bhojanīye bhojanīyatthaṁ pharanti …

neem tree, arctic snow, pointed gourd, holy basil, cotton plant, and whatever other leaf medicines there are that don’t serve as fresh or cooked food.
73

पे…।pe

pe….

After receiving them, you may keep them for life and use them when there’s a reason. If you use them when there’s no reason, you commit an offense of wrong conduct.”
74

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na गिलानानंgi·lā·nā·naṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ फलेहिpha·le·hi भेसज्जेहिbhe·saj·je·hi अत्थोat·tho होति।ho·ti

Tena kho pana samayena gilānānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ phalehi bhesajjehi attho hoti.

The sick monks needed medicinal fruits.
75

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
76

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve फलानिpha·lā·ni भेसज्जानि—bhe·saj·jā·ni

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, phalāni bhesajjāni—

“I allow medicinal fruits from these plants:
77

बिलङ्गं,bi·laṅ·gaṃ पिप्पलिं,pip·pa·liṃ मरिचं,ma·ri·caṃ हरीतकं,ha·rī·ta·kaṃ विभीतकं,vi·bhī·ta·kaṃ आमलकं,ā·ma·la·kaṃ गोट्ठफलं,goṭ·ṭha·pha·laṃ यानिyā·ni वाvā पनञ्ञानिपिpa·nañ·ñā·ni·pi अत्थिat·thi फलानिpha·lā·ni भेसज्जानि,bhe·saj·jā·ni नेवne·va खादनीयेkhā·da·nī·ye खादनीयत्थंkhā·da·nī·yat·thaṃ फरन्ति,pha·ran·ti नna भोजनीयेbho·ja·nī·ye भोजनीयत्थंbho·ja·nī·yat·thaṃ फरन्तिpha·ran·ti …

bilaṅgaṁ, pippaliṁ, maricaṁ, harītakaṁ, vibhītakaṁ, āmalakaṁ, goṭṭhaphalaṁ, yāni vā panaññānipi atthi phalāni bhesajjāni, neva khādanīye khādanīyatthaṁ pharanti, na bhojanīye bhojanīyatthaṁ pharanti …

false black pepper, long pepper, black pepper, chebulic myrobalan, belleric myrobalan, emblic myrobalan, crepe ginger, and whatever other medicinal fruits there are that don’t serve as fresh or cooked food.
78

पे…।pe

pe….

After receiving them, you may keep them for life and use them when there’s a reason. If you use them when there’s no reason, you commit an offense of wrong conduct.”
79

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na गिलानानंgi·lā·nā·naṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ जतूहिja·tū·hi भेसज्जेहिbhe·saj·je·hi अत्थोat·tho होति।ho·ti

Tena kho pana samayena gilānānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ jatūhi bhesajjehi attho hoti.

The sick monks needed medicinal gum.
80

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
81

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve जतूनिja·tū·ni भेसज्जानि—bhe·saj·jā·ni

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, jatūni bhesajjāni—

“I allow the following medicinal gums:
82

हिङ्गुं,hiṅ·guṃ हिङ्गुजतुं,hiṅ·gu·ja·tuṃ हिङ्गुसिपाटिकं,hiṅ·gu·si·pā·ṭi·kaṃ तकं,ta·kaṃ तकपत्तिं,ta·ka·pat·tiṃ तकपण्णिं,ta·ka·paṇ·ṇiṃ सज्जुलसं,saj·ju·la·saṃ यानिyā·ni वाvā पनञ्ञानिपिpa·nañ·ñā·ni·pi अत्थिat·thi जतूनिja·tū·ni भेसज्जानि,bhe·saj·jā·ni नेवne·va खादनीयेkhā·da·nī·ye खादनीयत्थंkhā·da·nī·yat·thaṃ फरन्तिpha·ran·ti …

hiṅguṁ, hiṅgujatuṁ, hiṅgusipāṭikaṁ, takaṁ, takapattiṁ, takapaṇṇiṁ, sajjulasaṁ, yāni vā panaññānipi atthi jatūni bhesajjāni, neva khādanīye khādanīyatthaṁ pharanti …

gum exuded from the asafoetida shrub, gum from the twigs and leaves of the asafoetida shrub, gum from the leaves of the asafoetida shrub, taka gum, taka-leaf gum, gum from heated taka foliage, resin, and whatever other medicinal gums there are that don’t serve as fresh or cooked food.
83

पे…।pe

pe….

After receiving them, you may keep them for life and use them when there’s a reason. If you use them when there’s no reason, you commit an offense of wrong conduct.”
84

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na गिलानानंgi·lā·nā·naṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ लोणेहिlo·ṇe·hi भेसज्जेहिbhe·saj·je·hi अत्थोat·tho होति।ho·ti

Tena kho pana samayena gilānānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ loṇehi bhesajjehi attho hoti.

The sick monks needed medicinal salts.
85

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
86

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve लोणानिlo·ṇā·ni भेसज्जानि—bhe·saj·jā·ni

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, loṇāni bhesajjāni—

“I allow the following medicinal salts:
87

सामुद्दं,sā·mud·daṃ काळलोणं,kā·ḷa·lo·ṇaṃ सिन्धवं,sin·dha·vaṃ उब्भिदं,ub·bhi·daṃ बिलं,bi·laṃ यानिyā·ni वाvā पनञ्ञानिपिpa·nañ·ñā·ni·pi अत्थिat·thi लोणानिlo·ṇā·ni भेसज्जानि,bhe·saj·jā·ni नेवne·va खादनीयेkhā·da·nī·ye खादनीयत्थंkhā·da·nī·yat·thaṃ फरन्ति,pha·ran·ti नna भोजनीयेbho·ja·nī·ye भोजनीयत्थंbho·ja·nī·yat·thaṃ फरन्ति,pha·ran·ti तानि—tā·ni

sāmuddaṁ, kāḷaloṇaṁ, sindhavaṁ, ubbhidaṁ, bilaṁ, yāni vā panaññānipi atthi loṇāni bhesajjāni, neva khādanīye khādanīyatthaṁ pharanti, na bhojanīye bhojanīyatthaṁ pharanti, tāni—

sea salt, black salt, hill salt, soil salt, red salt, and whatever other medicinal salts there are that don’t serve as fresh or cooked food.
88

पटिग्गहेत्वाpa·ṭig·ga·het·vā यावजीवंyā·va·jī·vaṃ परिहरितुं;pa·ri·ha·ri·tuṃ

paṭiggahetvā yāvajīvaṁ pariharituṁ;

After receiving them, you may keep them for life
89

सतिsa·ti पच्चयेpac·ca·ye परिभुञ्जितुं।pa·ri·bhuñ·ji·tuṃ

sati paccaye paribhuñjituṁ.

and use them when there’s a reason.
90

असतिa·sa·ti पच्चयेpac·ca·ye परिभुञ्जन्तस्सpa·ri·bhuñ·jan·tas·sa आपत्तिā·pat·ti दुक्कटस्सा”ति।duk·ka·ṭas·sā

Asati paccaye paribhuñjantassa āpatti dukkaṭassā”ti.

If you use them when there’s no reason, you commit an offense of wrong conduct.”
91

Allowable medical equipment and more
92

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to आनन्दस्सā·nan·das·sa उपज्झायस्सu·paj·jhā·yas·sa आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to बेलट्ठसीसस्सbe·laṭ·ṭha·sī·sas·sa थुल्लकच्छाबाधोthul·la·kac·chā·bā·dho होति।ho·ti

Tena kho pana samayena āyasmato ānandassa upajjhāyassa āyasmato belaṭṭhasīsassa thullakacchābādho hoti.

At this time Venerable Ānanda’s preceptor, Venerable Belaṭṭhasīsa, had carbuncles,
93

तस्सtas·sa लसिकायla·si·kā·ya चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni कायेkā·ye लग्गन्ति,lag·gan·ti तानिtā·ni भिक्खूbhik·khū उदकेनu·da·ke·na तेमेत्वाte·met·vā तेमेत्वाte·met·vā अपकड्ढन्ति।a·pa·kaḍ·ḍhan·ti

Tassa lasikāya cīvarāni kāye lagganti, tāni bhikkhū udakena temetvā temetvā apakaḍḍhanti.

the pus making his robes adhere to his body. The monks kept on wetting his robes to remove the pus.
94

अद्दसाad·da·sā खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā सेनासनचारिकंse·nā·sa·na·cā·ri·kaṃ आहिण्डन्तोā·hiṇ·ḍan·to तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū तानिtā·ni चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni उदकेनu·da·ke·na तेमेत्वाte·met·vā तेमेत्वाte·met·vā अपकड्ढन्ते,a·pa·kaḍ·ḍhan·te दिस्वानdis·vā·na येनye·na तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

Addasā kho bhagavā senāsanacārikaṁ āhiṇḍanto te bhikkhū tāni cīvarāni udakena temetvā temetvā apakaḍḍhante, disvāna yena te bhikkhū tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā te bhikkhū etadavoca—

As the Buddha was walking about the dwellings, he noticed this. He went up to them and said,
95

“किंkiṃ इमस्स,i·mas·sa भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no आबाधो”ति?ā·bā·dho

“kiṁ imassa, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno ābādho”ti?

“What sickness does this monk have?”
96

“इमस्स,i·mas·sa भन्ते,bhan·te आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to थुल्लकच्छाबाधो,thul·la·kac·chā·bā·dho लसिकायla·si·kā·ya चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni कायेkā·ye लग्गन्ति,lag·gan·ti तानिtā·ni मयंma·yaṃ उदकेनu·da·ke·na तेमेत्वाte·met·vā तेमेत्वाte·met·vā अपकड्ढामा”ति।a·pa·kaḍ·ḍhā·mā

“Imassa, bhante, āyasmato thullakacchābādho, lasikāya cīvarāni kāye lagganti, tāni mayaṁ udakena temetvā temetvā apakaḍḍhāmā”ti.

“He has carbuncles, sir. That’s why we’re doing this.”
97

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ निदानेni·dā·ne एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ पकरणेpa·ka·ra·ṇe धम्मिंdham·miṃ कथंka·thaṃ कत्वाkat·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

Atha kho bhagavā etasmiṁ nidāne etasmiṁ pakaraṇe dhammiṁ kathaṁ katvā bhikkhū āmantesi—

Soon afterwards the Buddha gave a teaching and addressed the monks:
98

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve यस्सyas·sa कण्डुkaṇ·ḍu वा,vā पिळकाpi·ḷa·kā वा,vā अस्सावोas·sā·vo वा,vā थुल्लकच्छुthul·la·kac·chu वाvā आबाधो,ā·bā·dho कायोkā·yo वाvā दुग्गन्धो,dug·gan·dho चुण्णानिcuṇ·ṇā·ni भेसज्जानि;bhe·saj·jā·ni

“anujānāmi, bhikkhave, yassa kaṇḍu vā, piḷakā vā, assāvo vā, thullakacchu vā ābādho, kāyo vā duggandho, cuṇṇāni bhesajjāni;

“For anyone who has an itch, a boil, a running sore, a carbuncle, or whose body smells, I allow medicinal powders.
99

अगिलानस्सa·gi·lā·nas·sa छकणंcha·ka·ṇaṃ मत्तिकंmat·ti·kaṃ रजननिप्पक्कं।ra·ja·na·nip·pak·kaṃ

agilānassa chakaṇaṁ mattikaṁ rajananippakkaṁ.

If you’re not sick, I allow detergent, soap, and cleaning agents.
100

अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve उदुक्खलंu·duk·kha·laṃ मुसलन्”ति।mu·sa·lan

Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, udukkhalaṁ musalan”ti.

And I allow a mortar and pestle.”
101

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na गिलानानंgi·lā·nā·naṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ चुण्णेहिcuṇ·ṇe·hi भेसज्जेहिbhe·saj·je·hi चालितेहिcā·li·te·hi अत्थोat·tho होति।ho·ti

Tena kho pana samayena gilānānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ cuṇṇehi bhesajjehi cālitehi attho hoti.

Soon afterwards the sick monks needed sifted medicinal powders.
102

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
103

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve चुण्णचालिनिन्”ति।cuṇ·ṇa·cā·li·nin

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, cuṇṇacālinin”ti.

“I allow a powder sieve.”
104

सण्हेहिsaṇ·he·hi अत्थोat·tho होति।ho·ti

Saṇhehi attho hoti.

They needed finely sifted powder.
105

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
106

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दुस्सचालिनिन्”ति।dus·sa·cā·li·nin

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, dussacālinin”ti.

“I allow a cloth sieve.”
107

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरस्सañ·ña·ta·ras·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no अमनुस्सिकाबाधोa·ma·nus·si·kā·bā·dho होति।ho·ti

Tena kho pana samayena aññatarassa bhikkhuno amanussikābādho hoti.

On one occasion a monk was possessed by a spirit.
108

तंtaṃ आचरियुपज्झायाā·ca·ri·yu·paj·jhā·yā उपट्ठहन्ताu·paṭ·ṭha·han·tā नासक्खिंसुnā·sak·khiṃ·su अरोगंa·ro·gaṃ कातुं।kā·tuṃ

Taṁ ācariyupajjhāyā upaṭṭhahantā nāsakkhiṁsu arogaṁ kātuṁ.

His teacher and preceptor who were nursing him were not able to cure him.
109

सोso सूकरसूनंsū·ka·ra·sū·naṃ गन्त्वाgan·tvā आमकमंसंā·ma·ka·maṃ·saṃ खादि,khā·di आमकलोहितंā·ma·ka·lo·hi·taṃ पिवि।pi·vi

So sūkarasūnaṁ gantvā āmakamaṁsaṁ khādi, āmakalohitaṁ pivi.

He then went to a pigs’ slaughterhouse to eat raw meat and drink blood.
110

तस्सtas·sa सोso अमनुस्सिकाबाधोa·ma·nus·si·kā·bā·dho पटिप्पस्सम्भि।pa·ṭip·pas·sam·bhi

Tassa so amanussikābādho paṭippassambhi.

As a result, he became well.
111

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

They told the Buddha.
112

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अमनुस्सिकाबाधेa·ma·nus·si·kā·bā·dhe आमकमंसंā·ma·ka·maṃ·saṃ आमकलोहितन्”ति।ā·ma·ka·lo·hi·tan

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, amanussikābādhe āmakamaṁsaṁ āmakalohitan”ti.

“For one who is possessed, I allow raw meat and raw blood.”
113

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरस्सañ·ña·ta·ras·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no चक्खुरोगाबाधोcak·khu·ro·gā·bā·dho होति।ho·ti

Tena kho pana samayena aññatarassa bhikkhuno cakkhurogābādho hoti.

At that time a monk was afflicted with an eye-disease.
114

तंtaṃ भिक्खूbhik·khū परिग्गहेत्वाpa·rig·ga·het·vā उच्चारम्पिuc·cā·ram·pi पस्सावम्पिpas·sā·vam·pi निक्खामेन्ति।nik·khā·men·ti

Taṁ bhikkhū pariggahetvā uccārampi passāvampi nikkhāmenti.

The monks had to hold him while he urinated and defecated.
115

अद्दसाad·da·sā खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā सेनासनचारिकंse·nā·sa·na·cā·ri·kaṃ आहिण्डन्तोā·hiṇ·ḍan·to तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū तंtaṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ परिग्गहेत्वाpa·rig·ga·het·vā उच्चारम्पिuc·cā·ram·pi पस्सावम्पिpas·sā·vam·pi निक्खामेन्ते,nik·khā·men·te दिस्वानdis·vā·na येनye·na तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

Addasā kho bhagavā senāsanacārikaṁ āhiṇḍanto te bhikkhū taṁ bhikkhuṁ pariggahetvā uccārampi passāvampi nikkhāmente, disvāna yena te bhikkhū tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā te bhikkhū etadavoca—

Just then, as the Buddha was walking about the dwellings, he noticed this. He then went up to them and said,
116

“किंkiṃ इमस्स,i·mas·sa भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no आबाधो”ति?ā·bā·dho

“kiṁ imassa, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno ābādho”ti?

“What sickness does this monk have?”
117

“इमस्स,i·mas·sa भन्ते,bhan·te आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to चक्खुरोगाबाधो।cak·khu·ro·gā·bā·dho

“Imassa, bhante, āyasmato cakkhurogābādho.

“He has an eye-disease, sir.
118

इमंi·maṃ मयंma·yaṃ परिग्गहेत्वाpa·rig·ga·het·vā उच्चारम्पिuc·cā·ram·pi पस्सावम्पिpas·sā·vam·pi निक्खामेमा”ति।nik·khā·me·mā

Imaṁ mayaṁ pariggahetvā uccārampi passāvampi nikkhāmemā”ti.

That’s why we do this for him.”
119

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ निदानेni·dā·ne एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ पकरणेpa·ka·ra·ṇe धम्मिंdham·miṃ कथंka·thaṃ कत्वाkat·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

Atha kho bhagavā etasmiṁ nidāne etasmiṁ pakaraṇe dhammiṁ kathaṁ katvā bhikkhū āmantesi—

Soon afterwards the Buddha gave a teaching and addressed the monks:
120

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अञ्जनं—añ·ja·naṃ

“anujānāmi, bhikkhave, añjanaṁ—

“I allow these ointments:
121

काळञ्जनं,kā·ḷañ·ja·naṃ रसञ्जनं,ra·sañ·ja·naṃ सोतञ्जनं,so·tañ·ja·naṃ गेरुकं,ge·ru·kaṃ कपल्लन्”ति।ka·pal·lan

kāḷañjanaṁ, rasañjanaṁ, sotañjanaṁ, gerukaṁ, kapallan”ti.

black ointment, mixed ointment, river ointment, red ocher, and soot.”
122

अञ्जनूपपिसनेहिañ·ja·nū·pa·pi·sa·ne·hi अत्थोat·tho होति।ho·ti

Añjanūpapisanehi attho hoti.

They needed scented ointments.
123

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
124

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve चन्दनं,can·da·naṃ तगरं,ta·ga·raṃ काळानुसारियं,kā·ḷā·nu·sā·ri·yaṃ तालीसं,tā·lī·saṃ भद्दमुत्तकन्”ति।bhad·da·mut·ta·kan

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, candanaṁ, tagaraṁ, kāḷānusāriyaṁ, tālīsaṁ, bhaddamuttakan”ti.

“I allow sandal, crape jasmine, Indian valerian, coffee plum, and nut grass.”
125

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na भिक्खूbhik·khū पिट्ठानिpiṭ·ṭhā·ni अञ्जनानिañ·ja·nā·ni चरुकेसुपिca·ru·ke·su·pi सरावकेसुपिsa·rā·va·ke·su·pi निक्खिपन्ति;nik·khi·pan·ti

Tena kho pana samayena bhikkhū piṭṭhāni añjanāni carukesupi sarāvakesupi nikkhipanti;

At that time the monks put their ointments in pots and scoops.
126

तिणचुण्णेहिपिti·ṇa·cuṇ·ṇe·hi·pi पंसुकेहिपिpaṃ·su·ke·hi·pi ओकिरियन्ति।o·ki·ri·yan·ti

tiṇacuṇṇehipi paṁsukehipi okiriyanti.

The ointment was contaminated with grass, dust, and dirt.
127

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
128

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अञ्जनिन्”ति।añ·ja·nin

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, añjanin”ti.

“I allow an ointment box.”
129

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na छब्बग्गियाchab·bag·gi·yā भिक्खूbhik·khū उच्चावचाuc·cā·va·cā अञ्जनियोañ·ja·ni·yo धारेन्ति—dhā·ren·ti

Tena kho pana samayena chabbaggiyā bhikkhū uccāvacā añjaniyo dhārenti—

Soon afterwards the monks from the group of six used luxurious ointment boxes
130

सोवण्णमयं,so·vaṇ·ṇa·ma·yaṃ रूपियमयं।rū·pi·ya·ma·yaṃ

sovaṇṇamayaṁ, rūpiyamayaṁ.

made with gold or silver.
131

मनुस्साma·nus·sā उज्झायन्तिuj·jhā·yan·ti खिय्यन्तिkhiy·yan·ti विपाचेन्ति—vi·pā·cen·ti

Manussā ujjhāyanti khiyyanti vipācenti—

People complained and criticized them,
132

“सेय्यथापिsey·ya·thā·pi गिहीgi·hī कामभोगिनो”ति।kā·ma·bho·gi·no

“seyyathāpi gihī kāmabhogino”ti.

“They’re just like householders who indulge in worldly pleasures!”
133

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

They told the Buddha.
134

“न,na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve उच्चावचाuc·cā·va·cā अञ्जनीañ·ja·nī धारेतब्बा।dhā·re·tab·bā

“Na, bhikkhave, uccāvacā añjanī dhāretabbā.

“You shouldn’t use luxurious ointment boxes.
135

योyo धारेय्य,dhā·rey·ya आपत्तिā·pat·ti दुक्कटस्स।duk·ka·ṭas·sa

Yo dhāreyya, āpatti dukkaṭassa.

If you do, you commit an offense of wrong conduct.
136

अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अट्ठिमयं,aṭ·ṭhi·ma·yaṃ दन्तमयं,dan·ta·ma·yaṃ विसाणमयं,vi·sā·ṇa·ma·yaṃ नळमयं,na·ḷa·ma·yaṃ वेळुमयं,ve·ḷu·ma·yaṃ कट्ठमयं,kaṭ·ṭha·ma·yaṃ जतुमयं,ja·tu·ma·yaṃ फलमयं,pha·la·ma·yaṃ लोहमयं,lo·ha·ma·yaṃ सङ्खनाभिमयन्”ति।saṅ·kha·nā·bhi·ma·yan

Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, aṭṭhimayaṁ, dantamayaṁ, visāṇamayaṁ, naḷamayaṁ, veḷumayaṁ, kaṭṭhamayaṁ, jatumayaṁ, phalamayaṁ, lohamayaṁ, saṅkhanābhimayan”ti.

I allow ointment boxes made of bone, ivory, horn, reed, bamboo, wood, resin, fruit, metal, or shell.”
137

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्जनियोañ·ja·ni·yo अपारुताa·pā·ru·tā होन्ति,hon·ti तिणचुण्णेहिपिti·ṇa·cuṇ·ṇe·hi·pi पंसुकेहिपिpaṃ·su·ke·hi·pi ओकिरियन्ति।o·ki·ri·yan·ti

Tena kho pana samayena añjaniyo apārutā honti, tiṇacuṇṇehipi paṁsukehipi okiriyanti.

At that time the ointment boxes were not covered. The ointment was contaminated with grass, dust, and dirt.
138

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
139

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अपिधानन्ति।a·pi·dhā·nan·ti

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, apidhānanti.

“I allow a lid.”
140

अपिधानंa·pi·dhā·naṃ निपतति।ni·pa·ta·ti

Apidhānaṁ nipatati.

The lids fell off.
141

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
142

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सुत्तकेनsut·ta·ke·na बन्धित्वाban·dhit·vā अञ्जनियाañ·ja·ni·yā बन्धितुन्”ति।ban·dhi·tun

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, suttakena bandhitvā añjaniyā bandhitun”ti.

“I allow you to tie it onto the ointment box with a string.”
143

अञ्जनीañ·ja·nī फलति।pha·la·ti

Añjanī phalati.

The ointment boxes split.
144

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
145

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सुत्तकेनsut·ta·ke·na सिब्बेतुन्”ति।sib·be·tun

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, suttakena sibbetun”ti.

“I allow you to sew it together with thread.”
146

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na भिक्खूbhik·khū अङ्गुलियाaṅ·gu·li·yā अञ्जन्ति,añ·jan·ti अक्खीनिak·khī·ni दुक्खानिduk·khā·ni होन्ति।hon·ti

Tena kho pana samayena bhikkhū aṅguliyā añjanti, akkhīni dukkhāni honti.

At that time the monks put the ointment on with their fingers. As a result their eyes hurt.
147

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
148

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अञ्जनिसलाकन्”ति।añ·ja·ni·sa·lā·kan

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, añjanisalākan”ti.

“I allow an ointment stick.”
149

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na छब्बग्गियाchab·bag·gi·yā भिक्खूbhik·khū उच्चावचाuc·cā·va·cā अञ्जनिसलाकायोañ·ja·ni·sa·lā·kā·yo धारेन्ति—dhā·ren·ti

Tena kho pana samayena chabbaggiyā bhikkhū uccāvacā añjanisalākāyo dhārenti—

Soon afterwards the monks from the group of six used luxurious ointment sticks
150

सोवण्णमयंso·vaṇ·ṇa·ma·yaṃ रूपियमयं।rū·pi·ya·ma·yaṃ

sovaṇṇamayaṁ rūpiyamayaṁ.

made with gold or silver.
151

मनुस्साma·nus·sā उज्झायन्तिuj·jhā·yan·ti खिय्यन्तिkhiy·yan·ti विपाचेन्ति—vi·pā·cen·ti

Manussā ujjhāyanti khiyyanti vipācenti—

People complained and criticized them,
152

“सेय्यथापिsey·ya·thā·pi गिहीgi·hī कामभोगिनो”ति।kā·ma·bho·gi·no

“seyyathāpi gihī kāmabhogino”ti.

“They’re just like householders who indulge in worldly pleasures!”
153

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

They told the Buddha.
154

“न,na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve उच्चावचाuc·cā·va·cā अञ्जनिसलाकाañ·ja·ni·sa·lā·kā धारेतब्बा।dhā·re·tab·bā

“Na, bhikkhave, uccāvacā añjanisalākā dhāretabbā.

“You shouldn’t use luxurious ointment sticks.
155

योyo धारेय्य,dhā·rey·ya आपत्तिā·pat·ti दुक्कटस्स।duk·ka·ṭas·sa

Yo dhāreyya, āpatti dukkaṭassa.

If you do, you commit an offense of wrong conduct.
156

अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अट्ठिमयंaṭ·ṭhi·ma·yaṃ …पे…pe सङ्खनाभिमयन्”ति।saṅ·kha·nā·bhi·ma·yan

Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, aṭṭhimayaṁ …pe… saṅkhanābhimayan”ti.

I allow ointment sticks made of bone, ivory, horn, reed, bamboo, wood, resin, fruit, metal, or shell.”
157

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्जनिसलाकाañ·ja·ni·sa·lā·kā भूमियंbhū·mi·yaṃ पतिताpa·ti·tā फरुसाpha·ru·sā होति।ho·ti

Tena kho pana samayena añjanisalākā bhūmiyaṁ patitā pharusā hoti.

The monks dropped the ointment sticks on the ground. The sticks became rough.
158

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
159

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सलाकठानियन्”ति।sa·lā·ka·ṭhā·ni·yan

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, salākaṭhāniyan”ti.

“I allow a case for the ointment stick.”
160

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na भिक्खूbhik·khū अञ्जनिम्पिañ·ja·nim·pi अञ्जनिसलाकम्पिañ·ja·ni·sa·lā·kam·pi हत्थेनhat·the·na परिहरन्ति।pa·ri·ha·ran·ti

Tena kho pana samayena bhikkhū añjanimpi añjanisalākampi hatthena pariharanti.

The monks carried the ointment boxes and sticks in their hands.
161

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
162

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अञ्जनित्थविकन्”ति।añ·ja·nit·tha·vi·kan

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, añjanitthavikan”ti.

“I allow a bag for the ointment box.”
163

अंसबद्धकोaṃ·sa·bad·dha·ko नna होति।ho·ti

Aṁsabaddhako na hoti.

They did not have a shoulder strap.
164

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
165

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अंसबद्धकंaṃ·sa·bad·dha·kaṃ बन्धनसुत्तकन्”ति।ban·dha·na·sut·ta·kan

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, aṁsabaddhakaṁ bandhanasuttakan”ti.

“I allow a shoulder strap and a string for tying it.”
166

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to पिलिन्दवच्छस्सpi·lin·da·vac·chas·sa सीसाभितापोsī·sā·bhi·tā·po होति।ho·ti

Tena kho pana samayena āyasmato pilindavacchassa sīsābhitāpo hoti.

At one time Venerable Pilindavaccha had a headache.
167

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
168

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve मुद्धनिmud·dha·ni तेलकन्”ति।te·la·kan

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, muddhani telakan”ti.

“I allow oil for the head.”
169

नक्खमनियोnak·kha·ma·ni·yo होति।ho·ti

Nakkhamaniyo hoti.

He did not get better.
170

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
171

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve नत्थुकम्मन्”ति।nat·thu·kam·man

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, natthukamman”ti.

“I allow treatment through the nose.”
172

नत्थुnat·thu गलति।ga·la·ti

Natthu galati.

The oil dripped from the nose.
173

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
174

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve नत्थुकरणिन्”ति।nat·thu·ka·ra·ṇin

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, natthukaraṇin”ti.

“I allow a nose dropper.”
175

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na छब्बग्गियाchab·bag·gi·yā भिक्खूbhik·khū उच्चावचाuc·cā·va·cā नत्थुकरणियोnat·thu·ka·ra·ṇi·yo धारेन्ति—dhā·ren·ti

Tena kho pana samayena chabbaggiyā bhikkhū uccāvacā natthukaraṇiyo dhārenti—

Soon afterwards the monks from the group of six used luxurious nose droppers
176

सोवण्णमयंso·vaṇ·ṇa·ma·yaṃ रूपियमयं।rū·pi·ya·ma·yaṃ

sovaṇṇamayaṁ rūpiyamayaṁ.

made with gold or silver.
177

मनुस्साma·nus·sā उज्झायन्तिuj·jhā·yan·ti खिय्यन्तिkhiy·yan·ti विपाचेन्ति—vi·pā·cen·ti

Manussā ujjhāyanti khiyyanti vipācenti—

People complained and criticized them,
178

“सेय्यथापिsey·ya·thā·pi गिहीgi·hī कामभोगिनो”ति।kā·ma·bho·gi·no

“seyyathāpi gihī kāmabhogino”ti.

“They’re just like householders who indulge in worldly pleasures!”
179

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

They told the Buddha.
180

“न,na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve उच्चावचाuc·cā·va·cā नत्थुकरणीnat·thu·ka·ra·ṇī धारेतब्बा।dhā·re·tab·bā

“Na, bhikkhave, uccāvacā natthukaraṇī dhāretabbā.

“You shouldn’t use luxurious nose droppers.
181

योyo धारेय्य,dhā·rey·ya आपत्तिā·pat·ti दुक्कटस्स।duk·ka·ṭas·sa

Yo dhāreyya, āpatti dukkaṭassa.

If you do, you commit an offense of wrong conduct.
182

अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अट्ठिमयंaṭ·ṭhi·ma·yaṃ …पे…pe

Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, aṭṭhimayaṁ …pe…

I allow nose droppers made of bone, ivory, horn, reed, bamboo, wood, resin, fruit, metal,
183

सङ्खनाभिमयन्”ति।saṅ·kha·nā·bhi·ma·yan

saṅkhanābhimayan”ti.

or shell.”
184

नत्थुंnat·thuṃ विसमंvi·sa·maṃ आसिञ्चन्ति।ā·siñ·can·ti

Natthuṁ visamaṁ āsiñcanti.

The nose dropper dripped unevenly.
185

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
186

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve यमकनत्थुकरणिन्”ति।ya·ma·ka·nat·thu·ka·ra·ṇin

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, yamakanatthukaraṇin”ti.

“I allow a double nose dropper.”
187

नक्खमनियोnak·kha·ma·ni·yo होति।ho·ti

Nakkhamaniyo hoti.

He did not get better.
188

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
189

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve धूमंdhū·maṃ पातुन्”ति।pā·tun

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, dhūmaṁ pātun”ti.

“I allow you to inhale smoke.”
190

तञ्ञेवtañ·ñe·va वट्टिंvaṭ·ṭiṃ आलिम्पेत्वाā·lim·pet·vā पिवन्ति,pi·van·ti कण्ठोkaṇ·ṭho दहति।da·ha·ti

Taññeva vaṭṭiṁ ālimpetvā pivanti, kaṇṭho dahati.

They just lit the wick and inhaled the smoke. They burned their throat.
191

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
192

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve धूमनेत्तन्”ति।dhū·ma·net·tan

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, dhūmanettan”ti.

“I allow a tube.”
193

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na छब्बग्गियाchab·bag·gi·yā भिक्खूbhik·khū उच्चावचानिuc·cā·va·cā·ni धूमनेत्तानिdhū·ma·net·tā·ni धारेन्ति—dhā·ren·ti

Tena kho pana samayena chabbaggiyā bhikkhū uccāvacāni dhūmanettāni dhārenti—

Soon the monks from the group of six used luxurious tubes
194

सोवण्णमयंso·vaṇ·ṇa·ma·yaṃ रूपियमयं।rū·pi·ya·ma·yaṃ

sovaṇṇamayaṁ rūpiyamayaṁ.

made with gold or silver.
195

मनुस्साma·nus·sā उज्झायन्तिuj·jhā·yan·ti खिय्यन्तिkhiy·yan·ti विपाचेन्ति—vi·pā·cen·ti

Manussā ujjhāyanti khiyyanti vipācenti—

People complained and criticized them,
196

“सेय्यथापिsey·ya·thā·pi गिहीgi·hī कामभोगिनो”ति।kā·ma·bho·gi·no

“seyyathāpi gihī kāmabhogino”ti.

“They’re just like householders who indulge in worldly pleasures!”
197

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

They told the Buddha.
198

“न,na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve उच्चावचानिuc·cā·va·cā·ni धूमनेत्तानिdhū·ma·net·tā·ni धारेतब्बानि।dhā·re·tab·bā·ni

“Na, bhikkhave, uccāvacāni dhūmanettāni dhāretabbāni.

“You shouldn’t use luxurious tubes.
199

योyo धारेय्य,dhā·rey·ya आपत्तिā·pat·ti दुक्कटस्स।duk·ka·ṭas·sa

Yo dhāreyya, āpatti dukkaṭassa.

If you do, you commit an offense of wrong conduct.
200

अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अट्ठिमयंaṭ·ṭhi·ma·yaṃ …पे…pe सङ्खनाभिमयन्”ति।saṅ·kha·nā·bhi·ma·yan

Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, aṭṭhimayaṁ …pe… saṅkhanābhimayan”ti.

I allow tubes made of bone, ivory, horn, reed, bamboo, wood, resin, fruit, metal, or shell.”
201

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na धूमनेत्तानिdhū·ma·net·tā·ni अपारुतानिa·pā·ru·tā·ni होन्ति,hon·ti पाणकाpā·ṇa·kā पविसन्ति।pa·vi·san·ti

Tena kho pana samayena dhūmanettāni apārutāni honti, pāṇakā pavisanti.

At that time the tubes were not covered. Insects crawled inside of them.
202

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
203

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अपिधानन्”ति।a·pi·dhā·nan

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, apidhānan”ti.

“I allow a lid.”
204

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na भिक्खूbhik·khū धूमनेत्तानिdhū·ma·net·tā·ni हत्थेनhat·the·na परिहरन्ति।pa·ri·ha·ran·ti

Tena kho pana samayena bhikkhū dhūmanettāni hatthena pariharanti.

At that time the monks carried the tubes in their hands.
205

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
206

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve धूमनेत्तथविकन्”ति।dhū·ma·net·ta·tha·vi·kan

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, dhūmanettathavikan”ti.

“I allow a bag for the tubes.”
207

एकतोe·ka·to घंसियन्ति।ghaṃ·si·yan·ti

Ekato ghaṁsiyanti.

The tubes scratched each other.
208

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
209

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve यमकथविकन्”ति।ya·ma·ka·tha·vi·kan

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, yamakathavikan”ti.

“I allow a bag with two compartments.”
210

अंसबद्धकोaṃ·sa·bad·dha·ko नna होति।ho·ti

Aṁsabaddhako na hoti.

They did not have a shoulder strap.
211

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
212

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अंसबद्धकंaṃ·sa·bad·dha·kaṃ बन्धनसुत्तकन्”ति।ban·dha·na·sut·ta·kan

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, aṁsabaddhakaṁ bandhanasuttakan”ti.

“I allow a shoulder strap and a string for fastening it.”
213

Allowable medical treatments and more
214

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to पिलिन्दवच्छस्सpi·lin·da·vac·chas·sa वाताबाधोvā·tā·bā·dho होति।ho·ti

Tena kho pana samayena āyasmato pilindavacchassa vātābādho hoti.

At one time Venerable Pilindavaccha had a certain disease.
215

वेज्जाvej·jā एवमाहंसु—e·va·mā·haṃ·su

Vejjā evamāhaṁsu—

The doctors said
216

“तेलंte·laṃ पचितब्बन्”ति।pa·ci·tab·ban

“telaṁ pacitabban”ti.

he needed a heated concoction of oil.
217

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
218

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve तेलपाकन्”ति।te·la·pā·kan

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, telapākan”ti.

“I allow a heated concoction of oil.”
219

तस्मिंtas·miṃ खोkho पनpa·na तेलपाकेte·la·pā·ke मज्जंmaj·jaṃ पक्खिपितब्बंpak·khi·pi·tab·baṃ होति।ho·ti

Tasmiṁ kho pana telapāke majjaṁ pakkhipitabbaṁ hoti.

They wanted to add alcohol to that concoction.
220

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
221

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve तेलपाकेte·la·pā·ke मज्जंmaj·jaṃ पक्खिपितुन्”ति।pak·khi·pi·tun

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, telapāke majjaṁ pakkhipitun”ti.

“I allow alcohol in a heated concoction of oil.”
222

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na छब्बग्गियाchab·bag·gi·yā भिक्खूbhik·khū अतिपक्खित्तमज्जानिa·ti·pak·khit·ta·maj·jā·ni तेलानिte·lā·ni पचन्ति,pa·can·ti तानिtā·ni पिवित्वाpi·vit·vā मज्जन्ति।maj·jan·ti

Tena kho pana samayena chabbaggiyā bhikkhū atipakkhittamajjāni telāni pacanti, tāni pivitvā majjanti.

Soon afterwards the monks from the group of six heated oil with too much alcohol. They drank it and became drunk.
223

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
224

“न,na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अतिपक्खित्तमज्जंa·ti·pak·khit·ta·maj·jaṃ तेलंte·laṃ पातब्बं।pā·tab·baṃ

“Na, bhikkhave, atipakkhittamajjaṁ telaṁ pātabbaṁ.

“You shouldn’t drink heated oil with too much alcohol.
225

योyo पिवेय्य,pi·vey·ya यथाधम्मोya·thā·dham·mo कारेतब्बो।kā·re·tab·bo

Yo piveyya, yathādhammo kāretabbo.

If you do, you should be dealt with according to the rule.
226

अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve यस्मिंyas·miṃ तेलपाकेte·la·pā·ke मज्जस्सmaj·jas·sa नna वण्णोvaṇ·ṇo नna गन्धोgan·dho नna रसोra·so पञ्ञायति,pañ·ñā·ya·ti एवरूपंe·va·rū·paṃ मज्जपक्खित्तंmaj·ja·pak·khit·taṃ तेलंte·laṃ पातुन्”ति।pā·tun

Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, yasmiṁ telapāke majjassa na vaṇṇo na gandho na raso paññāyati, evarūpaṁ majjapakkhittaṁ telaṁ pātun”ti.

I allow you to drink heated oil if there is no discernible color, smell, or taste of alcohol.”
227

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ बहुंba·huṃ अतिपक्खित्तमज्जंa·ti·pak·khit·ta·maj·jaṃ तेलंte·laṃ पक्कंpak·kaṃ होति।ho·ti

Tena kho pana samayena bhikkhūnaṁ bahuṁ atipakkhittamajjaṁ telaṁ pakkaṁ hoti.

The monks had heated much oil with too much alcohol.
228

अथa·tha खोkho भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ एतदहोसि—“कथंe·ta·da·ho·si नुnu खोkho अतिपक्खित्तमज्जेa·ti·pak·khit·ta·maj·je तेलेte·le पटिपज्जितब्बन्”ति?pa·ṭi·paj·ji·tab·ban

Atha kho bhikkhūnaṁ etadahosi—“kathaṁ nu kho atipakkhittamajje tele paṭipajjitabban”ti?

They did not know what to do with it.
229

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
230

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अब्भञ्जनंab·bhañ·ja·naṃ अधिट्ठातुन्”ति।a·dhiṭ·ṭhā·tun

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, abbhañjanaṁ adhiṭṭhātun”ti.

“I allow you to determine it for external use.”
231

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to पिलिन्दवच्छस्सpi·lin·da·vac·chas·sa बहुतरंba·hu·ta·raṃ तेलंte·laṃ पक्कंpak·kaṃ होति,ho·ti तेलभाजनंte·la·bhā·ja·naṃ नna विज्जति।vij·ja·ti

Tena kho pana samayena āyasmato pilindavacchassa bahutaraṁ telaṁ pakkaṁ hoti, telabhājanaṁ na vijjati.

Pilindavaccha had more heated oil, but there was no vessel for storing it.
232

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
233

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve तीणिtī·ṇi तुम्बानि—tum·bā·ni

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, tīṇi tumbāni—

“I allow three kinds of vessels:
234

लोहतुम्बं,lo·ha·tum·baṃ कट्ठतुम्बं,kaṭ·ṭha·tum·baṃ फलतुम्बन्”ति।pha·la·tum·ban

lohatumbaṁ, kaṭṭhatumbaṁ, phalatumban”ti.

made of metal, made of wood, made of fruit.”
235

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to पिलिन्दवच्छस्सpi·lin·da·vac·chas·sa अङ्गवातोaṅ·ga·vā·to होति।ho·ti

Tena kho pana samayena āyasmato pilindavacchassa aṅgavāto hoti.

At that time Pilindavaccha had arthritis of the hands and feet.
236

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
237

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सेदकम्मन्”ति।se·da·kam·man

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, sedakamman”ti.

“I allow treatment through sweating.”
238

नक्खमनियोnak·kha·ma·ni·yo होति।ho·ti

Nakkhamaniyo hoti.

He did not get better.
239

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
240

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सम्भारसेदन्”ति।sam·bhā·ra·se·dan

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, sambhārasedan”ti.

“I allow sweating with herbs.”
241

नक्खमनियोnak·kha·ma·ni·yo होति।ho·ti

Nakkhamaniyo hoti.

He still did not get better.
242

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
243

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve महासेदन्”ति।ma·hā·se·dan

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, mahāsedan”ti.

“I allow heavy sweating.”
244

नक्खमनियोnak·kha·ma·ni·yo होति।ho·ti

Nakkhamaniyo hoti.

He still did not get better.
245

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
246

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भङ्गोदकन्”ति।bhaṅ·go·da·kan

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, bhaṅgodakan”ti.

“I allow hemp water.”
247

नक्खमनियोnak·kha·ma·ni·yo होति।ho·ti

Nakkhamaniyo hoti.

He still did not get better.
248

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
249

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve उदककोट्ठकन्”ति।u·da·ka·koṭ·ṭha·kan

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, udakakoṭṭhakan”ti.

“I allow a bathtub.”
250

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to पिलिन्दवच्छस्सpi·lin·da·vac·chas·sa पब्बवातोpab·ba·vā·to होति।ho·ti

Tena kho pana samayena āyasmato pilindavacchassa pabbavāto hoti.

Pilindavaccha had arthritis.
251

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
252

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve लोहितंlo·hi·taṃ मोचेतुन्”ति।mo·ce·tun

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, lohitaṁ mocetun”ti.

“I allow bloodletting.”
253

नक्खमनियोnak·kha·ma·ni·yo होति।ho·ti

Nakkhamaniyo hoti.

He did not get better.
254

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
255

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve लोहितंlo·hi·taṃ मोचेत्वाmo·cet·vā विसाणेनvi·sā·ṇe·na गाहेतुन्”ति।gā·he·tun

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, lohitaṁ mocetvā visāṇena gāhetun”ti.

“I allow bloodletting and receiving it in a horn.”
256

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to पिलिन्दवच्छस्सpi·lin·da·vac·chas·sa पादाpā·dā फलिताpha·li·tā होन्ति।hon·ti

Tena kho pana samayena āyasmato pilindavacchassa pādā phalitā honti.

Pilindavaccha had cracked feet.
257

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
258

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve पादब्भञ्जनन्”ति।pā·dab·bhañ·ja·nan

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, pādabbhañjanan”ti.

“I allow salve for the feet.”
259

नक्खमनियोnak·kha·ma·ni·yo होति।ho·ti

Nakkhamaniyo hoti.

He did not get better.
260

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
261

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve पज्जंpaj·jaṃ अभिसङ्खरितुन्”ति।a·bhi·saṅ·kha·ri·tun

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, pajjaṁ abhisaṅkharitun”ti.

“I allow you to make foot salve.”
262

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरस्सañ·ña·ta·ras·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no गण्डाबाधोgaṇ·ḍā·bā·dho होति।ho·ti

Tena kho pana samayena aññatarassa bhikkhuno gaṇḍābādho hoti.

At that time a monk was afflicted with abscesses.
263

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
264

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सत्थकम्मन्”ति।sat·tha·kam·man

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, satthakamman”ti.

“I allow surgery.”
265

कसावोदकेनka·sā·vo·da·ke·na अत्थोat·tho होति।ho·ti

Kasāvodakena attho hoti.

They needed bitter water.
266

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
267

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve कसावोदकन्”ति।ka·sā·vo·da·kan

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, kasāvodakan”ti.

“I allow bitter water.”
268

तिलकक्केनti·la·kak·ke·na अत्थोat·tho होति।ho·ti

Tilakakkena attho hoti.

They needed sesame paste.
269

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
270

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve तिलकक्कन्”ति।ti·la·kak·kan

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, tilakakkan”ti.

“I allow sesame paste.”
271

कबळिकायka·ba·ḷi·kā·ya अत्थोat·tho होति।ho·ti

Kabaḷikāya attho hoti.

They needed flour paste.
272

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
273

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve कबळिकन्”ति।ka·ba·ḷi·kan

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, kabaḷikan”ti.

“I allow flour paste.”
274

वणबन्धनचोळेनva·ṇa·ban·dha·na·co·ḷe·na अत्थोat·tho होति।ho·ti

Vaṇabandhanacoḷena attho hoti.

They needed a dressing.
275

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
276

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve वणबन्धनचोळन्”ति।va·ṇa·ban·dha·na·co·ḷan

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, vaṇabandhanacoḷan”ti.

“I allow a dressing.”
277

वणोva·ṇo कण्डुवति।kaṇ·ḍu·va·ti

Vaṇo kaṇḍuvati.

The sore was itching.
278

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
279

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सासपकुट्टेनsā·sa·pa·kuṭ·ṭe·na फोसितुन्”ति।pho·si·tun

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, sāsapakuṭṭena phositun”ti.

“I allow you to sprinkle it with mustard powder.”
280

वणोva·ṇo किलिज्जित्थ।ki·lij·jit·tha

Vaṇo kilijjittha.

The sore festered.
281

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
282

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve धूमंdhū·maṃ कातुन्”ति।kā·tun

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, dhūmaṁ kātun”ti.

“I allow you to fumigate it.”
283

वड्ढमंसंvaḍ·ḍha·maṃ·saṃ वुट्ठाति।vuṭ·ṭhā·ti

Vaḍḍhamaṁsaṁ vuṭṭhāti.

The flesh protruded.
284

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
285

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve लोणसक्खरिकायlo·ṇa·sak·kha·ri·kā·ya छिन्दितुन्”ति।chin·di·tun

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, loṇasakkharikāya chinditun”ti.

“I allow you to cut it with a razor.”
286

वणोva·ṇo नna रुहति।ru·ha·ti

Vaṇo na ruhati.

The sore did not heal.
287

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
288

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve वणतेलन्”ति।va·ṇa·te·lan

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, vaṇatelan”ti.

“I allow oil for the sore.”
289

तेलंte·laṃ गलति।ga·la·ti

Telaṁ galati.

The oil dripped off.
290

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
291

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve विकासिकंvi·kā·si·kaṃ सब्बंsab·baṃ वणपटिकम्मन्”ति।va·ṇa·pa·ṭi·kam·man

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, vikāsikaṁ sabbaṁ vaṇapaṭikamman”ti.

“I allow a bandage and all treatments for sores.”
292

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro भिक्खुbhik·khu अहिनाa·hi·nā दट्ठोdaṭ·ṭho होति।ho·ti

Tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhu ahinā daṭṭho hoti.

On one occasion a certain monk was bitten by a snake.
293

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
294

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve चत्तारिcat·tā·ri महाविकटानिma·hā·vi·ka·ṭā·ni दातुं—dā·tuṃ

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, cattāri mahāvikaṭāni dātuṁ—

“I allow you to give him the four foul edibles:
295

गूथं,gū·thaṃ मुत्तं,mut·taṃ छारिकं,chā·ri·kaṃ मत्तिकन्”ति।mat·ti·kan

gūthaṁ, muttaṁ, chārikaṁ, mattikan”ti.

feces, urine, ash, and clay.”
296

अथa·tha खोkho भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

Atha kho bhikkhūnaṁ etadahosi—

The monks thought,
297

“अप्पटिग्गहितानिap·pa·ṭig·ga·hi·tā·ni नुnu खोkho उदाहुu·dā·hu पटिग्गहेतब्बानी”ति।pa·ṭig·ga·he·tab·bā·nī

“appaṭiggahitāni nu kho udāhu paṭiggahetabbānī”ti.

“Do they need to be received or not?”
298

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
299

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सतिsa·ti कप्पियकारकेkap·pi·ya·kā·ra·ke पटिग्गहापेतुं,pa·ṭig·ga·hā·pe·tuṃ असतिa·sa·ti कप्पियकारकेkap·pi·ya·kā·ra·ke सामंsā·maṃ गहेत्वाga·het·vā परिभुञ्जितुन्”ति।pa·ri·bhuñ·ji·tun

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, sati kappiyakārake paṭiggahāpetuṁ, asati kappiyakārake sāmaṁ gahetvā paribhuñjitun”ti.

“They should be received if there is an attendant. If there isn’t, I allow you to take them yourself and then eat them.”
300

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरेनañ·ña·ta·re·na भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā विसंvi·saṃ पीतंpī·taṃ होति।ho·ti

Tena kho pana samayena aññatarena bhikkhunā visaṁ pītaṁ hoti.

On one occasion a monk had drunk poison.
301

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
302

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve गूथंgū·thaṃ पायेतुन्”ति।pā·ye·tun

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, gūthaṁ pāyetun”ti.

“I allow you to give him feces to drink.”
303

अथa·tha खोkho भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

Atha kho bhikkhūnaṁ etadahosi—

The monks thought,
304

“अप्पटिग्गहितंap·pa·ṭig·ga·hi·taṃ नुnu खोkho उदाहुu·dā·hu पटिग्गहेतब्बो”ति?pa·ṭig·ga·he·tab·bo

“appaṭiggahitaṁ nu kho udāhu paṭiggahetabbo”ti?

“Does it need to be received or not?”
305

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
306

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve यंyaṃ करोन्तोka·ron·to पटिग्गण्हाति,pa·ṭig·gaṇ·hā·ti स्वेवsve·va पटिग्गहोpa·ṭig·ga·ho कतो,ka·to नna पुनpu·na पटिग्गहेतब्बो”ति।pa·ṭig·ga·he·tab·bo

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, yaṁ karonto paṭiggaṇhāti, sveva paṭiggaho kato, na puna paṭiggahetabbo”ti.

“I allow the one who is excreting it to receive it. When he’s received it, it doesn’t need to be received again.”
307

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरस्सañ·ña·ta·ras·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no घरदिन्नकाबाधोgha·ra·din·na·kā·bā·dho होति।ho·ti

Tena kho pana samayena aññatarassa bhikkhuno gharadinnakābādho hoti.

On one occasion a monk was sick from a drug.
308

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
309

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सीतालोळिंsī·tā·lo·ḷiṃ पायेतुन्”ति।pā·ye·tun

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, sītāloḷiṁ pāyetun”ti.

“I allow him to drink mud from a plow.”
310

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro भिक्खुbhik·khu दुट्ठगहणिकोduṭ·ṭha·ga·ha·ṇi·ko होति।ho·ti

Tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhu duṭṭhagahaṇiko hoti.

On one occasion a certain monk had indigestion.
311

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
312

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve आमिसखारंā·mi·sa·khā·raṃ पायेतुन्”ति।pā·ye·tun

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, āmisakhāraṁ pāyetun”ti.

“I allow him to drink lye.”
313

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरस्सañ·ña·ta·ras·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no पण्डुरोगाबाधोpaṇ·ḍu·ro·gā·bā·dho होति।ho·ti

Tena kho pana samayena aññatarassa bhikkhuno paṇḍurogābādho hoti.

On one occasion a certain monk suffered from jaundice.
314

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
315

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve मुत्तहरीतकंmut·ta·ha·rī·ta·kaṃ पायेतुन्”ति।pā·ye·tun

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, muttaharītakaṁ pāyetun”ti.

“I allow him to drink chebulic myrobalan soaked in cattle urine.”
316

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरस्सañ·ña·ta·ras·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no छविदोसाबाधोcha·vi·do·sā·bā·dho होति।ho·ti

Tena kho pana samayena aññatarassa bhikkhuno chavidosābādho hoti.

On one occasion a certain monk suffered from a skin disease.
317

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
318

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve गन्धालेपंgan·dhā·le·paṃ कातुन्”ति।kā·tun

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, gandhālepaṁ kātun”ti.

“I allow you to make a scented ointment.”
319

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro भिक्खुbhik·khu अभिसन्नकायोa·bhi·san·na·kā·yo होति।ho·ti

Tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhu abhisannakāyo hoti.

On one occasion a monk’s body was full of impurities.
320

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
321

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve विरेचनंvi·re·ca·naṃ पातुन्”ति।pā·tun

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, virecanaṁ pātun”ti.

“I allow him to drink a purgative.”
322

अच्छकञ्जियाac·cha·kañ·ji·yā अत्थोat·tho होति।ho·ti

Acchakañjiyā attho hoti.

He needed clear congee.
323

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
324

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अच्छकञ्जिन्”ति।ac·cha·kañ·jin

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, acchakañjin”ti.

“I allow clear congee.”
325

अकटयूसेनa·ka·ṭa·yū·se·na अत्थोat·tho होति।ho·ti

Akaṭayūsena attho hoti.

He needed mung-bean broth.
326

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
327

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अकटयूसन्”ति।a·ka·ṭa·yū·san

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, akaṭayūsan”ti.

“I allow mung-bean broth.”
328

कटाकटेनka·ṭā·ka·ṭe·na अत्थोat·tho होति।ho·ti

Kaṭākaṭena attho hoti.

He needed oily mung-bean broth.
329

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
330

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve कटाकटन्”ति।ka·ṭā·ka·ṭan

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, kaṭākaṭan”ti.

“I allow oily mung-bean broth.”
331

पटिच्छादनीयेनpa·ṭic·chā·da·nī·ye·na अत्थोat·tho होति।ho·ti

Paṭicchādanīyena attho hoti.

He needed meat broth.
332

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
333

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve पटिच्छादनीयन्”ति।pa·ṭic·chā·da·nī·yan

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, paṭicchādanīyan”ti.

“I allow meat broth.”
334

3। पिलिन्दवच्छवत्थुpi·lin·da·vac·cha·vat·thu

3. Pilindavacchavatthu

3. The account of Pilindavaccha
335

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na आयस्माā·yas·mā पिलिन्दवच्छोpi·lin·da·vac·cho राजगहेrā·ja·ga·he पब्भारंpab·bhā·raṃ सोधापेतिso·dhā·pe·ti लेणंle·ṇaṃ कत्तुकामो।kat·tu·kā·mo

Tena kho pana samayena āyasmā pilindavaccho rājagahe pabbhāraṁ sodhāpeti leṇaṁ kattukāmo.

At one time Venerable Pilindavaccha was having a hillside cleared near Rājagaha, intending to build a shelter.
336

अथa·tha खोkho राजाrā·jā मागधोmā·ga·dho सेनियोse·ni·yo बिम्बिसारोbim·bi·sā·ro येनायस्माye·nā·yas·mā पिलिन्दवच्छोpi·lin·da·vac·cho तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ पिलिन्दवच्छंpi·lin·da·vac·chaṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di

Atha kho rājā māgadho seniyo bimbisāro yenāyasmā pilindavaccho tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ pilindavacchaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

Just then King Seniya Bimbisāra of Magadha went to Pilindavaccha, bowed, sat down,
337

एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नोni·sin·no खोkho राजाrā·jā मागधोmā·ga·dho सेनियोse·ni·yo बिम्बिसारोbim·bi·sā·ro आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ पिलिन्दवच्छंpi·lin·da·vac·chaṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho rājā māgadho seniyo bimbisāro āyasmantaṁ pilindavacchaṁ etadavoca—

and said,
338

“किं,kiṃ भन्ते,bhan·te थेरोthe·ro कारापेती”ति?kā·rā·pe·tī

“kiṁ, bhante, thero kārāpetī”ti?

“Venerable, what are you having made?”
339

“पब्भारं,pab·bhā·raṃ महाराज,ma·hā·rā·ja सोधापेमि,so·dhā·pe·mi लेणंle·ṇaṃ कत्तुकामो”ति।kat·tu·kā·mo

“Pabbhāraṁ, mahārāja, sodhāpemi, leṇaṁ kattukāmo”ti.

“I’m clearing the hillside, great king. I want to build a shelter.”
340

“अत्थो,at·tho भन्ते,bhan·te अय्यस्सay·yas·sa आरामिकेना”ति?ā·rā·mi·ke·nā

“Attho, bhante, ayyassa ārāmikenā”ti?

“Do you need a monastery worker?”
341

“नna खो,kho महाराज,ma·hā·rā·ja भगवताbha·ga·va·tā आरामिकोā·rā·mi·ko अनुञ्ञातो”ति।a·nuñ·ñā·to

“Na kho, mahārāja, bhagavatā ārāmiko anuññāto”ti.

“The Buddha hasn’t allowed monastery workers.”
342

“तेनte·na हि,hi भन्ते,bhan·te भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ पटिपुच्छित्वाpa·ṭi·puc·chit·vā ममma·ma आरोचेय्याथा”ति।ā·ro·cey·yā·thā

“Tena hi, bhante, bhagavantaṁ paṭipucchitvā mama āroceyyāthā”ti.

“Well then, sir, please ask the Buddha and tell me the outcome.”
343

“एवं,e·vaṃ महाराजा”तिma·hā·rā·jā खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā पिलिन्दवच्छोpi·lin·da·vac·cho रञ्ञोrañ·ño मागधस्सmā·ga·dhas·sa सेनियस्सse·ni·yas·sa बिम्बिसारस्सbim·bi·sā·ras·sa पच्चस्सोसि।pac·cas·so·si

“Evaṁ, mahārājā”ti kho āyasmā pilindavaccho rañño māgadhassa seniyassa bimbisārassa paccassosi.

“Yes.”
344

अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā पिलिन्दवच्छोpi·lin·da·vac·cho राजानंrā·jā·naṃ मागधंmā·ga·dhaṃ सेनियंse·ni·yaṃ बिम्बिसारंbim·bi·sā·raṃ धम्मियाdham·mi·yā कथायka·thā·ya सन्दस्सेसि,san·das·se·si समादपेसि,sa·mā·da·pe·si समुत्तेजेसि,sa·mut·te·je·si सम्पहंसेसि।sam·pa·haṃ·se·si

Atha kho āyasmā pilindavaccho rājānaṁ māgadhaṁ seniyaṁ bimbisāraṁ dhammiyā kathāya sandassesi, samādapesi, samuttejesi, sampahaṁsesi.

Pilindavaccha instructed, inspired, and gladdened King Bimbisāra with a teaching,
345

अथa·tha खोkho राजाrā·jā मागधोmā·ga·dho सेनियोse·ni·yo बिम्बिसारोbim·bi·sā·ro आयस्मताā·yas·ma·tā पिलिन्दवच्छेनpi·lin·da·vac·che·na धम्मियाdham·mi·yā कथायka·thā·ya सन्दस्सितोsan·das·si·to समादपितोsa·mā·da·pi·to समुत्तेजितोsa·mut·te·ji·to सम्पहंसितोsam·pa·haṃ·si·to उट्ठायासनाuṭ·ṭhā·yā·sa·nā आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ पिलिन्दवच्छंpi·lin·da·vac·chaṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā पदक्खिणंpa·dak·khi·ṇaṃ कत्वाkat·vā पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

Atha kho rājā māgadho seniyo bimbisāro āyasmatā pilindavacchena dhammiyā kathāya sandassito samādapito samuttejito sampahaṁsito uṭṭhāyāsanā āyasmantaṁ pilindavacchaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pakkāmi.

after which the king got up from his seat, bowed down, circumambulated Pilindavaccha with his right side toward him, and left.
346

अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā पिलिन्दवच्छोpi·lin·da·vac·cho भगवतोbha·ga·va·to सन्तिकेsan·ti·ke दूतंdū·taṃ पाहेसि—pā·he·si

Atha kho āyasmā pilindavaccho bhagavato santike dūtaṁ pāhesi—

Soon afterwards Pilindavaccha sent a message to the Buddha:
347

“राजा,rā·jā भन्ते,bhan·te मागधोmā·ga·dho सेनियोse·ni·yo बिम्बिसारोbim·bi·sā·ro आरामिकंā·rā·mi·kaṃ दातुकामो।dā·tu·kā·mo

“rājā, bhante, māgadho seniyo bimbisāro ārāmikaṁ dātukāmo.

“Sir, King Seniya Bimbisāra of Magadha wishes to provide a monastery worker.
348

कथंka·thaṃ नुnu खो,kho भन्ते,bhan·te मयाma·yā पटिपज्जितब्बन्”ति?pa·ṭi·paj·ji·tab·ban

Kathaṁ nu kho, bhante, mayā paṭipajjitabban”ti?

What should I tell him?”
349

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ निदानेni·dā·ne एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ पकरणेpa·ka·ra·ṇe धम्मिंdham·miṃ कथंka·thaṃ कत्वाkat·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

Atha kho bhagavā etasmiṁ nidāne etasmiṁ pakaraṇe dhammiṁ kathaṁ katvā bhikkhū āmantesi—

The Buddha then gave a teaching and addressed the monks:
350

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve आरामिकन्”ति।ā·rā·mi·kan

“anujānāmi, bhikkhave, ārāmikan”ti.

“Monks, I allow monastery workers.”
351

दुतियम्पिdu·ti·yam·pi खोkho राजाrā·jā मागधोmā·ga·dho सेनियोse·ni·yo बिम्बिसारोbim·bi·sā·ro येनायस्माye·nā·yas·mā पिलिन्दवच्छोpi·lin·da·vac·cho तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ पिलिन्दवच्छंpi·lin·da·vac·chaṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di

Dutiyampi kho rājā māgadho seniyo bimbisāro yenāyasmā pilindavaccho tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ pilindavacchaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

Once again King Bimbisāra went to Pilindavaccha, bowed, sat down,
352

एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नोni·sin·no खोkho राजाrā·jā मागधोmā·ga·dho सेनियोse·ni·yo बिम्बिसारोbim·bi·sā·ro आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ पिलिन्दवच्छंpi·lin·da·vac·chaṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho rājā māgadho seniyo bimbisāro āyasmantaṁ pilindavacchaṁ etadavoca—

and said,
353

“अनुञ्ञातो,a·nuñ·ñā·to भन्ते,bhan·te भगवताbha·ga·va·tā आरामिको”ति?ā·rā·mi·ko

“anuññāto, bhante, bhagavatā ārāmiko”ti?

“Sir, has the Buddha allowed monastery workers?”
354

“एवं,e·vaṃ महाराजा”ति।ma·hā·rā·jā

“Evaṁ, mahārājā”ti.

“Yes, great king.”
355

“तेनte·na हि,hi भन्ते,bhan·te अय्यस्सay·yas·sa आरामिकंā·rā·mi·kaṃ दम्मी”ति।dam·mī

“Tena hi, bhante, ayyassa ārāmikaṁ dammī”ti.

“Well then, I’ll provide you with a monastery worker.”
356

अथa·tha खोkho राजाrā·jā मागधोmā·ga·dho सेनियोse·ni·yo बिम्बिसारोbim·bi·sā·ro आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to पिलिन्दवच्छस्सpi·lin·da·vac·chas·sa आरामिकंā·rā·mi·kaṃ पटिस्सुत्वा,pa·ṭis·sut·vā विस्सरित्वा,vis·sa·rit·vā चिरेनci·re·na सतिंsa·tiṃ पटिलभित्वा,pa·ṭi·la·bhit·vā अञ्ञतरंañ·ña·ta·raṃ सब्बत्थकंsab·bat·tha·kaṃ महामत्तंma·hā·mat·taṃ आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

Atha kho rājā māgadho seniyo bimbisāro āyasmato pilindavacchassa ārāmikaṁ paṭissutvā, vissaritvā, cirena satiṁ paṭilabhitvā, aññataraṁ sabbatthakaṁ mahāmattaṁ āmantesi—

Yet after making this promise, he forgot, and only remembered after a long time. He then addressed the official in charge of practical affairs:
357

“योyo मया,ma·yā भणे,bha·ṇe अय्यस्सay·yas·sa आरामिकोā·rā·mi·ko पटिस्सुतो,pa·ṭis·su·to दिन्नोdin·no सोso आरामिको”ति?ā·rā·mi·ko

“yo mayā, bhaṇe, ayyassa ārāmiko paṭissuto, dinno so ārāmiko”ti?

“Listen, has the monastery worker I promised been provided?”
358

“नna खो,kho देव,de·va अय्यस्सay·yas·sa आरामिकोā·rā·mi·ko दिन्नो”ति।din·no

“Na kho, deva, ayyassa ārāmiko dinno”ti.

“No, sir, he hasn’t.”
359

“कीवkī·va चिरंci·raṃ नुnu खो,kho भणे,bha·ṇe इतोi·to हिhi तंtaṃ होती”ति?ho·tī

“Kīva ciraṁ nu kho, bhaṇe, ito hi taṁ hotī”ti?

“How long has it been since we made that promise?”
360

अथa·tha खोkho सोso महामत्तोma·hā·mat·to रत्तियोrat·ti·yo गणेत्वाga·ṇet·vā राजानंrā·jā·naṃ मागधंmā·ga·dhaṃ सेनियंse·ni·yaṃ बिम्बिसारंbim·bi·sā·raṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

Atha kho so mahāmatto rattiyo gaṇetvā rājānaṁ māgadhaṁ seniyaṁ bimbisāraṁ etadavoca—

The official counted the days and said,
361

“पञ्च,pañ·ca देव,de·va रत्तिसतानी”ति।rat·ti·sa·tā·nī

“pañca, deva, rattisatānī”ti.

“It’s been five hundred days.”
362

“तेनte·na हि,hi भणे,bha·ṇe अय्यस्सay·yas·sa पञ्चpañ·ca आरामिकसतानिā·rā·mi·ka·sa·tā·ni देही”ति।de·hī

“Tena hi, bhaṇe, ayyassa pañca ārāmikasatāni dehī”ti.

“Well then, provide him with five hundred monastery workers.”
363

“एवं,e·vaṃ देवा”तिde·vā

“Evaṁ, devā”ti

“Yes.”
364

खोkho सोso महामत्तोma·hā·mat·to रञ्ञोrañ·ño मागधस्सmā·ga·dhas·sa सेनियस्सse·ni·yas·sa बिम्बिसारस्सbim·bi·sā·ras·sa पटिस्सुत्वाpa·ṭis·sut·vā आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to पिलिन्दवच्छस्सpi·lin·da·vac·chas·sa पञ्चpañ·ca आरामिकसतानिā·rā·mi·ka·sa·tā·ni पादासि,pā·dā·si पाटियेक्कोpā·ṭi·yek·ko गामोgā·mo निविसि।ni·vi·si

kho so mahāmatto rañño māgadhassa seniyassa bimbisārassa paṭissutvā āyasmato pilindavacchassa pañca ārāmikasatāni pādāsi, pāṭiyekko gāmo nivisi.

The official provided Pilindavaccha with those monastery workers, and a separate village was established.
365

“आरामिकगामको”तिपिā·rā·mi·ka·gā·ma·ko नंnaṃ आहंसु,ā·haṃ·su “पिलिन्दगामको”तिपिpi·lin·da·gā·ma·ko नंnaṃ आहंसु।ā·haṃ·su

“Ārāmikagāmako”tipi naṁ āhaṁsu, “pilindagāmako”tipi naṁ āhaṁsu.

They called it “The Monastery Workers’ Village” and “Pilinda Village”.
366

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na आयस्माā·yas·mā पिलिन्दवच्छोpi·lin·da·vac·cho तस्मिंtas·miṃ गामकेgā·ma·ke कुलूपकोku·lū·pa·ko होति।ho·ti

Tena kho pana samayena āyasmā pilindavaccho tasmiṁ gāmake kulūpako hoti.

And Pilindavaccha began associating with the families in that village.
367

अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā पिलिन्दवच्छोpi·lin·da·vac·cho पुब्बण्हसमयंpub·baṇ·ha·sa·ma·yaṃ निवासेत्वाni·vā·set·vā पत्तचीवरमादायpat·ta·cī·va·ra·mā·dā·ya पिलिन्दगामंpi·lin·da·gā·maṃ पिण्डायpiṇ·ḍā·ya पाविसि।pā·vi·si

Atha kho āyasmā pilindavaccho pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya pilindagāmaṁ piṇḍāya pāvisi.

After robing up one morning, he took his bowl and robe and went to Pilinda Village for alms.
368

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na तस्मिंtas·miṃ गामकेgā·ma·ke उस्सवोus·sa·vo होति।ho·ti

Tena kho pana samayena tasmiṁ gāmake ussavo hoti.

At that time they were holding a celebration in that village,
369

दारकाdā·ra·kā अलङ्कताa·laṅ·ka·tā मालाकिताmā·lā·ki·tā कीळन्ति।kī·ḷan·ti

Dārakā alaṅkatā mālākitā kīḷanti.

and the children were dressed up in ornaments and garlands.
370

अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā पिलिन्दवच्छोpi·lin·da·vac·cho पिलिन्दगामकेpi·lin·da·gā·ma·ke सपदानंsa·pa·dā·naṃ पिण्डायpiṇ·ḍā·ya चरमानोca·ra·mā·no येनye·na अञ्ञतरस्सañ·ña·ta·ras·sa आरामिकस्सā·rā·mi·kas·sa निवेसनंni·ve·sa·naṃ तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā पञ्ञत्तेpañ·ñat·te आसनेā·sa·ne निसीदि।ni·sī·di

Atha kho āyasmā pilindavaccho pilindagāmake sapadānaṁ piṇḍāya caramāno yena aññatarassa ārāmikassa nivesanaṁ tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi.

As Pilindavaccha was walking on continuous almsround, he came to the house of a certain monastery worker where he sat down on the prepared seat.
371

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na तस्साtas·sā आरामिकिनियाā·rā·mi·ki·ni·yā धीताdhī·tā अञ्ञेañ·ñe दारकेdā·ra·ke अलङ्कतेa·laṅ·ka·te मालाकितेmā·lā·ki·te पस्सित्वाpas·sit·vā रोदति—ro·da·ti

Tena kho pana samayena tassā ārāmikiniyā dhītā aññe dārake alaṅkate mālākite passitvā rodati—

Just then the daughter of the house had seen the other children dressed up in ornaments and garlands. She cried, saying,
372

“मालंmā·laṃ मेme देथ,de·tha अलङ्कारंa·laṅ·kā·raṃ मेme देथा”ति।de·thā

“mālaṁ me detha, alaṅkāraṁ me dethā”ti.

“I want a garland! I want ornaments!”
373

अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā पिलिन्दवच्छोpi·lin·da·vac·cho तंtaṃ आरामिकिनिंā·rā·mi·ki·niṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

Atha kho āyasmā pilindavaccho taṁ ārāmikiniṁ etadavoca—

Pilindavaccha asked her mother
374

“किस्सायंkis·sā·yaṃ दारिकाdā·ri·kā रोदती”ति?ro·da·tī

“kissāyaṁ dārikā rodatī”ti?

why the girl was crying.
375

“अयं,a·yaṃ भन्ते,bhan·te दारिकाdā·ri·kā अञ्ञेañ·ñe दारकेdā·ra·ke अलङ्कतेa·laṅ·ka·te मालाकितेmā·lā·ki·te पस्सित्वाpas·sit·vā रोदति—ro·da·ti

“Ayaṁ, bhante, dārikā aññe dārake alaṅkate mālākite passitvā rodati—

She told him,
376

‘मालंmā·laṃ मेme देथ,de·tha अलङ्कारंa·laṅ·kā·raṃ मेme देथा’ति।de·thā

‘mālaṁ me detha, alaṅkāraṁ me dethā’ti.

(Pāli only)
377

कुतोku·to अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ दुग्गतानंdug·ga·tā·naṃ माला,mā·lā कुतोku·to अलङ्कारो”ति?a·laṅ·kā·ro

Kuto amhākaṁ duggatānaṁ mālā, kuto alaṅkāro”ti?

adding, “Poor people like us can’t afford garlands and ornaments.”
378

अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā पिलिन्दवच्छोpi·lin·da·vac·cho अञ्ञतरंañ·ña·ta·raṃ तिणण्डुपकंti·ṇaṇ·ḍu·pa·kaṃ गहेत्वाga·het·vā तंtaṃ आरामिकिनिंā·rā·mi·ki·niṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

Atha kho āyasmā pilindavaccho aññataraṁ tiṇaṇḍupakaṁ gahetvā taṁ ārāmikiniṁ etadavoca—

Pilindavaccha then took a pad of grass and said to the mother,
379

“हन्दिमंhan·di·maṃ तिणण्डुपकंti·ṇaṇ·ḍu·pa·kaṃ तस्साtas·sā दारिकायdā·ri·kā·ya सीसेsī·se पटिमुञ्चा”ति।pa·ṭi·muñ·cā

“handimaṁ tiṇaṇḍupakaṁ tassā dārikāya sīse paṭimuñcā”ti.

“Here, place this on the girl’s head.”
380

अथa·tha खोkho साsā आरामिकिनीā·rā·mi·ki·nī तंtaṃ तिणण्डुपकंti·ṇaṇ·ḍu·pa·kaṃ गहेत्वाga·het·vā तस्साtas·sā दारिकायdā·ri·kā·ya सीसेsī·se पटिमुञ्चि।pa·ṭi·muñ·ci

Atha kho sā ārāmikinī taṁ tiṇaṇḍupakaṁ gahetvā tassā dārikāya sīse paṭimuñci.

She did,
381

साsā अहोसिa·ho·si सुवण्णमालाsu·vaṇ·ṇa·mā·lā अभिरूपा,a·bhi·rū·pā दस्सनीया,das·sa·nī·yā पासादिका;pā·sā·di·kā

Sā ahosi suvaṇṇamālā abhirūpā, dassanīyā, pāsādikā;

and it turned into a beautiful golden garland.
382

नत्थिnat·thi तादिसाtā·di·sā रञ्ञोपिrañ·ño·pi अन्तेपुरेan·te·pu·re सुवण्णमाला।su·vaṇ·ṇa·mā·lā

natthi tādisā raññopi antepure suvaṇṇamālā.

Even the royal compound had nothing like it.
383

मनुस्साma·nus·sā रञ्ञोrañ·ño मागधस्सmā·ga·dhas·sa सेनियस्सse·ni·yas·sa बिम्बिसारस्सbim·bi·sā·ras·sa आरोचेसुं—ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Manussā rañño māgadhassa seniyassa bimbisārassa ārocesuṁ—

People told King Bimbisāra,
384

“अमुकस्स,a·mu·kas·sa देव,de·va आरामिकस्सā·rā·mi·kas·sa घरेgha·re सुवण्णमालाsu·vaṇ·ṇa·mā·lā अभिरूपा,a·bhi·rū·pā दस्सनीया,das·sa·nī·yā पासादिका;pā·sā·di·kā

“amukassa, deva, ārāmikassa ghare suvaṇṇamālā abhirūpā, dassanīyā, pāsādikā;

“Sir, in the house of a such-and-such a monastery worker there’s a beautiful golden garland.
385

नत्थिnat·thi तादिसाtā·di·sā देवस्सपिde·vas·sa·pi अन्तेपुरेan·te·pu·re सुवण्णमाला;su·vaṇ·ṇa·mā·lā

natthi tādisā devassapi antepure suvaṇṇamālā;

Even in your court, sir, there’s nothing like it.
386

कुतोku·to तस्सtas·sa दुग्गतस्स?dug·ga·tas·sa

kuto tassa duggatassa?

So how did those poor people get it?
387

निस्संसयंnis·saṃ·sa·yaṃ चोरिकायco·ri·kā·ya आभता”ति।ā·bha·tā

Nissaṁsayaṁ corikāya ābhatā”ti.

They must have stolen it.”
388

अथa·tha खोkho राजाrā·jā मागधोmā·ga·dho सेनियोse·ni·yo बिम्बिसारोbim·bi·sā·ro तंtaṃ आरामिककुलंā·rā·mi·ka·ku·laṃ बन्धापेसि।ban·dhā·pe·si

Atha kho rājā māgadho seniyo bimbisāro taṁ ārāmikakulaṁ bandhāpesi.

King Bimbisāra then had that family imprisoned.
389

दुतियम्पिdu·ti·yam·pi खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā पिलिन्दवच्छोpi·lin·da·vac·cho पुब्बण्हसमयंpub·baṇ·ha·sa·ma·yaṃ निवासेत्वाni·vā·set·vā पत्तचीवरमादायpat·ta·cī·va·ra·mā·dā·ya पिलिन्दगामंpi·lin·da·gā·maṃ पिण्डायpiṇ·ḍā·ya पाविसि।pā·vi·si

Dutiyampi kho āyasmā pilindavaccho pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya pilindagāmaṁ piṇḍāya pāvisi.

Once again Pilindavaccha robed up in the morning, took his bowl and robe, and went to Pilinda Village for alms.
390

पिलिन्दगामकेpi·lin·da·gā·ma·ke सपदानंsa·pa·dā·naṃ पिण्डायpiṇ·ḍā·ya चरमानोca·ra·mā·no येनye·na तस्सtas·sa आरामिकस्सā·rā·mi·kas·sa निवेसनंni·ve·sa·naṃ तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā पटिविस्सकेpa·ṭi·vis·sa·ke पुच्छि—puc·chi

Pilindagāmake sapadānaṁ piṇḍāya caramāno yena tassa ārāmikassa nivesanaṁ tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā paṭivissake pucchi—

As he was walking on continuous almsround, he came to the house of that same monastery worker. He then asked the neighbors what had happened to that family.
391

“कहंka·haṃ इमंi·maṃ आरामिककुलंā·rā·mi·ka·ku·laṃ गतन्”ति?ga·tan

“kahaṁ imaṁ ārāmikakulaṁ gatan”ti?

(Pāli only)
392

“एतिस्सा,e·tis·sā भन्ते,bhan·te सुवण्णमालायsu·vaṇ·ṇa·mā·lā·ya कारणाkā·ra·ṇā रञ्ञाrañ·ñā बन्धापितन्”ति।ban·dhā·pi·tan

“Etissā, bhante, suvaṇṇamālāya kāraṇā raññā bandhāpitan”ti.

“The king had jailed them, venerable, because of that golden garland.”
393

अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā पिलिन्दवच्छोpi·lin·da·vac·cho येनye·na रञ्ञोrañ·ño मागधस्सmā·ga·dhas·sa सेनियस्सse·ni·yas·sa बिम्बिसारस्सbim·bi·sā·ras·sa निवेसनंni·ve·sa·naṃ तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā पञ्ञत्तेpañ·ñat·te आसनेā·sa·ne निसीदि।ni·sī·di

Atha kho āyasmā pilindavaccho yena rañño māgadhassa seniyassa bimbisārassa nivesanaṁ tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi.

Pilindavaccha went to King Bimbisāra’s house, where he sat down on the prepared seat.
394

अथa·tha खोkho राजाrā·jā मागधोmā·ga·dho सेनियोse·ni·yo बिम्बिसारोbim·bi·sā·ro येनायस्माye·nā·yas·mā पिलिन्दवच्छोpi·lin·da·vac·cho तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ पिलिन्दवच्छंpi·lin·da·vac·chaṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di

Atha kho rājā māgadho seniyo bimbisāro yenāyasmā pilindavaccho tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ pilindavacchaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

King Bimbisāra approached Pilindavaccha, bowed, and sat down.
395

एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नंni·sin·naṃ खोkho राजानंrā·jā·naṃ मागधंmā·ga·dhaṃ सेनियंse·ni·yaṃ बिम्बिसारंbim·bi·sā·raṃ आयस्माā·yas·mā पिलिन्दवच्छोpi·lin·da·vac·cho एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho rājānaṁ māgadhaṁ seniyaṁ bimbisāraṁ āyasmā pilindavaccho etadavoca—

Pilindavaccha said,
396

“किस्स,kis·sa महाराज,ma·hā·rā·ja आरामिककुलंā·rā·mi·ka·ku·laṃ बन्धापितन्”ति?ban·dhā·pi·tan

“kissa, mahārāja, ārāmikakulaṁ bandhāpitan”ti?

“Great king, why have you jailed the family of that monastery worker?”
397

“तस्स,tas·sa भन्ते,bhan·te आरामिकस्सā·rā·mi·kas·sa घरेgha·re सुवण्णमालाsu·vaṇ·ṇa·mā·lā अभिरूपा,a·bhi·rū·pā दस्सनीया,das·sa·nī·yā पासादिका;pā·sā·di·kā

“Tassa, bhante, ārāmikassa ghare suvaṇṇamālā abhirūpā, dassanīyā, pāsādikā;

“Sir, in the house of that monastery worker there was a beautiful golden garland.
398

नत्थिnat·thi तादिसाtā·di·sā अम्हाकम्पिam·hā·kam·pi अन्तेपुरेan·te·pu·re सुवण्णमाला;su·vaṇ·ṇa·mā·lā

natthi tādisā amhākampi antepure suvaṇṇamālā;

Even the royal compound has nothing like it.
399

कुतोku·to तस्सtas·sa दुग्गतस्स?dug·ga·tas·sa

kuto tassa duggatassa?

So how did those poor people get it?
400

निस्संसयंnis·saṃ·sa·yaṃ चोरिकायco·ri·kā·ya आभता”ति।ā·bha·tā

Nissaṁsayaṁ corikāya ābhatā”ti.

They must have stolen it.”
401

अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā पिलिन्दवच्छोpi·lin·da·vac·cho रञ्ञोrañ·ño मागधस्सmā·ga·dhas·sa सेनियस्सse·ni·yas·sa बिम्बिसारस्सbim·bi·sā·ras·sa पासादंpā·sā·daṃ सुवण्णन्तिsu·vaṇ·ṇan·ti अधिमुच्चि;a·dhi·muc·ci

Atha kho āyasmā pilindavaccho rañño māgadhassa seniyassa bimbisārassa pāsādaṁ suvaṇṇanti adhimucci;

Pilindavaccha then focused his mind on turning King Bimbisāra’s stilt house into gold.
402

सोso अहोसिa·ho·si सब्बसोवण्णमयो।sab·ba·so·vaṇ·ṇa·ma·yo

so ahosi sabbasovaṇṇamayo.

As a result, the whole house became gold.
403

“इदंi·daṃ पनpa·na ते,te महाराज,ma·hā·rā·ja तावtā·va बहुंba·huṃ सुवण्णंsu·vaṇ·ṇaṃ कुतो”ति?ku·to

“Idaṁ pana te, mahārāja, tāva bahuṁ suvaṇṇaṁ kuto”ti?

He said, “Great king, how did you get so much gold?”
404

“अञ्ञातं,añ·ñā·taṃ भन्ते,bhan·te अय्यस्सेवेसोay·yas·se·ve·so इद्धानुभावो”तिid·dhā·nu·bhā·vo तंtaṃ आरामिककुलंā·rā·mi·ka·ku·laṃ मुञ्चापेसि।muñ·cā·pe·si

“Aññātaṁ, bhante, ayyasseveso iddhānubhāvo”ti taṁ ārāmikakulaṁ muñcāpesi.

“Understood, sir! It’s your supernormal power.” And he released that family.
405

मनुस्सा—ma·nus·sā

Manussā—

People said,
406

“अय्येनay·ye·na किरki·ra पिलिन्दवच्छेनpi·lin·da·vac·che·na सराजिकायsa·rā·ji·kā·ya परिसायpa·ri·sā·ya उत्तरिut·ta·ri मनुस्सधम्मंma·nus·sa·dham·maṃ इद्धिपाटिहारियंid·dhi·pā·ṭi·hā·ri·yaṃ दस्सितन्”ति—das·si·tan

“ayyena kira pilindavacchena sarājikāya parisāya uttari manussadhammaṁ iddhipāṭihāriyaṁ dassitan”ti—

“They say Venerable Pilindavaccha has performed a superhuman feat, a wonder of supernormal power, for the king and his court!”
407

अत्तमनाat·ta·ma·nā अभिप्पसन्नाa·bhip·pa·san·nā आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to पिलिन्दवच्छस्सpi·lin·da·vac·chas·sa पञ्चpañ·ca भेसज्जानिbhe·saj·jā·ni अभिहरिंसु,a·bhi·ha·riṃ·su सेय्यथिदं—sey·ya·thi·daṃ

attamanā abhippasannā āyasmato pilindavacchassa pañca bhesajjāni abhihariṁsu, seyyathidaṁ—

Delighted, and gaining confidence in Pilindavaccha, they brought him the five tonics:
408

सप्पिं,sap·piṃ नवनीतं,na·va·nī·taṃ तेलं,te·laṃ मधुं,ma·dhuṃ फाणितं।phā·ṇi·taṃ

sappiṁ, navanītaṁ, telaṁ, madhuṁ, phāṇitaṁ.

ghee, butter, oil, honey, and syrup.
409

पकतियापिpa·ka·ti·yā·pi चca आयस्माā·yas·mā पिलिन्दवच्छोpi·lin·da·vac·cho लाभीlā·bhī होतिho·ti पञ्चन्नंpañ·can·naṃ भेसज्जानं;bhe·saj·jā·naṃ

Pakatiyāpi ca āyasmā pilindavaccho lābhī hoti pañcannaṁ bhesajjānaṁ;

Ordinarily, too, Pilindavaccha was getting the five tonics.
410

लद्धंlad·dhaṃ लद्धंlad·dhaṃ परिसायpa·ri·sā·ya विस्सज्जेति।vis·saj·je·ti

laddhaṁ laddhaṁ parisāya vissajjeti.

Since he was getting so much, he gave it away to his followers,
411

परिसाpa·ri·sā चस्सcas·sa होतिho·ti बाहुल्लिका;bā·hul·li·kā

Parisā cassa hoti bāhullikā;

who ended up with an abundance of tonics.
412

लद्धंlad·dhaṃ लद्धंlad·dhaṃ कोलम्बेपि,ko·lam·be·pi घटेपि,gha·ṭe·pi पूरेत्वाpū·ret·vā पटिसामेति;pa·ṭi·sā·me·ti

laddhaṁ laddhaṁ kolambepi, ghaṭepi, pūretvā paṭisāmeti;

After filling up basins and waterpots and setting these aside,
413

परिस्सावनानिपि,pa·ris·sā·va·nā·ni·pi थविकायोपि,tha·vi·kā·yo·pi पूरेत्वाpū·ret·vā वातपानेसुvā·ta·pā·ne·su लग्गेति।lag·ge·ti

parissāvanānipi, thavikāyopi, pūretvā vātapānesu laggeti.

they filled their water filters and bags and hung these in the windows.
414

तानिtā·ni ओलीनविलीनानिo·lī·na·vi·lī·nā·ni तिट्ठन्ति।tiṭ·ṭhan·ti

Tāni olīnavilīnāni tiṭṭhanti.

But as the tonics dripped,
415

उन्दूरेहिपिun·dū·re·hi·pi विहाराvi·hā·rā ओकिण्णविकिण्णाo·kiṇ·ṇa·vi·kiṇ·ṇā होन्ति।hon·ti

Undūrehipi vihārā okiṇṇavikiṇṇā honti.

the dwellings became infested with rats.
416

मनुस्साma·nus·sā विहारचारिकंvi·hā·ra·cā·ri·kaṃ आहिण्डन्ताā·hiṇ·ḍan·tā पस्सित्वाpas·sit·vā उज्झायन्तिuj·jhā·yan·ti खिय्यन्तिkhiy·yan·ti विपाचेन्ति—vi·pā·cen·ti

Manussā vihāracārikaṁ āhiṇḍantā passitvā ujjhāyanti khiyyanti vipācenti—

When people walking about the dwellings noticed this, they complained and criticized them,
417

“अन्तोकोट्ठागारिकाan·to·koṭ·ṭhā·gā·ri·kā इमेi·me समणाsa·ma·ṇā सक्यपुत्तिया,sak·ya·put·ti·yā सेय्यथापिsey·ya·thā·pi राजाrā·jā मागधोmā·ga·dho सेनियोse·ni·yo बिम्बिसारो”ति।bim·bi·sā·ro

“antokoṭṭhāgārikā ime samaṇā sakyaputtiyā, seyyathāpi rājā māgadho seniyo bimbisāro”ti.

“These Sakyan monastics are hoarding goods indoors, just like King Seniya Bimbisāra of Magadha!”
418

अस्सोसुंas·so·suṃ खोkho भिक्खूbhik·khū तेसंte·saṃ मनुस्सानंma·nus·sā·naṃ उज्झायन्तानंuj·jhā·yan·tā·naṃ खिय्यन्तानंkhiy·yan·tā·naṃ विपाचेन्तानं।vi·pā·cen·tā·naṃ

Assosuṁ kho bhikkhū tesaṁ manussānaṁ ujjhāyantānaṁ khiyyantānaṁ vipācentānaṁ.

The monks heard the complaints of those people
419

येye तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū अप्पिच्छा,ap·pic·chā तेte उज्झायन्तिuj·jhā·yan·ti खिय्यन्तिkhiy·yan·ti विपाचेन्ति—vi·pā·cen·ti

Ye te bhikkhū appicchā, te ujjhāyanti khiyyanti vipācenti—

and the monks of few desires complained and criticized those monks,
420

“कथञ्हिka·thañ·hi नामnā·ma भिक्खूbhik·khū एवरूपायe·va·rū·pā·ya बाहुल्लायbā·hul·lā·ya चेतेस्सन्ती”ति।ce·tes·san·tī

“kathañhi nāma bhikkhū evarūpāya bāhullāya cetessantī”ti.

“How can these monks choose to live with such abundance?”
421

अथa·tha खोkho तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū तेte अनेकपरियायेनa·ne·ka·pa·ri·yā·ye·na विगरहित्वाvi·ga·ra·hit·vā भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुंā·ro·ce·suṃ …पे…pe

Atha kho te bhikkhū te anekapariyāyena vigarahitvā bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ …pe…

After rebuking those monks in many ways, they told the Buddha. Soon afterwards he had the Sangha gathered and questioned the monks:
422

“सच्चंsac·caṃ किर,ki·ra भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खूbhik·khū एवरूपायe·va·rū·pā·ya बाहुल्लायbā·hul·lā·ya चेतेन्ती”ति?ce·ten·tī

“saccaṁ kira, bhikkhave, bhikkhū evarūpāya bāhullāya cetentī”ti?

“Is it true, monks, that there are monks who live like this?”
423

“सच्चं,sac·caṃ भगवा”तिbha·ga·vā …पे…pe

“Saccaṁ, bhagavā”ti …pe…

“It’s true, sir.” …
424

विगरहित्वाvi·ga·ra·hit·vā धम्मिंdham·miṃ कथंka·thaṃ कत्वाkat·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

vigarahitvā dhammiṁ kathaṁ katvā bhikkhū āmantesi—

After rebuking them, the Buddha gave a teaching and addressed the monks:
425

“यानिyā·ni खोkho पनpa·na तानिtā·ni गिलानानंgi·lā·nā·naṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ पटिसायनीयानिpa·ṭi·sā·ya·nī·yā·ni भेसज्जानि,bhe·saj·jā·ni सेय्यथिदं—सप्पि,sey·ya·thi·daṃ नवनीतं,na·va·nī·taṃ तेलं,te·laṃ मधु,ma·dhu फाणितं,phā·ṇi·taṃ तानिtā·ni पटिग्गहेत्वाpa·ṭig·ga·het·vā सत्ताहपरमंsat·tā·ha·pa·ra·maṃ सन्निधिकारकंsan·ni·dhi·kā·ra·kaṃ परिभुञ्जितब्बानि।pa·ri·bhuñ·ji·tab·bā·ni तंtaṃ अतिक्कामयतोa·tik·kā·ma·ya·to यथाधम्मोya·thā·dham·mo कारेतब्बो”ति।kā·re·tab·bo

“yāni kho pana tāni gilānānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ paṭisāyanīyāni bhesajjāni, seyyathidaṁ—sappi, navanītaṁ, telaṁ, madhu, phāṇitaṁ, tāni paṭiggahetvā sattāhaparamaṁ sannidhikārakaṁ paribhuñjitabbāni. Taṁ atikkāmayato yathādhammo kāretabbo”ti.

“After being received, the tonics allowable for sick monks—that is, ghee, butter, oil, honey, and syrup—should be used from storage for at most seven days. If you use them longer than that, you should be dealt with according to the rule.”
426

भेसज्जानुञ्ञातभाणवारोbhe·saj·jā·nuñ·ñā·ta·bhā·ṇa·vā·ro निट्ठितोniṭ·ṭhi·to पठमो।pa·ṭha·mo

Bhesajjānuññātabhāṇavāro niṭṭhito paṭhamo.

The first section for recitation on allowable medicines is finished.
427

4। गुळादिअनुजाननgu·ḷā·di·a·nu·jā·na·na

4. Guḷādianujānana

4. The allowance for sugar, etc.
428

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā सावत्थियंsā·vat·thi·yaṃ यथाभिरन्तंya·thā·bhi·ran·taṃ विहरित्वाvi·ha·rit·vā येनye·na राजगहंrā·ja·ga·haṃ तेनte·na चारिकंcā·ri·kaṃ पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

Atha kho bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ yathābhirantaṁ viharitvā yena rājagahaṁ tena cārikaṁ pakkāmi.

When the Buddha had stayed at Sāvatthī for as long as he liked, he set out wandering toward Rājagaha.
429

अद्दसाad·da·sā खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā कङ्खारेवतोkaṅ·khā·re·va·to अन्तरामग्गेan·ta·rā·mag·ge गुळकरणं,gu·ḷa·ka·ra·ṇaṃ ओक्कमित्वाok·ka·mit·vā गुळेgu·ḷe पिट्ठम्पिpiṭ·ṭham·pi छारिकम्पिchā·ri·kam·pi पक्खिपन्ते,pak·khi·pan·te दिस्वान—dis·vā·na

Addasā kho āyasmā kaṅkhārevato antarāmagge guḷakaraṇaṁ, okkamitvā guḷe piṭṭhampi chārikampi pakkhipante, disvāna—

While they were traveling, Venerable Revata the Doubter saw a sugar factory. As he approached, he noticed they were mixing the sugar with flour and ash. He thought,
430

“अकप्पियोa·kap·pi·yo गुळोgu·ḷo सामिसो,sā·mi·so नna कप्पतिkap·pa·ti गुळोgu·ḷo विकालेvi·kā·le परिभुञ्जितुन्”ति—pa·ri·bhuñ·ji·tun

“akappiyo guḷo sāmiso, na kappati guḷo vikāle paribhuñjitun”ti—

“Sugar mixed with food is unallowable, and so it’s unallowable to eat sugar at the wrong time,”
431

कुक्कुच्चायन्तोkuk·kuc·cā·yan·to सपरिसोsa·pa·ri·so गुळंgu·ḷaṃ नna परिभुञ्जति।pa·ri·bhuñ·ja·ti

kukkuccāyanto sapariso guḷaṁ na paribhuñjati.

and being afraid of wrongdoing, he and his followers did not take sugar.
432

येपिस्सye·pis·sa सोतब्बंso·tab·baṃ मञ्ञन्ति,mañ·ñan·ti तेपिte·pi गुळंgu·ḷaṃ नna परिभुञ्जन्ति।pa·ri·bhuñ·jan·ti

Yepissa sotabbaṁ maññanti, tepi guḷaṁ na paribhuñjanti.

(Pāli only)
433

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

They told the Buddha.
434

“किमत्थाय,ki·mat·thā·ya भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve गुळेgu·ḷe पिट्ठम्पिpiṭ·ṭham·pi छारिकम्पिchā·ri·kam·pi पक्खिपन्ती”ति?pak·khi·pan·tī

“Kimatthāya, bhikkhave, guḷe piṭṭhampi chārikampi pakkhipantī”ti?

“Why are they adding flour and ash to the sugar?”
435

“थद्धत्थाय,thad·dhat·thā·ya भगवा”ति।bha·ga·vā

“Thaddhatthāya, bhagavā”ti.

“To harden it, sir.”
436

“सचे,sa·ce भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve थद्धत्थायthad·dhat·thā·ya गुळेgu·ḷe पिट्ठम्पिpiṭ·ṭham·pi छारिकम्पिchā·ri·kam·pi पक्खिपन्ति,pak·khi·pan·ti सोso चca गुळोत्वेवgu·ḷot·ve·va सङ्खंsaṅ·khaṃ गच्छति।gac·cha·ti

“Sace, bhikkhave, thaddhatthāya guḷe piṭṭhampi chārikampi pakkhipanti, so ca guḷotveva saṅkhaṁ gacchati.

“If they add flour or ash to sugar to harden it, it’s still considered sugar.
437

अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve यथासुखंya·thā·su·khaṃ गुळंgu·ḷaṃ परिभुञ्जितुन्”ति।pa·ri·bhuñ·ji·tun

Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, yathāsukhaṁ guḷaṁ paribhuñjitun”ti.

I allow you to eat as much sugar as you like.”
438

अद्दसाad·da·sā खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā कङ्खारेवतोkaṅ·khā·re·va·to अन्तरामग्गेan·ta·rā·mag·ge वच्चेvac·ce मुग्गंmug·gaṃ जातं,jā·taṃ पस्सित्वा—pas·sit·vā

Addasā kho āyasmā kaṅkhārevato antarāmagge vacce muggaṁ jātaṁ, passitvā—

While still traveling, Revata noticed mung beans sprouting from feces. He thought,
439

“अकप्पियाa·kap·pi·yā मुग्गा;mug·gā

“akappiyā muggā;

“Mung beans are unallowable.
440

पक्कापिpak·kā·pi मुग्गाmug·gā जायन्ती”ति—jā·yan·tī

pakkāpi muggā jāyantī”ti—

They sprout even after being digested,”
441

कुक्कुच्चायन्तोkuk·kuc·cā·yan·to सपरिसोsa·pa·ri·so मुग्गंmug·gaṃ नna परिभुञ्जति।pa·ri·bhuñ·ja·ti

kukkuccāyanto sapariso muggaṁ na paribhuñjati.

and being afraid of wrongdoing, he and his followers did not eat mung beans.
442

येपिस्सye·pis·sa सोतब्बंso·tab·baṃ मञ्ञन्ति,mañ·ñan·ti तेपिte·pi मुग्गंmug·gaṃ नna परिभुञ्जन्ति।pa·ri·bhuñ·jan·ti

Yepissa sotabbaṁ maññanti, tepi muggaṁ na paribhuñjanti.

(Pāli only)
443

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

They told the Buddha.
444

“सचे,sa·ce भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve पक्कापिpak·kā·pi मुग्गाmug·gā जायन्ति,jā·yan·ti अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve यथासुखंya·thā·su·khaṃ मुग्गंmug·gaṃ परिभुञ्जितुन्”ति।pa·ri·bhuñ·ji·tun

“Sace, bhikkhave, pakkāpi muggā jāyanti, anujānāmi, bhikkhave, yathāsukhaṁ muggaṁ paribhuñjitun”ti.

“Although mung beans may sprout after being digested, I allow you to eat as much of it as you like.”
445

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरस्सañ·ña·ta·ras·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no उदरवाताबाधोu·da·ra·vā·tā·bā·dho होति।ho·ti

Tena kho pana samayena aññatarassa bhikkhuno udaravātābādho hoti.

On one occasion a certain monk who had a stomachache
446

सोso लोणसोवीरकंlo·ṇa·so·vī·ra·kaṃ अपायि।a·pā·yi

So loṇasovīrakaṁ apāyi.

drank a salty purgative
447

तस्सtas·sa सोso उदरवाताबाधोu·da·ra·vā·tā·bā·dho पटिप्पस्सम्भि।pa·ṭip·pas·sam·bhi

Tassa so udaravātābādho paṭippassambhi.

and was cured.
448

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
449

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve गिलानस्सgi·lā·nas·sa लोणसोवीरकं;lo·ṇa·so·vī·ra·kaṃ

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, gilānassa loṇasovīrakaṁ;

“I allow salty purgatives when you’re sick.
450

अगिलानस्सa·gi·lā·nas·sa उदकसम्भिन्नंu·da·ka·sam·bhin·naṃ पानपरिभोगेनpā·na·pa·ri·bho·ge·na परिभुञ्जितुन्”ति।pa·ri·bhuñ·ji·tun

agilānassa udakasambhinnaṁ pānaparibhogena paribhuñjitun”ti.

If you’re not sick, I allow you to drink it mixed with water.”
451

5। अन्तोवुट्ठादिपटिक्खेपकथाan·to·vuṭ·ṭhā·di·pa·ṭik·khe·pa·ka·thā

5. Antovuṭṭhādipaṭikkhepakathā

5. Discussion of the prohibition against storing indoors, etc.
452

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā अनुपुब्बेनa·nu·pub·be·na चारिकंcā·ri·kaṃ चरमानोca·ra·mā·no येनye·na राजगहंrā·ja·ga·haṃ तदवसरि।ta·da·va·sa·ri तत्रtat·ra सुदंsu·daṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā राजगहेrā·ja·ga·he विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti वेळुवनेve·ḷu·va·ne कलन्दकनिवापे।ka·lan·da·ka·ni·vā·pe

Atha kho bhagavā anupubbena cārikaṁ caramāno yena rājagahaṁ tadavasari. Tatra sudaṁ bhagavā rājagahe viharati veḷuvane kalandakanivāpe.

Wandering on, the Buddha eventually arrived at Rājagaha where he stayed in the Bamboo Grove, the squirrel sanctuary.
453

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na भगवतोbha·ga·va·to उदरवाताबाधोu·da·ra·vā·tā·bā·dho होति।ho·ti

Tena kho pana samayena bhagavato udaravātābādho hoti.

Soon afterwards the Buddha had a stomachache.
454

अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā आनन्दो—“पुब्बेपिā·nan·do भगवतोbha·ga·va·to उदरवाताबाधोu·da·ra·vā·tā·bā·dho तेकटुलयागुयाte·ka·ṭu·la·yā·gu·yā फासुphā·su होती”ति—ho·tī

Atha kho āyasmā ānando—“pubbepi bhagavato udaravātābādho tekaṭulayāguyā phāsu hotī”ti—

Venerable Ānanda thought, “Previously, when the Buddha had a stomachache, he was comfortable after drinking the threefold pungent congee.”
455

सामंsā·maṃ तिलम्पि,ti·lam·pi तण्डुलम्पि,taṇ·ḍu·lam·pi मुग्गम्पिmug·gam·pi विञ्ञापेत्वा,viñ·ñā·pet·vā अन्तोan·to वासेत्वा,vā·set·vā अन्तोan·to सामंsā·maṃ पचित्वाpa·cit·vā भगवतोbha·ga·va·to उपनामेसि—u·pa·nā·me·si

sāmaṁ tilampi, taṇḍulampi, muggampi viññāpetvā, anto vāsetvā, anto sāmaṁ pacitvā bhagavato upanāmesi—

He then asked for sesame seeds, rice, and mung beans, stored them indoors, cooked them himself indoors, and brought them to the Buddha, saying,
456

“पिवतुpi·va·tu भगवाbha·ga·vā तेकटुलयागुन्”ति।te·ka·ṭu·la·yā·gun

“pivatu bhagavā tekaṭulayāgun”ti.

“Sir, please drink the threefold pungent congee.”
457

जानन्तापिjā·nan·tā·pi तथागताta·thā·ga·tā पुच्छन्ति,puc·chan·ti जानन्तापिjā·nan·tā·pi नna पुच्छन्ति;puc·chan·ti

Jānantāpi tathāgatā pucchanti, jānantāpi na pucchanti;

When Buddhas know what is going on, sometimes they ask and sometimes not.
458

कालंkā·laṃ विदित्वाvi·dit·vā पुच्छन्ति,puc·chan·ti कालंkā·laṃ विदित्वाvi·dit·vā नna पुच्छन्ति;puc·chan·ti

kālaṁ viditvā pucchanti, kālaṁ viditvā na pucchanti;

They know the right time to ask and when not to ask.
459

अत्थसंहितंat·tha·saṃ·hi·taṃ तथागताta·thā·ga·tā पुच्छन्ति,puc·chan·ti नोno अनत्थसंहितं।a·nat·tha·saṃ·hi·taṃ

atthasaṁhitaṁ tathāgatā pucchanti, no anatthasaṁhitaṁ.

Buddhas ask when it is beneficial, otherwise not,
460

अनत्थसंहितेa·nat·tha·saṃ·hi·te सेतुघातोse·tu·ghā·to तथागतानं।ta·thā·ga·tā·naṃ

Anatthasaṁhite setughāto tathāgatānaṁ.

for Buddhas are incapable of doing what is unbeneficial.
461

द्वीहिdvī·hi आकारेहिā·kā·re·hi बुद्धाbud·dhā भगवन्तोbha·ga·van·to भिक्खूbhik·khū पटिपुच्छन्ति—pa·ṭi·puc·chan·ti “धम्मंdham·maṃ वाvā देसेस्साम,de·ses·sā·ma सावकानंsā·va·kā·naṃ वाvā सिक्खापदंsik·khā·pa·daṃ पञ्ञपेस्सामा”ति।pañ·ña·pes·sā·mā

Dvīhi ākārehi buddhā bhagavanto bhikkhū paṭipucchanti— “dhammaṁ vā desessāma, sāvakānaṁ vā sikkhāpadaṁ paññapessāmā”ti.

Buddhas question the monks for two reasons: to give a teaching or to lay down a training rule.
462

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ आनन्दंā·nan·daṃ आमन्तेसि—“कुतायं,ā·man·te·si आनन्द,ā·nan·da यागू”ति?yā·gū

Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi—“kutāyaṁ, ānanda, yāgū”ti?

So he said to Ānanda, “Ānanda, where does this congee come from?”
463

अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā आनन्दोā·nan·do भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसि।ā·ro·ce·si

Atha kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesi.

Ānanda told him.
464

विगरहिvi·ga·ra·hi बुद्धोbud·dho भगवा—bha·ga·vā

Vigarahi buddho bhagavā—

The Buddha rebuked him,
465

“अननुच्छविकं,a·na·nuc·cha·vi·kaṃ आनन्द,ā·nan·da अननुलोमिकं,a·na·nu·lo·mi·kaṃ अप्पतिरूपं,ap·pa·ti·rū·paṃ अस्सामणकं,as·sā·ma·ṇa·kaṃ अकप्पियं,a·kap·pi·yaṃ अकरणीयं।a·ka·ra·ṇī·yaṃ

“ananucchavikaṁ, ānanda, ananulomikaṁ, appatirūpaṁ, assāmaṇakaṁ, akappiyaṁ, akaraṇīyaṁ.

“It’s not suitable, Ānanda, it’s not proper, it’s not worthy of a monastic, it’s not allowable, it’s not to be done.
466

कथञ्हिka·thañ·hi नामnā·ma त्वं,tvaṃ आनन्द,ā·nan·da एवरूपायe·va·rū·pā·ya बाहुल्लायbā·hul·lā·ya चेतेस्ससि।ce·tes·sa·si

Kathañhi nāma tvaṁ, ānanda, evarūpāya bāhullāya cetessasi.

How could you be so indulgent?
467

यदपि,ya·da·pi आनन्द,ā·nan·da अन्तोan·to वुट्ठंvuṭ·ṭhaṃ तदपिta·da·pi अकप्पियं;a·kap·pi·yaṃ

Yadapi, ānanda, anto vuṭṭhaṁ tadapi akappiyaṁ;

What’s been stored indoors in a monastery is unallowable;
468

यदपिya·da·pi अन्तोan·to पक्कं,pak·kaṃ तदपिta·da·pi अकप्पियं;a·kap·pi·yaṃ

yadapi anto pakkaṁ, tadapi akappiyaṁ;

what’s been cooked indoors in a monastery is unallowable;
469

यदपिya·da·pi सामंsā·maṃ पक्कं,pak·kaṃ तदपिta·da·pi अकप्पियं।a·kap·pi·yaṃ

yadapi sāmaṁ pakkaṁ, tadapi akappiyaṁ.

what’s been cooked by oneself is unallowable.
470

नेतं,ne·taṃ आनन्द,ā·nan·da अप्पसन्नानंap·pa·san·nā·naṃ वाvā पसादायpa·sā·dā·ya …पे…pe

Netaṁ, ānanda, appasannānaṁ vā pasādāya …pe…

This will affect people’s confidence …”
471

विगरहित्वाvi·ga·ra·hit·vā धम्मिंdham·miṃ कथंka·thaṃ कत्वाkat·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

vigarahitvā dhammiṁ kathaṁ katvā bhikkhū āmantesi—

After rebuking him, he gave a teaching and addressed the monks:
472

“न,na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अन्तोan·to वुट्ठं,vuṭ·ṭhaṃ अन्तोan·to पक्कं,pak·kaṃ सामंsā·maṃ पक्कंpak·kaṃ परिभुञ्जितब्बं।pa·ri·bhuñ·ji·tab·baṃ

“na, bhikkhave, anto vuṭṭhaṁ, anto pakkaṁ, sāmaṁ pakkaṁ paribhuñjitabbaṁ.

“You shouldn’t eat what’s been stored indoors in a monastery, what’s been cooked indoors in a monastery, or what you have cooked yourself.
473

योyo परिभुञ्जेय्य,pa·ri·bhuñ·jey·ya आपत्तिā·pat·ti दुक्कटस्स।duk·ka·ṭas·sa

Yo paribhuñjeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassa.

If you do, you commit an offense of wrong conduct.
474

अन्तोan·to चे,ce भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve वुट्ठं,vuṭ·ṭhaṃ अन्तोan·to पक्कं,pak·kaṃ सामंsā·maṃ पक्कंpak·kaṃ तञ्चेtañ·ce परिभुञ्जेय्य,pa·ri·bhuñ·jey·ya आपत्तिā·pat·ti तिण्णंtiṇ·ṇaṃ दुक्कटानं।duk·ka·ṭā·naṃ

Anto ce, bhikkhave, vuṭṭhaṁ, anto pakkaṁ, sāmaṁ pakkaṁ tañce paribhuñjeyya, āpatti tiṇṇaṁ dukkaṭānaṁ.

If you eat what’s been stored indoors in a monastery, cooked indoors in a monastery, and cooked by yourselves, you commit three offenses of wrong conduct.
475

अन्तोan·to चे,ce भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve वुट्ठं,vuṭ·ṭhaṃ अन्तोan·to पक्कं,pak·kaṃ अञ्ञेहिañ·ñe·hi पक्कं,pak·kaṃ तञ्चेtañ·ce परिभुञ्जेय्य,pa·ri·bhuñ·jey·ya आपत्तिā·pat·ti द्विन्नंdvin·naṃ दुक्कटानं।duk·ka·ṭā·naṃ

Anto ce, bhikkhave, vuṭṭhaṁ, anto pakkaṁ, aññehi pakkaṁ, tañce paribhuñjeyya, āpatti dvinnaṁ dukkaṭānaṁ.

If you eat what’s been stored indoors in a monastery, cooked indoors in a monastery, but cooked by others, you commit two offenses of wrong conduct.
476

अन्तोan·to चे,ce भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve वुट्ठं,vuṭ·ṭhaṃ बहिba·hi पक्कं,pak·kaṃ सामंsā·maṃ पक्कं,pak·kaṃ तञ्चेtañ·ce परिभुञ्जेय्य,pa·ri·bhuñ·jey·ya आपत्तिā·pat·ti द्विन्नंdvin·naṃ दुक्कटानं।duk·ka·ṭā·naṃ

Anto ce, bhikkhave, vuṭṭhaṁ, bahi pakkaṁ, sāmaṁ pakkaṁ, tañce paribhuñjeyya, āpatti dvinnaṁ dukkaṭānaṁ.

If you eat what’s been stored indoors in a monastery, but cooked outside, yet cooked by yourselves, you commit two offenses of wrong conduct.
477

बहिba·hi चे,ce भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve वुट्ठं,vuṭ·ṭhaṃ अन्तोan·to पक्कं,pak·kaṃ सामंsā·maṃ पक्कं,pak·kaṃ तञ्चेtañ·ce परिभुञ्जेय्य,pa·ri·bhuñ·jey·ya आपत्तिā·pat·ti द्विन्नंdvin·naṃ दुक्कटानं।duk·ka·ṭā·naṃ

Bahi ce, bhikkhave, vuṭṭhaṁ, anto pakkaṁ, sāmaṁ pakkaṁ, tañce paribhuñjeyya, āpatti dvinnaṁ dukkaṭānaṁ.

If you eat what’s been stored outside, but cooked indoors in a monastery, and cooked by yourselves, you commit two offenses of wrong conduct.
478

अन्तोan·to चे,ce भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve वुट्ठं,vuṭ·ṭhaṃ बहिba·hi पक्कं,pak·kaṃ अञ्ञेहिañ·ñe·hi पक्कं,pak·kaṃ तञ्चेtañ·ce परिभुञ्जेय्य,pa·ri·bhuñ·jey·ya आपत्तिā·pat·ti दुक्कटस्स।duk·ka·ṭas·sa

Anto ce, bhikkhave, vuṭṭhaṁ, bahi pakkaṁ, aññehi pakkaṁ, tañce paribhuñjeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassa.

If you eat what’s been stored indoors in a monastery, but cooked outside, and cooked by others, you commit one offense of wrong conduct.
479

बहिba·hi चे,ce भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve वुट्ठं,vuṭ·ṭhaṃ अन्तोan·to पक्कं,pak·kaṃ अञ्ञेहिañ·ñe·hi पक्कं,pak·kaṃ तञ्चेtañ·ce परिभुञ्जेय्य,pa·ri·bhuñ·jey·ya आपत्तिā·pat·ti दुक्कटस्स।duk·ka·ṭas·sa

Bahi ce, bhikkhave, vuṭṭhaṁ, anto pakkaṁ, aññehi pakkaṁ, tañce paribhuñjeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassa.

If you eat what’s been stored outside, but cooked indoors in a monastery, yet cooked by others, you commit one offense of wrong conduct.
480

बहिba·hi चे,ce भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve वुट्ठं,vuṭ·ṭhaṃ बहिba·hi पक्कं,pak·kaṃ सामंsā·maṃ पक्कं,pak·kaṃ तञ्चेtañ·ce परिभुञ्जेय्य,pa·ri·bhuñ·jey·ya आपत्तिā·pat·ti दुक्कटस्स।duk·ka·ṭas·sa

Bahi ce, bhikkhave, vuṭṭhaṁ, bahi pakkaṁ, sāmaṁ pakkaṁ, tañce paribhuñjeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassa.

If you eat what’s been stored outside, and cooked outside, but cooked by yourselves, you commit one offense of wrong conduct.
481

बहिba·hi चे,ce भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve वुट्ठं,vuṭ·ṭhaṃ बहिba·hi पक्कं,pak·kaṃ अञ्ञेहिañ·ñe·hi पक्कं,pak·kaṃ तञ्चेtañ·ce परिभुञ्जेय्य,pa·ri·bhuñ·jey·ya अनापत्ती”ति।a·nā·pat·tī

Bahi ce, bhikkhave, vuṭṭhaṁ, bahi pakkaṁ, aññehi pakkaṁ, tañce paribhuñjeyya, anāpattī”ti.

If you eat what’s been stored outside, and cooked outside, and cooked by others, there is no offense.”
482

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na भिक्खू—bhik·khū

Tena kho pana samayena bhikkhū—

When the monks heard
483

“भगवताbha·ga·va·tā सामंपाकोsā·maṃ·pā·ko पटिक्खित्तो”ति—pa·ṭik·khit·to

“bhagavatā sāmaṁpāko paṭikkhitto”ti—

that the Buddha had prohibited cooking,
484

पुनpu·na पाकेpā·ke कुक्कुच्चायन्ति।kuk·kuc·cā·yan·ti

puna pāke kukkuccāyanti.

being afraid of wrongdoing, they did not reheat.
485

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
486

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve पुनpu·na पाकंpā·kaṃ पचितुन्”ति।pa·ci·tun

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, puna pākaṁ pacitun”ti.

“I allow you to reheat what’s already been cooked.”
487

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na राजगहंrā·ja·ga·haṃ दुब्भिक्खंdub·bhik·khaṃ होति।ho·ti

Tena kho pana samayena rājagahaṁ dubbhikkhaṁ hoti.

At that time Rājagaha was short of food.
488

मनुस्साma·nus·sā लोणम्पि,lo·ṇam·pi तेलम्पि,te·lam·pi तण्डुलम्पि,taṇ·ḍu·lam·pi खादनीयम्पिkhā·da·nī·yam·pi आरामंā·rā·maṃ आहरन्ति।ā·ha·ran·ti

Manussā loṇampi, telampi, taṇḍulampi, khādanīyampi ārāmaṁ āharanti.

People brought salt, oil, rice, and fresh food to the monastery.
489

तानिtā·ni भिक्खूbhik·khū बहिba·hi वासेन्ति;vā·sen·ti

Tāni bhikkhū bahi vāsenti;

The monks stored it outdoors,
490

उक्कपिण्डकापिuk·ka·piṇ·ḍa·kā·pi खादन्ति,khā·dan·ti चोरापिco·rā·pi हरन्ति।ha·ran·ti

ukkapiṇḍakāpi khādanti, corāpi haranti.

but it was eaten by vermin and stolen by thieves.
491

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
492

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अन्तोan·to वासेतुन्”ति।vā·se·tun

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, anto vāsetun”ti.

“I allow you to store food indoors.”
493

अन्तोan·to वासेत्वाvā·set·vā बहिba·hi पाचेन्ति।pā·cen·ti

Anto vāsetvā bahi pācenti.

The monks stored it indoors, but it was cooked outside.
494

दमकाda·ma·kā परिवारेन्ति।pa·ri·vā·ren·ti

Damakā parivārenti.

They were surrounded by scrap-eaters,
495

भिक्खूbhik·khū अविस्सट्ठाa·vis·saṭ·ṭhā परिभुञ्जन्ति।pa·ri·bhuñ·jan·ti

Bhikkhū avissaṭṭhā paribhuñjanti.

and the monks ate in fear.
496

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
497

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अन्तोan·to पचितुन्”ति।pa·ci·tun

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, anto pacitun”ti.

“I allow cooking indoors.”
498

दुब्भिक्खेdub·bhik·khe कप्पियकारकाkap·pi·ya·kā·ra·kā बहुतरंba·hu·ta·raṃ हरन्ति,ha·ran·ti अप्पतरंap·pa·ta·raṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ देन्ति।den·ti

Dubbhikkhe kappiyakārakā bahutaraṁ haranti, appataraṁ bhikkhūnaṁ denti.

Because of the famine, the attendants took more for themselves and gave less to the monks.
499

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
500

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सामंsā·maṃ पचितुं।pa·ci·tuṃ

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, sāmaṁ pacituṁ.

“I allow you to cook.
501

अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अन्तोan·to वुट्ठं,vuṭ·ṭhaṃ अन्तोan·to पक्कं,pak·kaṃ सामंsā·maṃ पक्कन्”ति।pak·kan

Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, anto vuṭṭhaṁ, anto pakkaṁ, sāmaṁ pakkan”ti.

I allow you to store food indoors in a monastery, to cook indoors in a monastery, and to cook yourselves.”
502

6। उग्गहितपटिग्गहणug·ga·hi·ta·pa·ṭig·ga·ha·ṇa

6. Uggahitapaṭiggahaṇa

6. Receiving what has been picked up
503

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na सम्बहुलाsam·ba·hu·lā भिक्खूbhik·khū कासीसुkā·sī·su वस्संवुट्ठाvas·saṃ·vuṭ·ṭhā राजगहंrā·ja·ga·haṃ गच्छन्ताgac·chan·tā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ दस्सनायdas·sa·nā·ya अन्तरामग्गेan·ta·rā·mag·ge नna लभिंसुla·bhiṃ·su लूखस्सlū·khas·sa वाvā पणीतस्सpa·ṇī·tas·sa वाvā भोजनस्सbho·ja·nas·sa यावदत्थंyā·va·dat·thaṃ पारिपूरिं;pā·ri·pū·riṃ

Tena kho pana samayena sambahulā bhikkhū kāsīsu vassaṁvuṭṭhā rājagahaṁ gacchantā bhagavantaṁ dassanāya antarāmagge na labhiṁsu lūkhassa vā paṇītassa vā bhojanassa yāvadatthaṁ pāripūriṁ;

On one occasion a number of monks who had completed the rainy-season residence in Kāsi were traveling to Rājagaha to visit the Buddha. While on their way, they did not receive sufficient food, whether fine or coarse.
504

बहुञ्चba·huñ·ca फलखादनीयंpha·la·khā·da·nī·yaṃ अहोसि;a·ho·si

bahuñca phalakhādanīyaṁ ahosi;

Yet there was much fruit,
505

कप्पियकारकोkap·pi·ya·kā·ra·ko चca नna अहोसि।a·ho·si

kappiyakārako ca na ahosi.

but no attendant to offer it.
506

अथa·tha खोkho तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū किलन्तरूपाki·lan·ta·rū·pā येनye·na राजगहंrā·ja·ga·haṃ वेळुवनंve·ḷu·va·naṃ कलन्दकनिवापो,ka·lan·da·ka·ni·vā·po येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमिंसु,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·miṃ·su उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदिंसु।ni·sī·diṃ·su

Atha kho te bhikkhū kilantarūpā yena rājagahaṁ veḷuvanaṁ kalandakanivāpo, yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu.

When the monks arrived at Rājagaha, they were exhausted. They went to the Bamboo Grove, approached the Buddha, bowed, and sat down.
507

आचिण्णंā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ खोkho पनेतंpa·ne·taṃ बुद्धानंbud·dhā·naṃ भगवन्तानंbha·ga·van·tā·naṃ आगन्तुकेहिā·gan·tu·ke·hi भिक्खूहिbhik·khū·hi सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ पटिसम्मोदितुं।pa·ṭi·sam·mo·di·tuṃ

Āciṇṇaṁ kho panetaṁ buddhānaṁ bhagavantānaṁ āgantukehi bhikkhūhi saddhiṁ paṭisammodituṁ.

Since it is the custom for Buddhas to greet newly-arrived monks,
508

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

Atha kho bhagavā te bhikkhū etadavoca—

he said to them,
509

“कच्चि,kac·ci भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve खमनीयं,kha·ma·nī·yaṃ कच्चिkac·ci यापनीयं,yā·pa·nī·yaṃ

“kacci, bhikkhave, khamanīyaṁ, kacci yāpanīyaṁ,

“I hope you’re keeping well, monks, I hope you’re getting by?
510

कच्चित्थkac·cit·tha अप्पकिलमथेनap·pa·ki·la·ma·the·na अद्धानंad·dhā·naṃ आगता;ā·ga·tā

kaccittha appakilamathena addhānaṁ āgatā;

I hope you’re not tired from traveling?
511

कुतोku·to चca तुम्हे,tum·he भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve आगच्छथा”ति?ā·gac·cha·thā

kuto ca tumhe, bhikkhave, āgacchathā”ti?

And where have you come from?”
512

“खमनीयं,kha·ma·nī·yaṃ भगवा,bha·ga·vā यापनीयं,yā·pa·nī·yaṃ भगवा।bha·ga·vā

“Khamanīyaṁ, bhagavā, yāpanīyaṁ, bhagavā.

“We’re keeping well, sir, we’re getting by,”
513

इधi·dha मयं,ma·yaṃ भन्ते,bhan·te कासीसुkā·sī·su वस्संवुट्ठाvas·saṃ·vuṭ·ṭhā राजगहंrā·ja·ga·haṃ आगच्छन्ताā·gac·chan·tā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ दस्सनायdas·sa·nā·ya अन्तरामग्गेan·ta·rā·mag·ge नna लभिम्हाla·bhim·hā लूखस्सlū·khas·sa वाvā पणीतस्सpa·ṇī·tas·sa वाvā भोजनस्सbho·ja·nas·sa यावदत्थंyā·va·dat·thaṃ पारिपूरिं;pā·ri·pū·riṃ

Idha mayaṁ, bhante, kāsīsu vassaṁvuṭṭhā rājagahaṁ āgacchantā bhagavantaṁ dassanāya antarāmagge na labhimhā lūkhassa vā paṇītassa vā bhojanassa yāvadatthaṁ pāripūriṁ;

and they told him what had happened.
514

बहुञ्चba·huñ·ca फलखादनीयंpha·la·khā·da·nī·yaṃ अहोसि;a·ho·si

bahuñca phalakhādanīyaṁ ahosi;

(Pāli only)
515

कप्पियकारकोkap·pi·ya·kā·ra·ko चca नna अहोसि;a·ho·si

kappiyakārako ca na ahosi;

(Pāli only)
516

तेनte·na मयंma·yaṃ किलन्तरूपाki·lan·ta·rū·pā अद्धानंad·dhā·naṃ आगता”ति।ā·ga·tā

tena mayaṁ kilantarūpā addhānaṁ āgatā”ti.

(Pāli only)
517

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ निदानेni·dā·ne एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ पकरणेpa·ka·ra·ṇe धम्मिंdham·miṃ कथंka·thaṃ कत्वाkat·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

Atha kho bhagavā etasmiṁ nidāne etasmiṁ pakaraṇe dhammiṁ kathaṁ katvā bhikkhū āmantesi—

Soon afterwards the Buddha gave a teaching and addressed the monks:
518

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve यत्थyat·tha फलखादनीयंpha·la·khā·da·nī·yaṃ पस्सति,pas·sa·ti कप्पियकारकोkap·pi·ya·kā·ra·ko चca नna होति,ho·ti सामंsā·maṃ गहेत्वा,ga·het·vā हरित्वा,ha·rit·vā कप्पियकारकेkap·pi·ya·kā·ra·ke पस्सित्वा,pas·sit·vā भूमियंbhū·mi·yaṃ निक्खिपित्वा,nik·khi·pit·vā पटिग्गहापेत्वाpa·ṭig·ga·hā·pet·vā परिभुञ्जितुं।pa·ri·bhuñ·ji·tuṃ

“anujānāmi, bhikkhave, yattha phalakhādanīyaṁ passati, kappiyakārako ca na hoti, sāmaṁ gahetvā, haritvā, kappiyakārake passitvā, bhūmiyaṁ nikkhipitvā, paṭiggahāpetvā paribhuñjituṁ.

“If there is no attendant, but you see fruit, I allow you to pick it up yourself. You should then carry it until you see an attendant, put it on the ground, and have it received. You may then eat it.
519

अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve उग्गहितंug·ga·hi·taṃ पटिग्गहितुन्”ति।pa·ṭig·ga·hi·tun

Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, uggahitaṁ paṭiggahitun”ti.

I allow you to receive what you have picked up.”
520

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरस्सañ·ña·ta·ras·sa ब्राह्मणस्सbrāh·ma·ṇas·sa नवाna·vā चca तिलाti·lā नवञ्चna·vañ·ca मधुma·dhu उप्पन्नाup·pan·nā होन्ति।hon·ti

Tena kho pana samayena aññatarassa brāhmaṇassa navā ca tilā navañca madhu uppannā honti.

On one occasion a certain brahmin had obtained fresh sesame seed and fresh honey.
521

अथa·tha खोkho तस्सtas·sa ब्राह्मणस्सbrāh·ma·ṇas·sa एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

Atha kho tassa brāhmaṇassa etadahosi—

He thought,
522

“यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ नवेna·ve चca तिलेti·le नवञ्चna·vañ·ca मधुंma·dhuṃ बुद्धप्पमुखस्सbud·dhap·pa·mu·khas·sa भिक्खुसङ्घस्सbhik·khu·saṅ·ghas·sa ददेय्यन्”ति।da·dey·yan

“yannūnāhaṁ nave ca tile navañca madhuṁ buddhappamukhassa bhikkhusaṅghassa dadeyyan”ti.

“Why don’t I give this to the Sangha of monks headed by the Buddha?”
523

अथa·tha खोkho सोso ब्राह्मणोbrāh·ma·ṇo येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवताbha·ga·va·tā सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ पटिसम्मोदि,pa·ṭi·sam·mo·di सम्मोदनीयंsam·mo·da·nī·yaṃ कथंka·thaṃ सारणीयंsā·ra·ṇī·yaṃ वीतिसारेत्वाvī·ti·sā·ret·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ अट्ठासि।aṭ·ṭhā·si

Atha kho so brāhmaṇo yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavatā saddhiṁ paṭisammodi, sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi.

He then went to the Buddha, exchanged pleasantries with him,
524

एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ ठितोṭhi·to खोkho सोso ब्राह्मणोbrāh·ma·ṇo भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

Ekamantaṁ ṭhito kho so brāhmaṇo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

and said,
525

“अधिवासेतुa·dhi·vā·se·tu मेme भवंbha·vaṃ गोतमोgo·ta·mo स्वातनायsvā·ta·nā·ya भत्तं,bhat·taṃ सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ भिक्खुसङ्घेना”ति।bhik·khu·saṅ·ghe·nā

“adhivāsetu me bhavaṁ gotamo svātanāya bhattaṁ, saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghenā”ti.

“Please accept tomorrow’s meal from me together with the Sangha of monks.”
526

अधिवासेसिa·dhi·vā·se·si भगवाbha·ga·vā तुण्हीभावेन।tuṇ·hī·bhā·ve·na

Adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvena.

The Buddha consented by remaining silent.
527

अथa·tha खोkho सोso ब्राह्मणोbrāh·ma·ṇo भगवतोbha·ga·va·to अधिवासनंa·dhi·vā·sa·naṃ विदित्वाvi·dit·vā पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

Atha kho so brāhmaṇo bhagavato adhivāsanaṁ viditvā pakkāmi.

Knowing that the Buddha had consented, the brahmin left.
528

अथa·tha खोkho सोso ब्राह्मणोbrāh·ma·ṇo तस्साtas·sā रत्तियाrat·ti·yā अच्चयेनac·ca·ye·na पणीतंpa·ṇī·taṃ खादनीयंkhā·da·nī·yaṃ भोजनीयंbho·ja·nī·yaṃ पटियादापेत्वाpa·ṭi·yā·dā·pet·vā भगवतोbha·ga·va·to कालंkā·laṃ आरोचापेसि—ā·ro·cā·pe·si

Atha kho so brāhmaṇo tassā rattiyā accayena paṇītaṁ khādanīyaṁ bhojanīyaṁ paṭiyādāpetvā bhagavato kālaṁ ārocāpesi—

The following morning that brahmin had various kinds of fine foods prepared. He then had the Buddha informed
529

“कालो,kā·lo भोbho गोतम,go·ta·ma निट्ठितंniṭ·ṭhi·taṃ भत्तन्”ति।bhat·tan

“kālo, bho gotama, niṭṭhitaṁ bhattan”ti.

that the meal was ready.
530

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā पुब्बण्हसमयंpub·baṇ·ha·sa·ma·yaṃ निवासेत्वाni·vā·set·vā पत्तचीवरमादायpat·ta·cī·va·ra·mā·dā·ya येनye·na तस्सtas·sa ब्राह्मणस्सbrāh·ma·ṇas·sa निवेसनंni·ve·sa·naṃ तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā पञ्ञत्तेpañ·ñat·te आसनेā·sa·ne निसीदि,ni·sī·di सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ भिक्खुसङ्घेन।bhik·khu·saṅ·ghe·na

Atha kho bhagavā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya yena tassa brāhmaṇassa nivesanaṁ tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi, saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghena.

The Buddha robed up, took his bowl and robe, and went to that brahmin’s house where he sat down on the prepared seat.
531

अथa·tha खोkho सोso ब्राह्मणोbrāh·ma·ṇo बुद्धप्पमुखंbud·dhap·pa·mu·khaṃ भिक्खुसङ्घंbhik·khu·saṅ·ghaṃ पणीतेनpa·ṇī·te·na खादनीयेनkhā·da·nī·ye·na भोजनीयेनbho·ja·nī·ye·na सहत्थाsa·hat·thā सन्तप्पेत्वाsan·tap·pet·vā सम्पवारेत्वाsam·pa·vā·ret·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ भुत्ताविंbhut·tā·viṃ ओनीतपत्तपाणिंo·nī·ta·pat·ta·pā·ṇiṃ एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di

Atha kho so brāhmaṇo buddhappamukhaṁ bhikkhusaṅghaṁ paṇītena khādanīyena bhojanīyena sahatthā santappetvā sampavāretvā bhagavantaṁ bhuttāviṁ onītapattapāṇiṁ ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

That brahmin personally served various kinds of fine foods to the Sangha of monks headed by the Buddha. When the Buddha had finished his meal, the brahmin sat down to one side.
532

एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नंni·sin·naṃ खोkho तंtaṃ ब्राह्मणंbrāh·ma·ṇaṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā धम्मियाdham·mi·yā कथायka·thā·ya सन्दस्सेत्वा,san·das·set·vā समादपेत्वा,sa·mā·da·pet·vā समुत्तेजेत्वा,sa·mut·te·jet·vā सम्पहंसेत्वाsam·pa·haṃ·set·vā उट्ठायासनाuṭ·ṭhā·yā·sa·nā पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho taṁ brāhmaṇaṁ bhagavā dhammiyā kathāya sandassetvā, samādapetvā, samuttejetvā, sampahaṁsetvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmi.

The Buddha then instructed, inspired, and gladdened him with a teaching, after which he got up and left.
533

अथa·tha खोkho तस्सtas·sa ब्राह्मणस्सbrāh·ma·ṇas·sa अचिरपक्कन्तस्सa·ci·ra·pak·kan·tas·sa भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

Atha kho tassa brāhmaṇassa acirapakkantassa bhagavato etadahosi—

Soon after the Buddha had left, that brahmin thought,
534

“येसंye·saṃ खोkho मयाma·yā अत्थायat·thā·ya बुद्धप्पमुखोbud·dhap·pa·mu·kho भिक्खुसङ्घोbhik·khu·saṅ·gho निमन्तितो,ni·man·ti·to ‘नवेna·ve चca तिलेti·le नवञ्चna·vañ·ca मधुंma·dhuṃ दस्सामी’ति,das·sā·mī तेte मयाma·yā पमुट्ठाpa·muṭ·ṭhā दातुं।dā·tuṃ

“yesaṁ kho mayā atthāya buddhappamukho bhikkhusaṅgho nimantito, ‘nave ca tile navañca madhuṁ dassāmī’ti, te mayā pamuṭṭhā dātuṁ.

“I invited the Sangha of monks headed by the Buddha to give them the fresh sesame seed and honey, but I forgot.
535

यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ नवेna·ve चca तिलेti·le नवञ्चna·vañ·ca मधुंma·dhuṃ कोलम्बेहिko·lam·be·hi चca घटेहिgha·ṭe·hi चca आरामंā·rā·maṃ हरापेय्यन्”ति।ha·rā·pey·yan

Yannūnāhaṁ nave ca tile navañca madhuṁ kolambehi ca ghaṭehi ca ārāmaṁ harāpeyyan”ti.

Why don’t I take the sesame seed and honey to the monastery in basins and waterpots?”
536

अथa·tha खोkho सोso ब्राह्मणोbrāh·ma·ṇo नवेna·ve चca तिलेti·le नवञ्चna·vañ·ca मधुंma·dhuṃ कोलम्बेहिko·lam·be·hi चca घटेहिgha·ṭe·hi चca आरामंā·rā·maṃ हरापेत्वाha·rā·pet·vā येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ अट्ठासि।aṭ·ṭhā·si

Atha kho so brāhmaṇo nave ca tile navañca madhuṁ kolambehi ca ghaṭehi ca ārāmaṁ harāpetvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi.

And he did just that. He then went up to the Buddha
537

एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ ठितोṭhi·to खोkho सोso ब्राह्मणोbrāh·ma·ṇo भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

Ekamantaṁ ṭhito kho so brāhmaṇo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

and said,
538

“येसंye·saṃ खोkho मया,ma·yā भोbho गोतम,go·ta·ma अत्थायat·thā·ya बुद्धप्पमुखोbud·dhap·pa·mu·kho भिक्खुसङ्घोbhik·khu·saṅ·gho निमन्तितो,ni·man·ti·to ‘नवेna·ve चca तिलेti·le नवञ्चna·vañ·ca मधुंma·dhuṃ दस्सामी’ति,das·sā·mī तेte मयाma·yā पमुट्ठाpa·muṭ·ṭhā दातुं।dā·tuṃ

“yesaṁ kho mayā, bho gotama, atthāya buddhappamukho bhikkhusaṅgho nimantito, ‘nave ca tile navañca madhuṁ dassāmī’ti, te mayā pamuṭṭhā dātuṁ.

“When I invited you for a meal, I forgot to give you these fresh sesame seeds and this honey.
539

पटिग्गण्हातुpa·ṭig·gaṇ·hā·tu मेme भवंbha·vaṃ गोतमोgo·ta·mo नवेna·ve चca तिलेti·le नवञ्चna·vañ·ca मधुन्”ति।ma·dhun

Paṭiggaṇhātu me bhavaṁ gotamo nave ca tile navañca madhun”ti.

Please accept it.”
540

“तेनte·na हि,hi ब्राह्मण,brāh·ma·ṇa भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ देही”ति।de·hī

“Tena hi, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhūnaṁ dehī”ti.

“Well then, brahmin, give it to the monks.”
541

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na भिक्खूbhik·khū दुब्भिक्खेdub·bhik·khe अप्पमत्तकेपिap·pa·mat·ta·ke·pi पवारेन्ति,pa·vā·ren·ti पटिसङ्खापिpa·ṭi·saṅ·khā·pi पटिक्खिपन्ति,pa·ṭik·khi·pan·ti

Tena kho pana samayena bhikkhū dubbhikkhe appamattakepi pavārenti, paṭisaṅkhāpi paṭikkhipanti,

At this time, food was scarce, and the monks were refusing invitations to eat more even after taking just a little. After reflection, they were even declining altogether.
542

सब्बोsab·bo चca सङ्घोsaṅ·gho पवारितोpa·vā·ri·to होति।ho·ti भिक्खूbhik·khū कुक्कुच्चायन्ताkuk·kuc·cā·yan·tā नna पटिग्गण्हन्ति।pa·ṭig·gaṇ·han·ti

sabbo ca saṅgho pavārito hoti. Bhikkhū kukkuccāyantā na paṭiggaṇhanti.

And so now that the whole Sangha was being invited, being afraid of wrongdoing, they did not accept.
543

“पटिग्गण्हथ,pa·ṭig·gaṇ·ha·tha भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve परिभुञ्जथ।pa·ri·bhuñ·ja·tha

“Paṭiggaṇhatha, bhikkhave, paribhuñjatha.

“Accept, monks, and eat.
544

अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve ततोta·to नीहटंnī·ha·ṭaṃ भुत्ताविनाbhut·tā·vi·nā पवारितेनpa·vā·ri·te·na अनतिरित्तंa·na·ti·rit·taṃ परिभुञ्जितुन्”ति।pa·ri·bhuñ·ji·tun

Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, tato nīhaṭaṁ bhuttāvinā pavāritena anatirittaṁ paribhuñjitun”ti.

I allow one who has finished his meal and refused an invitation to eat more to eat non-leftovers that have been brought out.”
545

7। पटिग्गहितादिअनुजाननpa·ṭig·ga·hi·tā·di·a·nu·jā·na·na

7. Paṭiggahitādianujānana

7. The allowance for what has been received, etc.
546

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to उपनन्दस्सu·pa·nan·das·sa सक्यपुत्तस्सsak·ya·put·tas·sa उपट्ठाककुलंu·paṭ·ṭhā·ka·ku·laṃ सङ्घस्सत्थायsaṅ·ghas·sat·thā·ya खादनीयंkhā·da·nī·yaṃ पाहेसि—pā·he·si

Tena kho pana samayena āyasmato upanandassa sakyaputtassa upaṭṭhākakulaṁ saṅghassatthāya khādanīyaṁ pāhesi—

On one occasion a family who was supporting Venerable Upananda the Sakyan sent fresh food to the Sangha, saying,
547

“अय्यस्सay·yas·sa उपनन्दस्सu·pa·nan·das·sa दस्सेत्वाdas·set·vā सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa दातब्बन्”ति।dā·tab·ban

“ayyassa upanandassa dassetvā saṅghassa dātabban”ti.

“After showing it to Venerable Upananda, it’s to be given to the Sangha.”
548

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na आयस्माā·yas·mā उपनन्दोu·pa·nan·do सक्यपुत्तोsak·ya·put·to गामंgā·maṃ पिण्डायpiṇ·ḍā·ya पविट्ठोpa·viṭ·ṭho होति।ho·ti

Tena kho pana samayena āyasmā upanando sakyaputto gāmaṁ piṇḍāya paviṭṭho hoti.

Just then Upananda had gone to the village for alms.
549

अथa·tha खोkho तेte मनुस्साma·nus·sā आरामंā·rā·maṃ गन्त्वाgan·tvā भिक्खूbhik·khū पुच्छिंसु—puc·chiṃ·su

Atha kho te manussā ārāmaṁ gantvā bhikkhū pucchiṁsu—

When those people arrived at the monastery, they asked for Upananda
550

“कहं,ka·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te अय्योay·yo उपनन्दो”ति?u·pa·nan·do

“kahaṁ, bhante, ayyo upanando”ti?

(Pāli only)
551

“एसावुसो,e·sā·vu·so आयस्माā·yas·mā उपनन्दोu·pa·nan·do सक्यपुत्तोsak·ya·put·to गामंgā·maṃ पिण्डायpiṇ·ḍā·ya पविट्ठो”ति।pa·viṭ·ṭho

“Esāvuso, āyasmā upanando sakyaputto gāmaṁ piṇḍāya paviṭṭho”ti.

and were told where he was.
552

“इदं,i·daṃ भन्ते,bhan·te खादनीयंkhā·da·nī·yaṃ अय्यस्सay·yas·sa उपनन्दस्सu·pa·nan·das·sa दस्सेत्वाdas·set·vā सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa दातब्बन्”ति।dā·tab·ban

“Idaṁ, bhante, khādanīyaṁ ayyassa upanandassa dassetvā saṅghassa dātabban”ti.

They said, “Venerables, after showing it to Venerable Upananda, this fresh food is to be given to the Sangha.”
553

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

The monks told the Buddha. He said,
554

“तेनte·na हि,hi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve पटिग्गहेत्वाpa·ṭig·ga·het·vā निक्खिपथnik·khi·pa·tha यावyā·va उपनन्दोu·pa·nan·do आगच्छती”ति।ā·gac·cha·tī

“Tena hi, bhikkhave, paṭiggahetvā nikkhipatha yāva upanando āgacchatī”ti.

“Well then, receive it and put it aside until Upananda returns.”
555

अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā उपनन्दोu·pa·nan·do सक्यपुत्तोsak·ya·put·to पुरेभत्तंpu·re·bhat·taṃ कुलानिku·lā·ni पयिरुपासित्वाpa·yi·ru·pā·sit·vā दिवाdi·vā आगच्छति।ā·gac·cha·ti

Atha kho āyasmā upanando sakyaputto purebhattaṁ kulāni payirupāsitvā divā āgacchati.

But because Upananda visited families before eating, he returned late to the monastery.
556

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na भिक्खूbhik·khū दुब्भिक्खेdub·bhik·khe अप्पमत्तकेपिap·pa·mat·ta·ke·pi पवारेन्ति,pa·vā·ren·ti पटिसङ्खापिpa·ṭi·saṅ·khā·pi पटिक्खिपन्ति,pa·ṭik·khi·pan·ti सब्बोsab·bo चca सङ्घोsaṅ·gho पवारितोpa·vā·ri·to होति।ho·ti

Tena kho pana samayena bhikkhū dubbhikkhe appamattakepi pavārenti, paṭisaṅkhāpi paṭikkhipanti, sabbo ca saṅgho pavārito hoti.

At this time, food was scarce, and the monks were refusing invitations to eat more even after taking just a little. After reflection, they were even declining altogether. And so now that the whole Sangha was being invited,
557

भिक्खूbhik·khū कुक्कुच्चायन्ताkuk·kuc·cā·yan·tā नna पटिग्गण्हन्ति।pa·ṭig·gaṇ·han·ti

Bhikkhū kukkuccāyantā na paṭiggaṇhanti.

being afraid of wrongdoing, they did not accept.
558

“पटिग्गण्हथ,pa·ṭig·gaṇ·ha·tha भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve परिभुञ्जथ।pa·ri·bhuñ·ja·tha

“Paṭiggaṇhatha, bhikkhave, paribhuñjatha.

“Accept, monks, and eat.
559

अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve पुरेभत्तंpu·re·bhat·taṃ पटिग्गहितंpa·ṭig·ga·hi·taṃ भुत्ताविनाbhut·tā·vi·nā पवारितेनpa·vā·ri·te·na अनतिरित्तंa·na·ti·rit·taṃ परिभुञ्जितुन्”ति।pa·ri·bhuñ·ji·tun

Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, purebhattaṁ paṭiggahitaṁ bhuttāvinā pavāritena anatirittaṁ paribhuñjitun”ti.

I allow one who has finished his meal and refused an invitation to eat more to eat non-leftovers that were received before the meal.”
560

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā राजगहेrā·ja·ga·he यथाभिरन्तंya·thā·bhi·ran·taṃ विहरित्वाvi·ha·rit·vā येनye·na सावत्थिsā·vat·thi तेनte·na चारिकंcā·ri·kaṃ पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

Atha kho bhagavā rājagahe yathābhirantaṁ viharitvā yena sāvatthi tena cārikaṁ pakkāmi.

When the Buddha had stayed at Rājagaha for as long as he liked, he set out wandering toward Sāvatthī.
561

अनुपुब्बेनa·nu·pub·be·na चारिकंcā·ri·kaṃ चरमानोca·ra·mā·no येनye·na सावत्थिsā·vat·thi तदवसरि।ta·da·va·sa·ri

Anupubbena cārikaṁ caramāno yena sāvatthi tadavasari.

When he eventually arrived,
562

तत्रtat·ra सुदंsu·daṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā सावत्थियंsā·vat·thi·yaṃ विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti जेतवनेje·ta·va·ne अनाथपिण्डिकस्सa·nā·tha·piṇ·ḍi·kas·sa आरामे।ā·rā·me

Tatra sudaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme.

he stayed in the Jeta Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s Monastery.
563

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सारिपुत्तस्सsā·ri·put·tas·sa कायडाहाबाधोkā·ya·ḍā·hā·bā·dho होति।ho·ti

Tena kho pana samayena āyasmato sāriputtassa kāyaḍāhābādho hoti.

At that time Venerable Sāriputta had a fever.
564

अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā महामोग्गल्लानोma·hā·mog·gal·lā·no येनायस्माye·nā·yas·mā सारिपुत्तोsā·ri·put·to तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ सारिपुत्तंsā·ri·put·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

Atha kho āyasmā mahāmoggallāno yenāyasmā sāriputto tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ sāriputtaṁ etadavoca—

Venerable Mahāmoggallāna went to him and asked,
565

“पुब्बेpub·be ते,te आवुसोā·vu·so सारिपुत्त,sā·ri·put·ta कायडाहाबाधोkā·ya·ḍā·hā·bā·dho केनke·na फासुphā·su होती”ति?ho·tī

“pubbe te, āvuso sāriputta, kāyaḍāhābādho kena phāsu hotī”ti?

“When you previously had a fever, Sāriputta, how did you get better?”
566

“भिसेहिbhi·se·hi चca मे,me आवुसो,ā·vu·so मुळालिकाहिmu·ḷā·li·kā·hi चा”ति।cā

“Bhisehi ca me, āvuso, muḷālikāhi cā”ti.

“I had lotus roots and tubers.”
567

अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā महामोग्गल्लानोma·hā·mog·gal·lā·no सेय्यथापिsey·ya·thā·pi नामnā·ma बलवाba·la·vā पुरिसोpu·ri·so समिञ्जितंsa·miñ·ji·taṃ वाvā बाहंbā·haṃ पसारेय्य,pa·sā·rey·ya पसारितंpa·sā·ri·taṃ वाvā बाहंbā·haṃ समिञ्जेय्य;sa·miñ·jey·ya एवमेवe·va·me·va जेतवनेje·ta·va·ne अन्तरहितोan·ta·ra·hi·to मन्दाकिनियाman·dā·ki·ni·yā पोक्खरणियाpok·kha·ra·ṇi·yā तीरेtī·re पातुरहोसि।pā·tu·ra·ho·si

Atha kho āyasmā mahāmoggallāno seyyathāpi nāma balavā puriso samiñjitaṁ vā bāhaṁ pasāreyya, pasāritaṁ vā bāhaṁ samiñjeyya; evameva jetavane antarahito mandākiniyā pokkharaṇiyā tīre pāturahosi.

Then, just as a strong man might bend or stretch his arm, Mahāmoggallāna disappeared from the Jeta Grove and reappeared on the banks of the Mandākinī lotus pond.
568

अद्दसाad·da·sā खोkho अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro नागोnā·go आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ महामोग्गल्लानंma·hā·mog·gal·lā·naṃ दूरतोवdū·ra·to·va आगच्छन्तं,ā·gac·chan·taṃ दिस्वानdis·vā·na आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ महामोग्गल्लानंma·hā·mog·gal·lā·naṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

Addasā kho aññataro nāgo āyasmantaṁ mahāmoggallānaṁ dūratova āgacchantaṁ, disvāna āyasmantaṁ mahāmoggallānaṁ etadavoca—

An elephant saw Mahāmoggallāna coming and said to him,
569

“एतुe·tu खो,kho भन्ते,bhan·te अय्योay·yo महामोग्गल्लानो।ma·hā·mog·gal·lā·no स्वागतं,svā·ga·taṃ भन्ते,bhan·te अय्यस्सay·yas·sa महामोग्गल्लानस्स।ma·hā·mog·gal·lā·nas·sa

“etu kho, bhante, ayyo mahāmoggallāno. Svāgataṁ, bhante, ayyassa mahāmoggallānassa.

“Welcome, Venerable Mahāmoggallāna, please come.
570

केन,ke·na भन्ते,bhan·te अय्यस्सay·yas·sa अत्थो;at·tho

Kena, bhante, ayyassa attho;

What do you need, venerable?
571

किंkiṃ दम्मी”ति?dam·mī

kiṁ dammī”ti?

What may I give?”
572

“भिसेहिbhi·se·hi चca मे,me आवुसो,ā·vu·so अत्थो,at·tho मुळालिकाहिmu·ḷā·li·kā·hi चा”ति।cā

“Bhisehi ca me, āvuso, attho, muḷālikāhi cā”ti.

“I need lotus roots and tubers.”
573

अथa·tha खोkho सोso नागोnā·go अञ्ञतरंañ·ña·ta·raṃ नागंnā·gaṃ आणापेसि—ā·ṇā·pe·si

Atha kho so nāgo aññataraṁ nāgaṁ āṇāpesi—

The elephant told another elephant,
574

“तेनte·na हि,hi भणे,bha·ṇe अय्यस्सay·yas·sa भिसेbhi·se चca मुळालिकायोmu·ḷā·li·kā·yo चca यावदत्थंyā·va·dat·thaṃ देही”ति।de·hī

“tena hi, bhaṇe, ayyassa bhise ca muḷālikāyo ca yāvadatthaṁ dehī”ti.

“Listen, give as many roots and tubers as the venerable needs.”
575

अथa·tha खोkho सोso नागोnā·go मन्दाकिनिंman·dā·ki·niṃ पोक्खरणिंpok·kha·ra·ṇiṃ ओगाहेत्वा,o·gā·het·vā सोण्डायsoṇ·ḍā·ya भिसञ्चbhi·sañ·ca मुळालिकञ्चmu·ḷā·li·kañ·ca अब्बाहित्वा,ab·bā·hit·vā सुविक्खालितंsu·vik·khā·li·taṃ विक्खालेत्वा,vik·khā·let·vā भण्डिकंbhaṇ·ḍi·kaṃ बन्धित्वाban·dhit·vā येनायस्माye·nā·yas·mā महामोग्गल्लानोma·hā·mog·gal·lā·no तेनुपसङ्कमि।te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi

Atha kho so nāgo mandākiniṁ pokkharaṇiṁ ogāhetvā, soṇḍāya bhisañca muḷālikañca abbāhitvā, suvikkhālitaṁ vikkhāletvā, bhaṇḍikaṁ bandhitvā yenāyasmā mahāmoggallāno tenupasaṅkami.

It plunged into the Mandākinī lotus pond and pulled up lotus roots and tubers with his trunk. It gave them a good rinse, bound them in a bundle, and went up to Mahāmoggallāna.
576

अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā महामोग्गल्लानो—सेय्यथापिma·hā·mog·gal·lā·no नामnā·ma बलवाba·la·vā पुरिसोpu·ri·so समिञ्जितंsa·miñ·ji·taṃ वाvā बाहंbā·haṃ पसारेय्य,pa·sā·rey·ya पसारितंpa·sā·ri·taṃ वाvā बाहंbā·haṃ समिञ्जेय्य;sa·miñ·jey·ya एवमेव—मन्दाकिनियाe·va·me·va पोक्खरणियाpok·kha·ra·ṇi·yā तीरेtī·re अन्तरहितोan·ta·ra·hi·to जेतवनेje·ta·va·ne पातुरहोसि।pā·tu·ra·ho·si

Atha kho āyasmā mahāmoggallāno—seyyathāpi nāma balavā puriso samiñjitaṁ vā bāhaṁ pasāreyya, pasāritaṁ vā bāhaṁ samiñjeyya; evameva—mandākiniyā pokkharaṇiyā tīre antarahito jetavane pāturahosi.

Then, just as a strong man might bend or stretch his arm, Mahāmoggallāna disappeared from the banks of the Mandākinī lotus pond and reappeared in the Jeta Grove.
577

सोपिso·pi खोkho नागोnā·go मन्दाकिनियाman·dā·ki·ni·yā पोक्खरणियाpok·kha·ra·ṇi·yā तीरेtī·re अन्तरहितोan·ta·ra·hi·to जेतवनेje·ta·va·ne पातुरहोसि।pā·tu·ra·ho·si

Sopi kho nāgo mandākiniyā pokkharaṇiyā tīre antarahito jetavane pāturahosi.

And that elephant did the same.
578

अथa·tha खोkho सोso नागोnā·go आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to महामोग्गल्लानस्सma·hā·mog·gal·lā·nas·sa भिसेbhi·se चca मुळालिकायोmu·ḷā·li·kā·yo चca पटिग्गहापेत्वाpa·ṭig·ga·hā·pet·vā जेतवनेje·ta·va·ne अन्तरहितोan·ta·ra·hi·to मन्दाकिनियाman·dā·ki·ni·yā पोक्खरणियाpok·kha·ra·ṇi·yā तीरेtī·re पातुरहोसि।pā·tu·ra·ho·si

Atha kho so nāgo āyasmato mahāmoggallānassa bhise ca muḷālikāyo ca paṭiggahāpetvā jetavane antarahito mandākiniyā pokkharaṇiyā tīre pāturahosi.

It had the roots and tubers offered to Mahāmoggallāna, before returning to the Mandākinī lotus pond in the same manner.
579

अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā महामोग्गल्लानोma·hā·mog·gal·lā·no आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सारिपुत्तस्सsā·ri·put·tas·sa भिसेbhi·se चca मुळालिकायोmu·ḷā·li·kā·yo चca उपनामेसि।u·pa·nā·me·si

Atha kho āyasmā mahāmoggallāno āyasmato sāriputtassa bhise ca muḷālikāyo ca upanāmesi.

Mahāmoggallāna then brought those lotus roots and tubers to Sāriputta.
580

अथa·tha खोkho आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सारिपुत्तस्सsā·ri·put·tas·sa भिसेbhi·se चca मुळालिकायोmu·ḷā·li·kā·yo चca भुत्तस्सbhut·tas·sa कायडाहाबाधोkā·ya·ḍā·hā·bā·dho पटिप्पस्सम्भि।pa·ṭip·pas·sam·bhi

Atha kho āyasmato sāriputtassa bhise ca muḷālikāyo ca bhuttassa kāyaḍāhābādho paṭippassambhi.

When he had eaten them, his fever subsided.
581

बहूba·hū भिसाbhi·sā चca मुळालिकायोmu·ḷā·li·kā·yo चca अवसिट्ठाa·va·siṭ·ṭhā होन्ति।hon·ti

Bahū bhisā ca muḷālikāyo ca avasiṭṭhā honti.

But there was much left over.
582

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na भिक्खूbhik·khū दुब्भिक्खेdub·bhik·khe अप्पमत्तकेपिap·pa·mat·ta·ke·pi पवारेन्ति,pa·vā·ren·ti पटिसङ्खापिpa·ṭi·saṅ·khā·pi पटिक्खिपन्ति,pa·ṭik·khi·pan·ti सब्बोsab·bo चca सङ्घोsaṅ·gho पवारितोpa·vā·ri·to होति।ho·ti

Tena kho pana samayena bhikkhū dubbhikkhe appamattakepi pavārenti, paṭisaṅkhāpi paṭikkhipanti, sabbo ca saṅgho pavārito hoti.

At this time, food was scarce, and the monks were refusing invitations to eat more even after taking just a little. After reflection, they were even declining altogether. And so now that the whole Sangha was being invited,
583

भिक्खूbhik·khū कुक्कुच्चायन्ताkuk·kuc·cā·yan·tā नna पटिग्गण्हन्ति।pa·ṭig·gaṇ·han·ti

Bhikkhū kukkuccāyantā na paṭiggaṇhanti.

being afraid of wrongdoing, they did not accept.
584

“पटिग्गण्हथ,pa·ṭig·gaṇ·ha·tha भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve परिभुञ्जथ।pa·ri·bhuñ·ja·tha

“Paṭiggaṇhatha, bhikkhave, paribhuñjatha.

“Accept, monks, and eat.
585

अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve वनट्ठंva·naṭ·ṭhaṃ पोक्खरट्ठंpok·kha·raṭ·ṭhaṃ भुत्ताविनाbhut·tā·vi·nā पवारितेनpa·vā·ri·te·na अनतिरित्तंa·na·ti·rit·taṃ परिभुञ्जितुन्”ति।pa·ri·bhuñ·ji·tun

Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, vanaṭṭhaṁ pokkharaṭṭhaṁ bhuttāvinā pavāritena anatirittaṁ paribhuñjitun”ti.

I allow one who has finished his meal and refused an invitation to eat more to eat non-leftovers coming from the forest or a lotus pond.”
586

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na सावत्थियंsā·vat·thi·yaṃ बहुंba·huṃ फलखादनीयंpha·la·khā·da·nī·yaṃ उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ होति,ho·ti कप्पियकारकोkap·pi·ya·kā·ra·ko चca नna होति।ho·ti

Tena kho pana samayena sāvatthiyaṁ bahuṁ phalakhādanīyaṁ uppannaṁ hoti, kappiyakārako ca na hoti.

On one occasion in Sāvatthī, much fruit had been given, but there was no attendant.
587

भिक्खूbhik·khū कुक्कुच्चायन्ताkuk·kuc·cā·yan·tā फलंpha·laṃ नna परिभुञ्जन्ति।pa·ri·bhuñ·jan·ti

Bhikkhū kukkuccāyantā phalaṁ na paribhuñjanti.

Being afraid of wrongdoing, the monks did not eat it.
588

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
589

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अबीजंa·bī·jaṃ निब्बत्तबीजंnib·bat·ta·bī·jaṃ अकतकप्पंa·ka·ta·kap·paṃ फलंpha·laṃ परिभुञ्जितुन्”ति।pa·ri·bhuñ·ji·tun

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, abījaṁ nibbattabījaṁ akatakappaṁ phalaṁ paribhuñjitun”ti.

“I allow you to eat fruit that hasn’t been made allowable if it’s seedless or the seeds have been removed.”
590

8। सत्थकम्मपटिक्खेपकथाsat·tha·kam·ma·pa·ṭik·khe·pa·ka·thā

8. Satthakammapaṭikkhepakathā

8. Discussion of the prohibition against surgery
591

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā सावत्थियंsā·vat·thi·yaṃ यथाभिरन्तंya·thā·bhi·ran·taṃ विहरित्वाvi·ha·rit·vā येनye·na राजगहंrā·ja·ga·haṃ तेनte·na चारिकंcā·ri·kaṃ पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

Atha kho bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ yathābhirantaṁ viharitvā yena rājagahaṁ tena cārikaṁ pakkāmi.

When the Buddha had stayed at Sāvatthī for as long as he liked, he set out wandering toward Rājagaha.
592

अनुपुब्बेनa·nu·pub·be·na चारिकंcā·ri·kaṃ चरमानोca·ra·mā·no येनye·na राजगहंrā·ja·ga·haṃ तदवसरि।ta·da·va·sa·ri

Anupubbena cārikaṁ caramāno yena rājagahaṁ tadavasari.

When he eventually arrived,
593

तत्रtat·ra सुदंsu·daṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā राजगहेrā·ja·ga·he विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti वेळुवनेve·ḷu·va·ne कलन्दकनिवापे।ka·lan·da·ka·ni·vā·pe

Tatra sudaṁ bhagavā rājagahe viharati veḷuvane kalandakanivāpe.

he stayed in the Bamboo Grove, the squirrel sanctuary.
594

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरस्सañ·ña·ta·ras·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no भगन्दलाबाधोbha·gan·da·lā·bā·dho होति।ho·ti

Tena kho pana samayena aññatarassa bhikkhuno bhagandalābādho hoti.

At that time the doctor Ākāsagotta performed surgery on a certain monk who had hemorrhoids.
595

आकासगोत्तोā·kā·sa·got·to वेज्जोvej·jo सत्थकम्मंsat·tha·kam·maṃ करोति।ka·ro·ti

Ākāsagotto vejjo satthakammaṁ karoti.

(Pāli only)
596

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā सेनासनचारिकंse·nā·sa·na·cā·ri·kaṃ आहिण्डन्तोā·hiṇ·ḍan·to येनye·na तस्सtas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no विहारोvi·hā·ro तेनुपसङ्कमि।te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi

Atha kho bhagavā senāsanacārikaṁ āhiṇḍanto yena tassa bhikkhuno vihāro tenupasaṅkami.

Just then, while walking about the dwellings, the Buddha came to this monk’s dwelling.
597

अद्दसाad·da·sā खोkho आकासगोत्तोā·kā·sa·got·to वेज्जोvej·jo भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ दूरतोवdū·ra·to·va आगच्छन्तं,ā·gac·chan·taṃ दिस्वानdis·vā·na भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

Addasā kho ākāsagotto vejjo bhagavantaṁ dūratova āgacchantaṁ, disvāna bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

Ākāsagotta saw the Buddha coming and said to him,
598

“आगच्छतुā·gac·cha·tu भवंbha·vaṃ गोतमो,go·ta·mo इमस्सi·mas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no वच्चमग्गंvac·ca·mag·gaṃ पस्सतु,pas·sa·tu सेय्यथापिsey·ya·thā·pi गोधामुखन्”ति।go·dhā·mu·khan

“āgacchatu bhavaṁ gotamo, imassa bhikkhuno vaccamaggaṁ passatu, seyyathāpi godhāmukhan”ti.

“Good Gotama, please come and see this monk’s anus. It’s just like the mouth of a lizard.”
599

अथa·tha खोkho भगवा—bha·ga·vā

Atha kho bhagavā—

The Buddha thought,
600

“सोso मंmaṃ ख्वायंkhvā·yaṃ मोघपुरिसोmo·gha·pu·ri·so उप्पण्डेती”ति—up·paṇ·ḍe·tī

“so maṁ khvāyaṁ moghapuriso uppaṇḍetī”ti—

“This foolish man is mocking me,”
601

ततोवta·to·va पटिनिवत्तित्वा,pa·ṭi·ni·vat·tit·vā एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ निदानेni·dā·ne एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ पकरणेpa·ka·ra·ṇe भिक्खुसङ्घंbhik·khu·saṅ·ghaṃ सन्निपातापेत्वा,san·ni·pā·tā·pet·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū पटिपुच्छि—pa·ṭi·puc·chi

tatova paṭinivattitvā, etasmiṁ nidāne etasmiṁ pakaraṇe bhikkhusaṅghaṁ sannipātāpetvā, bhikkhū paṭipucchi—

and he turned around right there. Soon afterwards he had the Sangha gathered and questioned the monks:
602

“अत्थिat·thi किर,ki·ra भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अमुकस्मिंa·mu·kas·miṃ विहारेvi·hā·re भिक्खुbhik·khu गिलानो”ति?gi·lā·no

“atthi kira, bhikkhave, amukasmiṁ vihāre bhikkhu gilāno”ti?

“Is there a sick monk in such-and-such a dwelling?”
603

“अत्थि,at·thi भगवा”ति।bha·ga·vā

“Atthi, bhagavā”ti.

“There is, sir.”
604

“किंkiṃ तस्स,tas·sa भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no आबाधो”ति?ā·bā·dho

“Kiṁ tassa, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno ābādho”ti?

“What’s his illness?”
605

“तस्स,tas·sa भन्ते,bhan·te आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to भगन्दलाबाधो,bha·gan·da·lā·bā·dho आकासगोत्तोā·kā·sa·got·to वेज्जोvej·jo सत्थकम्मंsat·tha·kam·maṃ करोती”ति।ka·ro·tī

“Tassa, bhante, āyasmato bhagandalābādho, ākāsagotto vejjo satthakammaṁ karotī”ti.

“He has hemorrhoids, and the doctor Ākāsagotta is performing surgery.”
606

विगरहिvi·ga·ra·hi बुद्धोbud·dho भगवा—bha·ga·vā

Vigarahi buddho bhagavā—

The Buddha rebuked him,
607

“अननुच्छविकं,a·na·nuc·cha·vi·kaṃ भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve तस्सtas·sa मोघपुरिसस्स,mo·gha·pu·ri·sas·sa अननुलोमिकं,a·na·nu·lo·mi·kaṃ अप्पतिरूपं,ap·pa·ti·rū·paṃ अस्सामणकं,as·sā·ma·ṇa·kaṃ अकप्पियं,a·kap·pi·yaṃ अकरणीयं।a·ka·ra·ṇī·yaṃ

“ananucchavikaṁ, bhikkhave, tassa moghapurisassa, ananulomikaṁ, appatirūpaṁ, assāmaṇakaṁ, akappiyaṁ, akaraṇīyaṁ.

“It’s not suitable, monks, for that foolish man, it’s not proper, it’s not worthy of a monastic, it’s not allowable, it’s not to be done.
608

कथञ्हिka·thañ·hi नामnā·ma सो,so भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve मोघपुरिसोmo·gha·pu·ri·so सम्बाधेsam·bā·dhe सत्थकम्मंsat·tha·kam·maṃ कारापेस्सति।kā·rā·pes·sa·ti

Kathañhi nāma so, bhikkhave, moghapuriso sambādhe satthakammaṁ kārāpessati.

How can he have surgery on the private parts?
609

सम्बाधे,sam·bā·dhe भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सुखुमाsu·khu·mā छवि,cha·vi दुरोपयोdu·ro·pa·yo वणो,va·ṇo दुप्परिहारंdup·pa·ri·hā·raṃ सत्थं।sat·thaṃ

Sambādhe, bhikkhave, sukhumā chavi, duropayo vaṇo, dupparihāraṁ satthaṁ.

The skin is delicate in that area, sores heel with difficulty, and a scalpel is hard to wield there.
610

नेतं,ne·taṃ भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अप्पसन्नानंap·pa·san·nā·naṃ वाvā पसादायpa·sā·dā·ya …पे…pe

Netaṁ, bhikkhave, appasannānaṁ vā pasādāya …pe…

This will affect people’s confidence …”
611

विगरहित्वाvi·ga·ra·hit·vā …पे…pe

vigarahitvā …pe…

After rebuking him …
612

धम्मिंdham·miṃ कथंka·thaṃ कत्वाkat·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

dhammiṁ kathaṁ katvā bhikkhū āmantesi—

he gave a teaching and addressed the monks:
613

“न,na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सम्बाधेsam·bā·dhe सत्थकम्मंsat·tha·kam·maṃ कारापेतब्बं।kā·rā·pe·tab·baṃ

“na, bhikkhave, sambādhe satthakammaṁ kārāpetabbaṁ.

“You shouldn’t have surgery on the private parts.
614

योyo कारापेय्य,kā·rā·pey·ya आपत्तिā·pat·ti थुल्लच्चयस्सा”ति।thul·lac·ca·yas·sā

Yo kārāpeyya, āpatti thullaccayassā”ti.

If you do, you commit a serious offense.”
615

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na छब्बग्गियाchab·bag·gi·yā भिक्खू—bhik·khū

Tena kho pana samayena chabbaggiyā bhikkhū—

When they heard that the Buddha had prohibited surgery,
616

“भगवताbha·ga·va·tā सत्थकम्मंsat·tha·kam·maṃ पटिक्खित्तन्”ति—pa·ṭik·khit·tan

“bhagavatā satthakammaṁ paṭikkhittan”ti—

(Pāli only)
617

वत्थिकम्मंvat·thi·kam·maṃ कारापेन्ति।kā·rā·pen·ti

vatthikammaṁ kārāpenti.

the monks from the group of six had enemas.
618

येye तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū अप्पिच्छा,ap·pic·chā तेte उज्झायन्तिuj·jhā·yan·ti खिय्यन्तिkhiy·yan·ti विपाचेन्ति—vi·pā·cen·ti

Ye te bhikkhū appicchā, te ujjhāyanti khiyyanti vipācenti—

The monks of few desires complained and criticized them,
619

“कथञ्हिka·thañ·hi नामnā·ma छब्बग्गियाchab·bag·gi·yā भिक्खूbhik·khū वत्थिकम्मंvat·thi·kam·maṃ कारापेस्सन्ती”ति।kā·rā·pes·san·tī

“kathañhi nāma chabbaggiyā bhikkhū vatthikammaṁ kārāpessantī”ti.

“How can the monks from the group of six have enemas?”
620

अथa·tha खोkho तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Atha kho te bhikkhū bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

They told the Buddha what had happened.
621

“सच्चंsac·caṃ किर,ki·ra भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve छब्बग्गियाchab·bag·gi·yā भिक्खूbhik·khū वत्थिकम्मंvat·thi·kam·maṃ कारापेन्ती”ति?kā·rā·pen·tī

“Saccaṁ kira, bhikkhave, chabbaggiyā bhikkhū vatthikammaṁ kārāpentī”ti?

“Is it true, monks, that the monks from the group of six are having enemas?”
622

“सच्चं,sac·caṃ भगवा”तिbha·ga·vā …पे…pe

“Saccaṁ, bhagavā”ti …pe…

“It’s true, sir.” …
623

विगरहित्वाvi·ga·ra·hit·vā धम्मिंdham·miṃ कथंka·thaṃ कत्वाkat·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

vigarahitvā dhammiṁ kathaṁ katvā bhikkhū āmantesi—

After rebuking them, the Buddha gave a teaching and addressed the monks:
624

“न,na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सम्बाधस्सsam·bā·dhas·sa सामन्ताsā·man·tā द्वङ्गुलाdvaṅ·gu·lā सत्थकम्मंsat·tha·kam·maṃ वाvā वत्थिकम्मंvat·thi·kam·maṃ वाvā कारापेतब्बं।kā·rā·pe·tab·baṃ

“na, bhikkhave, sambādhassa sāmantā dvaṅgulā satthakammaṁ vā vatthikammaṁ vā kārāpetabbaṁ.

“You shouldn’t get surgery within 3.5 centimeters of the private parts or have enemas.
625

योyo कारापेय्य,kā·rā·pey·ya आपत्तिā·pat·ti थुल्लच्चयस्सा”ति।thul·lac·ca·yas·sā

Yo kārāpeyya, āpatti thullaccayassā”ti.

If you do, you commit a serious offense.”
626

9। मनुस्समंसपटिक्खेपकथाma·nus·sa·maṃ·sa·pa·ṭik·khe·pa·ka·thā

9. Manussamaṁsapaṭikkhepakathā

9. Discussion of the prohibition against human flesh
627

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā राजगहेrā·ja·ga·he यथाभिरन्तंya·thā·bhi·ran·taṃ विहरित्वाvi·ha·rit·vā येनye·na बाराणसीbā·rā·ṇa·sī तेनte·na चारिकंcā·ri·kaṃ पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

Atha kho bhagavā rājagahe yathābhirantaṁ viharitvā yena bārāṇasī tena cārikaṁ pakkāmi.

When the Buddha had stayed at Rājagaha for as long as he liked, he set out wandering toward Benares.
628

अनुपुब्बेनa·nu·pub·be·na चारिकंcā·ri·kaṃ चरमानोca·ra·mā·no येनye·na बाराणसीbā·rā·ṇa·sī तदवसरि।ta·da·va·sa·ri

Anupubbena cārikaṁ caramāno yena bārāṇasī tadavasari.

When he eventually arrived,
629

तत्रtat·ra सुदंsu·daṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā बाराणसियंbā·rā·ṇa·si·yaṃ विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti इसिपतनेi·si·pa·ta·ne मिगदाये।mi·ga·dā·ye

Tatra sudaṁ bhagavā bārāṇasiyaṁ viharati isipatane migadāye.

he stayed in the deer park at Isipatana.
630

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na बाराणसियंbā·rā·ṇa·si·yaṃ सुप्पियोsup·pi·yo चca उपासकोu·pā·sa·ko सुप्पियाsup·pi·yā चca उपासिकाu·pā·si·kā उभतोपसन्नाu·bha·to·pa·san·nā होन्ति,hon·ti दायका,dā·ya·kā कारका,kā·ra·kā सङ्घुपट्ठाका।saṅ·ghu·paṭ·ṭhā·kā

Tena kho pana samayena bārāṇasiyaṁ suppiyo ca upāsako suppiyā ca upāsikā ubhatopasannā honti, dāyakā, kārakā, saṅghupaṭṭhākā.

At that time in Benares there were two lay-followers, Suppiya and Suppiyā, husband and wife, both with confidence in Buddhism. They were donors and benefactors, and they attended on the Sangha.
631

अथa·tha खोkho सुप्पियाsup·pi·yā उपासिकाu·pā·si·kā आरामंā·rā·maṃ गन्त्वाgan·tvā विहारेनvi·hā·re·na विहारंvi·hā·raṃ परिवेणेनpa·ri·ve·ṇe·na परिवेणंpa·ri·ve·ṇaṃ उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū पुच्छति—puc·cha·ti

Atha kho suppiyā upāsikā ārāmaṁ gantvā vihārena vihāraṁ pariveṇena pariveṇaṁ upasaṅkamitvā bhikkhū pucchati—

On one occasion Suppiyā went to the monastery. She walked from dwelling to dwelling, from yard to yard, asking the monks,
632

“को,ko भन्ते,bhan·te गिलानो,gi·lā·no कस्सkas·sa किंkiṃ आहरियतू”ति?ā·ha·ri·ya·tū

“ko, bhante, gilāno, kassa kiṁ āhariyatū”ti?

“Is anyone sick? What may I bring?”
633

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरेनañ·ña·ta·re·na भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā विरेचनंvi·re·ca·naṃ पीतंpī·taṃ होति।ho·ti

Tena kho pana samayena aññatarena bhikkhunā virecanaṁ pītaṁ hoti.

Just then a certain monk had drunk a purgative.
634

अथa·tha खोkho सोso भिक्खुbhik·khu सुप्पियंsup·pi·yaṃ उपासिकंu·pā·si·kaṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

Atha kho so bhikkhu suppiyaṁ upāsikaṁ etadavoca—

He told Suppiyā about this, adding,
635

“मयाma·yā खो,kho भगिनि,bha·gi·ni विरेचनंvi·re·ca·naṃ पीतं।pī·taṃ

“mayā kho, bhagini, virecanaṁ pītaṁ.

(Pāli only)
636

अत्थोat·tho मेme पटिच्छादनीयेना”ति।pa·ṭic·chā·da·nī·ye·nā

Attho me paṭicchādanīyenā”ti.

“I need meat broth.”
637

“सुट्ठु,suṭ·ṭhu अय्य,ay·ya आहरियिस्सती”तिā·ha·ri·yis·sa·tī

“Suṭṭhu, ayya, āhariyissatī”ti

“No problem, I’ll organize it.”
638

घरंgha·raṃ गन्त्वाgan·tvā अन्तेवासिंan·te·vā·siṃ आणापेसि—ā·ṇā·pe·si

gharaṁ gantvā antevāsiṁ āṇāpesi—

She then returned to her house and told a servant,
639

“गच्छ,gac·cha भणे,bha·ṇe पवत्तमंसंpa·vat·ta·maṃ·saṃ जानाही”ति।jā·nā·hī

“gaccha, bhaṇe, pavattamaṁsaṁ jānāhī”ti.

“Go and get some meat.”
640

“एवं,e·vaṃ अय्ये”तिay·ye खोkho सोso पुरिसोpu·ri·so सुप्पियायsup·pi·yā·ya उपासिकायu·pā·si·kā·ya पटिस्सुणित्वाpa·ṭis·su·ṇit·vā केवलकप्पंke·va·la·kap·paṃ बाराणसिंbā·rā·ṇa·siṃ आहिण्डन्तोā·hiṇ·ḍan·to नna अद्दसad·da·sa पवत्तमंसं।pa·vat·ta·maṃ·saṃ

“Evaṁ, ayye”ti kho so puriso suppiyāya upāsikāya paṭissuṇitvā kevalakappaṁ bārāṇasiṁ āhiṇḍanto na addasa pavattamaṁsaṁ.

Saying, “Yes, ma’am,” he walked around the whole of Benares, but could not find any.
641

अथa·tha खोkho सोso पुरिसोpu·ri·so येनye·na सुप्पियाsup·pi·yā उपासिकाu·pā·si·kā तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā सुप्पियंsup·pi·yaṃ उपासिकंu·pā·si·kaṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

Atha kho so puriso yena suppiyā upāsikā tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā suppiyaṁ upāsikaṁ etadavoca—

So he returned to Suppiyā and said,
642

“नत्थय्येnat·thay·ye पवत्तमंसं।pa·vat·ta·maṃ·saṃ

“natthayye pavattamaṁsaṁ.

“There’s no meat, ma’am.
643

माघातोmā·ghā·to अज्जा”ति।aj·jā

Māghāto ajjā”ti.

There’s no slaughter today.”
644

अथa·tha खोkho सुप्पियायsup·pi·yā·ya उपासिकायu·pā·si·kā·ya एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

Atha kho suppiyāya upāsikāya etadahosi—

Suppiyā thought,
645

“तस्सtas·sa खोkho गिलानस्सgi·lā·nas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no पटिच्छादनीयंpa·ṭic·chā·da·nī·yaṃ अलभन्तस्सa·la·bhan·tas·sa आबाधोā·bā·dho वाvā अभिवड्ढिस्सति,a·bhi·vaḍ·ḍhis·sa·ti कालङ्किरियाkā·laṅ·ki·ri·yā वाvā भविस्सति।bha·vis·sa·ti

“tassa kho gilānassa bhikkhuno paṭicchādanīyaṁ alabhantassa ābādho vā abhivaḍḍhissati, kālaṅkiriyā vā bhavissati.

“If that monk doesn’t get meat broth, his illness will get worse or he’ll die.
646

नna खोkho मेतंme·taṃ पतिरूपंpa·ti·rū·paṃ याहंyā·haṃ पटिस्सुणित्वाpa·ṭis·su·ṇit·vā नna हरापेय्यन्”ति।ha·rā·pey·yan

Na kho metaṁ patirūpaṁ yāhaṁ paṭissuṇitvā na harāpeyyan”ti.

Because I’ve already agreed to provide it, it would not be right if I didn’t.”
647

पोत्थनिकंpot·tha·ni·kaṃ गहेत्वाga·het·vā ऊरुमंसंū·ru·maṃ·saṃ उक्कन्तित्वाuk·kan·tit·vā दासियाdā·si·yā अदासि—a·dā·si

Potthanikaṁ gahetvā ūrumaṁsaṁ ukkantitvā dāsiyā adāsi—

She then took a knife, cut flesh from her own thigh, and gave it to a slave, saying,
648

“हन्द,han·da जे,je इमंi·maṃ मंसंmaṃ·saṃ सम्पादेत्वाsam·pā·det·vā अमुकस्मिंa·mu·kas·miṃ विहारेvi·hā·re भिक्खुbhik·khu गिलानो,gi·lā·no तस्सtas·sa दज्जाहि।daj·jā·hi

“handa, je, imaṁ maṁsaṁ sampādetvā amukasmiṁ vihāre bhikkhu gilāno, tassa dajjāhi.

“Prepare this meat and give it to the sick monk in such-and-such a dwelling.
649

योyo चca मंmaṃ पुच्छति,puc·cha·ti ‘गिलाना’तिgi·lā·nā पटिवेदेही”तिpa·ṭi·ve·de·hī उत्तरासङ्गेनut·ta·rā·saṅ·ge·na ऊरुंū·ruṃ वेठेत्वाve·ṭhet·vā ओवरकंo·va·ra·kaṃ पविसित्वाpa·vi·sit·vā मञ्चकेmañ·ca·ke निपज्जि।ni·paj·ji

Yo ca maṁ pucchati, ‘gilānā’ti paṭivedehī”ti uttarāsaṅgena ūruṁ veṭhetvā ovarakaṁ pavisitvā mañcake nipajji.

If anyone asks for me, tell them I’m sick.” She then wrapped her thigh in her upper robe, entered her bedroom, and lay down on the bed.
650

अथa·tha खोkho सुप्पियोsup·pi·yo उपासकोu·pā·sa·ko घरंgha·raṃ गन्त्वाgan·tvā दासिंdā·siṃ पुच्छि—puc·chi

Atha kho suppiyo upāsako gharaṁ gantvā dāsiṁ pucchi—

When Suppiya returned home, he asked the slave where his wife was.
651

“कहंka·haṃ सुप्पिया”ति?sup·pi·yā

“kahaṁ suppiyā”ti?

(Pāli only)
652

“एसाय्य,e·sāy·ya ओवरकेo·va·ra·ke निपन्ना”ति।ni·pan·nā

“Esāyya, ovarake nipannā”ti.

The slave told him.
653

अथa·tha खोkho सुप्पियोsup·pi·yo उपासकोu·pā·sa·ko येनye·na सुप्पियाsup·pi·yā उपासिकाu·pā·si·kā तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā सुप्पियंsup·pi·yaṃ उपासिकंu·pā·si·kaṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

Atha kho suppiyo upāsako yena suppiyā upāsikā tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā suppiyaṁ upāsikaṁ etadavoca—

He then went to see her,
654

“किस्सkis·sa निपन्नासी”ति?ni·pan·nā·sī

“kissa nipannāsī”ti?

(Pāli only)
655

“गिलानाम्ही”ति।gi·lā·nām·hī

“Gilānāmhī”ti.

(Pāli only)
656

“किंkiṃ तेte आबाधो”ति?ā·bā·dho

“Kiṁ te ābādho”ti?

(Pāli only)
657

अथa·tha खोkho सुप्पियाsup·pi·yā उपासिकाu·pā·si·kā सुप्पियस्सsup·pi·yas·sa उपासकस्सu·pā·sa·kas·sa एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसि।ā·ro·ce·si

Atha kho suppiyā upāsikā suppiyassa upāsakassa etamatthaṁ ārocesi.

and she told him what had happened.
658

अथa·tha खोkho सुप्पियोsup·pi·yo उपासको—u·pā·sa·ko

Atha kho suppiyo upāsako—

He thought,
659

“अच्छरियंac·cha·ri·yaṃ वतva·ta भो,bho अब्भुतंab·bhu·taṃ वतva·ta भो।bho

“acchariyaṁ vata bho, abbhutaṁ vata bho.

“It’s astonishing and amazing
660

यावyā·va सद्धायंsad·dhā·yaṃ सुप्पियाsup·pi·yā पसन्ना,pa·san·nā यत्रyat·ra हिhi नामnā·ma अत्तनोपिat·ta·no·pi मंसानिmaṃ·sā·ni परिच्चत्तानि।pa·ric·cat·tā·ni

Yāva saddhāyaṁ suppiyā pasannā, yatra hi nāma attanopi maṁsāni pariccattāni.

how much faith and confidence Suppiyā has, as she gives up even her own flesh.
661

किम्पिमायkim·pi·mā·ya अञ्ञंañ·ñaṃ किञ्चिkiñ·ci अदेय्यंa·dey·yaṃ भविस्सती”ति—bha·vis·sa·tī

Kimpimāya aññaṁ kiñci adeyyaṁ bhavissatī”ti—

Is there anything she would not give?”
662

हट्ठोhaṭ·ṭho उदग्गोu·dag·go येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di

haṭṭho udaggo yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

Delighted and joyful he went to the Buddha. He bowed, sat down,
663

एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नोni·sin·no खोkho सुप्पियोsup·pi·yo उपासकोu·pā·sa·ko भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho suppiyo upāsako bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

and said,
664

“अधिवासेतुa·dhi·vā·se·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te भगवाbha·ga·vā स्वातनायsvā·ta·nā·ya भत्तं,bhat·taṃ सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ भिक्खुसङ्घेना”ति।bhik·khu·saṅ·ghe·nā

“adhivāsetu me, bhante, bhagavā svātanāya bhattaṁ, saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghenā”ti.

“Sir, please accept tomorrow’s meal from me together with the Sangha of monks.”
665

अधिवासेसिa·dhi·vā·se·si भगवाbha·ga·vā तुण्हीभावेन।tuṇ·hī·bhā·ve·na

Adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvena.

The Buddha consented by remaining silent.
666

अथa·tha खोkho सुप्पियोsup·pi·yo उपासकोu·pā·sa·ko भगवतोbha·ga·va·to अधिवासनंa·dhi·vā·sa·naṃ विदित्वाvi·dit·vā उट्ठायासनाuṭ·ṭhā·yā·sa·nā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā पदक्खिणंpa·dak·khi·ṇaṃ कत्वाkat·vā पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

Atha kho suppiyo upāsako bhagavato adhivāsanaṁ viditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pakkāmi.

Knowing that the Buddha had consented, Suppiya got up from his seat, bowed down, circumambulated the Buddha with his right side toward him, and left.
667

अथa·tha खोkho सुप्पियोsup·pi·yo उपासकोu·pā·sa·ko तस्साtas·sā रत्तियाrat·ti·yā अच्चयेनac·ca·ye·na पणीतंpa·ṇī·taṃ खादनीयंkhā·da·nī·yaṃ भोजनीयंbho·ja·nī·yaṃ पटियादापेत्वाpa·ṭi·yā·dā·pet·vā भगवतोbha·ga·va·to कालंkā·laṃ आरोचापेसि—“कालो,ā·ro·cā·pe·si भन्ते,bhan·te निट्ठितंniṭ·ṭhi·taṃ भत्तन्”ति।bhat·tan

Atha kho suppiyo upāsako tassā rattiyā accayena paṇītaṁ khādanīyaṁ bhojanīyaṁ paṭiyādāpetvā bhagavato kālaṁ ārocāpesi—“kālo, bhante, niṭṭhitaṁ bhattan”ti.

The following morning Suppiya had various kinds of fine foods prepared. He then had the Buddha informed that the meal was ready.
668

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā पुब्बण्हसमयंpub·baṇ·ha·sa·ma·yaṃ निवासेत्वाni·vā·set·vā पत्तचीवरमादायpat·ta·cī·va·ra·mā·dā·ya येनye·na सुप्पियस्सsup·pi·yas·sa उपासकस्सu·pā·sa·kas·sa निवेसनंni·ve·sa·naṃ तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā पञ्ञत्तेpañ·ñat·te आसनेā·sa·ne निसीदि,ni·sī·di सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ भिक्खुसङ्घेन।bhik·khu·saṅ·ghe·na

Atha kho bhagavā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya yena suppiyassa upāsakassa nivesanaṁ tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi, saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghena.

The Buddha robed up, took his bowl and robe, and went to Suppiya’s house where he sat down on the prepared seat together with the Sangha of monks.
669

अथa·tha खोkho सुप्पियोsup·pi·yo उपासकोu·pā·sa·ko येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ अट्ठासि।aṭ·ṭhā·si

Atha kho suppiyo upāsako yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi.

Suppiya approached the Buddha and bowed down to him.
670

एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ ठितंṭhi·taṃ खोkho सुप्पियंsup·pi·yaṃ उपासकंu·pā·sa·kaṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā एतदवोच—“कहं,e·ta·da·vo·ca सुप्पिया”ति?sup·pi·yā

Ekamantaṁ ṭhitaṁ kho suppiyaṁ upāsakaṁ bhagavā etadavoca—“kahaṁ, suppiyā”ti?

When the Buddha asked him where Suppiyā was,
671

“गिलाना,gi·lā·nā भगवा”ति।bha·ga·vā

“Gilānā, bhagavā”ti.

he replied that she was sick.
672

“तेनte·na हिhi आगच्छतू”ति।ā·gac·cha·tū

“Tena hi āgacchatū”ti.

“Well then, please tell her to come.”
673

“न,na भगवा,bha·ga·vā उस्सहती”ति।us·sa·ha·tī

“Na, bhagavā, ussahatī”ti.

“She’s not able, sir.”
674

“तेनte·na हिhi परिग्गहेत्वापिpa·rig·ga·het·vā·pi आनेथा”ति।ā·ne·thā

“Tena hi pariggahetvāpi ānethā”ti.

“Well then, carry her in here.”
675

अथa·tha खोkho सुप्पियोsup·pi·yo उपासकोu·pā·sa·ko सुप्पियंsup·pi·yaṃ उपासिकंu·pā·si·kaṃ परिग्गहेत्वाpa·rig·ga·het·vā आनेसि।ā·ne·si

Atha kho suppiyo upāsako suppiyaṁ upāsikaṁ pariggahetvā ānesi.

And he did.
676

तस्साtas·sā सहsa·ha दस्सनेनdas·sa·ne·na भगवतोbha·ga·va·to तावtā·va महावणोma·hā·va·ṇo रुळ्होru·ḷho अहोसिa·ho·si सुच्छविलोमजातो।suc·cha·vi·lo·ma·jā·to

Tassā saha dassanena bhagavato tāva mahāvaṇo ruḷho ahosi succhavilomajāto.

The moment Suppiyā saw the Buddha that great wound healed and was perfectly covered with skin and hairs.
677

अथa·tha खोkho सुप्पियोsup·pi·yo चca उपासकोu·pā·sa·ko सुप्पियाsup·pi·yā चca उपासिका—u·pā·si·kā

Atha kho suppiyo ca upāsako suppiyā ca upāsikā—

Suppiya and Suppiyā exclaimed,
678

“अच्छरियंac·cha·ri·yaṃ वतva·ta भो,bho अब्भुतंab·bhu·taṃ वतva·ta भो।bho

“acchariyaṁ vata bho, abbhutaṁ vata bho.

“The great power and might of the Buddha
679

तथागतस्सta·thā·ga·tas·sa महिद्धिकताma·hid·dhi·ka·tā महानुभावता,ma·hā·nu·bhā·va·tā यत्रyat·ra हिhi नामnā·ma सहsa·ha दस्सनेनdas·sa·ne·na भगवतोbha·ga·va·to तावtā·va महावणोma·hā·va·ṇo रुळ्होru·ḷho भविस्सतिbha·vis·sa·ti सुच्छविलोमजातो”ति—suc·cha·vi·lo·ma·jā·to

Tathāgatassa mahiddhikatā mahānubhāvatā, yatra hi nāma saha dassanena bhagavato tāva mahāvaṇo ruḷho bhavissati succhavilomajāto”ti—

is truly astonishing and amazing!”
680

हट्ठाhaṭ·ṭhā उदग्गाu·dag·gā बुद्धप्पमुखंbud·dhap·pa·mu·khaṃ भिक्खुसङ्घंbhik·khu·saṅ·ghaṃ पणीतेनpa·ṇī·te·na खादनीयेनkhā·da·nī·ye·na भोजनीयेनbho·ja·nī·ye·na सहत्थाsa·hat·thā सन्तप्पेत्वाsan·tap·pet·vā सम्पवारेत्वाsam·pa·vā·ret·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ भुत्ताविंbhut·tā·viṃ ओनीतपत्तपाणिंo·nī·ta·pat·ta·pā·ṇiṃ एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदिंसु।ni·sī·diṃ·su

haṭṭhā udaggā buddhappamukhaṁ bhikkhusaṅghaṁ paṇītena khādanīyena bhojanīyena sahatthā santappetvā sampavāretvā bhagavantaṁ bhuttāviṁ onītapattapāṇiṁ ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu.

Delighted and joyful, they personally served various kinds of fine foods to the Sangha of monks headed by the Buddha. When the Buddha had finished his meal, they sat down to one side.
681

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā सुप्पियञ्चsup·pi·yañ·ca उपासकंu·pā·sa·kaṃ सुप्पियञ्चsup·pi·yañ·ca उपासिकंu·pā·si·kaṃ धम्मियाdham·mi·yā कथायka·thā·ya सन्दस्सेत्वाsan·das·set·vā समादपेत्वाsa·mā·da·pet·vā समुत्तेजेत्वाsa·mut·te·jet·vā सम्पहंसेत्वाsam·pa·haṃ·set·vā उट्ठायासनाuṭ·ṭhā·yā·sa·nā पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

Atha kho bhagavā suppiyañca upāsakaṁ suppiyañca upāsikaṁ dhammiyā kathāya sandassetvā samādapetvā samuttejetvā sampahaṁsetvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmi.

The Buddha instructed, inspired, and gladdened them with a teaching, after which he got up from his seat and left.
682

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ निदानेni·dā·ne एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ पकरणेpa·ka·ra·ṇe भिक्खुसङ्घंbhik·khu·saṅ·ghaṃ सन्निपातापेत्वाsan·ni·pā·tā·pet·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū पटिपुच्छि—pa·ṭi·puc·chi

Atha kho bhagavā etasmiṁ nidāne etasmiṁ pakaraṇe bhikkhusaṅghaṁ sannipātāpetvā bhikkhū paṭipucchi—

Soon afterwards the Buddha had the Sangha gathered and questioned the monks:
683

“को,ko भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सुप्पियंsup·pi·yaṃ उपासिकंu·pā·si·kaṃ मंसंmaṃ·saṃ विञ्ञापेसी”ति?viñ·ñā·pe·sī

“ko, bhikkhave, suppiyaṁ upāsikaṁ maṁsaṁ viññāpesī”ti?

“Who asked Suppiyā for meat?”
684

एवंe·vaṃ वुत्ते,vut·te सोso भिक्खुbhik·khu भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—“अहंe·ta·da·vo·ca खो,kho भन्ते,bhan·te सुप्पियंsup·pi·yaṃ उपासिकंu·pā·si·kaṃ मंसंmaṃ·saṃ विञ्ञापेसिन्”ति।viñ·ñā·pe·sin

Evaṁ vutte, so bhikkhu bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—“ahaṁ kho, bhante, suppiyaṁ upāsikaṁ maṁsaṁ viññāpesin”ti.

The responsible monk told the Buddha.
685

“आहरियित्थ,ā·ha·ri·yit·tha भिक्खू”ति?bhik·khū

“Āhariyittha, bhikkhū”ti?

“Did you get the meat?”
686

“आहरियित्थ,ā·ha·ri·yit·tha भगवा”ति।bha·ga·vā

“Āhariyittha, bhagavā”ti.

“I did, sir.”
687

“परिभुञ्जिpa·ri·bhuñ·ji त्वं,tvaṃ भिक्खू”ति?bhik·khū

“Paribhuñji tvaṁ, bhikkhū”ti?

“Did you eat it?”
688

“परिभुञ्जामहं,pa·ri·bhuñ·jā·ma·haṃ भगवा”ति।bha·ga·vā

“Paribhuñjāmahaṁ, bhagavā”ti.

“Yes.”
689

“पटिवेक्खिpa·ṭi·vek·khi त्वं,tvaṃ भिक्खू”ति?bhik·khū

“Paṭivekkhi tvaṁ, bhikkhū”ti?

“Were you circumspect about it?”
690

“नाहं,nā·haṃ भगवा,bha·ga·vā पटिवेक्खिन्”ति।pa·ṭi·vek·khin

“Nāhaṁ, bhagavā, paṭivekkhin”ti.

“No, sir.”
691

विगरहिvi·ga·ra·hi बुद्धोbud·dho भगवाbha·ga·vā …पे…pe

Vigarahi buddho bhagavā …pe…

The Buddha rebuked him …
692

कथञ्हिka·thañ·hi नामnā·ma त्वं,tvaṃ मोघपुरिस,mo·gha·pu·ri·sa अप्पटिवेक्खित्वाap·pa·ṭi·vek·khit·vā मंसंmaṃ·saṃ परिभुञ्जिस्ससि।pa·ri·bhuñ·jis·sa·si

kathañhi nāma tvaṁ, moghapurisa, appaṭivekkhitvā maṁsaṁ paribhuñjissasi.

“Foolish man, how can you eat meat without circumspection?
693

मनुस्समंसंma·nus·sa·maṃ·saṃ खोkho तया,ta·yā मोघपुरिस,mo·gha·pu·ri·sa परिभुत्तं।pa·ri·bhut·taṃ

Manussamaṁsaṁ kho tayā, moghapurisa, paribhuttaṁ.

You have eaten human flesh.
694

नेतं,ne·taṃ मोघपुरिस,mo·gha·pu·ri·sa अप्पसन्नानंap·pa·san·nā·naṃ वाvā पसादायpa·sā·dā·ya …पे…pe

Netaṁ, moghapurisa, appasannānaṁ vā pasādāya …pe…

This will affect people’s confidence …”
695

विगरहित्वाvi·ga·ra·hit·vā धम्मिंdham·miṃ कथंka·thaṃ कत्वाkat·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

vigarahitvā dhammiṁ kathaṁ katvā bhikkhū āmantesi—

After rebuking him, he gave a teaching and addressed the monks:
696

“सन्ति,san·ti भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve मनुस्साma·nus·sā सद्धाsad·dhā पसन्ना,pa·san·nā तेहिte·hi अत्तनोपिat·ta·no·pi मंसानिmaṃ·sā·ni परिच्चत्तानि।pa·ric·cat·tā·ni

“santi, bhikkhave, manussā saddhā pasannā, tehi attanopi maṁsāni pariccattāni.

“There are people who have faith and confidence, even to the point of giving up their own flesh.
697

न,na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve मनुस्समंसंma·nus·sa·maṃ·saṃ परिभुञ्जितब्बं।pa·ri·bhuñ·ji·tab·baṃ

Na, bhikkhave, manussamaṁsaṁ paribhuñjitabbaṁ.

You shouldn’t eat human flesh.
698

योyo परिभुञ्जेय्य,pa·ri·bhuñ·jey·ya आपत्तिā·pat·ti थुल्लच्चयस्स।thul·lac·ca·yas·sa

Yo paribhuñjeyya, āpatti thullaccayassa.

If you do, you commit a serious offense.
699

नna च,ca भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अप्पटिवेक्खित्वाap·pa·ṭi·vek·khit·vā मंसंmaṃ·saṃ परिभुञ्जितब्बं।pa·ri·bhuñ·ji·tab·baṃ

Na ca, bhikkhave, appaṭivekkhitvā maṁsaṁ paribhuñjitabbaṁ.

You shouldn’t eat flesh without being circumspect.
700

योyo परिभुञ्जेय्य,pa·ri·bhuñ·jey·ya आपत्तिā·pat·ti दुक्कटस्सा”ति।duk·ka·ṭas·sā

Yo paribhuñjeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā”ti.

If you do, you commit an offense of wrong conduct.”
701

10। हत्थिमंसादिपटिक्खेपकथाhat·thi·maṃ·sā·di·pa·ṭik·khe·pa·ka·thā

10. Hatthimaṁsādipaṭikkhepakathā

10. Discussion of the prohibition against elephant meat, etc.
702

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na रञ्ञोrañ·ño हत्थीhat·thī मरन्ति।ma·ran·ti

Tena kho pana samayena rañño hatthī maranti.

At one time the king’s elephants had died.
703

मनुस्साma·nus·sā दुब्भिक्खेdub·bhik·khe हत्थिमंसंhat·thi·maṃ·saṃ परिभुञ्जन्ति,pa·ri·bhuñ·jan·ti भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ पिण्डायpiṇ·ḍā·ya चरन्तानंca·ran·tā·naṃ हत्थिमंसंhat·thi·maṃ·saṃ देन्ति।den·ti

Manussā dubbhikkhe hatthimaṁsaṁ paribhuñjanti, bhikkhūnaṁ piṇḍāya carantānaṁ hatthimaṁsaṁ denti.

Because there was a shortage of food, people ate the elephant meat. They also gave elephant meat to monks who were walking for alms.
704

भिक्खूbhik·khū हत्थिमंसंhat·thi·maṃ·saṃ परिभुञ्जन्ति।pa·ri·bhuñ·jan·ti

Bhikkhū hatthimaṁsaṁ paribhuñjanti.

When the monks ate it,
705

मनुस्साma·nus·sā उज्झायन्तिuj·jhā·yan·ti खिय्यन्तिkhiy·yan·ti विपाचेन्ति—vi·pā·cen·ti

Manussā ujjhāyanti khiyyanti vipācenti—

people complained and criticized them,
706

“कथञ्हिka·thañ·hi नामnā·ma समणाsa·ma·ṇā सक्यपुत्तियाsak·ya·put·ti·yā हत्थिमंसंhat·thi·maṃ·saṃ परिभुञ्जिस्सन्ति।pa·ri·bhuñ·jis·san·ti

“kathañhi nāma samaṇā sakyaputtiyā hatthimaṁsaṁ paribhuñjissanti.

“How can the Sakyan monastics eat elephant meat?
707

राजङ्गंrā·jaṅ·gaṃ हत्थी,hat·thī सचेsa·ce राजाrā·jā जानेय्य,jā·ney·ya नna नेसंne·saṃ अत्तमनोat·ta·ma·no अस्सा”ति।as·sā

Rājaṅgaṁ hatthī, sace rājā jāneyya, na nesaṁ attamano assā”ti.

Elephants are an attribute of kingship. If the king knew, he would not be pleased with those monks.”
708

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

They told the Buddha.
709

“न,na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve हत्थिमंसंhat·thi·maṃ·saṃ परिभुञ्जितब्बं।pa·ri·bhuñ·ji·tab·baṃ

“Na, bhikkhave, hatthimaṁsaṁ paribhuñjitabbaṁ.

“You shouldn’t eat elephant meat.
710

योyo परिभुञ्जेय्य,pa·ri·bhuñ·jey·ya आपत्तिā·pat·ti दुक्कटस्सा”ति।duk·ka·ṭas·sā

Yo paribhuñjeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā”ti.

If you do, you commit an offense of wrong conduct.”
711

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na रञ्ञोrañ·ño अस्साas·sā मरन्ति।ma·ran·ti

Tena kho pana samayena rañño assā maranti.

At one time the king’s horses had died.
712

मनुस्साma·nus·sā दुब्भिक्खेdub·bhik·khe अस्समंसंas·sa·maṃ·saṃ परिभुञ्जन्ति,pa·ri·bhuñ·jan·ti भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ पिण्डायpiṇ·ḍā·ya चरन्तानंca·ran·tā·naṃ अस्समंसंas·sa·maṃ·saṃ देन्ति।den·ti

Manussā dubbhikkhe assamaṁsaṁ paribhuñjanti, bhikkhūnaṁ piṇḍāya carantānaṁ assamaṁsaṁ denti.

Because there was a shortage of food, people ate the horse meat. They also gave horse meat to monks who were walking for alms.
713

भिक्खूbhik·khū अस्समंसंas·sa·maṃ·saṃ परिभुञ्जन्ति।pa·ri·bhuñ·jan·ti

Bhikkhū assamaṁsaṁ paribhuñjanti.

When the monks ate it,
714

मनुस्साma·nus·sā उज्झायन्तिuj·jhā·yan·ti खिय्यन्तिkhiy·yan·ti विपाचेन्ति—vi·pā·cen·ti

Manussā ujjhāyanti khiyyanti vipācenti—

people complained and criticized them,
715

“कथञ्हिka·thañ·hi नामnā·ma समणाsa·ma·ṇā सक्यपुत्तियाsak·ya·put·ti·yā अस्समंसंas·sa·maṃ·saṃ परिभुञ्जिस्सन्ति।pa·ri·bhuñ·jis·san·ti

“kathañhi nāma samaṇā sakyaputtiyā assamaṁsaṁ paribhuñjissanti.

“How can the Sakyan monastics eat horse meat?
716

राजङ्गंrā·jaṅ·gaṃ अस्सा,as·sā सचेsa·ce राजाrā·jā जानेय्य,jā·ney·ya नna नेसंne·saṃ अत्तमनोat·ta·ma·no अस्सा”ति।as·sā

Rājaṅgaṁ assā, sace rājā jāneyya, na nesaṁ attamano assā”ti.

Horses are an attribute of kingship. If the king knew, he would not be pleased with those monks.”
717

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

They told the Buddha.
718

“न,na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अस्समंसंas·sa·maṃ·saṃ परिभुञ्जितब्बं।pa·ri·bhuñ·ji·tab·baṃ

“Na, bhikkhave, assamaṁsaṁ paribhuñjitabbaṁ.

“You shouldn’t eat horse meat.
719

योyo परिभुञ्जेय्य,pa·ri·bhuñ·jey·ya आपत्तिā·pat·ti दुक्कटस्सा”ति।duk·ka·ṭas·sā

Yo paribhuñjeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā”ti.

If you do, you commit an offense of wrong conduct.”
720

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na मनुस्साma·nus·sā दुब्भिक्खेdub·bhik·khe सुनखमंसंsu·na·kha·maṃ·saṃ परिभुञ्जन्ति,pa·ri·bhuñ·jan·ti भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ पिण्डायpiṇ·ḍā·ya चरन्तानंca·ran·tā·naṃ सुनखमंसंsu·na·kha·maṃ·saṃ देन्ति।den·ti

Tena kho pana samayena manussā dubbhikkhe sunakhamaṁsaṁ paribhuñjanti, bhikkhūnaṁ piṇḍāya carantānaṁ sunakhamaṁsaṁ denti.

At one time when there was a shortage of food, people ate dog meat. They also gave dog meat to monks who were walking for alms.
721

भिक्खूbhik·khū सुनखमंसंsu·na·kha·maṃ·saṃ परिभुञ्जन्ति।pa·ri·bhuñ·jan·ti

Bhikkhū sunakhamaṁsaṁ paribhuñjanti.

When the monks ate it,
722

मनुस्साma·nus·sā उज्झायन्तिuj·jhā·yan·ti खिय्यन्तिkhiy·yan·ti विपाचेन्ति—vi·pā·cen·ti

Manussā ujjhāyanti khiyyanti vipācenti—

people complained and criticized them,
723

“कथञ्हिka·thañ·hi नामnā·ma समणाsa·ma·ṇā सक्यपुत्तियाsak·ya·put·ti·yā सुनखमंसंsu·na·kha·maṃ·saṃ परिभुञ्जिस्सन्ति,pa·ri·bhuñ·jis·san·ti जेगुच्छोje·guc·cho सुनखोsu·na·kho पटिकूलो”ति।pa·ṭi·kū·lo

“kathañhi nāma samaṇā sakyaputtiyā sunakhamaṁsaṁ paribhuñjissanti, jeguccho sunakho paṭikūlo”ti.

“How can the Sakyan monastics eat dog meat? Dogs are disgusting and repulsive.”
724

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

They told the Buddha.
725

“न,na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सुनखमंसंsu·na·kha·maṃ·saṃ परिभुञ्जितब्बं।pa·ri·bhuñ·ji·tab·baṃ

“Na, bhikkhave, sunakhamaṁsaṁ paribhuñjitabbaṁ.

“You shouldn’t eat dog meat.
726

योyo परिभुञ्जेय्य,pa·ri·bhuñ·jey·ya आपत्तिā·pat·ti दुक्कटस्सा”ति।duk·ka·ṭas·sā

Yo paribhuñjeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā”ti.

If you do, you commit an offense of wrong conduct.”
727

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na मनुस्साma·nus·sā दुब्भिक्खेdub·bhik·khe अहिमंसंa·hi·maṃ·saṃ परिभुञ्जन्ति,pa·ri·bhuñ·jan·ti भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ पिण्डायpiṇ·ḍā·ya चरन्तानंca·ran·tā·naṃ अहिमंसंa·hi·maṃ·saṃ देन्ति।den·ti

Tena kho pana samayena manussā dubbhikkhe ahimaṁsaṁ paribhuñjanti, bhikkhūnaṁ piṇḍāya carantānaṁ ahimaṁsaṁ denti.

At one time when there was a shortage of food, people ate snake meat. They also gave snake meat to monks who were walking for alms.
728

भिक्खूbhik·khū अहिमंसंa·hi·maṃ·saṃ परिभुञ्जन्ति।pa·ri·bhuñ·jan·ti

Bhikkhū ahimaṁsaṁ paribhuñjanti.

When the monks ate it,
729

मनुस्साma·nus·sā उज्झायन्तिuj·jhā·yan·ti खिय्यन्तिkhiy·yan·ti विपाचेन्ति—vi·pā·cen·ti

Manussā ujjhāyanti khiyyanti vipācenti—

people complained and criticized them,
730

“कथञ्हिka·thañ·hi नामnā·ma समणाsa·ma·ṇā सक्यपुत्तियाsak·ya·put·ti·yā अहिमंसंa·hi·maṃ·saṃ परिभुञ्जिस्सन्ति,pa·ri·bhuñ·jis·san·ti जेगुच्छोje·guc·cho अहिa·hi पटिकूलो”ति।pa·ṭi·kū·lo

“kathañhi nāma samaṇā sakyaputtiyā ahimaṁsaṁ paribhuñjissanti, jeguccho ahi paṭikūlo”ti.

“How can the Sakyan monastics eat snake meat? Snakes are disgusting and repulsive.”
731

सुपस्सोपिsu·pas·so·pi नागराजाnā·ga·rā·jā येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ अट्ठासि।aṭ·ṭhā·si

Supassopi nāgarājā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi.

Even Supassa the king of dragons went to see the Buddha. He bowed down to the Buddha
732

एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ ठितोṭhi·to खोkho सुपस्सोsu·pas·so नागराजाnā·ga·rā·jā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

Ekamantaṁ ṭhito kho supasso nāgarājā bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

and said,
733

“सन्ति,san·ti भन्ते,bhan·te नागाnā·gā अस्सद्धाas·sad·dhā अप्पसन्ना।ap·pa·san·nā

“santi, bhante, nāgā assaddhā appasannā.

“Sir, there are dragons without faith and confidence.
734

तेte अप्पमत्तकेहिपिap·pa·mat·ta·ke·hi·pi भिक्खूbhik·khū विहेठेय्युं।vi·he·ṭhey·yuṃ

Te appamattakehipi bhikkhū viheṭheyyuṁ.

They might harm the monks even over small matters.
735

साधु,sā·dhu भन्ते,bhan·te अय्याay·yā अहिमंसंa·hi·maṃ·saṃ नna परिभुञ्जेय्युन्”ति।pa·ri·bhuñ·jey·yun

Sādhu, bhante, ayyā ahimaṁsaṁ na paribhuñjeyyun”ti.

Please ask the venerables not to eat snake meat.”
736

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā सुपस्संsu·pas·saṃ नागराजानंnā·ga·rā·jā·naṃ धम्मियाdham·mi·yā कथायka·thā·ya सन्दस्सेसिsan·das·se·si …पे…pe पदक्खिणंpa·dak·khi·ṇaṃ कत्वाkat·vā पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

Atha kho bhagavā supassaṁ nāgarājānaṁ dhammiyā kathāya sandassesi …pe… padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pakkāmi.

The Buddha instructed, inspired, and gladdened him with a teaching, after which Supassa bowed down, circumambulated the Buddha with his right side toward him, and left.
737

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ निदानेni·dā·ne एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ पकरणेpa·ka·ra·ṇe धम्मिंdham·miṃ कथंka·thaṃ कत्वाkat·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

Atha kho bhagavā etasmiṁ nidāne etasmiṁ pakaraṇe dhammiṁ kathaṁ katvā bhikkhū āmantesi—

Soon afterwards the Buddha gave a teaching and addressed the monks:
738

“न,na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अहिमंसंa·hi·maṃ·saṃ परिभुञ्जितब्बं।pa·ri·bhuñ·ji·tab·baṃ

“na, bhikkhave, ahimaṁsaṁ paribhuñjitabbaṁ.

“You shouldn’t eat snake meat.
739

योyo परिभुञ्जेय्य,pa·ri·bhuñ·jey·ya आपत्तिā·pat·ti दुक्कटस्सा”ति।duk·ka·ṭas·sā

Yo paribhuñjeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā”ti.

If you do, you commit an offense of wrong conduct.”
740

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na लुद्दकाlud·da·kā सीहंsī·haṃ हन्त्वाhan·tvā सीहमंसंsī·ha·maṃ·saṃ परिभुञ्जन्ति,pa·ri·bhuñ·jan·ti भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ पिण्डायpiṇ·ḍā·ya चरन्तानंca·ran·tā·naṃ सीहमंसंsī·ha·maṃ·saṃ देन्ति।den·ti

Tena kho pana samayena luddakā sīhaṁ hantvā sīhamaṁsaṁ paribhuñjanti, bhikkhūnaṁ piṇḍāya carantānaṁ sīhamaṁsaṁ denti.

On one occasion hunters killed a lion and ate the lion meat. They also gave lion meat to monks who were walking for alms.
741

भिक्खूbhik·khū सीहमंसंsī·ha·maṃ·saṃ परिभुञ्जित्वाpa·ri·bhuñ·jit·vā अरञ्ञेa·rañ·ñe विहरन्ति।vi·ha·ran·ti

Bhikkhū sīhamaṁsaṁ paribhuñjitvā araññe viharanti.

After eating it, those monks returned to the wilderness.
742

सीहाsī·hā सीहमंसगन्धेनsī·ha·maṃ·sa·gan·dhe·na भिक्खूbhik·khū परिपातेन्ति।pa·ri·pā·ten·ti

Sīhā sīhamaṁsagandhena bhikkhū paripātenti.

And because of the smell of lion meat, lions attacked them.
743

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
744

“न,na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सीहमंसंsī·ha·maṃ·saṃ परिभुञ्जितब्बं।pa·ri·bhuñ·ji·tab·baṃ

“Na, bhikkhave, sīhamaṁsaṁ paribhuñjitabbaṁ.

“You shouldn’t eat lion meat.
745

योyo परिभुञ्जेय्य,pa·ri·bhuñ·jey·ya आपत्तिā·pat·ti दुक्कटस्सा”ति।duk·ka·ṭas·sā

Yo paribhuñjeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā”ti.

If you do, you commit an offense of wrong conduct.”
746

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na लुद्दकाlud·da·kā ब्यग्घंbyag·ghaṃ हन्त्वाhan·tvā …पे…pe

Tena kho pana samayena luddakā byagghaṁ hantvā …pe…

On one occasion hunters killed a tiger …
747

दीपिंdī·piṃ हन्त्वाhan·tvā …पे…pe

dīpiṁ hantvā …pe…

a leopard …
748

अच्छंac·chaṃ हन्त्वाhan·tvā …पे…pe

acchaṁ hantvā …pe…

a bear …
749

तरच्छंta·rac·chaṃ हन्त्वाhan·tvā तरच्छमंसंta·rac·cha·maṃ·saṃ परिभुञ्जन्ति,pa·ri·bhuñ·jan·ti भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ पिण्डायpiṇ·ḍā·ya चरन्तानंca·ran·tā·naṃ तरच्छमंसंta·rac·cha·maṃ·saṃ देन्ति।den·ti

taracchaṁ hantvā taracchamaṁsaṁ paribhuñjanti, bhikkhūnaṁ piṇḍāya carantānaṁ taracchamaṁsaṁ denti.

a hyena and ate the hyena meat. They also gave hyena meat to monks who were walking for alms.
750

भिक्खूbhik·khū तरच्छमंसंta·rac·cha·maṃ·saṃ परिभुञ्जित्वाpa·ri·bhuñ·jit·vā अरञ्ञेa·rañ·ñe विहरन्ति।vi·ha·ran·ti

Bhikkhū taracchamaṁsaṁ paribhuñjitvā araññe viharanti.

After eating it, those monks returned to the wilderness.
751

तरच्छाta·rac·chā तरच्छमंसगन्धेनta·rac·cha·maṃ·sa·gan·dhe·na भिक्खूbhik·khū परिपातेन्ति।pa·ri·pā·ten·ti

Taracchā taracchamaṁsagandhena bhikkhū paripātenti.

And because of the smell of hyena meat, hyenas attacked them.
752

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
753

“न,na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve तरच्छमंसंta·rac·cha·maṃ·saṃ परिभुञ्जितब्बं।pa·ri·bhuñ·ji·tab·baṃ

“Na, bhikkhave, taracchamaṁsaṁ paribhuñjitabbaṁ.

“You shouldn’t eat tiger meat, leopard meat, bear meat, or hyena meat.
754

योyo परिभुञ्जेय्य,pa·ri·bhuñ·jey·ya आपत्तिā·pat·ti दुक्कटस्सा”ति।duk·ka·ṭas·sā

Yo paribhuñjeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā”ti.

If you do, you commit an offense of wrong conduct.”
755

सुप्पियभाणवारोsup·pi·ya·bhā·ṇa·vā·ro निट्ठितोniṭ·ṭhi·to दुतियो।du·ti·yo

Suppiyabhāṇavāro niṭṭhito dutiyo.

The second section for recitation on Suppiyā is finished.
756

11। यागुमधुगोळकानुजाननyā·gu·ma·dhu·go·ḷa·kā·nu·jā·na·na

11. Yāgumadhugoḷakānujānana

11. The allowance for congee and honey balls
757

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā बाराणसियंbā·rā·ṇa·si·yaṃ यथाभिरन्तंya·thā·bhi·ran·taṃ विहरित्वाvi·ha·rit·vā येनye·na अन्धकविन्दंan·dha·ka·vin·daṃ तेनte·na चारिकंcā·ri·kaṃ पक्कामि,pak·kā·mi महताma·ha·tā भिक्खुसङ्घेनbhik·khu·saṅ·ghe·na सद्धिं,sad·dhiṃ अड्ढतेलसेहिaḍ·ḍha·te·la·se·hi भिक्खुसतेहि।bhik·khu·sa·te·hi

Atha kho bhagavā bārāṇasiyaṁ yathābhirantaṁ viharitvā yena andhakavindaṁ tena cārikaṁ pakkāmi, mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ, aḍḍhatelasehi bhikkhusatehi.

When the Buddha had stayed at Benares for as long as he liked, he set out wandering toward Andhakavinda together with a large sangha of twelve-hundred and fifty monks.
758

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na जानपदाjā·na·pa·dā मनुस्साma·nus·sā बहुंba·huṃ लोणम्पि,lo·ṇam·pi तेलम्पि,te·lam·pi तण्डुलम्पि,taṇ·ḍu·lam·pi खादनीयम्पिkhā·da·nī·yam·pi सकटेसुsa·ka·ṭe·su आरोपेत्वाā·ro·pet·vā बुद्धप्पमुखस्सbud·dhap·pa·mu·khas·sa भिक्खुसङ्घस्सbhik·khu·saṅ·ghas·sa पिट्ठितोpiṭ·ṭhi·to पिट्ठितोpiṭ·ṭhi·to अनुबन्धाa·nu·ban·dhā होन्ति—hon·ti

Tena kho pana samayena jānapadā manussā bahuṁ loṇampi, telampi, taṇḍulampi, khādanīyampi sakaṭesu āropetvā buddhappamukhassa bhikkhusaṅghassa piṭṭhito piṭṭhito anubandhā honti—

On this occasion the country people had loaded large quantities of salt, oil, rice, and fresh food onto carts, and were following behind the Sangha of monks headed by the Buddha, thinking,
759

“यदाya·dā पटिपाटिंpa·ṭi·pā·ṭiṃ लभिस्सामla·bhis·sā·ma तदाta·dā भत्तंbhat·taṃ करिस्सामा”ति,ka·ris·sā·mā पञ्चमत्तानिpañ·ca·mat·tā·ni चca विघासादसतानि।vi·ghā·sā·da·sa·tā·ni

“yadā paṭipāṭiṁ labhissāma tadā bhattaṁ karissāmā”ti, pañcamattāni ca vighāsādasatāni.

“When our turn comes, we’ll prepare a meal.” Five hundred people living on scraps were also following along.
760

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā अनुपुब्बेनa·nu·pub·be·na चारिकंcā·ri·kaṃ चरमानोca·ra·mā·no येनye·na अन्धकविन्दंan·dha·ka·vin·daṃ तदवसरि।ta·da·va·sa·ri

Atha kho bhagavā anupubbena cārikaṁ caramāno yena andhakavindaṁ tadavasari.

Eventually the Buddha arrived at Andhakavinda and stayed there.
761

अथa·tha खोkho अञ्ञतरस्सañ·ña·ta·ras·sa ब्राह्मणस्सbrāh·ma·ṇas·sa पटिपाटिंpa·ṭi·pā·ṭiṃ अलभन्तस्सa·la·bhan·tas·sa एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

Atha kho aññatarassa brāhmaṇassa paṭipāṭiṁ alabhantassa etadahosi—

Soon afterwards a certain brahmin whose turn to offer a meal had not yet come, thought,
762

“अतीतानिa·tī·tā·ni खोkho मेme द्वेdve मासानिmā·sā·ni बुद्धप्पमुखंbud·dhap·pa·mu·khaṃ भिक्खुसङ्घंbhik·khu·saṅ·ghaṃ अनुबन्धन्तस्सa·nu·ban·dhan·tas·sa ‘यदाya·dā पटिपाटिंpa·ṭi·pā·ṭiṃ लभिस्सामिla·bhis·sā·mi तदाta·dā भत्तंbhat·taṃ करिस्सामी’ति,ka·ris·sā·mī नna चca मेme पटिपाटिpa·ṭi·pā·ṭi लब्भति,lab·bha·ti अहञ्चम्हिa·hañ·cam·hi एकत्तको,e·kat·ta·ko बहुba·hu चca मेme घरावासत्थोgha·rā·vā·sat·tho हायति।hā·ya·ti

“atītāni kho me dve māsāni buddhappamukhaṁ bhikkhusaṅghaṁ anubandhantassa ‘yadā paṭipāṭiṁ labhissāmi tadā bhattaṁ karissāmī’ti, na ca me paṭipāṭi labbhati, ahañcamhi ekattako, bahu ca me gharāvāsattho hāyati.

“I’ve been following the Sangha of monks headed by the Buddha for two months waiting to offer them a meal, and I’m still waiting. Moreover, I am all alone, and all my household business is being neglected.
763

यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ भत्तग्गंbhat·tag·gaṃ ओलोकेय्यं;o·lo·key·yaṃ

Yannūnāhaṁ bhattaggaṁ olokeyyaṁ;

Why don’t I inspect the dining hall
764

यंyaṃ भत्तग्गेbhat·tag·ge नास्स,nās·sa तंtaṃ पटियादेय्यन्”ति।pa·ṭi·yā·dey·yan

yaṁ bhattagge nāssa, taṁ paṭiyādeyyan”ti.

and prepare whatever is lacking?”
765

अथa·tha खोkho सोso ब्राह्मणोbrāh·ma·ṇo भत्तग्गंbhat·tag·gaṃ ओलोकेन्तोo·lo·ken·to द्वेdve नाद्दस—nād·da·sa

Atha kho so brāhmaṇo bhattaggaṁ olokento dve nāddasa—

When he did, he saw that two things were missing:
766

यागुञ्चyā·guñ·ca मधुगोळकञ्च।ma·dhu·go·ḷa·kañ·ca

yāguñca madhugoḷakañca.

congee and honey balls.
767

अथa·tha खोkho सोso ब्राह्मणोbrāh·ma·ṇo येनायस्माye·nā·yas·mā आनन्दोā·nan·do तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ आनन्दंā·nan·daṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

Atha kho so brāhmaṇo yenāyasmā ānando tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ etadavoca—

He then went to Venerable Ānanda and told what he had been thinking,
768

“इधi·dha मे,me भोbho आनन्द,ā·nan·da पटिपाटिंpa·ṭi·pā·ṭiṃ अलभन्तस्सa·la·bhan·tas·sa एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

“idha me, bho ānanda, paṭipāṭiṁ alabhantassa etadahosi—

(Pāli only)
769

‘अतीतानिa·tī·tā·ni खोkho मेme द्वेdve मासानिmā·sā·ni बुद्धप्पमुखंbud·dhap·pa·mu·khaṃ भिक्खुसङ्घंbhik·khu·saṅ·ghaṃ अनुबन्धन्तस्स,a·nu·ban·dhan·tas·sa “यदाya·dā पटिपाटिंpa·ṭi·pā·ṭiṃ लभिस्सामिla·bhis·sā·mi तदाta·dā भत्तंbhat·taṃ करिस्सामी”ति।ka·ris·sā·mī

‘atītāni kho me dve māsāni buddhappamukhaṁ bhikkhusaṅghaṁ anubandhantassa, “yadā paṭipāṭiṁ labhissāmi tadā bhattaṁ karissāmī”ti.

(Pāli only)
770

नna चca मेme पटिपाटिpa·ṭi·pā·ṭi लब्भति,lab·bha·ti अहञ्चम्हिa·hañ·cam·hi एकत्तको,e·kat·ta·ko बहुba·hu चca मेme घरावासत्थोgha·rā·vā·sat·tho हायति।hā·ya·ti

Na ca me paṭipāṭi labbhati, ahañcamhi ekattako, bahu ca me gharāvāsattho hāyati.

(Pāli only)
771

यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ भत्तग्गंbhat·tag·gaṃ ओलोकेय्यं;o·lo·key·yaṃ

Yannūnāhaṁ bhattaggaṁ olokeyyaṁ;

(Pāli only)
772

यंyaṃ भत्तग्गेbhat·tag·ge नास्स,nās·sa तंtaṃ पटियादेय्यन्’ति।pa·ṭi·yā·dey·yan

yaṁ bhattagge nāssa, taṁ paṭiyādeyyan’ti.

(Pāli only)
773

सोso खोkho अहं,a·haṃ भोbho आनन्द,ā·nan·da भत्तग्गंbhat·tag·gaṃ ओलोकेन्तोo·lo·ken·to द्वेdve नाद्दसं—nād·da·saṃ

So kho ahaṁ, bho ānanda, bhattaggaṁ olokento dve nāddasaṁ—

(Pāli only)
774

यागुञ्चyā·guñ·ca मधुगोळकञ्च।ma·dhu·go·ḷa·kañ·ca

yāguñca madhugoḷakañca.

(Pāli only)
775

सचाहं,sa·cā·haṃ भोbho आनन्द,ā·nan·da पटियादेय्यंpa·ṭi·yā·dey·yaṃ यागुञ्चyā·guñ·ca मधुगोळकञ्च,ma·dhu·go·ḷa·kañ·ca पटिग्गण्हेय्यpa·ṭig·gaṇ·hey·ya मेme भवंbha·vaṃ गोतमो”ति?go·ta·mo

Sacāhaṁ, bho ānanda, paṭiyādeyyaṁ yāguñca madhugoḷakañca, paṭiggaṇheyya me bhavaṁ gotamo”ti?

adding, “Good Ānanda, if I were to prepare congee and honey balls, would Good Gotama accept it?”
776

“तेनte·na हि,hi ब्राह्मण,brāh·ma·ṇa भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ पटिपुच्छिस्सामी”ति।pa·ṭi·puc·chis·sā·mī

“Tena hi, brāhmaṇa, bhagavantaṁ paṭipucchissāmī”ti.

“Well, brahmin, let me ask the Buddha.”
777

अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā आनन्दोā·nan·do भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसि।ā·ro·ce·si

Atha kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesi.

Venerable Ānanda told the Buddha,
778

“तेनte·na हानन्द,hā·nan·da पटियादेतू”ति।pa·ṭi·yā·de·tū

“Tena hānanda, paṭiyādetū”ti.

who said, “Allow it to be prepared, Ānanda.”
779

“तेनte·na हि,hi ब्राह्मण,brāh·ma·ṇa पटियादेही”ति।pa·ṭi·yā·de·hī

“Tena hi, brāhmaṇa, paṭiyādehī”ti.

Ānanda passed the message on to the brahmin.
780

अथa·tha खोkho सोso ब्राह्मणोbrāh·ma·ṇo तस्साtas·sā रत्तियाrat·ti·yā अच्चयेनac·ca·ye·na पहूतंpa·hū·taṃ यागुञ्चyā·guñ·ca मधुगोळकञ्चma·dhu·go·ḷa·kañ·ca पटियादापेत्वाpa·ṭi·yā·dā·pet·vā भगवतोbha·ga·va·to उपनामेसि—u·pa·nā·me·si

Atha kho so brāhmaṇo tassā rattiyā accayena pahūtaṁ yāguñca madhugoḷakañca paṭiyādāpetvā bhagavato upanāmesi—

The following morning that brahmin prepared much congee and many honey balls and brought it to the Buddha, saying,
781

“पटिग्गण्हातुpa·ṭig·gaṇ·hā·tu मेme भवंbha·vaṃ गोतमोgo·ta·mo यागुञ्चyā·guñ·ca मधुगोळकञ्चा”ति।ma·dhu·go·ḷa·kañ·cā

“paṭiggaṇhātu me bhavaṁ gotamo yāguñca madhugoḷakañcā”ti.

“Good Gotama, please accept the congee and the honey balls.”
782

“तेनte·na हि,hi ब्राह्मण,brāh·ma·ṇa भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ देही”ति।de·hī

“Tena hi, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhūnaṁ dehī”ti.

“Well then, brahmin, give it to the monks.”
783

भिक्खूbhik·khū कुक्कुच्चायन्ताkuk·kuc·cā·yan·tā नna पटिग्गण्हन्ति।pa·ṭig·gaṇ·han·ti

Bhikkhū kukkuccāyantā na paṭiggaṇhanti.

But being afraid of wrongdoing, the monks did not accept.
784

“पटिग्गण्हथ,pa·ṭig·gaṇ·ha·tha भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve परिभुञ्जथा”ति।pa·ri·bhuñ·ja·thā

“Paṭiggaṇhatha, bhikkhave, paribhuñjathā”ti.

The Buddha said, “Accept, monks, and eat.”
785

अथa·tha खोkho सोso ब्राह्मणोbrāh·ma·ṇo बुद्धप्पमुखंbud·dhap·pa·mu·khaṃ भिक्खुसङ्घंbhik·khu·saṅ·ghaṃ पहूतायpa·hū·tā·ya यागुयाyā·gu·yā चca मधुगोळकेनma·dhu·go·ḷa·ke·na चca सहत्थाsa·hat·thā सन्तप्पेत्वाsan·tap·pet·vā सम्पवारेत्वाsam·pa·vā·ret·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ धोतहत्थंdho·ta·hat·thaṃ ओनीतपत्तपाणिंo·nī·ta·pat·ta·pā·ṇiṃ एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di

Atha kho so brāhmaṇo buddhappamukhaṁ bhikkhusaṅghaṁ pahūtāya yāguyā ca madhugoḷakena ca sahatthā santappetvā sampavāretvā bhagavantaṁ dhotahatthaṁ onītapattapāṇiṁ ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

That brahmin then personally served much congee and many honey balls to the Sangha of monks headed by the Buddha. When the Buddha had finished his meal, the brahmin sat down to one side.
786

एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नंni·sin·naṃ खोkho तंtaṃ ब्राह्मणंbrāh·ma·ṇaṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho taṁ brāhmaṇaṁ bhagavā etadavoca—

And the Buddha said this to him:
787

“दसयिमे,da·sa·yi·me ब्राह्मण,brāh·ma·ṇa आनिसंसाā·ni·saṃ·sā यागुया।yā·gu·yā

“Dasayime, brāhmaṇa, ānisaṁsā yāguyā.

“Brahmin, there are these ten benefits of congee.
788

कतमेka·ta·me दस?da·sa

Katame dasa?

(Pāli only)
789

यागुंyā·guṃ देन्तोden·to आयुंā·yuṃ देति,de·ti वण्णंvaṇ·ṇaṃ देति,de·ti सुखंsu·khaṃ देति,de·ti बलंba·laṃ देति,de·ti पटिभानंpa·ṭi·bhā·naṃ देति,de·ti यागुyā·gu पीताpī·tā खुद्दंkhud·daṃ पटिहनति,pa·ṭi·ha·na·ti पिपासंpi·pā·saṃ विनेति,vi·ne·ti वातंvā·taṃ अनुलोमेति,a·nu·lo·me·ti वत्थिंvat·thiṃ सोधेति,so·dhe·ti आमावसेसंā·mā·va·se·saṃ पाचेति—pā·ce·ti

Yāguṁ dento āyuṁ deti, vaṇṇaṁ deti, sukhaṁ deti, balaṁ deti, paṭibhānaṁ deti, yāgu pītā khuddaṁ paṭihanati, pipāsaṁ vineti, vātaṁ anulometi, vatthiṁ sodheti, āmāvasesaṁ pāceti—

One who gives congee gives life, beauty, happiness, strength, and eloquence; drinking congee stills hunger, allays thirst, gets rid of wind, cleans out the bladder, and helps the digestion of food remnants.
790

इमेi·me खो,kho ब्राह्मण,brāh·ma·ṇa दसानिसंसाda·sā·ni·saṃ·sā यागुयाति।yā·gu·yā·ti

ime kho, brāhmaṇa, dasānisaṁsā yāguyāti.

(Pāli only)
791

योyo सञ्ञतानंsañ·ña·tā·naṃ परदत्तभोजिनं,pa·ra·dat·ta·bho·ji·naṃ

Yo saññatānaṁ paradattabhojinaṁ,

One who gives congee respectfully at the right time
792

कालेनkā·le·na सक्कच्चsak·kac·ca ददातिda·dā·ti यागुं;yā·guṃ

Kālena sakkacca dadāti yāguṁ;

To the restrained ones who live on the gifts of others,
793

दसस्सda·sas·sa ठानानिṭhā·nā·ni अनुप्पवेच्छति,a·nup·pa·vec·cha·ti

Dasassa ṭhānāni anuppavecchati,

Such a one supplies them with ten things:
794

आयुञ्चā·yuñ·ca वण्णञ्चvaṇ·ṇañ·ca सुखंsu·khaṃ बलञ्च।ba·lañ·ca

Āyuñca vaṇṇañca sukhaṁ balañca.

Long life, beauty, happiness, and strength,
795

पटिभानमस्सpa·ṭi·bhā·na·mas·sa उपजायतेu·pa·jā·ya·te ततो,ta·to

Paṭibhānamassa upajāyate tato,

And eloquence, too, one gets from that;
796

खुद्दंkhud·daṃ पिपासञ्चpi·pā·sañ·ca ब्यपनेतिbya·pa·ne·ti वातं;vā·taṃ

Khuddaṁ pipāsañca byapaneti vātaṁ;

Hunger, thirst, and wind are removed,
797

सोधेतिso·dhe·ti वत्थिंvat·thiṃ परिणामेतिpa·ri·ṇā·me·ti भत्तं,bhat·taṃ

Sodheti vatthiṁ pariṇāmeti bhattaṁ,

The bladder is cleaned and the food digested.
798

भेसज्जमेतंbhe·saj·ja·me·taṃ सुगतेनsu·ga·te·na वण्णितं।vaṇ·ṇi·taṃ

Bhesajjametaṁ sugatena vaṇṇitaṁ.

This tonic is praised by the Accomplished One.
799

तस्माtas·mā हिhi यागुंyā·guṃ अलमेवa·la·me·va दातुं,dā·tuṃ

Tasmā hi yāguṁ alameva dātuṁ,

Therefore, for a person looking for happiness—
800

निच्चंnic·caṃ मनुस्सेनma·nus·se·na सुखत्थिकेन;su·khat·thi·ke·na

Niccaṁ manussena sukhatthikena;

One wishing for heavenly bliss
801

दिब्बानिdib·bā·ni वाvā पत्थयताpat·tha·ya·tā सुखानि,su·khā·ni

Dibbāni vā patthayatā sukhāni,

Or desiring human prosperity—
802

मनुस्ससोभग्यतमिच्छताma·nus·sa·so·bhag·ya·ta·mic·cha·tā वा”ति।vā

Manussasobhagyatamicchatā vā”ti.

It’s appropriate to give congee regularly.”
803

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā तंtaṃ ब्राह्मणंbrāh·ma·ṇaṃ इमाहिi·mā·hi गाथाहिgā·thā·hi अनुमोदित्वाa·nu·mo·dit·vā उट्ठायासनाuṭ·ṭhā·yā·sa·nā पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

Atha kho bhagavā taṁ brāhmaṇaṁ imāhi gāthāhi anumoditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmi.

The Buddha then got up from his seat and left.
804

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ निदानेni·dā·ne एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ पकरणेpa·ka·ra·ṇe धम्मिंdham·miṃ कथंka·thaṃ कत्वाkat·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

Atha kho bhagavā etasmiṁ nidāne etasmiṁ pakaraṇe dhammiṁ kathaṁ katvā bhikkhū āmantesi—

Soon afterwards he gave a teaching and addressed the monks:
805

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve यागुञ्चyā·guñ·ca मधुगोळकञ्चा”ति।ma·dhu·go·ḷa·kañ·cā

“anujānāmi, bhikkhave, yāguñca madhugoḷakañcā”ti.

“I allow congee and honey balls.”
806

12। तरुणपसन्नमहामत्तवत्थुta·ru·ṇa·pa·san·na·ma·hā·mat·ta·vat·thu

12. Taruṇapasannamahāmattavatthu

12. The government official with recently acquired faith
807

अस्सोसुंas·so·suṃ खोkho मनुस्साma·nus·sā भगवताbha·ga·va·tā किरki·ra यागुyā·gu अनुञ्ञाताa·nuñ·ñā·tā मधुगोळकञ्चाति।ma·dhu·go·ḷa·kañ·cā·ti

Assosuṁ kho manussā bhagavatā kira yāgu anuññātā madhugoḷakañcāti.

When people heard that the Buddha had allowed congee and honey balls,
808

तेte कालस्सेव,kā·las·se·va भोज्जयागुंbhoj·ja·yā·guṃ पटियादेन्तिpa·ṭi·yā·den·ti मधुगोळकञ्च।ma·dhu·go·ḷa·kañ·ca

Te kālasseva, bhojjayāguṁ paṭiyādenti madhugoḷakañca.

they prepared rice porridge and honey balls early in the morning.
809

भिक्खूbhik·khū कालस्सेवkā·las·se·va भोज्जयागुयाbhoj·ja·yā·gu·yā धाताdhā·tā मधुगोळकेनma·dhu·go·ḷa·ke·na चca भत्तग्गेbhat·tag·ge नna चित्तरूपंcit·ta·rū·paṃ परिभुञ्जन्ति।pa·ri·bhuñ·jan·ti

Bhikkhū kālasseva bhojjayāguyā dhātā madhugoḷakena ca bhattagge na cittarūpaṁ paribhuñjanti.

After eating rice porridge and honey balls to their satisfaction in the morning, the monks did not eat as much as they had intended in the dining hall.
810

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरेनañ·ña·ta·re·na तरुणपसन्नेनta·ru·ṇa·pa·san·ne·na महामत्तेनma·hā·mat·te·na स्वातनायsvā·ta·nā·ya बुद्धप्पमुखोbud·dhap·pa·mu·kho भिक्खुसङ्घोbhik·khu·saṅ·gho निमन्तितोni·man·ti·to होति।ho·ti

Tena kho pana samayena aññatarena taruṇapasannena mahāmattena svātanāya buddhappamukho bhikkhusaṅgho nimantito hoti.

At this time a certain government official who had recently acquired faith in Buddhism had invited the Sangha of monks headed by the Buddha for the meal on the following day.
811

अथa·tha खोkho तस्सtas·sa तरुणपसन्नस्सta·ru·ṇa·pa·san·nas·sa महामत्तस्सma·hā·mat·tas·sa एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

Atha kho tassa taruṇapasannassa mahāmattassa etadahosi—

He thought,
812

“यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ अड्ढतेलसन्नंaḍ·ḍha·te·la·san·naṃ भिक्खुसतानंbhik·khu·sa·tā·naṃ अड्ढतेलसानिaḍ·ḍha·te·la·sā·ni मंसपातिसतानिmaṃ·sa·pā·ti·sa·tā·ni पटियादेय्यं,pa·ṭi·yā·dey·yaṃ एकमेकस्सe·ka·me·kas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no एकमेकंe·ka·me·kaṃ मंसपातिंmaṃ·sa·pā·tiṃ उपनामेय्यन्”ति।u·pa·nā·mey·yan

“yannūnāhaṁ aḍḍhatelasannaṁ bhikkhusatānaṁ aḍḍhatelasāni maṁsapātisatāni paṭiyādeyyaṁ, ekamekassa bhikkhuno ekamekaṁ maṁsapātiṁ upanāmeyyan”ti.

“Why don’t I prepare twelve hundred and fifty bowls of meat for the twelve hundred and fifty monks? I can then give one bowl to each and every monk.”
813

अथa·tha खोkho सोso तरुणपसन्नोta·ru·ṇa·pa·san·no महामत्तोma·hā·mat·to तस्साtas·sā रत्तियाrat·ti·yā अच्चयेनac·ca·ye·na पणीतंpa·ṇī·taṃ खादनीयंkhā·da·nī·yaṃ भोजनीयंbho·ja·nī·yaṃ पटियादापेत्वाpa·ṭi·yā·dā·pet·vā अड्ढतेलसानिaḍ·ḍha·te·la·sā·ni चca मंसपातिसतानि,maṃ·sa·pā·ti·sa·tā·ni भगवतोbha·ga·va·to कालंkā·laṃ आरोचापेसि—“कालो,ā·ro·cā·pe·si भन्ते,bhan·te निट्ठितंniṭ·ṭhi·taṃ भत्तन्”ति।bhat·tan

Atha kho so taruṇapasanno mahāmatto tassā rattiyā accayena paṇītaṁ khādanīyaṁ bhojanīyaṁ paṭiyādāpetvā aḍḍhatelasāni ca maṁsapātisatāni, bhagavato kālaṁ ārocāpesi—“kālo, bhante, niṭṭhitaṁ bhattan”ti.

The following morning that official had various kinds of fine foods prepared, as well as twelve hundred and fifty bowls of meat. He then had the Buddha informed that the meal was ready.
814

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā पुब्बण्हसमयंpub·baṇ·ha·sa·ma·yaṃ निवासेत्वाni·vā·set·vā पत्तचीवरमादायpat·ta·cī·va·ra·mā·dā·ya येनye·na तस्सtas·sa तरुणपसन्नस्सta·ru·ṇa·pa·san·nas·sa महामत्तस्सma·hā·mat·tas·sa निवेसनंni·ve·sa·naṃ तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā पञ्ञत्तेpañ·ñat·te आसनेā·sa·ne निसीदि,ni·sī·di सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ भिक्खुसङ्घेन।bhik·khu·saṅ·ghe·na

Atha kho bhagavā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya yena tassa taruṇapasannassa mahāmattassa nivesanaṁ tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi, saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghena.

The Buddha robed up, took his bowl and robe, and went to that brahmin’s house where he sat down on the prepared seat together with the Sangha of monks.
815

अथa·tha खोkho सोso तरुणपसन्नोta·ru·ṇa·pa·san·no महामत्तोma·hā·mat·to भत्तग्गेbhat·tag·ge भिक्खूbhik·khū परिविसति।pa·ri·vi·sa·ti

Atha kho so taruṇapasanno mahāmatto bhattagge bhikkhū parivisati.

That official then served the monks in the dining hall.
816

भिक्खूbhik·khū एवमाहंसु—e·va·mā·haṃ·su

Bhikkhū evamāhaṁsu—

As he did so, the monks said,
817

“थोकं,tho·kaṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so देहि;de·hi थोकं,tho·kaṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so देही”ति।de·hī

“thokaṁ, āvuso, dehi; thokaṁ, āvuso, dehī”ti.

“Only a little, thanks.”
818

“माmā खोkho तुम्हे,tum·he भन्ते—‘अयंbhan·te तरुणपसन्नोta·ru·ṇa·pa·san·no महामत्तो’ति—थोकंma·hā·mat·to थोकंtho·kaṃ पटिग्गण्हथ।pa·ṭig·gaṇ·ha·tha

“Mā kho tumhe, bhante—‘ayaṁ taruṇapasanno mahāmatto’ti—thokaṁ thokaṁ paṭiggaṇhatha.

“Please don’t say that because I’ve only recently acquired faith in Buddhism.
819

बहुंba·huṃ मेme खादनीयंkhā·da·nī·yaṃ भोजनीयंbho·ja·nī·yaṃ पटियत्तं,pa·ṭi·yat·taṃ अड्ढतेलसानिaḍ·ḍha·te·la·sā·ni चca मंसपातिसतानि।maṃ·sa·pā·ti·sa·tā·ni

Bahuṁ me khādanīyaṁ bhojanīyaṁ paṭiyattaṁ, aḍḍhatelasāni ca maṁsapātisatāni.

I’ve prepared much food of various kinds, as well as twelve-hundred and fifty bowls of meat.
820

एकमेकस्सe·ka·me·kas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no एकमेकंe·ka·me·kaṃ मंसपातिंmaṃ·sa·pā·tiṃ उपनामेस्सामीति।u·pa·nā·mes·sā·mī·ti

Ekamekassa bhikkhuno ekamekaṁ maṁsapātiṁ upanāmessāmīti.

I’ll bring one bowl of meat to each and every one of you.
821

पटिग्गण्हथ,pa·ṭig·gaṇ·ha·tha भन्ते,bhan·te यावदत्थन्”ति।yā·va·dat·than

Paṭiggaṇhatha, bhante, yāvadatthan”ti.

Venerables, please accept as much as you like.”
822

“नna खोkho मयं,ma·yaṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so एतङ्कारणाe·taṅ·kā·ra·ṇā थोकंtho·kaṃ थोकंtho·kaṃ पटिग्गण्हाम,pa·ṭig·gaṇ·hā·ma अपिa·pi चca मयंma·yaṃ कालस्सेवkā·las·se·va भोज्जयागुयाbhoj·ja·yā·gu·yā धाताdhā·tā मधुगोळकेनma·dhu·go·ḷa·ke·na च।ca तेनte·na मयंma·yaṃ थोकंtho·kaṃ थोकंtho·kaṃ पटिग्गण्हामा”ति।pa·ṭig·gaṇ·hā·mā

“Na kho mayaṁ, āvuso, etaṅkāraṇā thokaṁ thokaṁ paṭiggaṇhāma, api ca mayaṁ kālasseva bhojjayāguyā dhātā madhugoḷakena ca. Tena mayaṁ thokaṁ thokaṁ paṭiggaṇhāmā”ti.

“We’re not taking so little because of that, but because we ate rice porridge and honey balls to our satisfaction early in the morning.”
823

अथa·tha खोkho सोso तरुणपसन्नोta·ru·ṇa·pa·san·no महामत्तोma·hā·mat·to उज्झायतिuj·jhā·ya·ti खिय्यतिkhiy·ya·ti विपाचेति—vi·pā·ce·ti

Atha kho so taruṇapasanno mahāmatto ujjhāyati khiyyati vipāceti—

The official complained and criticized them,
824

“कथञ्हिka·thañ·hi नामnā·ma भदन्ताbha·dan·tā मयाma·yā निमन्तिताni·man·ti·tā अञ्ञस्सañ·ñas·sa भोज्जयागुंbhoj·ja·yā·guṃ परिभुञ्जिस्सन्ति,pa·ri·bhuñ·jis·san·ti नna चाहंcā·haṃ पटिबलोpa·ṭi·ba·lo यावदत्थंyā·va·dat·thaṃ दातुन्”तिdā·tun

“kathañhi nāma bhadantā mayā nimantitā aññassa bhojjayāguṁ paribhuñjissanti, na cāhaṁ paṭibalo yāvadatthaṁ dātun”ti

“When the venerables have been invited by me, how can they eat someone else’s rice porridge? Am I incapable of giving them as much as they like?”
825

कुपितोku·pi·to अनत्तमनोa·nat·ta·ma·no आसादनापेक्खोā·sā·da·nā·pek·kho भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ पत्तेpat·te पूरेन्तोpū·ren·to अगमासि—“भुञ्जथa·ga·mā·si वाvā हरथha·ra·tha वा”ति।vā

kupito anattamano āsādanāpekkho bhikkhūnaṁ patte pūrento agamāsi—“bhuñjatha vā haratha vā”ti.

Angry and aiming to criticize, he walked around filling the monks’ almsbowls, saying, “Eat it or take it away.”
826

अथa·tha खोkho सोso तरुणपसन्नोta·ru·ṇa·pa·san·no महामत्तोma·hā·mat·to बुद्धप्पमुखंbud·dhap·pa·mu·khaṃ भिक्खुसङ्घंbhik·khu·saṅ·ghaṃ पणीतेनpa·ṇī·te·na खादनीयेनkhā·da·nī·ye·na भोजनीयेनbho·ja·nī·ye·na सहत्थाsa·hat·thā सन्तप्पेत्वाsan·tap·pet·vā सम्पवारेत्वाsam·pa·vā·ret·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ भुत्ताविंbhut·tā·viṃ ओनीतपत्तपाणिंo·nī·ta·pat·ta·pā·ṇiṃ एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di

Atha kho so taruṇapasanno mahāmatto buddhappamukhaṁ bhikkhusaṅghaṁ paṇītena khādanīyena bhojanīyena sahatthā santappetvā sampavāretvā bhagavantaṁ bhuttāviṁ onītapattapāṇiṁ ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

When he had personally served the various kinds of fine foods to the Sangha of monks headed by the Buddha, and the Buddha had finished his meal, the official sat down to one side.
827

एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नंni·sin·naṃ खोkho तंtaṃ तरुणपसन्नंta·ru·ṇa·pa·san·naṃ महामत्तंma·hā·mat·taṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā धम्मियाdham·mi·yā कथायka·thā·ya सन्दस्सेत्वाsan·das·set·vā समादपेत्वाsa·mā·da·pet·vā समुत्तेजेत्वाsa·mut·te·jet·vā सम्पहंसेत्वाsam·pa·haṃ·set·vā उट्ठायासनाuṭ·ṭhā·yā·sa·nā पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho taṁ taruṇapasannaṁ mahāmattaṁ bhagavā dhammiyā kathāya sandassetvā samādapetvā samuttejetvā sampahaṁsetvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmi.

The Buddha instructed, inspired, and gladdened him with a teaching, after which he got up from his seat and left.
828

अथa·tha खोkho तस्सtas·sa तरुणपसन्नस्सta·ru·ṇa·pa·san·nas·sa महामत्तस्सma·hā·mat·tas·sa अचिरपक्कन्तस्सa·ci·ra·pak·kan·tas·sa भगवतोbha·ga·va·to अहुदेवa·hu·de·va कुक्कुच्चं,kuk·kuc·caṃ अहुa·hu विप्पटिसारो—vip·pa·ṭi·sā·ro

Atha kho tassa taruṇapasannassa mahāmattassa acirapakkantassa bhagavato ahudeva kukkuccaṁ, ahu vippaṭisāro—

Soon after the Buddha had left, that official felt anxiety and remorse, thinking,
829

“अलाभाa·lā·bhā वतva·ta मे,me नna वतva·ta मेme लाभा;lā·bhā दुल्लद्धंdul·lad·dhaṃ वतva·ta मे,me नna वतva·ta मेme सुलद्धं;su·lad·dhaṃ

“alābhā vata me, na vata me lābhā; dulladdhaṁ vata me, na vata me suladdhaṁ;

“It’s bad for me, truly bad,
830

योहंyo·haṃ कुपितोku·pi·to अनत्तमनोa·nat·ta·ma·no आसादनापेक्खोā·sā·da·nā·pek·kho भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ पत्तेpat·te पूरेन्तोpū·ren·to अगमासिं—‘भुञ्जथa·ga·mā·siṃ वाvā हरथha·ra·tha वा’ति।vā

yohaṁ kupito anattamano āsādanāpekkho bhikkhūnaṁ patte pūrento agamāsiṁ—‘bhuñjatha vā haratha vā’ti.

that I acted like this.
831

किंkiṃ नुnu खोkho मयाma·yā बहुंba·huṃ पसुतंpa·su·taṃ पुञ्ञंpuñ·ñaṃ वाvā अपुञ्ञंa·puñ·ñaṃ वा”ति?vā

Kiṁ nu kho mayā bahuṁ pasutaṁ puññaṁ vā apuññaṁ vā”ti?

I wonder, did I make much merit or demerit?”
832

अथa·tha खोkho सोso तरुणपसन्नोta·ru·ṇa·pa·san·no महामत्तोma·hā·mat·to येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di

Atha kho so taruṇapasanno mahāmatto yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

He then went to the Buddha, bowed, sat down,
833

एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नोni·sin·no खोkho सोso तरुणपसन्नोta·ru·ṇa·pa·san·no महामत्तोma·hā·mat·to भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho so taruṇapasanno mahāmatto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

and told him what he had been thinking, adding,
834

“इधi·dha मय्हं,may·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te अचिरपक्कन्तस्सa·ci·ra·pak·kan·tas·sa भगवतोbha·ga·va·to अहुदेवa·hu·de·va कुक्कुच्चं,kuk·kuc·caṃ अहुa·hu विप्पटिसारोvip·pa·ṭi·sā·ro

“idha mayhaṁ, bhante, acirapakkantassa bhagavato ahudeva kukkuccaṁ, ahu vippaṭisāro

(Pāli only)
835

‘अलाभाa·lā·bhā वतva·ta मे,me नna वतva·ta मेme लाभा;lā·bhā दुल्लद्धंdul·lad·dhaṃ वतva·ta मे,me नna वतva·ta मेme सुलद्धं;su·lad·dhaṃ

‘alābhā vata me, na vata me lābhā; dulladdhaṁ vata me, na vata me suladdhaṁ;

(Pāli only)
836

योहंyo·haṃ कुपितोku·pi·to अनत्तमनोa·nat·ta·ma·no आसादनापेक्खोā·sā·da·nā·pek·kho भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ पत्तेpat·te पूरेन्तोpū·ren·to अगमासिं—भुञ्जथa·ga·mā·siṃ वाvā हरथha·ra·tha वाति।vā·ti

yohaṁ kupito anattamano āsādanāpekkho bhikkhūnaṁ patte pūrento agamāsiṁ—bhuñjatha vā haratha vāti.

(Pāli only)
837

किंkiṃ नुnu खोkho मयाma·yā बहुंba·huṃ पसुतं,pa·su·taṃ पुञ्ञंpuñ·ñaṃ वाvā अपुञ्ञंa·puñ·ñaṃ वा’ति।vā

Kiṁ nu kho mayā bahuṁ pasutaṁ, puññaṁ vā apuññaṁ vā’ti.

(Pāli only)
838

किंkiṃ नुnu खोkho मया,ma·yā भन्ते,bhan·te बहुंba·huṃ पसुतं,pa·su·taṃ पुञ्ञंpuñ·ñaṃ वाvā अपुञ्ञंa·puñ·ñaṃ वा”ति?vā

Kiṁ nu kho mayā, bhante, bahuṁ pasutaṁ, puññaṁ vā apuññaṁ vā”ti?

“I wonder, sir, did I make much merit or demerit?”
839

“यदग्गेनya·dag·ge·na तया,ta·yā आवुसो,ā·vu·so स्वातनायsvā·ta·nā·ya बुद्धप्पमुखोbud·dhap·pa·mu·kho भिक्खुसङ्घोbhik·khu·saṅ·gho निमन्तितोni·man·ti·to तदग्गेनta·dag·ge·na तेte बहुंba·huṃ पुञ्ञंpuñ·ñaṃ पसुतं।pa·su·taṃ

“Yadaggena tayā, āvuso, svātanāya buddhappamukho bhikkhusaṅgho nimantito tadaggena te bahuṁ puññaṁ pasutaṁ.

“When you invited the Sangha of monks headed by the Buddha for a meal on the following day, you made much merit.
840

यदग्गेनya·dag·ge·na तेte एकमेकेनe·ka·me·ke·na भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā एकमेकंe·ka·me·kaṃ सित्थंsit·thaṃ पटिग्गहितंpa·ṭig·ga·hi·taṃ तदग्गेनta·dag·ge·na तेte बहुंba·huṃ पुञ्ञंpuñ·ñaṃ पसुतं,pa·su·taṃ सग्गाsag·gā तेte आरद्धा”ति।ā·rad·dhā

Yadaggena te ekamekena bhikkhunā ekamekaṁ sitthaṁ paṭiggahitaṁ tadaggena te bahuṁ puññaṁ pasutaṁ, saggā te āraddhā”ti.

When each and every monk received rice from you, you made much merit. You are heading for heaven.”
841

अथa·tha खोkho सोso तरुणपसन्नोta·ru·ṇa·pa·san·no महामत्तो—“लाभाma·hā·mat·to किरki·ra मे,me सुलद्धंsu·lad·dhaṃ किरki·ra मे,me बहुंba·huṃ किरki·ra मयाma·yā पुञ्ञंpuñ·ñaṃ पसुतं,pa·su·taṃ सग्गाsag·gā किरki·ra मेme आरद्धा”ति—ā·rad·dhā

Atha kho so taruṇapasanno mahāmatto—“lābhā kira me, suladdhaṁ kira me, bahuṁ kira mayā puññaṁ pasutaṁ, saggā kira me āraddhā”ti—

When the official heard this,
842

हट्ठोhaṭ·ṭho उदग्गोu·dag·go उट्ठायासनाuṭ·ṭhā·yā·sa·nā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā पदक्खिणंpa·dak·khi·ṇaṃ कत्वाkat·vā पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

haṭṭho udaggo uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pakkāmi.

he was joyful and elated. He got up from his seat, bowed down, circumambulated the Buddha with his right side toward him, and left.
843

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ निदानेni·dā·ne एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ पकरणेpa·ka·ra·ṇe भिक्खुसङ्घंbhik·khu·saṅ·ghaṃ सन्निपातापेत्वाsan·ni·pā·tā·pet·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū पटिपुच्छि—pa·ṭi·puc·chi

Atha kho bhagavā etasmiṁ nidāne etasmiṁ pakaraṇe bhikkhusaṅghaṁ sannipātāpetvā bhikkhū paṭipucchi—

Soon afterwards the Buddha had the Sangha gathered and questioned the monks:
844

“सच्चंsac·caṃ किर,ki·ra भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खूbhik·khū अञ्ञत्रañ·ñat·ra निमन्तिताni·man·ti·tā अञ्ञस्सañ·ñas·sa भोज्जयागुंbhoj·ja·yā·guṃ परिभुञ्जन्ती”ति?pa·ri·bhuñ·jan·tī

“saccaṁ kira, bhikkhave, bhikkhū aññatra nimantitā aññassa bhojjayāguṁ paribhuñjantī”ti?

“Is it true, monks, that monks who had been invited for a meal ate someone else’s rice porridge beforehand?”
845

“सच्चं,sac·caṃ भगवा”ति।bha·ga·vā

“Saccaṁ, bhagavā”ti.

“It’s true, sir.”
846

विगरहिvi·ga·ra·hi बुद्धोbud·dho भगवाbha·ga·vā …पे…pe

Vigarahi buddho bhagavā …pe…

The Buddha rebuked them …
847

कथञ्हिka·thañ·hi नामnā·ma ते,te भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve मोघपुरिसाmo·gha·pu·ri·sā अञ्ञत्रañ·ñat·ra निमन्तिताni·man·ti·tā अञ्ञस्सañ·ñas·sa भोज्जयागुंbhoj·ja·yā·guṃ परिभुञ्जिस्सन्ति।pa·ri·bhuñ·jis·san·ti

kathañhi nāma te, bhikkhave, moghapurisā aññatra nimantitā aññassa bhojjayāguṁ paribhuñjissanti.

“How can those foolish men eat someone else’s congee beforehand when they have been invited for a meal?
848

नेतं,ne·taṃ भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अप्पसन्नानंap·pa·san·nā·naṃ वाvā पसादायpa·sā·dā·ya …पे…pe

Netaṁ, bhikkhave, appasannānaṁ vā pasādāya …pe…

This will affect people’s confidence …”
849

विगरहित्वाvi·ga·ra·hit·vā धम्मिंdham·miṃ कथंka·thaṃ कत्वाkat·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

vigarahitvā dhammiṁ kathaṁ katvā bhikkhū āmantesi—

After rebuking them, he gave a teaching and addressed the monks:
850

“न,na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अञ्ञत्रañ·ñat·ra निमन्तितेनni·man·ti·te·na अञ्ञस्सañ·ñas·sa भोज्जयागुbhoj·ja·yā·gu परिभुञ्जितब्बा।pa·ri·bhuñ·ji·tab·bā

“na, bhikkhave, aññatra nimantitena aññassa bhojjayāgu paribhuñjitabbā.

“When you have been invited to a meal, you shouldn’t eat someone else’s rice porridge beforehand.
851

योyo परिभुञ्जेय्य,pa·ri·bhuñ·jey·ya यथाधम्मोya·thā·dham·mo कारेतब्बो”ति।kā·re·tab·bo

Yo paribhuñjeyya, yathādhammo kāretabbo”ti.

If you do, you should be dealt with according to the rule.”
852

13। बेलट्ठकच्चानवत्थुbe·laṭ·ṭha·kac·cā·na·vat·thu

13. Belaṭṭhakaccānavatthu

13. The account of Belaṭṭha Kaccāna
853

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā अन्धकविन्देan·dha·ka·vin·de यथाभिरन्तंya·thā·bhi·ran·taṃ विहरित्वाvi·ha·rit·vā येनye·na राजगहंrā·ja·ga·haṃ तेनte·na चारिकंcā·ri·kaṃ पक्कामि,pak·kā·mi महताma·ha·tā भिक्खुसङ्घेनbhik·khu·saṅ·ghe·na सद्धिं,sad·dhiṃ अड्ढतेलसेहिaḍ·ḍha·te·la·se·hi भिक्खुसतेहि।bhik·khu·sa·te·hi

Atha kho bhagavā andhakavinde yathābhirantaṁ viharitvā yena rājagahaṁ tena cārikaṁ pakkāmi, mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ, aḍḍhatelasehi bhikkhusatehi.

When the Buddha had stayed at Andhakavinda for as long as he liked, he set out wandering toward Rājagaha together with a large sangha of twelve-hundred and fifty monks.
854

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na बेलट्ठोbe·laṭ·ṭho कच्चानोkac·cā·no राजगहाrā·ja·ga·hā अन्धकविन्दंan·dha·ka·vin·daṃ अद्धानमग्गप्पटिपन्नोad·dhā·na·mag·gap·pa·ṭi·pan·no होति,ho·ti पञ्चमत्तेहिpañ·ca·mat·te·hi सकटसतेहि,sa·ka·ṭa·sa·te·hi सब्बेहेवsab·be·he·va गुळकुम्भपूरेहि।gu·ḷa·kum·bha·pū·re·hi

Tena kho pana samayena belaṭṭho kaccāno rājagahā andhakavindaṁ addhānamaggappaṭipanno hoti, pañcamattehi sakaṭasatehi, sabbeheva guḷakumbhapūrehi.

Just then Belaṭṭha Kaccāna was traveling from Rājagaha to Andhakavinda with five hundred carts, all of them filled with jars of sugar.
855

अद्दसाad·da·sā खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā बेलट्ठंbe·laṭ·ṭhaṃ कच्चानंkac·cā·naṃ दूरतोवdū·ra·to·va आगच्छन्तं,ā·gac·chan·taṃ दिस्वानdis·vā·na मग्गाmag·gā ओक्कम्मok·kam·ma अञ्ञतरस्मिंañ·ña·ta·ras·miṃ रुक्खमूलेruk·kha·mū·le निसीदि।ni·sī·di

Addasā kho bhagavā belaṭṭhaṁ kaccānaṁ dūratova āgacchantaṁ, disvāna maggā okkamma aññatarasmiṁ rukkhamūle nisīdi.

When the Buddha saw Belaṭṭha Kaccāna coming, he stepped off the road and sat down at the foot of a tree.
856

अथa·tha खोkho बेलट्ठोbe·laṭ·ṭho कच्चानोkac·cā·no येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ अट्ठासि।aṭ·ṭhā·si

Atha kho belaṭṭho kaccāno yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi.

Belaṭṭha Kaccāna went up to the Buddha, bowed,
857

एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ ठितोṭhi·to खोkho बेलट्ठोbe·laṭ·ṭho कच्चानोkac·cā·no भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

Ekamantaṁ ṭhito kho belaṭṭho kaccāno bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

and said,
858

“इच्छामहं,ic·chā·ma·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te एकमेकस्सe·ka·me·kas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no एकमेकंe·ka·me·kaṃ गुळकुम्भंgu·ḷa·kum·bhaṃ दातुन्”ति।dā·tun

“icchāmahaṁ, bhante, ekamekassa bhikkhuno ekamekaṁ guḷakumbhaṁ dātun”ti.

“Sir, I would like to give one jar of sugar to each and every monk.”
859

“तेनte·na हिhi त्वं,tvaṃ कच्चान,kac·cā·na एकंयेवe·kaṃ·ye·va गुळकुम्भंgu·ḷa·kum·bhaṃ आहरा”ति।ā·ha·rā

“Tena hi tvaṁ, kaccāna, ekaṁyeva guḷakumbhaṁ āharā”ti.

“Well then, Kaccāna, just bring one jar of sugar.”
860

“एवं,e·vaṃ भन्ते”तिbhan·te खोkho बेलट्ठोbe·laṭ·ṭho कच्चानोkac·cā·no भगवतोbha·ga·va·to पटिस्सुणित्वाpa·ṭis·su·ṇit·vā एकंयेवe·kaṃ·ye·va गुळकुम्भंgu·ḷa·kum·bhaṃ आदायā·dā·ya येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

“Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho belaṭṭho kaccāno bhagavato paṭissuṇitvā ekaṁyeva guḷakumbhaṁ ādāya yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

Saying, “Yes, sir,” he got a jar of sugar, returned to the Buddha, and said,
861

“आभतो,ā·bha·to भन्ते,bhan·te गुळकुम्भो;gu·ḷa·kum·bho

“ābhato, bhante, guḷakumbho;

“Here is the jar.
862

कथाहं,ka·thā·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te पटिपज्जामी”ति?pa·ṭi·paj·jā·mī

kathāhaṁ, bhante, paṭipajjāmī”ti?

What should I do next?”
863

“तेनte·na हिhi त्वं,tvaṃ कच्चान,kac·cā·na भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ गुळंgu·ḷaṃ देही”ति।de·hī

“Tena hi tvaṁ, kaccāna, bhikkhūnaṁ guḷaṁ dehī”ti.

“Now give sugar to the monks.”
864

“एवं,e·vaṃ भन्ते”तिbhan·te खोkho बेलट्ठोbe·laṭ·ṭho कच्चानोkac·cā·no भगवतोbha·ga·va·to पटिस्सुणित्वाpa·ṭis·su·ṇit·vā भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ गुळंgu·ḷaṃ दत्वाdat·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

“Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho belaṭṭho kaccāno bhagavato paṭissuṇitvā bhikkhūnaṁ guḷaṁ datvā bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

Saying, “Yes, sir,” he did just that. He then said to the Buddha,
865

“दिन्नो,din·no भन्ते,bhan·te भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ गुळो,gu·ḷo बहुba·hu चायंcā·yaṃ गुळोgu·ḷo अवसिट्ठो।a·va·siṭ·ṭho

“dinno, bhante, bhikkhūnaṁ guḷo, bahu cāyaṁ guḷo avasiṭṭho.

“I’ve given sugar to the monks, but there’s much left over.
866

कथाहं,ka·thā·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te पटिपज्जामी”ति?pa·ṭi·paj·jā·mī

Kathāhaṁ, bhante, paṭipajjāmī”ti?

What should I do with that?”
867

“तेनte·na हिhi त्वं,tvaṃ कच्चान,kac·cā·na भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ गुळंgu·ḷaṃ यावदत्थंyā·va·dat·thaṃ देही”ति।de·hī

“Tena hi tvaṁ, kaccāna, bhikkhūnaṁ guḷaṁ yāvadatthaṁ dehī”ti.

“Give the monks as much sugar as they need.”
868

“एवं,e·vaṃ भन्ते”तिbhan·te खोkho बेलट्ठोbe·laṭ·ṭho कच्चानोkac·cā·no भगवतोbha·ga·va·to पटिस्सुणित्वाpa·ṭis·su·ṇit·vā भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ गुळंgu·ḷaṃ यावदत्थंyā·va·dat·thaṃ दत्वाdat·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

“Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho belaṭṭho kaccāno bhagavato paṭissuṇitvā bhikkhūnaṁ guḷaṁ yāvadatthaṁ datvā bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

Saying, “Yes, sir,” he did as requested. He then said to the Buddha,
869

“दिन्नो,din·no भन्ते,bhan·te भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ गुळोgu·ḷo यावदत्थो,yā·va·dat·tho बहुba·hu चायंcā·yaṃ गुळोgu·ḷo अवसिट्ठो।a·va·siṭ·ṭho

“dinno, bhante, bhikkhūnaṁ guḷo yāvadattho, bahu cāyaṁ guḷo avasiṭṭho.

“I’ve given the monks as much sugar as they need, but there’s much left over.
870

कथाहं,ka·thā·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te पटिपज्जामी”ति?pa·ṭi·paj·jā·mī

Kathāhaṁ, bhante, paṭipajjāmī”ti?

What should I do with that?”
871

“तेनte·na हिhi त्वं,tvaṃ कच्चान,kac·cā·na भिक्खूbhik·khū गुळेहिgu·ḷe·hi सन्तप्पेही”ति।san·tap·pe·hī

“Tena hi tvaṁ, kaccāna, bhikkhū guḷehi santappehī”ti.

“Give the monks as much sugar as they want.”
872

“एवं,e·vaṃ भन्ते”तिbhan·te खोkho बेलट्ठोbe·laṭ·ṭho कच्चानोkac·cā·no भगवतोbha·ga·va·to पटिस्सुणित्वाpa·ṭis·su·ṇit·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū गुळेहिgu·ḷe·hi सन्तप्पेसि।san·tap·pe·si

“Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho belaṭṭho kaccāno bhagavato paṭissuṇitvā bhikkhū guḷehi santappesi.

Saying, “Yes, sir,” he again did as requested.
873

एकच्चेe·kac·ce भिक्खूbhik·khū पत्तेपिpat·te·pi पूरेसुंpū·re·suṃ परिस्सावनानिपिpa·ris·sā·va·nā·ni·pi थविकायोपिtha·vi·kā·yo·pi पूरेसुं।pū·re·suṃ

Ekacce bhikkhū pattepi pūresuṁ parissāvanānipi thavikāyopi pūresuṁ.

Some monks filled their almsbowls and even their water filters and bags.
874

अथa·tha खोkho बेलट्ठोbe·laṭ·ṭho कच्चानोkac·cā·no भिक्खूbhik·khū गुळेहिgu·ḷe·hi सन्तप्पेत्वाsan·tap·pet·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

Atha kho belaṭṭho kaccāno bhikkhū guḷehi santappetvā bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

When he was finished, he said to the Buddha,
875

“सन्तप्पिता,san·tap·pi·tā भन्ते,bhan·te भिक्खूbhik·khū गुळेहि,gu·ḷe·hi बहुba·hu चायंcā·yaṃ गुळोgu·ḷo अवसिट्ठो।a·va·siṭ·ṭho

“santappitā, bhante, bhikkhū guḷehi, bahu cāyaṁ guḷo avasiṭṭho.

“I’ve given the monks as much sugar as they want, but there’s much left over.
876

कथाहं,ka·thā·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te पटिपज्जामी”ति?pa·ṭi·paj·jā·mī

Kathāhaṁ, bhante, paṭipajjāmī”ti?

What should I do with that?”
877

“तेनte·na हिhi त्वं,tvaṃ कच्चान,kac·cā·na विघासादानंvi·ghā·sā·dā·naṃ गुळंgu·ḷaṃ देही”ति।de·hī

“Tena hi tvaṁ, kaccāna, vighāsādānaṁ guḷaṁ dehī”ti.

“Give to those who live on scraps.”
878

“एवं,e·vaṃ भन्ते”तिbhan·te खोkho बेलट्ठोbe·laṭ·ṭho कच्चानोkac·cā·no भगवतोbha·ga·va·to पटिस्सुणित्वाpa·ṭis·su·ṇit·vā विघासादानंvi·ghā·sā·dā·naṃ गुळंgu·ḷaṃ दत्वाdat·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

“Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho belaṭṭho kaccāno bhagavato paṭissuṇitvā vighāsādānaṁ guḷaṁ datvā bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

Saying, “Yes, sir,” he again did as requested. He then said to the Buddha,
879

“दिन्नो,din·no भन्ते,bhan·te विघासादानंvi·ghā·sā·dā·naṃ गुळो,gu·ḷo बहुba·hu चायंcā·yaṃ गुळोgu·ḷo अवसिट्ठो।a·va·siṭ·ṭho

“dinno, bhante, vighāsādānaṁ guḷo, bahu cāyaṁ guḷo avasiṭṭho.

“I’ve given them sugar, but there’s much left over.
880

कथाहं,ka·thā·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te पटिपज्जामी”ति?pa·ṭi·paj·jā·mī

Kathāhaṁ, bhante, paṭipajjāmī”ti?

What should I do with that?”
881

“तेनte·na हिhi त्वं,tvaṃ कच्चान,kac·cā·na विघासादानंvi·ghā·sā·dā·naṃ गुळंgu·ḷaṃ यावदत्थंyā·va·dat·thaṃ देही”ति।de·hī

“Tena hi tvaṁ, kaccāna, vighāsādānaṁ guḷaṁ yāvadatthaṁ dehī”ti.

“Give them as much sugar as they need.”
882

“एवं,e·vaṃ भन्ते”तिbhan·te खोkho बेलट्ठोbe·laṭ·ṭho कच्चानोkac·cā·no भगवतोbha·ga·va·to पटिस्सुणित्वाpa·ṭis·su·ṇit·vā विघासादानंvi·ghā·sā·dā·naṃ गुळंgu·ḷaṃ यावदत्थंyā·va·dat·thaṃ दत्वाdat·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

“Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho belaṭṭho kaccāno bhagavato paṭissuṇitvā vighāsādānaṁ guḷaṁ yāvadatthaṁ datvā bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

Saying, “Yes, sir,” he again did as requested. He then said to the Buddha,
883

“दिन्नो,din·no भन्ते,bhan·te विघासादानंvi·ghā·sā·dā·naṃ गुळोgu·ḷo यावदत्थो,yā·va·dat·tho बहुba·hu चायंcā·yaṃ गुळोgu·ḷo अवसिट्ठो।a·va·siṭ·ṭho

“dinno, bhante, vighāsādānaṁ guḷo yāvadattho, bahu cāyaṁ guḷo avasiṭṭho.

“I’ve given them as much sugar as they need, but there’s much left over.
884

कथाहं,ka·thā·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te पटिपज्जामी”ति?pa·ṭi·paj·jā·mī

Kathāhaṁ, bhante, paṭipajjāmī”ti?

What should I do with that?”
885

“तेनte·na हिhi त्वं,tvaṃ कच्चान,kac·cā·na विघासादेvi·ghā·sā·de गुळेहिgu·ḷe·hi सन्तप्पेही”ति।san·tap·pe·hī

“Tena hi tvaṁ, kaccāna, vighāsāde guḷehi santappehī”ti.

“Give them as much sugar as they want.”
886

“एवं,e·vaṃ भन्ते”तिbhan·te खोkho बेलट्ठोbe·laṭ·ṭho कच्चानोkac·cā·no भगवतोbha·ga·va·to पटिस्सुणित्वाpa·ṭis·su·ṇit·vā विघासादेvi·ghā·sā·de गुळेहिgu·ḷe·hi सन्तप्पेसि।san·tap·pe·si

“Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho belaṭṭho kaccāno bhagavato paṭissuṇitvā vighāsāde guḷehi santappesi.

Saying, “Yes, sir,” he once again did as requested.
887

एकच्चेe·kac·ce विघासादाvi·ghā·sā·dā कोलम्बेपिko·lam·be·pi घटेपिgha·ṭe·pi पूरेसुं,pū·re·suṃ पिटकानिपिpi·ṭa·kā·ni·pi उच्छङ्गेपिuc·chaṅ·ge·pi पूरेसुं।pū·re·suṃ

Ekacce vighāsādā kolambepi ghaṭepi pūresuṁ, piṭakānipi ucchaṅgepi pūresuṁ.

Some of those who lived on scraps filled basins, waterpots, and baskets, and some even their laps.
888

अथa·tha खोkho बेलट्ठोbe·laṭ·ṭho कच्चानोkac·cā·no विघासादेvi·ghā·sā·de गुळेहिgu·ḷe·hi सन्तप्पेत्वाsan·tap·pet·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

Atha kho belaṭṭho kaccāno vighāsāde guḷehi santappetvā bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

When he was finished, he said to the Buddha,
889

“सन्तप्पिता,san·tap·pi·tā भन्ते,bhan·te विघासादाvi·ghā·sā·dā गुळेहि,gu·ḷe·hi बहुba·hu चायंcā·yaṃ गुळोgu·ḷo अवसिट्ठो।a·va·siṭ·ṭho

“santappitā, bhante, vighāsādā guḷehi, bahu cāyaṁ guḷo avasiṭṭho.

“I’ve given them as much sugar as they want, but there’s much left over.
890

कथाहं,ka·thā·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te पटिपज्जामी”ति?pa·ṭi·paj·jā·mī

Kathāhaṁ, bhante, paṭipajjāmī”ti?

What should I do with that?”
891

“नाहंnā·haṃ तं,taṃ कच्चान,kac·cā·na पस्सामिpas·sā·mi सदेवकेsa·de·va·ke लोकेlo·ke समारकेsa·mā·ra·ke सब्रह्मकेsab·rah·ma·ke सस्समणब्राह्मणियाsas·sa·ma·ṇab·rāh·ma·ṇi·yā पजायpa·jā·ya सदेवमनुस्सायsa·de·va·ma·nus·sā·ya यस्सyas·sa सोso गुळोgu·ḷo परिभुत्तोpa·ri·bhut·to सम्माsam·mā परिणामंpa·ri·ṇā·maṃ गच्छेय्य,gac·chey·ya अञ्ञत्रañ·ñat·ra तथागतस्सta·thā·ga·tas·sa वाvā तथागतसावकस्सta·thā·ga·ta·sā·va·kas·sa वा।vā

“Nāhaṁ taṁ, kaccāna, passāmi sadevake loke samārake sabrahmake sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiyā pajāya sadevamanussāya yassa so guḷo paribhutto sammā pariṇāmaṁ gaccheyya, aññatra tathāgatassa vā tathāgatasāvakassa vā.

“Kaccāna, I don’t see anyone in this world with its gods, lords of death, and supreme beings, in this society with its monastics and brahmins, its gods and humans, who would be able to properly digest that sugar except a Buddha or his disciple.
892

तेनte·na हिhi त्वं,tvaṃ कच्चान,kac·cā·na तंtaṃ गुळंgu·ḷaṃ अप्पहरितेap·pa·ha·ri·te वाvā छड्डेहि,chaḍ·ḍe·hi अप्पाणकेap·pā·ṇa·ke वाvā उदकेu·da·ke ओपिलापेही”ति।o·pi·lā·pe·hī

Tena hi tvaṁ, kaccāna, taṁ guḷaṁ appaharite vā chaḍḍehi, appāṇake vā udake opilāpehī”ti.

So discard that sugar where there are no cultivated plants or in water without life.”
893

“एवं,e·vaṃ भन्ते”तिbhan·te खोkho बेलट्ठोbe·laṭ·ṭho कच्चानोkac·cā·no भगवतोbha·ga·va·to पटिस्सुणित्वाpa·ṭis·su·ṇit·vā तंtaṃ गुळंgu·ḷaṃ अप्पाणकेap·pā·ṇa·ke उदकेu·da·ke ओपिलापेति।o·pi·lā·pe·ti

“Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho belaṭṭho kaccāno bhagavato paṭissuṇitvā taṁ guḷaṁ appāṇake udake opilāpeti.

Saying, “Yes, sir,” he dumped that sugar in water without life.
894

अथa·tha खोkho सोso गुळोgu·ḷo उदकेu·da·ke पक्खित्तोpak·khit·to चिच्चिटायतिcic·ci·ṭā·ya·ti चिटिचिटायतिci·ṭi·ci·ṭā·ya·ti पधूपायतिpa·dhū·pā·ya·ti सम्पधूपायति।sam·pa·dhū·pā·ya·ti

Atha kho so guḷo udake pakkhitto cicciṭāyati ciṭiciṭāyati padhūpāyati sampadhūpāyati.

As he did so, that sugar hissed, sputtered, fumed, and smoked—
895

सेय्यथापिsey·ya·thā·pi नामnā·ma फालोphā·lo दिवसंसन्तत्तोdi·va·saṃ·san·tat·to उदकेu·da·ke पक्खित्तोpak·khit·to चिच्चिटायतिcic·ci·ṭā·ya·ti चिटिचिटायतिci·ṭi·ci·ṭā·ya·ti पधूपायतिpa·dhū·pā·ya·ti सम्पधूपायति;sam·pa·dhū·pā·ya·ti

Seyyathāpi nāma phālo divasaṁsantatto udake pakkhitto cicciṭāyati ciṭiciṭāyati padhūpāyati sampadhūpāyati;

just like a plowshare heated the whole day hisses, sputters, fumes, and smokes when dropped in water.
896

एवमेवe·va·me·va सोso गुळोgu·ḷo उदकेu·da·ke पक्खित्तोpak·khit·to चिच्चिटायतिcic·ci·ṭā·ya·ti चिटिचिटायतिci·ṭi·ci·ṭā·ya·ti पधूपायतिpa·dhū·pā·ya·ti सम्पधूपायति।sam·pa·dhū·pā·ya·ti

evameva so guḷo udake pakkhitto cicciṭāyati ciṭiciṭāyati padhūpāyati sampadhūpāyati.

(Pāli only)
897

अथa·tha खोkho बेलट्ठोbe·laṭ·ṭho कच्चानोkac·cā·no संविग्गोsaṃ·vig·go लोमहट्ठजातोlo·ma·haṭ·ṭha·jā·to येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di

Atha kho belaṭṭho kaccāno saṁviggo lomahaṭṭhajāto yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

Belaṭṭha Kaccāna was awestruck, with goose bumps all over. He approached the Buddha, bowed, and sat down.
898

एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नस्सni·sin·nas·sa खोkho बेलट्ठस्सbe·laṭ·ṭhas·sa कच्चानस्सkac·cā·nas·sa भगवाbha·ga·vā अनुपुब्बिंa·nu·pub·biṃ कथंka·thaṃ कथेसि,ka·the·si सेय्यथिदं—sey·ya·thi·daṃ

Ekamantaṁ nisinnassa kho belaṭṭhassa kaccānassa bhagavā anupubbiṁ kathaṁ kathesi, seyyathidaṁ—

The Buddha then gave him a progressive talk—
899

दानकथंdā·na·ka·thaṃ सीलकथंsī·la·ka·thaṃ सग्गकथं,sag·ga·ka·thaṃ कामानंkā·mā·naṃ आदीनवंā·dī·na·vaṃ ओकारंo·kā·raṃ सङ्किलेसं,saṅ·ki·le·saṃ नेक्खम्मेnek·kham·me आनिसंसंā·ni·saṃ·saṃ पकासेसि।pa·kā·se·si

dānakathaṁ sīlakathaṁ saggakathaṁ, kāmānaṁ ādīnavaṁ okāraṁ saṅkilesaṁ, nekkhamme ānisaṁsaṁ pakāsesi.

on generosity, morality, and heaven; on the downside, degradation, and defilement of worldly pleasures; and he revealed the benefits of renunciation.
900

यदाya·dā भगवाbha·ga·vā अञ्ञासिañ·ñā·si बेलट्ठंbe·laṭ·ṭhaṃ कच्चानंkac·cā·naṃ कल्लचित्तं,kal·la·cit·taṃ मुदुचित्तं,mu·du·cit·taṃ विनीवरणचित्तं,vi·nī·va·ra·ṇa·cit·taṃ उदग्गचित्तं,u·dag·ga·cit·taṃ पसन्नचित्तं,pa·san·na·cit·taṃ अथa·tha याyā बुद्धानंbud·dhā·naṃ सामुक्कंसिकाsā·muk·kaṃ·si·kā धम्मदेसना,dham·ma·de·sa·nā तंtaṃ पकासेसिpa·kā·se·si …पे…pe

Yadā bhagavā aññāsi belaṭṭhaṁ kaccānaṁ kallacittaṁ, muducittaṁ, vinīvaraṇacittaṁ, udaggacittaṁ, pasannacittaṁ, atha yā buddhānaṁ sāmukkaṁsikā dhammadesanā, taṁ pakāsesi …pe…

When the Buddha knew that his mind was ready, supple, without hindrances, joyful, and confident, he revealed the teaching unique to the Buddhas: suffering, its origin, its end, and the path.
901

एवमेवe·va·me·va बेलट्ठस्सbe·laṭ·ṭhas·sa कच्चानस्सkac·cā·nas·sa तस्मिंयेवtas·miṃ·ye·va आसनेā·sa·ne विरजंvi·ra·jaṃ वीतमलंvī·ta·ma·laṃ धम्मचक्खुंdham·ma·cak·khuṃ उदपादि—u·da·pā·di

evameva belaṭṭhassa kaccānassa tasmiṁyeva āsane virajaṁ vītamalaṁ dhammacakkhuṁ udapādi—

And just as a clean and stainless cloth absorbs dye properly, so too, while he was sitting right there, Belaṭṭha Kaccāna experienced the stainless vision of the Truth:
902

“यंyaṃ किञ्चिkiñ·ci समुदयधम्मं,sa·mu·da·ya·dham·maṃ सब्बंsab·baṃ तंtaṃ निरोधधम्मन्”ति।ni·ro·dha·dham·man

“yaṁ kiñci samudayadhammaṁ, sabbaṁ taṁ nirodhadhamman”ti.

“Anything that has a beginning has an end.”
903

अथa·tha खोkho बेलट्ठोbe·laṭ·ṭho कच्चानोkac·cā·no दिट्ठधम्मोdiṭ·ṭha·dham·mo पत्तधम्मोpat·ta·dham·mo विदितधम्मोvi·di·ta·dham·mo परियोगाळ्हधम्मोpa·ri·yo·gā·ḷha·dham·mo तिण्णविचिकिच्छोtiṇ·ṇa·vi·ci·kic·cho विगतकथङ्कथोvi·ga·ta·ka·thaṅ·ka·tho वेसारज्जप्पत्तोve·sā·raj·jap·pat·to अपरप्पच्चयोa·pa·rap·pac·ca·yo सत्थुसासनेsat·thu·sā·sa·ne भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

Atha kho belaṭṭho kaccāno diṭṭhadhammo pattadhammo viditadhammo pariyogāḷhadhammo tiṇṇavicikiccho vigatakathaṅkatho vesārajjappatto aparappaccayo satthusāsane bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

He had seen the Truth, had reached, understood, and penetrated it. He had gone beyond doubt and uncertainty, had attained to confidence, and had become independent of others in the Teacher’s instruction. He then said to the Buddha,
904

“अभिक्कन्तं,a·bhik·kan·taṃ भन्ते,bhan·te अभिक्कन्तं,a·bhik·kan·taṃ भन्ते।bhan·te

“abhikkantaṁ, bhante, abhikkantaṁ, bhante.

“Wonderful, sir, wonderful!
905

सेय्यथापि,sey·ya·thā·pi भन्ते,bhan·te निक्कुज्जितंnik·kuj·ji·taṃ वाvā उक्कुज्जेय्यuk·kuj·jey·ya …पे…pe

Seyyathāpi, bhante, nikkujjitaṁ vā ukkujjeyya …pe…

Just as one might set upright what’s overturned, or reveal what’s hidden, or show the way to one who’s lost, or bring a lamp into the dark so that one with eyes might see what’s there—
906

एवमेवंe·va·me·vaṃ खोkho भगवताbha·ga·va·tā अनेकपरियायेनa·ne·ka·pa·ri·yā·ye·na धम्मोdham·mo पकासितो।pa·kā·si·to

evamevaṁ kho bhagavatā anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsito.

just so has the Buddha made the Teaching clear in many ways.
907

एसाहं,e·sā·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ सरणंsa·ra·ṇaṃ गच्छामि,gac·chā·mi धम्मञ्च,dham·mañ·ca भिक्खुसङ्घञ्च।bhik·khu·saṅ·ghañ·ca

Esāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavantaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāmi, dhammañca, bhikkhusaṅghañca.

I go for refuge to the Buddha, the Teaching, and the Sangha of monks.
908

उपासकंu·pā·sa·kaṃ मंmaṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā धारेतुdhā·re·tu अज्जतग्गेaj·ja·tag·ge पाणुपेतंpā·ṇu·pe·taṃ सरणगतन्”ति।sa·ra·ṇa·ga·tan

Upāsakaṁ maṁ bhagavā dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupetaṁ saraṇagatan”ti.

Please accept me as a lay follower who’s gone for refuge for life.”
909

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā अनुपुब्बेनa·nu·pub·be·na चारिकंcā·ri·kaṃ चरमानोca·ra·mā·no येनye·na राजगहंrā·ja·ga·haṃ तदवसरि।ta·da·va·sa·ri

Atha kho bhagavā anupubbena cārikaṁ caramāno yena rājagahaṁ tadavasari.

The Buddha then continued wandering toward Rājagaha.
910

तत्रtat·ra सुदंsu·daṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā राजगहेrā·ja·ga·he विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti वेळुवनेve·ḷu·va·ne कलन्दकनिवापे।ka·lan·da·ka·ni·vā·pe

Tatra sudaṁ bhagavā rājagahe viharati veḷuvane kalandakanivāpe.

When he eventually arrived, he stayed in the Bamboo Grove, the squirrel sanctuary.
911

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na राजगहेrā·ja·ga·he गुळोgu·ḷo उस्सन्नोus·san·no होति।ho·ti

Tena kho pana samayena rājagahe guḷo ussanno hoti.

At that time there was an abundance of sugar in Rājagaha.
912

भिक्खू—bhik·khū

Bhikkhū—

The monks thought,
913

“गिलानस्सेवgi·lā·nas·se·va भगवताbha·ga·va·tā गुळोgu·ḷo अनुञ्ञातो,a·nuñ·ñā·to नोno अगिलानस्सा”ति—a·gi·lā·nas·sā

“gilānasseva bhagavatā guḷo anuññāto, no agilānassā”ti—

“The Buddha has only allowed sugar for the sick,”
914

कुक्कुच्चायन्ताkuk·kuc·cā·yan·tā गुळंgu·ḷaṃ नna भुञ्जन्ति।bhuñ·jan·ti

kukkuccāyantā guḷaṁ na bhuñjanti.

and being afraid of wrongdoing, they did not eat it.
915

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
916

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve गिलानस्सgi·lā·nas·sa गुळं,gu·ḷaṃ अगिलानस्सa·gi·lā·nas·sa गुळोदकन्”ति।gu·ḷo·da·kan

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, gilānassa guḷaṁ, agilānassa guḷodakan”ti.

“I allow you to take sugar when you’re sick and sugar mixed in water when you’re not.”
917

14। पाटलिगामवत्थुpā·ṭa·li·gā·ma·vat·thu

14. Pāṭaligāmavatthu

14. Pāṭaligāma
918

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā राजगहेrā·ja·ga·he यथाभिरन्तंya·thā·bhi·ran·taṃ विहरित्वाvi·ha·rit·vā येनye·na पाटलिगामोpā·ṭa·li·gā·mo तेनte·na चारिकंcā·ri·kaṃ पक्कामि,pak·kā·mi महताma·ha·tā भिक्खुसङ्घेनbhik·khu·saṅ·ghe·na सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ अड्ढतेलसेहिaḍ·ḍha·te·la·se·hi भिक्खुसतेहि।bhik·khu·sa·te·hi

Atha kho bhagavā rājagahe yathābhirantaṁ viharitvā yena pāṭaligāmo tena cārikaṁ pakkāmi, mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ aḍḍhatelasehi bhikkhusatehi.

When the Buddha had stayed at Rājagaha for as long as he liked, he set out wandering toward Pāṭaligāma with a large sangha of twelve-hundred and fifty monks.
919

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā अनुपुब्बेनa·nu·pub·be·na चारिकंcā·ri·kaṃ चरमानोca·ra·mā·no येनye·na पाटलिगामोpā·ṭa·li·gā·mo तदवसरि।ta·da·va·sa·ri

Atha kho bhagavā anupubbena cārikaṁ caramāno yena pāṭaligāmo tadavasari.

When he eventually arrived, he stayed there.
920

अस्सोसुंas·so·suṃ खोkho पाटलिगामिकाpā·ṭa·li·gā·mi·kā उपासका—u·pā·sa·kā

Assosuṁ kho pāṭaligāmikā upāsakā—

When the lay followers of Pāṭaligāma heard
921

“भगवाbha·ga·vā किरki·ra पाटलिगामंpā·ṭa·li·gā·maṃ अनुप्पत्तो”ति।a·nup·pat·to

“bhagavā kira pāṭaligāmaṁ anuppatto”ti.

that he had arrived,
922

अथa·tha खोkho पाटलिगामिकाpā·ṭa·li·gā·mi·kā उपासकाu·pā·sa·kā येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमिंसु,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·miṃ·su उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदिंसु।ni·sī·diṃ·su

Atha kho pāṭaligāmikā upāsakā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu.

they went to see him, bowed, and sat down on one side.
923

एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नेni·sin·ne खोkho पाटलिगामिकेpā·ṭa·li·gā·mi·ke उपासकेu·pā·sa·ke भगवाbha·ga·vā धम्मियाdham·mi·yā कथायka·thā·ya सन्दस्सेसि,san·das·se·si समादपेसि,sa·mā·da·pe·si समुत्तेजेसि,sa·mut·te·je·si सम्पहंसेसि।sam·pa·haṃ·se·si

Ekamantaṁ nisinne kho pāṭaligāmike upāsake bhagavā dhammiyā kathāya sandassesi, samādapesi, samuttejesi, sampahaṁsesi.

The Buddha instructed, inspired, and gladdened them with a teaching.
924

अथa·tha खोkho पाटलिगामिकाpā·ṭa·li·gā·mi·kā उपासकाu·pā·sa·kā भगवताbha·ga·va·tā धम्मियाdham·mi·yā कथायka·thā·ya सन्दस्सिताsan·das·si·tā समादपिताsa·mā·da·pi·tā समुत्तेजिताsa·mut·te·ji·tā सम्पहंसिताsam·pa·haṃ·si·tā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोचुं—e·ta·da·vo·cuṃ

Atha kho pāṭaligāmikā upāsakā bhagavatā dhammiyā kathāya sandassitā samādapitā samuttejitā sampahaṁsitā bhagavantaṁ etadavocuṁ—

They then said to the Buddha,
925

“अधिवासेतुa·dhi·vā·se·tu नो,no भन्ते,bhan·te भगवाbha·ga·vā आवसथागारंā·va·sa·thā·gā·raṃ सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ भिक्खुसङ्घेना”ति।bhik·khu·saṅ·ghe·nā

“adhivāsetu no, bhante, bhagavā āvasathāgāraṁ saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghenā”ti.

“Sir, please visit our guesthouse together with the Sangha of monks.”
926

अधिवासेसिa·dhi·vā·se·si भगवाbha·ga·vā तुण्हीभावेन।tuṇ·hī·bhā·ve·na

Adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvena.

The Buddha consented by remaining silent.
927

अथa·tha खोkho पाटलिगामिकाpā·ṭa·li·gā·mi·kā उपासकाu·pā·sa·kā भगवतोbha·ga·va·to अधिवासनंa·dhi·vā·sa·naṃ विदित्वाvi·dit·vā उट्ठायासनाuṭ·ṭhā·yā·sa·nā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā पदक्खिणंpa·dak·khi·ṇaṃ कत्वाkat·vā येनye·na आवसथागारंā·va·sa·thā·gā·raṃ तेनुपसङ्कमिंसु,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·miṃ·su उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā सब्बसन्थरिंsab·ba·san·tha·riṃ आवसथागारंā·va·sa·thā·gā·raṃ सन्थरित्वा,san·tha·rit·vā आसनानिā·sa·nā·ni पञ्ञपेत्वा,pañ·ña·pet·vā उदकमणिकंu·da·ka·ma·ṇi·kaṃ पतिट्ठापेत्वा,pa·tiṭ·ṭhā·pet·vā तेलपदीपंte·la·pa·dī·paṃ आरोपेत्वाā·ro·pet·vā येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमिंसु,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·miṃ·su उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ अट्ठंसु।aṭ·ṭhaṃ·su

Atha kho pāṭaligāmikā upāsakā bhagavato adhivāsanaṁ viditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā yena āvasathāgāraṁ tenupasaṅkamiṁsu, upasaṅkamitvā sabbasanthariṁ āvasathāgāraṁ santharitvā, āsanāni paññapetvā, udakamaṇikaṁ patiṭṭhāpetvā, telapadīpaṁ āropetvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhaṁsu.

Knowing that he had consented, they got up from their seats, bowed down, and circumambulated him with their right sides toward him. They then went to the guesthouse, spread mats on the floor, prepared seats, put out a large waterpot, and hung up an oil lamp, after which they returned to the Buddha, bowed,
928

एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ ठिताṭhi·tā खोkho पाटलिगामिकाpā·ṭa·li·gā·mi·kā उपासकाu·pā·sa·kā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोचुं—e·ta·da·vo·cuṃ

Ekamantaṁ ṭhitā kho pāṭaligāmikā upāsakā bhagavantaṁ etadavocuṁ—

and told him
929

“सब्बसन्थरिसन्थतं,sab·ba·san·tha·ri·san·tha·taṃ भन्ते,bhan·te आवसथागारं।ā·va·sa·thā·gā·raṃ

“sabbasantharisanthataṁ, bhante, āvasathāgāraṁ.

that everything was prepared,
930

आसनानिā·sa·nā·ni पञ्ञत्तानि।pañ·ñat·tā·ni

Āsanāni paññattāni.

(Pāli only)
931

उदकमणिकोu·da·ka·ma·ṇi·ko पतिट्ठापितो।pa·tiṭ·ṭhā·pi·to

Udakamaṇiko patiṭṭhāpito.

(Pāli only)
932

तेलपदीपोte·la·pa·dī·po आरोपितो।ā·ro·pi·to

Telapadīpo āropito.

(Pāli only)
933

यस्सदानि,yas·sa·dā·ni भन्ते,bhan·te भगवाbha·ga·vā कालंkā·laṃ मञ्ञती”ति।mañ·ña·tī

Yassadāni, bhante, bhagavā kālaṁ maññatī”ti.

adding, “Sir, please come when you’re ready.”
934

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā निवासेत्वाni·vā·set·vā पत्तचीवरमादायpat·ta·cī·va·ra·mā·dā·ya सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ भिक्खुसङ्घेनbhik·khu·saṅ·ghe·na येनye·na आवसथागारंā·va·sa·thā·gā·raṃ तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā पादेpā·de पक्खालेत्वाpak·khā·let·vā आवसथागारंā·va·sa·thā·gā·raṃ पविसित्वाpa·vi·sit·vā मज्झिमंmaj·jhi·maṃ थम्भंtham·bhaṃ निस्सायnis·sā·ya पुरत्थाभिमुखोpu·rat·thā·bhi·mu·kho निसीदि।ni·sī·di

Atha kho bhagavā nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghena yena āvasathāgāraṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā pāde pakkhāletvā āvasathāgāraṁ pavisitvā majjhimaṁ thambhaṁ nissāya puratthābhimukho nisīdi.

The Buddha robed up, took his bowl and robe, and went to the guesthouse together with the Sangha of monks. He washed his feet, entered the guesthouse, and sat down facing east, leaning on the central pillar.
935

भिक्खुसङ्घोपिbhik·khu·saṅ·gho·pi खोkho पादेpā·de पक्खालेत्वाpak·khā·let·vā आवसथागारंā·va·sa·thā·gā·raṃ पविसित्वाpa·vi·sit·vā पच्छिमंpac·chi·maṃ भित्तिंbhit·tiṃ निस्सायnis·sā·ya पुरत्थाभिमुखोpu·rat·thā·bhi·mu·kho निसीदि,ni·sī·di भगवन्तंयेवbha·ga·van·taṃ·ye·va पुरक्खत्वा।pu·rak·khat·vā

Bhikkhusaṅghopi kho pāde pakkhāletvā āvasathāgāraṁ pavisitvā pacchimaṁ bhittiṁ nissāya puratthābhimukho nisīdi, bhagavantaṁyeva purakkhatvā.

The monks washed their feet too, entered the guesthouse, and sat down facing east with the Buddha in front of them, leaning against the western wall.
936

पाटलिगामिकापिpā·ṭa·li·gā·mi·kā·pi खोkho उपासकाu·pā·sa·kā पादेpā·de पक्खालेत्वाpak·khā·let·vā आवसथागारंā·va·sa·thā·gā·raṃ पविसित्वाpa·vi·sit·vā पुरत्थिमंpu·rat·thi·maṃ भित्तिंbhit·tiṃ निस्सायnis·sā·ya पच्छिमाभिमुखाpac·chi·mā·bhi·mu·khā निसीदिंसु,ni·sī·diṃ·su भगवन्तंयेवbha·ga·van·taṃ·ye·va पुरक्खत्वा।pu·rak·khat·vā

Pāṭaligāmikāpi kho upāsakā pāde pakkhāletvā āvasathāgāraṁ pavisitvā puratthimaṁ bhittiṁ nissāya pacchimābhimukhā nisīdiṁsu, bhagavantaṁyeva purakkhatvā.

The lay followers of Pāṭaligāma followed suit and sat down facing west with the Buddha in front of them, leaning against the eastern wall.
937

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā पाटलिगामिकेpā·ṭa·li·gā·mi·ke उपासकेu·pā·sa·ke आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

Atha kho bhagavā pāṭaligāmike upāsake āmantesi—

The Buddha then addressed those lay followers:
938

“पञ्चिमे,pañ·ci·me गहपतयो,ga·ha·pa·ta·yo आदीनवाā·dī·na·vā दुस्सीलस्सdus·sī·las·sa सीलविपत्तिया।sī·la·vi·pat·ti·yā

“Pañcime, gahapatayo, ādīnavā dussīlassa sīlavipattiyā.

“There are these five dangers for one who is immoral because of failure in morality.
939

कतमेka·ta·me पञ्च?pañ·ca

Katame pañca?

(Pāli only)
940

इध,i·dha गहपतयो,ga·ha·pa·ta·yo दुस्सीलोdus·sī·lo सीलविपन्नोsī·la·vi·pan·no पमादाधिकरणंpa·mā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ महतिंma·ha·tiṃ भोगजानिंbho·ga·jā·niṃ निगच्छति।ni·gac·cha·ti

Idha, gahapatayo, dussīlo sīlavipanno pamādādhikaraṇaṁ mahatiṁ bhogajāniṁ nigacchati.

Because of heedlessness, they lose much wealth.
941

अयंa·yaṃ पठमोpa·ṭha·mo आदीनवोā·dī·na·vo दुस्सीलस्सdus·sī·las·sa सीलविपत्तिया।sī·la·vi·pat·ti·yā

Ayaṁ paṭhamo ādīnavo dussīlassa sīlavipattiyā.

(Pāli only)
942

पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ गहपतयो,ga·ha·pa·ta·yo दुस्सीलस्सdus·sī·las·sa सीलविपन्नस्सsī·la·vi·pan·nas·sa पापकोpā·pa·ko कित्तिसद्दोkit·ti·sad·do अब्भुग्गच्छति।ab·bhug·gac·cha·ti

Puna caparaṁ, gahapatayo, dussīlassa sīlavipannassa pāpako kittisaddo abbhuggacchati.

They get a bad reputation.
943

अयंa·yaṃ दुतियोdu·ti·yo आदीनवोā·dī·na·vo दुस्सीलस्सdus·sī·las·sa सीलविपत्तिया।sī·la·vi·pat·ti·yā

Ayaṁ dutiyo ādīnavo dussīlassa sīlavipattiyā.

(Pāli only)
944

पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ गहपतयो,ga·ha·pa·ta·yo दुस्सीलोdus·sī·lo सीलविपन्नोsī·la·vi·pan·no यञ्ञदेवyañ·ña·de·va परिसंpa·ri·saṃ उपसङ्कमति,u·pa·saṅ·ka·ma·ti यदिya·di खत्तियपरिसं,khat·ti·ya·pa·ri·saṃ यदिya·di ब्राह्मणपरिसं,brāh·ma·ṇa·pa·ri·saṃ यदिya·di गहपतिपरिसं,ga·ha·pa·ti·pa·ri·saṃ यदिya·di समणपरिसं,sa·ma·ṇa·pa·ri·saṃ अविसारदोa·vi·sā·ra·do उपसङ्कमतिu·pa·saṅ·ka·ma·ti मङ्कुभूतो।maṅ·ku·bhū·to

Puna caparaṁ, gahapatayo, dussīlo sīlavipanno yaññadeva parisaṁ upasaṅkamati, yadi khattiyaparisaṁ, yadi brāhmaṇaparisaṁ, yadi gahapatiparisaṁ, yadi samaṇaparisaṁ, avisārado upasaṅkamati maṅkubhūto.

Whenever they come to a gathering of people—whether a gathering of aristocrats, brahmins, householders, or monastics—they are shy and timid.
945

अयंa·yaṃ ततियोta·ti·yo आदीनवोā·dī·na·vo दुस्सीलस्सdus·sī·las·sa सीलविपत्तिया।sī·la·vi·pat·ti·yā

Ayaṁ tatiyo ādīnavo dussīlassa sīlavipattiyā.

(Pāli only)
946

पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ गहपतयो,ga·ha·pa·ta·yo दुस्सीलोdus·sī·lo सीलविपन्नोsī·la·vi·pan·no सम्मूळ्होsam·mū·ḷho कालंkā·laṃ करोति।ka·ro·ti

Puna caparaṁ, gahapatayo, dussīlo sīlavipanno sammūḷho kālaṁ karoti.

They die confused.
947

अयंa·yaṃ चतुत्थोca·tut·tho आदीनवोā·dī·na·vo दुस्सीलस्सdus·sī·las·sa सीलविपत्तिया।sī·la·vi·pat·ti·yā

Ayaṁ catuttho ādīnavo dussīlassa sīlavipattiyā.

(Pāli only)
948

पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ गहपतयो,ga·ha·pa·ta·yo दुस्सीलोdus·sī·lo सीलविपन्नोsī·la·vi·pan·no कायस्सkā·yas·sa भेदाbhe·dā परंpa·raṃ मरणाma·ra·ṇā अपायंa·pā·yaṃ दुग्गतिंdug·ga·tiṃ विनिपातंvi·ni·pā·taṃ निरयंni·ra·yaṃ उपपज्जति।u·pa·paj·ja·ti

Puna caparaṁ, gahapatayo, dussīlo sīlavipanno kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjati.

After death, they are reborn in a lower realm.
949

अयंa·yaṃ पञ्चमोpañ·ca·mo आदीनवोā·dī·na·vo दुस्सीलस्सdus·sī·las·sa सीलविपत्तिया।sī·la·vi·pat·ti·yā

Ayaṁ pañcamo ādīnavo dussīlassa sīlavipattiyā.

(Pāli only)
950

इमेi·me खो,kho गहपतयो,ga·ha·pa·ta·yo पञ्चpañ·ca आदीनवाā·dī·na·vā दुस्सीलस्सdus·sī·las·sa सीलविपत्तिया।sī·la·vi·pat·ti·yā

Ime kho, gahapatayo, pañca ādīnavā dussīlassa sīlavipattiyā.

(Pāli only)
951

पञ्चिमे,pañ·ci·me गहपतयो,ga·ha·pa·ta·yo आनिसंसाā·ni·saṃ·sā सीलवतोsī·la·va·to सीलसम्पदाय।sī·la·sam·pa·dā·ya

Pañcime, gahapatayo, ānisaṁsā sīlavato sīlasampadāya.

There are these five benefits for one who is moral because of success in morality.
952

कतमेka·ta·me पञ्च?pañ·ca

Katame pañca?

(Pāli only)
953

इध,i·dha गहपतयो,ga·ha·pa·ta·yo सीलवाsī·la·vā सीलसम्पन्नोsī·la·sam·pan·no अप्पमादाधिकरणंap·pa·mā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ महन्तंma·han·taṃ भोगक्खन्धंbho·gak·khan·dhaṃ अधिगच्छति।a·dhi·gac·cha·ti

Idha, gahapatayo, sīlavā sīlasampanno appamādādhikaraṇaṁ mahantaṁ bhogakkhandhaṁ adhigacchati.

Because of heedfulness, they gain much wealth.
954

अयंa·yaṃ पठमोpa·ṭha·mo आनिसंसोā·ni·saṃ·so सीलवतोsī·la·va·to सीलसम्पदाय।sī·la·sam·pa·dā·ya

Ayaṁ paṭhamo ānisaṁso sīlavato sīlasampadāya.

(Pāli only)
955

पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ गहपतयो,ga·ha·pa·ta·yo सीलवतोsī·la·va·to सीलसम्पन्नस्सsī·la·sam·pan·nas·sa कल्याणोkal·yā·ṇo कित्तिसद्दोkit·ti·sad·do अब्भुग्गच्छति।ab·bhug·gac·cha·ti

Puna caparaṁ, gahapatayo, sīlavato sīlasampannassa kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggacchati.

They get a good reputation.
956

अयंa·yaṃ दुतियोdu·ti·yo आनिसंसोā·ni·saṃ·so सीलवतोsī·la·va·to सीलसम्पदाय।sī·la·sam·pa·dā·ya

Ayaṁ dutiyo ānisaṁso sīlavato sīlasampadāya.

(Pāli only)
957

पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ गहपतयो,ga·ha·pa·ta·yo सीलवाsī·la·vā सीलसम्पन्नोsī·la·sam·pan·no यञ्ञदेवyañ·ña·de·va परिसंpa·ri·saṃ उपसङ्कमति,u·pa·saṅ·ka·ma·ti यदिya·di खत्तियपरिसं,khat·ti·ya·pa·ri·saṃ यदिya·di ब्राह्मणपरिसं,brāh·ma·ṇa·pa·ri·saṃ यदिya·di गहपतिपरिसं,ga·ha·pa·ti·pa·ri·saṃ यदिya·di समणपरिसं,sa·ma·ṇa·pa·ri·saṃ विसारदोvi·sā·ra·do उपसङ्कमतिu·pa·saṅ·ka·ma·ti अमङ्कुभूतो।a·maṅ·ku·bhū·to

Puna caparaṁ, gahapatayo, sīlavā sīlasampanno yaññadeva parisaṁ upasaṅkamati, yadi khattiyaparisaṁ, yadi brāhmaṇaparisaṁ, yadi gahapatiparisaṁ, yadi samaṇaparisaṁ, visārado upasaṅkamati amaṅkubhūto.

Whenever they come to a gathering of people—whether a gathering of aristocrats, brahmins, householders, or monastics—they are confident and self-assured.
958

अयंa·yaṃ ततियोta·ti·yo आनिसंसोā·ni·saṃ·so सीलवतोsī·la·va·to सीलसम्पदाय।sī·la·sam·pa·dā·ya

Ayaṁ tatiyo ānisaṁso sīlavato sīlasampadāya.

(Pāli only)
959

पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ गहपतयो,ga·ha·pa·ta·yo सीलवाsī·la·vā सीलसम्पन्नोsī·la·sam·pan·no असम्मूळ्होa·sam·mū·ḷho कालंkā·laṃ करोति।ka·ro·ti

Puna caparaṁ, gahapatayo, sīlavā sīlasampanno asammūḷho kālaṁ karoti.

They die with a clear mind.
960

अयंa·yaṃ चतुत्थोca·tut·tho आनिसंसोā·ni·saṃ·so सीलवतोsī·la·va·to सीलसम्पदाय।sī·la·sam·pa·dā·ya

Ayaṁ catuttho ānisaṁso sīlavato sīlasampadāya.

(Pāli only)
961

पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ गहपतयो,ga·ha·pa·ta·yo सीलवाsī·la·vā सीलसम्पन्नोsī·la·sam·pan·no कायस्सkā·yas·sa भेदाbhe·dā परंpa·raṃ मरणाma·ra·ṇā सुगतिंsu·ga·tiṃ सग्गंsag·gaṃ लोकंlo·kaṃ उपपज्जति।u·pa·paj·ja·ti

Puna caparaṁ, gahapatayo, sīlavā sīlasampanno kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjati.

After death, they are reborn in heaven.”
962

अयंa·yaṃ पञ्चमोpañ·ca·mo आनिसंसोā·ni·saṃ·so सीलवतोsī·la·va·to सीलसम्पदाय।sī·la·sam·pa·dā·ya

Ayaṁ pañcamo ānisaṁso sīlavato sīlasampadāya.

(Pāli only)
963

इमेi·me खो,kho गहपतयो,ga·ha·pa·ta·yo पञ्चpañ·ca आनिसंसाā·ni·saṃ·sā सीलवतोsī·la·va·to सीलसम्पदाया”ति।sī·la·sam·pa·dā·yā

Ime kho, gahapatayo, pañca ānisaṁsā sīlavato sīlasampadāyā”ti.

(Pāli only)
964

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā पाटलिगामिकेpā·ṭa·li·gā·mi·ke उपासकेu·pā·sa·ke बहुदेवba·hu·de·va रत्तिंrat·tiṃ धम्मियाdham·mi·yā कथायka·thā·ya सन्दस्सेत्वाsan·das·set·vā समादपेत्वाsa·mā·da·pet·vā समुत्तेजेत्वाsa·mut·te·jet·vā सम्पहंसेत्वाsam·pa·haṃ·set·vā उय्योजेसि—uy·yo·je·si

Atha kho bhagavā pāṭaligāmike upāsake bahudeva rattiṁ dhammiyā kathāya sandassetvā samādapetvā samuttejetvā sampahaṁsetvā uyyojesi—

The Buddha instructed, inspired, and gladdened them by teaching for much of the night. He then dismissed them, saying,
965

“अभिक्कन्ताa·bhik·kan·tā खो,kho गहपतयो,ga·ha·pa·ta·yo रत्ति।rat·ti

“abhikkantā kho, gahapatayo, ratti.

“It’s late.
966

यस्सदानिyas·sa·dā·ni तुम्हेtum·he कालंkā·laṃ मञ्ञथा”ति।mañ·ña·thā

Yassadāni tumhe kālaṁ maññathā”ti.

Please go when you’re ready.”
967

“एवं,e·vaṃ भन्ते”ति,bhan·te खोkho पाटलिगामिकाpā·ṭa·li·gā·mi·kā उपासकाu·pā·sa·kā भगवतोbha·ga·va·to पटिस्सुणित्वाpa·ṭis·su·ṇit·vā उट्ठायासनाuṭ·ṭhā·yā·sa·nā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā पदक्खिणंpa·dak·khi·ṇaṃ कत्वाkat·vā पक्कमिंसु।pak·ka·miṃ·su

“Evaṁ, bhante”ti, kho pāṭaligāmikā upāsakā bhagavato paṭissuṇitvā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pakkamiṁsu.

Saying, “Yes, sir,” they got up from their seats, bowed down, circumambulated him with their right sides toward him, and left.
968

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā अचिरपक्कन्तेसुa·ci·ra·pak·kan·te·su पाटलिगामिकेसुpā·ṭa·li·gā·mi·ke·su उपासकेसुu·pā·sa·ke·su सुञ्ञागारंsuñ·ñā·gā·raṃ पाविसि।pā·vi·si

Atha kho bhagavā acirapakkantesu pāṭaligāmikesu upāsakesu suññāgāraṁ pāvisi.

Soon after the lay followers of Pāṭaligāma had left, the Buddha entered an empty cubicle.
969

15। सुनिधवस्सकारवत्थुsu·ni·dha·vas·sa·kā·ra·vat·thu

15. Sunidhavassakāravatthu

15. Sunidha and Vassakāra
970

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na सुनिधवस्सकाराsu·ni·dha·vas·sa·kā·rā मगधमहामत्ताma·ga·dha·ma·hā·mat·tā पाटलिगामेpā·ṭa·li·gā·me नगरंna·ga·raṃ मापेन्तिmā·pen·ti वज्जीनंvaj·jī·naṃ पटिबाहाय।pa·ṭi·bā·hā·ya

Tena kho pana samayena sunidhavassakārā magadhamahāmattā pāṭaligāme nagaraṁ māpenti vajjīnaṁ paṭibāhāya.

At that time Sunidha and Vassakāra, the government officials of Magadha, were building a fortress at Pāṭaligāma to defend against the Vajjians.
971

अद्दसाad·da·sā खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā रत्तियाrat·ti·yā पच्चूससमयंpac·cū·sa·sa·ma·yaṃ पच्चुट्ठायpac·cuṭ·ṭhā·ya दिब्बेनdib·be·na चक्खुनाcak·khu·nā विसुद्धेनvi·sud·dhe·na अतिक्कन्तमानुसकेनa·tik·kan·ta·mā·nu·sa·ke·na सम्बहुलाsam·ba·hu·lā देवतायोde·va·tā·yo पाटलिगामेpā·ṭa·li·gā·me वत्थूनिvat·thū·ni परिग्गण्हन्तियो।pa·rig·gaṇ·han·ti·yo

Addasā kho bhagavā rattiyā paccūsasamayaṁ paccuṭṭhāya dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena sambahulā devatāyo pāṭaligāme vatthūni pariggaṇhantiyo.

The Buddha got up early in the morning and, with his superhuman and purified clairvoyance, he saw a number of gods taking possession of sites around Pāṭaligāma.
972

यस्मिंyas·miṃ पदेसेpa·de·se महेसक्खाma·he·sak·khā देवताde·va·tā वत्थूनिvat·thū·ni परिग्गण्हन्ति,pa·rig·gaṇ·han·ti महेसक्खानंma·he·sak·khā·naṃ तत्थtat·tha राजूनंrā·jū·naṃ राजमहामत्तानंrā·ja·ma·hā·mat·tā·naṃ चित्तानिcit·tā·ni नमन्तिna·man·ti निवेसनानिni·ve·sa·nā·ni मापेतुं।mā·pe·tuṃ

Yasmiṁ padese mahesakkhā devatā vatthūni pariggaṇhanti, mahesakkhānaṁ tattha rājūnaṁ rājamahāmattānaṁ cittāni namanti nivesanāni māpetuṁ.

And wherever powerful gods took possession of a site was where powerful kings and government officials tended to build their houses.
973

यस्मिंyas·miṃ पदेसेpa·de·se मज्झिमाmaj·jhi·mā देवताde·va·tā वत्थूनिvat·thū·ni परिग्गण्हन्ति,pa·rig·gaṇ·han·ti मज्झिमानंmaj·jhi·mā·naṃ तत्थtat·tha राजूनंrā·jū·naṃ राजमहामत्तानंrā·ja·ma·hā·mat·tā·naṃ चित्तानिcit·tā·ni नमन्तिna·man·ti निवेसनानिni·ve·sa·nā·ni मापेतुं।mā·pe·tuṃ

Yasmiṁ padese majjhimā devatā vatthūni pariggaṇhanti, majjhimānaṁ tattha rājūnaṁ rājamahāmattānaṁ cittāni namanti nivesanāni māpetuṁ.

Wherever gods of middle standing took possession of a site was where the kings and government officials of middle standing tended to build their houses.
974

यस्मिंyas·miṃ पदेसेpa·de·se नीचाnī·cā देवताde·va·tā वत्थूनिvat·thū·ni परिग्गण्हन्ति,pa·rig·gaṇ·han·ti नीचानंnī·cā·naṃ तत्थtat·tha राजूनंrā·jū·naṃ राजमहामत्तानंrā·ja·ma·hā·mat·tā·naṃ चित्तानिcit·tā·ni नमन्तिna·man·ti निवेसनानिni·ve·sa·nā·ni मापेतुं।mā·pe·tuṃ

Yasmiṁ padese nīcā devatā vatthūni pariggaṇhanti, nīcānaṁ tattha rājūnaṁ rājamahāmattānaṁ cittāni namanti nivesanāni māpetuṁ.

Wherever the lower ranked gods took possession of a site was where the lower ranked kings and government officials tended to build their houses.
975

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ आनन्दंā·nan·daṃ आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi—

The Buddha said to Venerable Ānanda,
976

“केke नुnu खोkho ते,te आनन्द,ā·nan·da पाटलिगामेpā·ṭa·li·gā·me नगरंna·ga·raṃ मापेन्ती”ति?mā·pen·tī

“ke nu kho te, ānanda, pāṭaligāme nagaraṁ māpentī”ti?

“Who’s building a fortress in Pāṭaligāma?”
977

“सुनिधवस्सकारा,su·ni·dha·vas·sa·kā·rā भन्ते,bhan·te मगधमहामत्ताma·ga·dha·ma·hā·mat·tā पाटलिगामेpā·ṭa·li·gā·me नगरंna·ga·raṃ मापेन्तिmā·pen·ti वज्जीनंvaj·jī·naṃ पटिबाहाया”ति।pa·ṭi·bā·hā·yā

“Sunidhavassakārā, bhante, magadhamahāmattā pāṭaligāme nagaraṁ māpenti vajjīnaṁ paṭibāhāyā”ti.

“Sunidha and Vassakāra, sir.”
978

“सेय्यथापि,sey·ya·thā·pi आनन्द,ā·nan·da देवेहिde·ve·hi तावतिंसेहिtā·va·tiṃ·se·hi सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ मन्तेत्वा;man·tet·vā

“Seyyathāpi, ānanda, devehi tāvatiṁsehi saddhiṁ mantetvā;

“They are building the fortress, Ānanda, as if they had consulted with the Tāvatiṁsa gods.”
979

एवमेवe·va·me·va खो,kho आनन्द,ā·nan·da सुनिधवस्सकाराsu·ni·dha·vas·sa·kā·rā मगधमहामत्ताma·ga·dha·ma·hā·mat·tā पाटलिगामेpā·ṭa·li·gā·me नगरंna·ga·raṃ मापेन्तिmā·pen·ti वज्जीनंvaj·jī·naṃ पटिबाहाय।pa·ṭi·bā·hā·ya

evameva kho, ānanda, sunidhavassakārā magadhamahāmattā pāṭaligāme nagaraṁ māpenti vajjīnaṁ paṭibāhāya.

(Pāli only)
980

इधाहं,i·dhā·haṃ आनन्द,ā·nan·da रत्तियाrat·ti·yā पच्चूससमयंpac·cū·sa·sa·ma·yaṃ पच्चुट्ठायpac·cuṭ·ṭhā·ya अद्दसंad·da·saṃ दिब्बेनdib·be·na चक्खुनाcak·khu·nā विसुद्धेनvi·sud·dhe·na अतिक्कन्तमानुसकेनa·tik·kan·ta·mā·nu·sa·ke·na सम्बहुलाsam·ba·hu·lā देवतायोde·va·tā·yo पाटलिगामेpā·ṭa·li·gā·me वत्थूनिvat·thū·ni परिग्गण्हन्तियो।pa·rig·gaṇ·han·ti·yo

Idhāhaṁ, ānanda, rattiyā paccūsasamayaṁ paccuṭṭhāya addasaṁ dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena sambahulā devatāyo pāṭaligāme vatthūni pariggaṇhantiyo.

The Buddha told Ānanda what he had seen,
981

यस्मिंyas·miṃ पदेसेpa·de·se महेसक्खाma·he·sak·khā देवताde·va·tā वत्थूनिvat·thū·ni परिग्गण्हन्ति,pa·rig·gaṇ·han·ti महेसक्खानंma·he·sak·khā·naṃ तत्थtat·tha राजूनंrā·jū·naṃ राजमहामत्तानंrā·ja·ma·hā·mat·tā·naṃ चित्तानिcit·tā·ni नमन्तिna·man·ti निवेसनानिni·ve·sa·nā·ni मापेतुं।mā·pe·tuṃ

Yasmiṁ padese mahesakkhā devatā vatthūni pariggaṇhanti, mahesakkhānaṁ tattha rājūnaṁ rājamahāmattānaṁ cittāni namanti nivesanāni māpetuṁ.

(Pāli only)
982

यस्मिंyas·miṃ पदेसेpa·de·se मज्झिमाmaj·jhi·mā देवताde·va·tā वत्थूनिvat·thū·ni परिग्गण्हन्ति,pa·rig·gaṇ·han·ti मज्झिमानंmaj·jhi·mā·naṃ तत्थtat·tha राजूनंrā·jū·naṃ राजमहामत्तानंrā·ja·ma·hā·mat·tā·naṃ चित्तानिcit·tā·ni नमन्तिna·man·ti निवेसनानिni·ve·sa·nā·ni मापेतुं।mā·pe·tuṃ

Yasmiṁ padese majjhimā devatā vatthūni pariggaṇhanti, majjhimānaṁ tattha rājūnaṁ rājamahāmattānaṁ cittāni namanti nivesanāni māpetuṁ.

(Pāli only)
983

यस्मिंyas·miṃ पदेसेpa·de·se नीचाnī·cā देवताde·va·tā वत्थूनिvat·thū·ni परिग्गण्हन्ति,pa·rig·gaṇ·han·ti नीचानंnī·cā·naṃ तत्थtat·tha राजूनंrā·jū·naṃ राजमहामत्तानंrā·ja·ma·hā·mat·tā·naṃ चित्तानिcit·tā·ni नमन्तिna·man·ti निवेसनानिni·ve·sa·nā·ni मापेतुं।mā·pe·tuṃ

Yasmiṁ padese nīcā devatā vatthūni pariggaṇhanti, nīcānaṁ tattha rājūnaṁ rājamahāmattānaṁ cittāni namanti nivesanāni māpetuṁ.

(Pāli only)
984

यावता,yā·va·tā आनन्द,ā·nan·da अरियंa·ri·yaṃ आयतनं,ā·ya·ta·naṃ यावताyā·va·tā वणिप्पथो,va·ṇip·pa·tho इदंi·daṃ अग्गनगरंag·ga·na·ga·raṃ भविस्सतिbha·vis·sa·ti पाटलिपुत्तंpā·ṭa·li·put·taṃ पुटभेदनं।pu·ṭa·bhe·da·naṃ

Yāvatā, ānanda, ariyaṁ āyatanaṁ, yāvatā vaṇippatho, idaṁ agganagaraṁ bhavissati pāṭaliputtaṁ puṭabhedanaṁ.

adding, “As far, Ānanda, as the extent of the Indian realm, as far as the routes of commerce, Pāṭaliputta will be the chief city, the destination for merchandise.
985

पाटलिपुत्तस्सpā·ṭa·li·put·tas·sa खो,kho आनन्द,ā·nan·da तयोta·yo अन्तरायाan·ta·rā·yā भविस्सन्ति—bha·vis·san·ti

Pāṭaliputtassa kho, ānanda, tayo antarāyā bhavissanti—

And there will be three dangers for Pāṭaliputta:
986

अग्गितोag·gi·to वाvā उदकतोu·da·ka·to वाvā अब्भन्तरतोab·bhan·ta·ra·to वाvā मिथुभेदा”ति।mi·thu·bhe·dā

aggito vā udakato vā abbhantarato vā mithubhedā”ti.

fire, water, and internal dissent.”
987

अथa·tha खोkho सुनिधवस्सकाराsu·ni·dha·vas·sa·kā·rā मगधमहामत्ताma·ga·dha·ma·hā·mat·tā येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमिंसु,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·miṃ·su उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवताbha·ga·va·tā सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ सम्मोदिंसु,sam·mo·diṃ·su सम्मोदनीयंsam·mo·da·nī·yaṃ कथंka·thaṃ सारणीयंsā·ra·ṇī·yaṃ वीतिसारेत्वाvī·ti·sā·ret·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ अट्ठंसु।aṭ·ṭhaṃ·su

Atha kho sunidhavassakārā magadhamahāmattā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodiṁsu, sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhaṁsu.

Sunidha and Vassakāra then went to the Buddha and exchanged pleasantries with him,
988

एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ ठिताṭhi·tā खोkho सुनिधवस्सकाराsu·ni·dha·vas·sa·kā·rā मगधमहामत्ताma·ga·dha·ma·hā·mat·tā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोचुं—e·ta·da·vo·cuṃ

Ekamantaṁ ṭhitā kho sunidhavassakārā magadhamahāmattā bhagavantaṁ etadavocuṁ—

adding,
989

“अधिवासेतुa·dhi·vā·se·tu नोno भवंbha·vaṃ गोतमोgo·ta·mo अज्जतनायaj·ja·ta·nā·ya भत्तंbhat·taṃ सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ भिक्खुसङ्घेना”ति।bhik·khu·saṅ·ghe·nā

“adhivāsetu no bhavaṁ gotamo ajjatanāya bhattaṁ saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghenā”ti.

“Please accept tomorrow’s meal from us together with the Sangha of monks.”
990

अधिवासेसिa·dhi·vā·se·si भगवाbha·ga·vā तुण्हीभावेन।tuṇ·hī·bhā·ve·na

Adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvena.

The Buddha consented by remaining silent.
991

अथa·tha खोkho सुनिधवस्सकाराsu·ni·dha·vas·sa·kā·rā मगधमहामत्ताma·ga·dha·ma·hā·mat·tā भगवतोbha·ga·va·to अधिवासनंa·dhi·vā·sa·naṃ विदित्वाvi·dit·vā पक्कमिंसु।pak·ka·miṃ·su

Atha kho sunidhavassakārā magadhamahāmattā bhagavato adhivāsanaṁ viditvā pakkamiṁsu.

Knowing that he had consented, they left.
992

अथa·tha खोkho सुनिधवस्सकाराsu·ni·dha·vas·sa·kā·rā मगधमहामत्ताma·ga·dha·ma·hā·mat·tā पणीतंpa·ṇī·taṃ खादनीयंkhā·da·nī·yaṃ भोजनीयंbho·ja·nī·yaṃ पटियादापेत्वाpa·ṭi·yā·dā·pet·vā भगवतोbha·ga·va·to कालंkā·laṃ आरोचापेसुं—“कालो,ā·ro·cā·pe·suṃ भोbho गोतम,go·ta·ma निट्ठितंniṭ·ṭhi·taṃ भत्तन्”ति।bhat·tan

Atha kho sunidhavassakārā magadhamahāmattā paṇītaṁ khādanīyaṁ bhojanīyaṁ paṭiyādāpetvā bhagavato kālaṁ ārocāpesuṁ—“kālo, bho gotama, niṭṭhitaṁ bhattan”ti.

Having had various kinds of fine foods prepared, they had the Buddha informed that the meal was ready.
993

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā पुब्बण्हसमयंpub·baṇ·ha·sa·ma·yaṃ निवासेत्वाni·vā·set·vā पत्तचीवरमादायpat·ta·cī·va·ra·mā·dā·ya येनye·na सुनिधवस्सकारानंsu·ni·dha·vas·sa·kā·rā·naṃ मगधमहामत्तानंma·ga·dha·ma·hā·mat·tā·naṃ परिवेसनाpa·ri·ve·sa·nā तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā पञ्ञत्तेpañ·ñat·te आसनेā·sa·ne निसीदिni·sī·di सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ भिक्खुसङ्घेन।bhik·khu·saṅ·ghe·na

Atha kho bhagavā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya yena sunidhavassakārānaṁ magadhamahāmattānaṁ parivesanā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghena.

The Buddha robed up, took his bowl and robe, and went to Sunidha and Vassakāra’s meal offering where he sat down on the prepared seat together with the Sangha of monks.
994

अथa·tha खोkho सुनिधवस्सकाराsu·ni·dha·vas·sa·kā·rā मगधमहामत्ताma·ga·dha·ma·hā·mat·tā बुद्धप्पमुखंbud·dhap·pa·mu·khaṃ भिक्खुसङ्घंbhik·khu·saṅ·ghaṃ पणीतेनpa·ṇī·te·na खादनीयेनkhā·da·nī·ye·na भोजनीयेनbho·ja·nī·ye·na सहत्थाsa·hat·thā सन्तप्पेत्वाsan·tap·pet·vā सम्पवारेत्वाsam·pa·vā·ret·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ भुत्ताविंbhut·tā·viṃ ओनीतपत्तपाणिंo·nī·ta·pat·ta·pā·ṇiṃ एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदिंसु।ni·sī·diṃ·su

Atha kho sunidhavassakārā magadhamahāmattā buddhappamukhaṁ bhikkhusaṅghaṁ paṇītena khādanīyena bhojanīyena sahatthā santappetvā sampavāretvā bhagavantaṁ bhuttāviṁ onītapattapāṇiṁ ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu.

Sunidha and Vassakāra then personally served various kinds of fine foods to the Sangha of monks headed by the Buddha. When the Buddha had finished his meal, they sat down to one side.
995

एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नेni·sin·ne खोkho सुनिधवस्सकारेsu·ni·dha·vas·sa·kā·re मगधमहामत्तेma·ga·dha·ma·hā·mat·te भगवाbha·ga·vā इमाहिi·mā·hi गाथाहिgā·thā·hi अनुमोदि—a·nu·mo·di

Ekamantaṁ nisinne kho sunidhavassakāre magadhamahāmatte bhagavā imāhi gāthāhi anumodi—

And the Buddha expressed his appreciation with these verses:
996

“यस्मिंyas·miṃ पदेसेpa·de·se कप्पेति,kap·pe·ti

“Yasmiṁ padese kappeti,

“In whatever place
997

वासंvā·saṃ पण्डितजातियो;paṇ·ḍi·ta·jā·ti·yo

vāsaṁ paṇḍitajātiyo;

The wise decide to live,
998

सीलवन्तेत्थsī·la·van·tet·tha भोजेत्वा,bho·jet·vā

Sīlavantettha bhojetvā,

There they feed the virtuous,
999

सञ्ञतेsañ·ña·te ब्रह्मचारयो।brah·ma·cā·ra·yo

saññate brahmacārayo.

The restrained monastics.
1000

याyā तत्थtat·tha देवताde·va·tā आसुं,ā·suṃ

Yā tattha devatā āsuṁ,

One should dedicate the offering
1001

तासंtā·saṃ दक्खिणमादिसे;dak·khi·ṇa·mā·di·se

tāsaṁ dakkhiṇamādise;

To whatever gods are there.
1002

ताtā पूजिताpū·ji·tā पूजयन्ति,pū·ja·yan·ti

Tā pūjitā pūjayanti,

Being revered and honored,
1003

मानिताmā·ni·tā मानयन्तिmā·na·yan·ti नं।naṃ

mānitā mānayanti naṁ.

They return the favor to you.
1004

ततोta·to नंnaṃ अनुकम्पन्ति,a·nu·kam·pan·ti

Tato naṁ anukampanti,

And they have compassion for you,
1005

माताmā·tā पुत्तंवput·taṃ·va ओरसं;o·ra·saṃ

mātā puttaṁva orasaṁ;

As a mother for her own child.
1006

देवतानुकम्पितोde·va·tā·nu·kam·pi·to पोसो,po·so

Devatānukampito poso,

The person the gods have compassion for
1007

सदाsa·dā भद्रानिbhad·rā·ni पस्सती”ति।pas·sa·tī

sadā bhadrāni passatī”ti.

Always has good fortune.”
1008

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā सुनिधवस्सकारेsu·ni·dha·vas·sa·kā·re मगधमहामत्तेma·ga·dha·ma·hā·mat·te इमाहिi·mā·hi गाथाहिgā·thā·hi अनुमोदित्वाa·nu·mo·dit·vā उट्ठायासनाuṭ·ṭhā·yā·sa·nā पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

Atha kho bhagavā sunidhavassakāre magadhamahāmatte imāhi gāthāhi anumoditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmi.

The Buddha then got up from his seat and left.
1009

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na सुनिधवस्सकाराsu·ni·dha·vas·sa·kā·rā मगधमहामत्ताma·ga·dha·ma·hā·mat·tā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ पिट्ठितोpiṭ·ṭhi·to पिट्ठितोpiṭ·ṭhi·to अनुबन्धाa·nu·ban·dhā होन्ति—hon·ti

Tena kho pana samayena sunidhavassakārā magadhamahāmattā bhagavantaṁ piṭṭhito piṭṭhito anubandhā honti—

But Sunidha and Vassakāra followed behind him, thinking,
1010

“येनज्जye·naj·ja समणोsa·ma·ṇo गोतमोgo·ta·mo द्वारेनdvā·re·na निक्खमिस्सति,nik·kha·mis·sa·ti तंtaṃ गोतमद्वारंgo·ta·mad·vā·raṃ नामnā·ma भविस्सति;bha·vis·sa·ti

“yenajja samaṇo gotamo dvārena nikkhamissati, taṁ gotamadvāraṁ nāma bhavissati;

“Whatever gate the ascetic Gotama leaves from, we’ll name the Gotama Gate.
1011

येनye·na तित्थेनtit·the·na गङ्गंgaṅ·gaṃ नदिंna·diṃ उत्तरिस्सति,ut·ta·ris·sa·ti तंtaṃ गोतमतित्थंgo·ta·ma·tit·thaṃ नामnā·ma भविस्सती”ति।bha·vis·sa·tī

yena titthena gaṅgaṁ nadiṁ uttarissati, taṁ gotamatitthaṁ nāma bhavissatī”ti.

Whatever ford he uses to cross the river Ganges, we’ll name the Gotama Ford.”
1012

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā येनye·na द्वारेनdvā·re·na निक्खमि,nik·kha·mi तंtaṃ गोतमद्वारंgo·ta·mad·vā·raṃ नामnā·ma अहोसि।a·ho·si

Atha kho bhagavā yena dvārena nikkhami, taṁ gotamadvāraṁ nāma ahosi.

And so the gate through which he left was named the Gotama Gate.
1013

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā येनye·na गङ्गाgaṅ·gā नदीna·dī तेनुपसङ्कमि।te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi

Atha kho bhagavā yena gaṅgā nadī tenupasaṅkami.

The Buddha then went to the river Ganges.
1014

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na गङ्गाgaṅ·gā नदीna·dī पूराpū·rā होतिho·ti समतित्तिकाsa·ma·tit·ti·kā काकपेय्या।kā·ka·pey·yā

Tena kho pana samayena gaṅgā nadī pūrā hoti samatittikā kākapeyyā.

At that time the river was full to the brim.
1015

मनुस्साma·nus·sā अञ्ञेañ·ñe नावंnā·vaṃ परियेसन्ति,pa·ri·ye·san·ti अञ्ञेañ·ñe उळुम्पंu·ḷum·paṃ परियेसन्ति,pa·ri·ye·san·ti अञ्ञेañ·ñe कुल्लंkul·laṃ बन्धन्तिban·dhan·ti ओराo·rā पारंpā·raṃ गन्तुकामा।gan·tu·kā·mā

Manussā aññe nāvaṁ pariyesanti, aññe uḷumpaṁ pariyesanti, aññe kullaṁ bandhanti orā pāraṁ gantukāmā.

Among the people who wanted to cross, some were looking for a boat, some for a barge, and some were putting together a raft.
1016

अद्दसाad·da·sā खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā तेte मनुस्सेma·nus·se अञ्ञेañ·ñe नावंnā·vaṃ परियेसन्ते,pa·ri·ye·san·te अञ्ञेañ·ñe उळुम्पंu·ḷum·paṃ परियेसन्ते,pa·ri·ye·san·te अञ्ञेañ·ñe कुल्लंkul·laṃ बन्धन्तेban·dhan·te ओराo·rā पारंpā·raṃ गन्तुकामे,gan·tu·kā·me दिस्वानdis·vā·na सेय्यथापिsey·ya·thā·pi नामnā·ma बलवाba·la·vā पुरिसोpu·ri·so समिञ्जितंsa·miñ·ji·taṃ वाvā बाहंbā·haṃ पसारेय्य,pa·sā·rey·ya पसारितंpa·sā·ri·taṃ वाvā बाहंbā·haṃ समिञ्जेय्य;sa·miñ·jey·ya एवमेवe·va·me·va खो—गङ्गायkho नदियाna·di·yā ओरिमतीरेo·ri·ma·tī·re अन्तरहितोan·ta·ra·hi·to पारिमतीरेpā·ri·ma·tī·re पच्चुट्ठासिpac·cuṭ·ṭhā·si सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ भिक्खुसङ्घेन।bhik·khu·saṅ·ghe·na

Addasā kho bhagavā te manusse aññe nāvaṁ pariyesante, aññe uḷumpaṁ pariyesante, aññe kullaṁ bandhante orā pāraṁ gantukāme, disvāna seyyathāpi nāma balavā puriso samiñjitaṁ vā bāhaṁ pasāreyya, pasāritaṁ vā bāhaṁ samiñjeyya; evameva kho—gaṅgāya nadiyā orimatīre antarahito pārimatīre paccuṭṭhāsi saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghena.

The Buddha saw this. Then, just as a strong man might bend or stretch his arm, the Buddha disappeared from the near shore of the river and reappeared on the far shore together with the Sangha of monks.
1017

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ विदित्वाvi·dit·vā तायंtā·yaṃ वेलायंve·lā·yaṃ इमंi·maṃ उदानंu·dā·naṃ उदानेसि—u·dā·ne·si

Atha kho bhagavā etamatthaṁ viditvā tāyaṁ velāyaṁ imaṁ udānaṁ udānesi—

Seeing the significance of this, the Buddha uttered a heartfelt exclamation:
1018

“येye तरन्तिta·ran·ti अण्णवंaṇ·ṇa·vaṃ सरं,sa·raṃ

“Ye taranti aṇṇavaṁ saraṁ,

“Whoever crosses the flowing mass of water,
1019

सेतुंse·tuṃ कत्वानkat·vā·na विसज्जvi·saj·ja पल्ललानि;pal·la·lā·ni

Setuṁ katvāna visajja pallalāni;

They build a bridge, leaving the water behind.
1020

कुल्लञ्हिkul·lañ·hi जनोja·no बन्धति,ban·dha·ti

Kullañhi jano bandhati,

While ordinary people put together a raft,
1021

तिण्णाtiṇ·ṇā मेधाविनोme·dhā·vi·no जना”ति।ja·nā

Tiṇṇā medhāvino janā”ti.

The wise have crossed already.”
1022

16। कोटिगामेसच्चकथाko·ṭi·gā·me·sac·ca·ka·thā

16. Koṭigāmesaccakathā

16. Discussion of the truths at Koṭigāma
1023

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā येनye·na कोटिगामोko·ṭi·gā·mo तेनुपसङ्कमि।te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi

Atha kho bhagavā yena koṭigāmo tenupasaṅkami.

The Buddha then went to Koṭigāma
1024

तत्रtat·ra सुदंsu·daṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā कोटिगामेko·ṭi·gā·me विहरति।vi·ha·ra·ti

Tatra sudaṁ bhagavā koṭigāme viharati.

and stayed there.
1025

तत्रtat·ra खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi—

And he addressed the monks:
1026

“चतुन्नं,ca·tun·naṃ भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अरियसच्चानंa·ri·ya·sac·cā·naṃ अननुबोधाa·na·nu·bo·dhā अप्पटिवेधाap·pa·ṭi·ve·dhā एवमिदंe·va·mi·daṃ दीघमद्धानंdī·gha·mad·dhā·naṃ सन्धावितंsan·dhā·vi·taṃ संसरितंsaṃ·sa·ri·taṃ ममञ्चेवma·mañ·ce·va तुम्हाकञ्च।tum·hā·kañ·ca

“catunnaṁ, bhikkhave, ariyasaccānaṁ ananubodhā appaṭivedhā evamidaṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ sandhāvitaṁ saṁsaritaṁ mamañceva tumhākañca.

“It’s because of not awakening to or penetrating these four noble truths that you and I have wandered on and transmigrated for such a long time:
1027

कतमेसंka·ta·me·saṃ चतुन्नं?ca·tun·naṃ

Katamesaṁ catunnaṁ?

(Pāli only)
1028

दुक्खस्स,duk·khas·sa भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अरियसच्चस्सa·ri·ya·sac·cas·sa अननुबोधाa·na·nu·bo·dhā अप्पटिवेधाap·pa·ṭi·ve·dhā एवमिदंe·va·mi·daṃ दीघमद्धानंdī·gha·mad·dhā·naṃ सन्धावितंsan·dhā·vi·taṃ संसरितंsaṃ·sa·ri·taṃ ममञ्चेवma·mañ·ce·va तुम्हाकञ्च।tum·hā·kañ·ca

Dukkhassa, bhikkhave, ariyasaccassa ananubodhā appaṭivedhā evamidaṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ sandhāvitaṁ saṁsaritaṁ mamañceva tumhākañca.

the noble truth of suffering,
1029

दुक्खसमुदयस्सduk·kha·sa·mu·da·yas·sa अरियसच्चस्सa·ri·ya·sac·cas·sa …पे…pe

Dukkhasamudayassa ariyasaccassa …pe…

the noble truth of the origin of suffering,
1030

दुक्खनिरोधस्सduk·kha·ni·ro·dhas·sa अरियसच्चस्सa·ri·ya·sac·cas·sa …पे…pe

dukkhanirodhassa ariyasaccassa …pe…

the noble truth of the end of suffering,
1031

दुक्खनिरोधगामिनियाduk·kha·ni·ro·dha·gā·mi·ni·yā पटिपदायpa·ṭi·pa·dā·ya अरियसच्चस्सa·ri·ya·sac·cas·sa अननुबोधाa·na·nu·bo·dhā अप्पटिवेधाap·pa·ṭi·ve·dhā एवमिदंe·va·mi·daṃ दीघमद्धानंdī·gha·mad·dhā·naṃ सन्धावितंsan·dhā·vi·taṃ संसरितंsaṃ·sa·ri·taṃ ममञ्चेवma·mañ·ce·va तुम्हाकञ्च।tum·hā·kañ·ca

dukkhanirodhagāminiyā paṭipadāya ariyasaccassa ananubodhā appaṭivedhā evamidaṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ sandhāvitaṁ saṁsaritaṁ mamañceva tumhākañca.

the noble truth of the path leading to the end of suffering.
1032

तयिदं,ta·yi·daṃ भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दुक्खंduk·khaṃ अरियसच्चंa·ri·ya·sac·caṃ अनुबुद्धंa·nu·bud·dhaṃ पटिविद्धं,pa·ṭi·vid·dhaṃ दुक्खसमुदयंduk·kha·sa·mu·da·yaṃ अरियसच्चंa·ri·ya·sac·caṃ अनुबुद्धंa·nu·bud·dhaṃ पटिविद्धं,pa·ṭi·vid·dhaṃ दुक्खनिरोधंduk·kha·ni·ro·dhaṃ अरियसच्चंa·ri·ya·sac·caṃ अनुबुद्धंa·nu·bud·dhaṃ पटिविद्धं,pa·ṭi·vid·dhaṃ दुक्खनिरोधगामिनीduk·kha·ni·ro·dha·gā·mi·nī पटिपदाpa·ṭi·pa·dā अरियसच्चंa·ri·ya·sac·caṃ अनुबुद्धंa·nu·bud·dhaṃ पटिविद्धं,pa·ṭi·vid·dhaṃ उच्छिन्नाuc·chin·nā भवतण्हा,bha·va·taṇ·hā खीणाkhī·ṇā भवनेत्ति,bha·va·net·ti नत्थिnat·thi दानिdā·ni पुनब्भवोति।pu·nab·bha·vo·ti

Tayidaṁ, bhikkhave, dukkhaṁ ariyasaccaṁ anubuddhaṁ paṭividdhaṁ, dukkhasamudayaṁ ariyasaccaṁ anubuddhaṁ paṭividdhaṁ, dukkhanirodhaṁ ariyasaccaṁ anubuddhaṁ paṭividdhaṁ, dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā ariyasaccaṁ anubuddhaṁ paṭividdhaṁ, ucchinnā bhavataṇhā, khīṇā bhavanetti, natthi dāni punabbhavoti.

But now, monks, the noble truth of suffering has been awakened to and penetrated, likewise the noble truth of the origin of suffering, the noble truth of the end of suffering, and the noble truth of the path leading to the end of suffering. Craving for existence has been cut off; the passage to existence has been destroyed; now there is no further existence.
1033

चतुन्नंca·tun·naṃ अरियसच्चानं,a·ri·ya·sac·cā·naṃ

Catunnaṁ ariyasaccānaṁ,

Because of not properly seeing
1034

यथाभूतंya·thā·bhū·taṃ अदस्सना;a·das·sa·nā

yathābhūtaṁ adassanā;

The four noble truths,
1035

संसितंsaṃ·si·taṃ दीघमद्धानं,dī·gha·mad·dhā·naṃ

Saṁsitaṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ,

You have transmigrated for a long time
1036

तासुtā·su तास्वेवtās·ve·va जातिसु।jā·ti·su

tāsu tāsveva jātisu.

Among the various kinds of rebirth.
1037

तानिtā·ni एतानिe·tā·ni दिट्ठानि,diṭ·ṭhā·ni

Tāni etāni diṭṭhāni,

But now they have been seen,
1038

भवनेत्तिbha·va·net·ti समूहता;sa·mū·ha·tā

bhavanetti samūhatā;

The passage to existence has been destroyed,
1039

उच्छिन्नंuc·chin·naṃ मूलंmū·laṃ दुक्खस्स,duk·khas·sa

Ucchinnaṁ mūlaṁ dukkhassa,

The root of suffering has been cut off,
1040

नत्थिnat·thi दानिdā·ni पुनब्भवो”ति।pu·nab·bha·vo

natthi dāni punabbhavo”ti.

And there is no further existence.”
1041

17। अम्बपालीवत्थुam·ba·pā·lī·vat·thu

17. Ambapālīvatthu

17–18. The account of Ambapālī and the Licchavīs
1042

अस्सोसिas·so·si खोkho अम्बपालीam·ba·pā·lī गणिका—ga·ṇi·kā

Assosi kho ambapālī gaṇikā—

The courtesan Ambapālī heard
1043

“भगवाbha·ga·vā किरki·ra कोटिगामंko·ṭi·gā·maṃ अनुप्पत्तो”ति।a·nup·pat·to

“bhagavā kira koṭigāmaṁ anuppatto”ti.

that the Buddha had arrived at Koṭigāma.
1044

अथa·tha खोkho अम्बपालीam·ba·pā·lī गणिकाga·ṇi·kā भद्रानिbhad·rā·ni भद्रानिbhad·rā·ni यानानिyā·nā·ni योजापेत्वाyo·jā·pet·vā भद्रंbhad·raṃ भद्रंbhad·raṃ यानंyā·naṃ अभिरुहित्वाa·bhi·ru·hit·vā भद्रेहिbhad·re·hi भद्रेहिbhad·re·hi यानेहिyā·ne·hi वेसालियाve·sā·li·yā निय्यासिniy·yā·si भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ दस्सनाय।das·sa·nā·ya

Atha kho ambapālī gaṇikā bhadrāni bhadrāni yānāni yojāpetvā bhadraṁ bhadraṁ yānaṁ abhiruhitvā bhadrehi bhadrehi yānehi vesāliyā niyyāsi bhagavantaṁ dassanāya.

She had her best carriages harnessed, mounted one of them, and left Vesālī to visit the Buddha.
1045

यावतिकाyā·va·ti·kā यानस्सyā·nas·sa भूमि,bhū·mi यानेनyā·ne·na गन्त्वा,gan·tvā यानाyā·nā पच्चोरोहित्वा,pac·co·ro·hit·vā पत्तिकावpat·ti·kā·va येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di

Yāvatikā yānassa bhūmi, yānena gantvā, yānā paccorohitvā, pattikāva yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

She went by carriage as far as the ground would allow, dismounted, and then approached the Buddha on foot. After bowing down to the Buddha, she sat down,
1046

एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नंni·sin·naṃ खोkho अम्बपालिंam·ba·pā·liṃ गणिकंga·ṇi·kaṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā धम्मियाdham·mi·yā कथायka·thā·ya सन्दस्सेसिsan·das·se·si समादपेसिsa·mā·da·pe·si समुत्तेजेसिsa·mut·te·je·si सम्पहंसेसि।sam·pa·haṃ·se·si

Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho ambapāliṁ gaṇikaṁ bhagavā dhammiyā kathāya sandassesi samādapesi samuttejesi sampahaṁsesi.

and the Buddha instructed, inspired, and gladdened her with a teaching.
1047

अथa·tha खोkho अम्बपालीam·ba·pā·lī गणिकाga·ṇi·kā भगवताbha·ga·va·tā धम्मियाdham·mi·yā कथायka·thā·ya सन्दस्सिताsan·das·si·tā समादपिताsa·mā·da·pi·tā समुत्तेजिताsa·mut·te·ji·tā सम्पहंसिताsam·pa·haṃ·si·tā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

Atha kho ambapālī gaṇikā bhagavatā dhammiyā kathāya sandassitā samādapitā samuttejitā sampahaṁsitā bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

She then said to the Buddha,
1048

“अधिवासेतुa·dhi·vā·se·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te भगवाbha·ga·vā स्वातनायsvā·ta·nā·ya भत्तंbhat·taṃ सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ भिक्खुसङ्घेना”ति।bhik·khu·saṅ·ghe·nā

“adhivāsetu me, bhante, bhagavā svātanāya bhattaṁ saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghenā”ti.

“Sir, please accept tomorrow’s meal from me together with the Sangha of monks.”
1049

अधिवासेसिa·dhi·vā·se·si भगवाbha·ga·vā तुण्हीभावेन।tuṇ·hī·bhā·ve·na

Adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvena.

The Buddha consented by remaining silent.
1050

अथa·tha खोkho अम्बपालीam·ba·pā·lī गणिकाga·ṇi·kā भगवतोbha·ga·va·to अधिवासनंa·dhi·vā·sa·naṃ विदित्वाvi·dit·vā उट्ठायासनाuṭ·ṭhā·yā·sa·nā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā पदक्खिणंpa·dak·khi·ṇaṃ कत्वाkat·vā पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

Atha kho ambapālī gaṇikā bhagavato adhivāsanaṁ viditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pakkāmi.

Knowing that he had consented, she got up from her seat, bowed down, circumambulated him with her right side toward him, and left.
1051

18। लिच्छवीवत्थुlic·cha·vī·vat·thu

18. Licchavīvatthu

(Pāli only)
1052

अस्सोसुंas·so·suṃ खोkho वेसालिकाve·sā·li·kā लिच्छवी—lic·cha·vī

Assosuṁ kho vesālikā licchavī—

The Licchavīs of Vesālī, too,
1053

“भगवाbha·ga·vā किरki·ra कोटिगामंko·ṭi·gā·maṃ अनुप्पत्तो”ति।a·nup·pat·to

“bhagavā kira koṭigāmaṁ anuppatto”ti.

heard that the Buddha had arrived at Koṭigāma.
1054

अथa·tha खोkho वेसालिकाve·sā·li·kā लिच्छवीlic·cha·vī भद्रानिbhad·rā·ni भद्रानिbhad·rā·ni यानानिyā·nā·ni योजापेत्वाyo·jā·pet·vā भद्रंbhad·raṃ भद्रंbhad·raṃ यानंyā·naṃ अभिरुहित्वाa·bhi·ru·hit·vā भद्रेहिbhad·re·hi भद्रेहिbhad·re·hi यानेहिyā·ne·hi वेसालियाve·sā·li·yā निय्यासुंniy·yā·suṃ भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ दस्सनाय।das·sa·nā·ya

Atha kho vesālikā licchavī bhadrāni bhadrāni yānāni yojāpetvā bhadraṁ bhadraṁ yānaṁ abhiruhitvā bhadrehi bhadrehi yānehi vesāliyā niyyāsuṁ bhagavantaṁ dassanāya.

They had their best carriages harnessed, mounted one of them, and left Vesālī to visit the Buddha.
1055

अप्पेकच्चेap·pe·kac·ce लिच्छवीlic·cha·vī नीलाnī·lā होन्तिhon·ti नीलवण्णाnī·la·vaṇ·ṇā नीलवत्थाnī·la·vat·thā नीलालङ्कारा,nī·lā·laṅ·kā·rā अप्पेकच्चेap·pe·kac·ce लिच्छवीlic·cha·vī पीताpī·tā होन्तिhon·ti पीतवण्णाpī·ta·vaṇ·ṇā पीतवत्थाpī·ta·vat·thā पीतालङ्कारा,pī·tā·laṅ·kā·rā अप्पेकच्चेap·pe·kac·ce लिच्छवीlic·cha·vī लोहिताlo·hi·tā होन्तिhon·ti लोहितवण्णाlo·hi·ta·vaṇ·ṇā लोहितवत्थाlo·hi·ta·vat·thā लोहितालङ्कारा,lo·hi·tā·laṅ·kā·rā अप्पेकच्चेap·pe·kac·ce लिच्छवीlic·cha·vī ओदाताo·dā·tā होन्तिhon·ti ओदातवण्णाo·dā·ta·vaṇ·ṇā ओदातवत्थाo·dā·ta·vat·thā ओदातालङ्कारा।o·dā·tā·laṅ·kā·rā

Appekacce licchavī nīlā honti nīlavaṇṇā nīlavatthā nīlālaṅkārā, appekacce licchavī pītā honti pītavaṇṇā pītavatthā pītālaṅkārā, appekacce licchavī lohitā honti lohitavaṇṇā lohitavatthā lohitālaṅkārā, appekacce licchavī odātā honti odātavaṇṇā odātavatthā odātālaṅkārā.

Some of them wore blue, with blue makeup, blue clothes, and blue ornaments, and likewise, some of them wore yellow, some red, and some white.
1056

अथa·tha खोkho अम्बपालीam·ba·pā·lī गणिकाga·ṇi·kā दहरानंda·ha·rā·naṃ दहरानंda·ha·rā·naṃ लिच्छवीनंlic·cha·vī·naṃ ईसायī·sā·ya ईसंī·saṃ युगेनyu·ge·na युगंyu·gaṃ चक्केनcak·ke·na चक्कंcak·kaṃ अक्खेनak·khe·na अक्खंak·khaṃ पटिवट्टेसि।pa·ṭi·vaṭ·ṭe·si

Atha kho ambapālī gaṇikā daharānaṁ daharānaṁ licchavīnaṁ īsāya īsaṁ yugena yugaṁ cakkena cakkaṁ akkhena akkhaṁ paṭivaṭṭesi.

When Ambapālī met the young Licchavīs, she turned her carriage around and drove up next to them, pole to pole, yoke to yoke, wheel to wheel, axle to axle.
1057

अथa·tha खोkho तेte लिच्छवीlic·cha·vī अम्बपालिंam·ba·pā·liṃ गणिकंga·ṇi·kaṃ एतदवोचुं—e·ta·da·vo·cuṃ

Atha kho te licchavī ambapāliṁ gaṇikaṁ etadavocuṁ—

The Licchavīs said, “What on earth are you doing?”
1058

“किस्स,kis·sa जेje अम्बपालि,am·ba·pā·li दहरानंda·ha·rā·naṃ दहरानंda·ha·rā·naṃ लिच्छवीनंlic·cha·vī·naṃ ईसायī·sā·ya ईसंī·saṃ युगेनyu·ge·na युगंyu·gaṃ चक्केनcak·ke·na चक्कंcak·kaṃ अक्खेनak·khe·na अक्खंak·khaṃ पटिवट्टेसी”ति?pa·ṭi·vaṭ·ṭe·sī

“kissa, je ambapāli, daharānaṁ daharānaṁ licchavīnaṁ īsāya īsaṁ yugena yugaṁ cakkena cakkaṁ akkhena akkhaṁ paṭivaṭṭesī”ti?

(Pāli only)
1059

“तथाta·thā हिhi पनpa·na मया,ma·yā अय्यपुत्ता,ay·ya·put·tā स्वातनायsvā·ta·nā·ya बुद्धप्पमुखोbud·dhap·pa·mu·kho भिक्खुसङ्घोbhik·khu·saṅ·gho निमन्तितो”ति।ni·man·ti·to

“Tathā hi pana mayā, ayyaputtā, svātanāya buddhappamukho bhikkhusaṅgho nimantito”ti.

and she replied, “I’m doing this, sirs, because I’ve invited the Buddha and the Sangha of monks for tomorrow’s meal!”
1060

“देहि,de·hi जेje अम्बपालि,am·ba·pā·li अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ एतंe·taṃ भत्तंbhat·taṃ सतसहस्सेना”ति।sa·ta·sa·has·se·nā

“Dehi, je ambapāli, amhākaṁ etaṁ bhattaṁ satasahassenā”ti.

“We’ll give you a hundred thousand for this meal, Ambapālī.”
1061

“सचेपिsa·ce·pi मे,me अय्यपुत्ता,ay·ya·put·tā वेसालिंve·sā·liṃ साहारंsā·hā·raṃ दज्जेय्याथ,daj·jey·yā·tha नेवne·va दज्जाहंdaj·jā·haṃ तंtaṃ भत्तन्”ति।bhat·tan

“Sacepi me, ayyaputtā, vesāliṁ sāhāraṁ dajjeyyātha, neva dajjāhaṁ taṁ bhattan”ti.

“Even if you gave me the whole of Vesālī and the adjoining countryside, I would not give you this meal.”
1062

अथa·tha खोkho तेte लिच्छवीlic·cha·vī अङ्गुलिंaṅ·gu·liṃ फोटेसुं—pho·ṭe·suṃ

Atha kho te licchavī aṅguliṁ phoṭesuṁ—

The Licchavīs snapped their fingers in dismay, saying,
1063

“जितम्हji·tam·ha वतva·ta भोbho अम्बकाय,am·ba·kā·ya पराजितम्हpa·rā·ji·tam·ha वतva·ta भोbho अम्बकाया”ति।am·ba·kā·yā

“jitamha vata bho ambakāya, parājitamha vata bho ambakāyā”ti.

“Dammit, we’ve been beaten by the mango woman!”
1064

अथa·tha खोkho तेte लिच्छवीlic·cha·vī येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमिंसु।te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·miṃ·su

Atha kho te licchavī yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu.

And they continued on their way to the Buddha.
1065

अद्दसाad·da·sā खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā तेte लिच्छवीlic·cha·vī दूरतोवdū·ra·to·va आगच्छन्ते,ā·gac·chan·te दिस्वानdis·vā·na भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

Addasā kho bhagavā te licchavī dūratova āgacchante, disvāna bhikkhū āmantesi—

When the Buddha saw them coming, he said to the monks,
1066

“येहि,ye·hi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खूहिbhik·khū·hi देवाde·vā तावतिंसाtā·va·tiṃ·sā अदिट्ठपुब्बा,a·diṭ·ṭha·pub·bā ओलोकेथ,o·lo·ke·tha भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve लिच्छवीपरिसं;lic·cha·vī·pa·ri·saṃ

“yehi, bhikkhave, bhikkhūhi devā tāvatiṁsā adiṭṭhapubbā, oloketha, bhikkhave, licchavīparisaṁ;

“Those of you who haven’t seen the Tāvatiṁsa gods, look at the Licchavīs.
1067

अपलोकेथ,a·pa·lo·ke·tha भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve लिच्छवीपरिसं;lic·cha·vī·pa·ri·saṃ

apaloketha, bhikkhave, licchavīparisaṁ;

(Pāli only)
1068

उपसंहरथ,u·pa·saṃ·ha·ra·tha भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve लिच्छवीपरिसंlic·cha·vī·pa·ri·saṃ तावतिंसपरिसन्”ति।tā·va·tiṃ·sa·pa·ri·san

upasaṁharatha, bhikkhave, licchavīparisaṁ tāvatiṁsaparisan”ti.

The Licchavīs are similar to the Tāvatiṁsa gods.”
1069

अथa·tha खोkho तेte लिच्छवीlic·cha·vī यावतिकाyā·va·ti·kā यानस्सyā·nas·sa भूमि,bhū·mi यानेनyā·ne·na गन्त्वाgan·tvā यानाyā·nā पच्चोरोहित्वाpac·co·ro·hit·vā पत्तिकावpat·ti·kā·va येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमिंसु;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·miṃ·su

Atha kho te licchavī yāvatikā yānassa bhūmi, yānena gantvā yānā paccorohitvā pattikāva yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu;

The Licchavīs went by carriage as far as the ground would allow, dismounted, and then approached the Buddha on foot.
1070

उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदिंसु।ni·sī·diṃ·su

upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu.

After bowing down to the Buddha, they sat down,
1071

एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नेni·sin·ne खोkho तेte लिच्छवीlic·cha·vī भगवाbha·ga·vā धम्मियाdham·mi·yā कथायka·thā·ya सन्दस्सेसिsan·das·se·si समादपेसिsa·mā·da·pe·si समुत्तेजेसिsa·mut·te·je·si सम्पहंसेसि।sam·pa·haṃ·se·si

Ekamantaṁ nisinne kho te licchavī bhagavā dhammiyā kathāya sandassesi samādapesi samuttejesi sampahaṁsesi.

and the Buddha instructed, inspired, and gladdened them with a teaching.
1072

अथa·tha खोkho तेte लिच्छवी,lic·cha·vī भगवताbha·ga·va·tā धम्मियाdham·mi·yā कथायka·thā·ya सन्दस्सिताsan·das·si·tā समादपिताsa·mā·da·pi·tā समुत्तेजिताsa·mut·te·ji·tā सम्पहंसिताsam·pa·haṃ·si·tā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोचुं—e·ta·da·vo·cuṃ

Atha kho te licchavī, bhagavatā dhammiyā kathāya sandassitā samādapitā samuttejitā sampahaṁsitā bhagavantaṁ etadavocuṁ—

They then said to the Buddha,
1073

“अधिवासेतुa·dhi·vā·se·tu नो,no भन्ते,bhan·te भगवाbha·ga·vā स्वातनायsvā·ta·nā·ya भत्तंbhat·taṃ सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ भिक्खुसङ्घेना”ति।bhik·khu·saṅ·ghe·nā

“adhivāsetu no, bhante, bhagavā svātanāya bhattaṁ saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghenā”ti.

“Sir, please accept tomorrow’s meal from us together with the Sangha of monks.”
1074

“अधिवुट्ठोम्हि,a·dhi·vuṭ·ṭhom·hi लिच्छवी,lic·cha·vī स्वातनायsvā·ta·nā·ya अम्बपालियाam·ba·pā·li·yā गणिकायga·ṇi·kā·ya भत्तन्”ति।bhat·tan

“Adhivuṭṭhomhi, licchavī, svātanāya ambapāliyā gaṇikāya bhattan”ti.

“I have already accepted tomorrow’s meal from Ambapālī.”
1075

अथa·tha खोkho तेte लिच्छवीlic·cha·vī अङ्गुलिंaṅ·gu·liṃ फोटेसुं—pho·ṭe·suṃ

Atha kho te licchavī aṅguliṁ phoṭesuṁ—

The Licchavīs snapped their fingers in dismay,
1076

“जितम्हji·tam·ha वतva·ta भोbho अम्बकाय,am·ba·kā·ya पराजितम्हpa·rā·ji·tam·ha वतva·ta भोbho अम्बकाया”ति।am·ba·kā·yā

“jitamha vata bho ambakāya, parājitamha vata bho ambakāyā”ti.

saying, “Dammit, we’ve been beaten by the mango woman.”
1077

अथa·tha खोkho तेte लिच्छवीlic·cha·vī भगवतोbha·ga·va·to भासितंbhā·si·taṃ अभिनन्दित्वाa·bhi·nan·dit·vā अनुमोदित्वाa·nu·mo·dit·vā उट्ठायासनाuṭ·ṭhā·yā·sa·nā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā पदक्खिणंpa·dak·khi·ṇaṃ कत्वाkat·vā पक्कमिंसु।pak·ka·miṃ·su

Atha kho te licchavī bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinanditvā anumoditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pakkamiṁsu.

After rejoicing in the Buddha’s words, they got up from their seats, bowed down, circumambulated him with their right sides toward him, and left.
1078

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā कोटिगामेko·ṭi·gā·me यथाभिरन्तंya·thā·bhi·ran·taṃ विहरित्वाvi·ha·rit·vā येनye·na नातिकाnā·ti·kā तेनुपसङ्कमि।te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi

Atha kho bhagavā koṭigāme yathābhirantaṁ viharitvā yena nātikā tenupasaṅkami.

When the Buddha had stayed at Koṭigāma for as long as he liked, he went to Nātikā,
1079

तत्रtat·ra सुदंsu·daṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā नातिकेnā·ti·ke विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti गिञ्जकावसथे।giñ·ja·kā·va·sa·the

Tatra sudaṁ bhagavā nātike viharati giñjakāvasathe.

where he stayed in the brick guesthouse.
1080

अथa·tha खोkho अम्बपालीam·ba·pā·lī गणिकाga·ṇi·kā तस्साtas·sā रत्तियाrat·ti·yā अच्चयेनac·ca·ye·na सकेsa·ke आरामेā·rā·me पणीतंpa·ṇī·taṃ खादनीयंkhā·da·nī·yaṃ भोजनीयंbho·ja·nī·yaṃ पटियादापेत्वाpa·ṭi·yā·dā·pet·vā भगवतोbha·ga·va·to कालंkā·laṃ आरोचापेसि—“कालो,ā·ro·cā·pe·si भन्ते,bhan·te निट्ठितंniṭ·ṭhi·taṃ भत्तन्”ति।bhat·tan

Atha kho ambapālī gaṇikā tassā rattiyā accayena sake ārāme paṇītaṁ khādanīyaṁ bhojanīyaṁ paṭiyādāpetvā bhagavato kālaṁ ārocāpesi—“kālo, bhante, niṭṭhitaṁ bhattan”ti.

The following morning Ambapālī had various kinds of fine foods prepared in her own park. She then had the Buddha informed that the meal was ready.
1081

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā पुब्बण्हसमयंpub·baṇ·ha·sa·ma·yaṃ निवासेत्वाni·vā·set·vā पत्तचीवरमादायpat·ta·cī·va·ra·mā·dā·ya येनye·na अम्बपालियाam·ba·pā·li·yā गणिकायga·ṇi·kā·ya परिवेसनाpa·ri·ve·sa·nā तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā पञ्ञत्तेpañ·ñat·te आसनेā·sa·ne निसीदिni·sī·di सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ भिक्खुसङ्घेन।bhik·khu·saṅ·ghe·na

Atha kho bhagavā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya yena ambapāliyā gaṇikāya parivesanā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghena.

The Buddha robed up, took his bowl and robe, and went to Ambapālī’s meal offering where he sat down on the prepared seat together with the Sangha of monks.
1082

अथa·tha खोkho अम्बपालीam·ba·pā·lī गणिकाga·ṇi·kā बुद्धप्पमुखंbud·dhap·pa·mu·khaṃ भिक्खुसङ्घंbhik·khu·saṅ·ghaṃ पणीतेनpa·ṇī·te·na खादनीयेनkhā·da·nī·ye·na भोजनीयेनbho·ja·nī·ye·na सहत्थाsa·hat·thā सन्तप्पेत्वाsan·tap·pet·vā सम्पवारेत्वाsam·pa·vā·ret·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ भुत्ताविंbhut·tā·viṃ ओनीतपत्तपाणिंo·nī·ta·pat·ta·pā·ṇiṃ एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नाni·sin·nā खोkho अम्बपालीam·ba·pā·lī गणिकाga·ṇi·kā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

Atha kho ambapālī gaṇikā buddhappamukhaṁ bhikkhusaṅghaṁ paṇītena khādanīyena bhojanīyena sahatthā santappetvā sampavāretvā bhagavantaṁ bhuttāviṁ onītapattapāṇiṁ ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinnā kho ambapālī gaṇikā bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

Ambapālī personally served various kinds of fine foods to the Sangha of monks headed by the Buddha. When the Buddha had finished his meal, she sat down to one side and said,
1083

“इमाहं,i·mā·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te अम्बवनंam·ba·va·naṃ बुद्धप्पमुखस्सbud·dhap·pa·mu·khas·sa भिक्खुसङ्घस्सbhik·khu·saṅ·ghas·sa दम्मी”ति।dam·mī

“imāhaṁ, bhante, ambavanaṁ buddhappamukhassa bhikkhusaṅghassa dammī”ti.

“Sir, I give this mango grove to the Sangha of monks headed by the Buddha.”
1084

पटिग्गहेसिpa·ṭig·ga·he·si भगवाbha·ga·vā आरामं।ā·rā·maṃ

Paṭiggahesi bhagavā ārāmaṁ.

The Buddha accepted the park.
1085

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā अम्बपालिंam·ba·pā·liṃ गणिकंga·ṇi·kaṃ धम्मियाdham·mi·yā कथायka·thā·ya सन्दस्सेत्वाsan·das·set·vā समादपेत्वाsa·mā·da·pet·vā समुत्तेजेत्वाsa·mut·te·jet·vā सम्पहंसेत्वाsam·pa·haṃ·set·vā उट्ठायासनाuṭ·ṭhā·yā·sa·nā येनye·na महावनंma·hā·va·naṃ तेनुपसङ्कमि।te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi

Atha kho bhagavā ambapāliṁ gaṇikaṁ dhammiyā kathāya sandassetvā samādapetvā samuttejetvā sampahaṁsetvā uṭṭhāyāsanā yena mahāvanaṁ tenupasaṅkami.

After instructing, inspiring, and gladdening her with a teaching, he got up from his seat and went to the Great Wood near Vesālī,
1086

तत्रtat·ra सुदंsu·daṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā वेसालियंve·sā·li·yaṃ विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti महावनेma·hā·va·ne कूटागारसालायं।kū·ṭā·gā·ra·sā·lā·yaṃ

Tatra sudaṁ bhagavā vesāliyaṁ viharati mahāvane kūṭāgārasālāyaṁ.

where he stayed in the house with the peaked roof.
1087

लिच्छविभाणवारोlic·cha·vi·bhā·ṇa·vā·ro निट्ठितोniṭ·ṭhi·to ततियो।ta·ti·yo

Licchavibhāṇavāro niṭṭhito tatiyo.

The third section for recitation on the Licchavīs is finished.
1088

19। सीहसेनापतिवत्थुsī·ha·se·nā·pa·ti·vat·thu

19. Sīhasenāpativatthu

19. The account of General Sīha
1089

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अभिञ्ञाताa·bhiñ·ñā·tā अभिञ्ञाताa·bhiñ·ñā·tā लिच्छवीlic·cha·vī सन्धागारेsan·dhā·gā·re सन्निसिन्नाsan·ni·sin·nā सन्निपतिताsan·ni·pa·ti·tā अनेकपरियायेनa·ne·ka·pa·ri·yā·ye·na बुद्धस्सbud·dhas·sa वण्णंvaṇ·ṇaṃ भासन्ति,bhā·san·ti धम्मस्सdham·mas·sa वण्णंvaṇ·ṇaṃ भासन्ति,bhā·san·ti सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa वण्णंvaṇ·ṇaṃ भासन्ति।bhā·san·ti

Tena kho pana samayena abhiññātā abhiññātā licchavī sandhāgāre sannisinnā sannipatitā anekapariyāyena buddhassa vaṇṇaṁ bhāsanti, dhammassa vaṇṇaṁ bhāsanti, saṅghassa vaṇṇaṁ bhāsanti.

On one occasion a number of well-known Licchavīs were seated together in the public hall, praising the Buddha, the Teaching, and the Sangha in many ways.
1090

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na सीहोsī·ho सेनापतिse·nā·pa·ti निगण्ठसावकोni·gaṇ·ṭha·sā·va·ko तस्संtas·saṃ परिसायंpa·ri·sā·yaṃ निसिन्नोni·sin·no होति।ho·ti

Tena kho pana samayena sīho senāpati nigaṇṭhasāvako tassaṁ parisāyaṁ nisinno hoti.

Sīha the general, a disciple of the Jains, was seated in that gathering.
1091

अथa·tha खोkho सीहस्सsī·has·sa सेनापतिस्सse·nā·pa·tis·sa एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

Atha kho sīhassa senāpatissa etadahosi—

He thought,
1092

“निस्संसयंnis·saṃ·sa·yaṃ खोkho सोso भगवाbha·ga·vā अरहंa·ra·haṃ सम्मासम्बुद्धोsam·mā·sam·bud·dho भविस्सति,bha·vis·sa·ti तथाta·thā हिमेhi·me अभिञ्ञाताa·bhiñ·ñā·tā अभिञ्ञाताa·bhiñ·ñā·tā लिच्छवीlic·cha·vī सन्धागारेsan·dhā·gā·re सन्निसिन्नाsan·ni·sin·nā सन्निपतिताsan·ni·pa·ti·tā अनेकपरियायेनa·ne·ka·pa·ri·yā·ye·na बुद्धस्सbud·dhas·sa वण्णंvaṇ·ṇaṃ भासन्ति,bhā·san·ti धम्मस्सdham·mas·sa वण्णंvaṇ·ṇaṃ भासन्ति,bhā·san·ti सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa वण्णंvaṇ·ṇaṃ भासन्ति।bhā·san·ti

“nissaṁsayaṁ kho so bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho bhavissati, tathā hime abhiññātā abhiññātā licchavī sandhāgāre sannisinnā sannipatitā anekapariyāyena buddhassa vaṇṇaṁ bhāsanti, dhammassa vaṇṇaṁ bhāsanti, saṅghassa vaṇṇaṁ bhāsanti.

“No doubt that Buddha is perfected, a fully Awakened One, since these well-known Licchavīs praise the Buddha, the Teaching, and the Sangha in this way.
1093

यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ तंtaṃ भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ दस्सनायdas·sa·nā·ya उपसङ्कमेय्यंu·pa·saṅ·ka·mey·yaṃ अरहन्तंa·ra·han·taṃ सम्मासम्बुद्धन्”ति।sam·mā·sam·bud·dhan

Yannūnāhaṁ taṁ bhagavantaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkameyyaṁ arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhan”ti.

Why don’t I go and visit that Buddha?”
1094

अथa·tha खोkho सीहोsī·ho सेनापतिse·nā·pa·ti येनye·na निगण्ठोni·gaṇ·ṭho नाटपुत्तोnā·ṭa·put·to तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā निगण्ठंni·gaṇ·ṭhaṃ नाटपुत्तंnā·ṭa·put·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

Atha kho sīho senāpati yena nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā nigaṇṭhaṁ nāṭaputtaṁ etadavoca—

He then went to the Jain ascetic from Ñātika and said,
1095

“इच्छामहं,ic·chā·ma·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te समणंsa·ma·ṇaṃ गोतमंgo·ta·maṃ दस्सनायdas·sa·nā·ya उपसङ्कमितुन्”ति।u·pa·saṅ·ka·mi·tun

“icchāmahaṁ, bhante, samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamitun”ti.

“Sir, I wish to visit the ascetic Gotama.”
1096

“किंkiṃ पनpa·na त्वं,tvaṃ सीह,sī·ha किरियवादोki·ri·ya·vā·do समानोsa·mā·no अकिरियवादंa·ki·ri·ya·vā·daṃ समणंsa·ma·ṇaṃ गोतमंgo·ta·maṃ दस्सनायdas·sa·nā·ya उपसङ्कमिस्ससि?u·pa·saṅ·ka·mis·sa·si

“Kiṁ pana tvaṁ, sīha, kiriyavādo samāno akiriyavādaṁ samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissasi?

“But Sīha, why visit the ascetic Gotama who believes that actions don’t have results when you believe that they do?
1097

समणोsa·ma·ṇo हि,hi सीह,sī·ha गोतमोgo·ta·mo अकिरियवादोa·ki·ri·ya·vā·do अकिरियायa·ki·ri·yā·ya धम्मंdham·maṃ देसेति,de·se·ti तेनte·na चca सावकेsā·va·ke विनेती”ति।vi·ne·tī

Samaṇo hi, sīha, gotamo akiriyavādo akiriyāya dhammaṁ deseti, tena ca sāvake vinetī”ti.

For the ascetic Gotama believes in inaction, teaches that, and trains his disciples in that.”
1098

अथa·tha खोkho सीहस्सsī·has·sa सेनापतिस्सse·nā·pa·tis·sa योyo अहोसिa·ho·si गमिकाभिसङ्खारोga·mi·kā·bhi·saṅ·khā·ro भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ दस्सनाय,das·sa·nā·ya सोso पटिप्पस्सम्भि।pa·ṭip·pas·sam·bhi

Atha kho sīhassa senāpatissa yo ahosi gamikābhisaṅkhāro bhagavantaṁ dassanāya, so paṭippassambhi.

Sīha’s intention to go died down.
1099

दुतियम्पिdu·ti·yam·pi खोkho अभिञ्ञाताa·bhiñ·ñā·tā अभिञ्ञाताa·bhiñ·ñā·tā लिच्छवीlic·cha·vī सन्धागारेsan·dhā·gā·re सन्निसिन्नाsan·ni·sin·nā सन्निपतिताsan·ni·pa·ti·tā अनेकपरियायेनa·ne·ka·pa·ri·yā·ye·na बुद्धस्सbud·dhas·sa वण्णंvaṇ·ṇaṃ भासन्ति,bhā·san·ti धम्मस्सdham·mas·sa वण्णंvaṇ·ṇaṃ भासन्ति,bhā·san·ti सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa वण्णंvaṇ·ṇaṃ भासन्ति।bhā·san·ti

Dutiyampi kho abhiññātā abhiññātā licchavī sandhāgāre sannisinnā sannipatitā anekapariyāyena buddhassa vaṇṇaṁ bhāsanti, dhammassa vaṇṇaṁ bhāsanti, saṅghassa vaṇṇaṁ bhāsanti.

The same sequence of events happened a second time.
1100

दुतियम्पिdu·ti·yam·pi खोkho सीहस्सsī·has·sa सेनापतिस्सse·nā·pa·tis·sa एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

Dutiyampi kho sīhassa senāpatissa etadahosi—

(Pāli only)
1101

“निस्संसयंnis·saṃ·sa·yaṃ खोkho सोso भगवाbha·ga·vā अरहंa·ra·haṃ सम्मासम्बुद्धोsam·mā·sam·bud·dho भविस्सति,bha·vis·sa·ti तथाta·thā हिमेhi·me अभिञ्ञाताa·bhiñ·ñā·tā अभिञ्ञाताa·bhiñ·ñā·tā लिच्छवीlic·cha·vī सन्धागारेsan·dhā·gā·re सन्निसिन्नाsan·ni·sin·nā सन्निपतिताsan·ni·pa·ti·tā अनेकपरियायेनa·ne·ka·pa·ri·yā·ye·na बुद्धस्सbud·dhas·sa वण्णंvaṇ·ṇaṃ भासन्ति,bhā·san·ti धम्मस्सdham·mas·sa वण्णंvaṇ·ṇaṃ भासन्ति,bhā·san·ti सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa वण्णंvaṇ·ṇaṃ भासन्ति।bhā·san·ti

“nissaṁsayaṁ kho so bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho bhavissati, tathā hime abhiññātā abhiññātā licchavī sandhāgāre sannisinnā sannipatitā anekapariyāyena buddhassa vaṇṇaṁ bhāsanti, dhammassa vaṇṇaṁ bhāsanti, saṅghassa vaṇṇaṁ bhāsanti.

(Pāli only)
1102

यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ तंtaṃ भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ दस्सनायdas·sa·nā·ya उपसङ्कमेय्यंu·pa·saṅ·ka·mey·yaṃ अरहन्तंa·ra·han·taṃ सम्मासम्बुद्धन्”ति।sam·mā·sam·bud·dhan

Yannūnāhaṁ taṁ bhagavantaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkameyyaṁ arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhan”ti.

(Pāli only)
1103

दुतियम्पिdu·ti·yam·pi खोkho सीहोsī·ho सेनापतिse·nā·pa·ti येनye·na निगण्ठोni·gaṇ·ṭho नाटपुत्तोnā·ṭa·put·to तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā निगण्ठंni·gaṇ·ṭhaṃ नाटपुत्तंnā·ṭa·put·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

Dutiyampi kho sīho senāpati yena nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā nigaṇṭhaṁ nāṭaputtaṁ etadavoca—

(Pāli only)
1104

“इच्छामहं,ic·chā·ma·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te समणंsa·ma·ṇaṃ गोतमंgo·ta·maṃ दस्सनायdas·sa·nā·ya उपसङ्कमितुन्”ति।u·pa·saṅ·ka·mi·tun

“icchāmahaṁ, bhante, samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamitun”ti.

(Pāli only)
1105

“किंkiṃ पनpa·na त्वं,tvaṃ सीह,sī·ha किरियवादोki·ri·ya·vā·do समानोsa·mā·no अकिरियवादंa·ki·ri·ya·vā·daṃ समणंsa·ma·ṇaṃ गोतमंgo·ta·maṃ दस्सनायdas·sa·nā·ya उपसङ्कमिस्ससि?u·pa·saṅ·ka·mis·sa·si

“Kiṁ pana tvaṁ, sīha, kiriyavādo samāno akiriyavādaṁ samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissasi?

(Pāli only)
1106

समणोsa·ma·ṇo हि,hi सीह,sī·ha गोतमोgo·ta·mo अकिरियवादोa·ki·ri·ya·vā·do अकिरियायa·ki·ri·yā·ya धम्मंdham·maṃ देसेति,de·se·ti तेनte·na चca सावकेsā·va·ke विनेती”ति।vi·ne·tī

Samaṇo hi, sīha, gotamo akiriyavādo akiriyāya dhammaṁ deseti, tena ca sāvake vinetī”ti.

(Pāli only)
1107

दुतियम्पिdu·ti·yam·pi खोkho सीहस्सsī·has·sa सेनापतिस्सse·nā·pa·tis·sa योyo अहोसिa·ho·si गमिकाभिसङ्खारोga·mi·kā·bhi·saṅ·khā·ro भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ दस्सनाय,das·sa·nā·ya सोso पटिप्पस्सम्भि।pa·ṭip·pas·sam·bhi

Dutiyampi kho sīhassa senāpatissa yo ahosi gamikābhisaṅkhāro bhagavantaṁ dassanāya, so paṭippassambhi.

(Pāli only)
1108

ततियम्पिta·ti·yam·pi खोkho अभिञ्ञाताa·bhiñ·ñā·tā अभिञ्ञाताa·bhiñ·ñā·tā लिच्छवीlic·cha·vī सन्धागारेsan·dhā·gā·re सन्निसिन्नाsan·ni·sin·nā सन्निपतिताsan·ni·pa·ti·tā अनेकपरियायेनa·ne·ka·pa·ri·yā·ye·na बुद्धस्सbud·dhas·sa वण्णंvaṇ·ṇaṃ भासन्ति,bhā·san·ti धम्मस्सdham·mas·sa वण्णंvaṇ·ṇaṃ भासन्ति,bhā·san·ti सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa वण्णंvaṇ·ṇaṃ भासन्ति।bhā·san·ti

Tatiyampi kho abhiññātā abhiññātā licchavī sandhāgāre sannisinnā sannipatitā anekapariyāyena buddhassa vaṇṇaṁ bhāsanti, dhammassa vaṇṇaṁ bhāsanti, saṅghassa vaṇṇaṁ bhāsanti.

A third time a number of well-known Licchavīs were seated together in the public hall, praising the Buddha, the Teaching, and the Sangha in many ways.
1109

ततियम्पिta·ti·yam·pi खोkho सीहस्सsī·has·sa सेनापतिस्सse·nā·pa·tis·sa एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

Tatiyampi kho sīhassa senāpatissa etadahosi—

Sīha heard this, and he had the same thoughts as before.
1110

“निस्संसयंnis·saṃ·sa·yaṃ खोkho सोso भगवाbha·ga·vā अरहंa·ra·haṃ सम्मासम्बुद्धोsam·mā·sam·bud·dho भविस्सति,bha·vis·sa·ti तथाta·thā हिमेhi·me अभिञ्ञाताa·bhiñ·ñā·tā अभिञ्ञाताa·bhiñ·ñā·tā लिच्छवीlic·cha·vī सन्धागारेsan·dhā·gā·re सन्निसिन्नाsan·ni·sin·nā सन्निपतिताsan·ni·pa·ti·tā अनेकपरियायेनa·ne·ka·pa·ri·yā·ye·na बुद्धस्सbud·dhas·sa वण्णंvaṇ·ṇaṃ भासन्ति,bhā·san·ti धम्मस्सdham·mas·sa वण्णंvaṇ·ṇaṃ भासन्ति,bhā·san·ti सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa वण्णंvaṇ·ṇaṃ भासन्ति।bhā·san·ti

“nissaṁsayaṁ kho so bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho bhavissati, tathā hime abhiññātā abhiññātā licchavī sandhāgāre sannisinnā sannipatitā anekapariyāyena buddhassa vaṇṇaṁ bhāsanti, dhammassa vaṇṇaṁ bhāsanti, saṅghassa vaṇṇaṁ bhāsanti.

(Pāli only)
1111

किञ्हिkiñ·hi मेme करिस्सन्तिka·ris·san·ti निगण्ठाni·gaṇ·ṭhā अपलोकिताa·pa·lo·ki·tā वाvā अनपलोकिताa·na·pa·lo·ki·tā वा?vā

Kiñhi me karissanti nigaṇṭhā apalokitā vā anapalokitā vā?

And it occurred to him, “What can the Jain ascetics do to me, whether I get their permission or not?
1112

यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ अनपलोकेत्वावa·na·pa·lo·ket·vā·va निगण्ठेni·gaṇ·ṭhe तंtaṃ भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ दस्सनायdas·sa·nā·ya उपसङ्कमेय्यंu·pa·saṅ·ka·mey·yaṃ अरहन्तंa·ra·han·taṃ सम्मासम्बुद्धन्”ति।sam·mā·sam·bud·dhan

Yannūnāhaṁ anapaloketvāva nigaṇṭhe taṁ bhagavantaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkameyyaṁ arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhan”ti.

Let me go and visit the Buddha, the Perfected and fully Awakened One, without getting permission from the Jains.”
1113

अथa·tha खोkho सीहोsī·ho सेनापतिse·nā·pa·ti पञ्चहिpañ·ca·hi रथसतेहिra·tha·sa·te·hi दिवादिवस्सdi·vā·di·vas·sa वेसालियाve·sā·li·yā निय्यासिniy·yā·si भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ दस्सनाय।das·sa·nā·ya

Atha kho sīho senāpati pañcahi rathasatehi divādivassa vesāliyā niyyāsi bhagavantaṁ dassanāya.

Soon afterwards, in the middle of the day, General Sīha set out from Vesālī with five hundred carriages to visit the Buddha.
1114

यावतिकाyā·va·ti·kā यानस्सyā·nas·sa भूमि,bhū·mi यानेनyā·ne·na गन्त्वाgan·tvā यानाyā·nā पच्चोरोहित्वाpac·co·ro·hit·vā पत्तिकोवpat·ti·ko·va येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di

Yāvatikā yānassa bhūmi, yānena gantvā yānā paccorohitvā pattikova yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

He went by carriage as far as the ground would allow, dismounted, and then approached the Buddha on foot. He bowed, sat down,
1115

एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नोni·sin·no खोkho सीहोsī·ho सेनापतिse·nā·pa·ti भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho sīho senāpati bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

and said,
1116

“सुतंsu·taṃ मेme तं,taṃ भन्ते—‘अकिरियवादोbhan·te समणोsa·ma·ṇo गोतमोgo·ta·mo अकिरियायa·ki·ri·yā·ya धम्मंdham·maṃ देसेति,de·se·ti तेनte·na चca सावकेsā·va·ke विनेती’ति।vi·ne·tī

“sutaṁ me taṁ, bhante—‘akiriyavādo samaṇo gotamo akiriyāya dhammaṁ deseti, tena ca sāvake vinetī’ti.

“Sir, I have heard that the ascetic Gotama believes in inaction, that he teaches inaction, and that he trains his disciples in that.
1117

येye ते,te भन्ते,bhan·te एवमाहंसु—‘अकिरियवादोe·va·mā·haṃ·su समणोsa·ma·ṇo गोतमो,go·ta·mo अकिरियायa·ki·ri·yā·ya धम्मंdham·maṃ देसेति,de·se·ti तेनte·na चca सावकेsā·va·ke विनेती’ति।vi·ne·tī

Ye te, bhante, evamāhaṁsu—‘akiriyavādo samaṇo gotamo, akiriyāya dhammaṁ deseti, tena ca sāvake vinetī’ti.

Those who say this,
1118

कच्चिkac·ci ते,te भन्ते,bhan·te भगवतोbha·ga·va·to वुत्तवादिनो,vut·ta·vā·di·no नna चca भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभूतेनa·bhū·te·na अब्भाचिक्खन्ति,ab·bhā·cik·khan·ti धम्मस्सdham·mas·sa चानुधम्मंcā·nu·dham·maṃ ब्याकरोन्ति,byā·ka·ron·ti नna चca कोचिko·ci सहधम्मिकोsa·ha·dham·mi·ko वादानुवादोvā·dā·nu·vā·do गारय्हंgā·ray·haṃ ठानंṭhā·naṃ आगच्छति?ā·gac·cha·ti

Kacci te, bhante, bhagavato vuttavādino, na ca bhagavantaṁ abhūtena abbhācikkhanti, dhammassa cānudhammaṁ byākaronti, na ca koci sahadhammiko vādānuvādo gārayhaṁ ṭhānaṁ āgacchati?

do they say what you have said without falsely misrepresenting you? Do they explain according to the Teaching so that they can’t be legitimately blamed?
1119

अनब्भक्खातुकामाa·nab·bhak·khā·tu·kā·mā हिhi मयं,ma·yaṃ भन्ते,bhan·te भगवन्तन्”ति।bha·ga·van·tan

Anabbhakkhātukāmā hi mayaṁ, bhante, bhagavantan”ti.

I don’t wish to misrepresent you.”
1120

“अत्थि,at·thi सीह,sī·ha परियायो,pa·ri·yā·yo येनye·na मंmaṃ परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na सम्माsam·mā वदमानोva·da·mā·no वदेय्य—va·dey·ya

“Atthi, sīha, pariyāyo, yena maṁ pariyāyena sammā vadamāno vadeyya—

“There’s a way, Sīha, one could rightly say of me
1121

अकिरियवादोa·ki·ri·ya·vā·do समणोsa·ma·ṇo गोतमो,go·ta·mo अकिरियायa·ki·ri·yā·ya धम्मंdham·maṃ देसेति,de·se·ti तेनte·na चca सावकेsā·va·ke विनेतीति।vi·ne·tī·ti

akiriyavādo samaṇo gotamo, akiriyāya dhammaṁ deseti, tena ca sāvake vinetīti.

that I believe in inaction, that I teach inaction, and that I train my disciples in that. What’s that way?
1122

अत्थि,at·thi सीह,sī·ha परियायो,pa·ri·yā·yo येनye·na मंmaṃ परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na सम्माsam·mā वदमानोva·da·mā·no वदेय्य—va·dey·ya

Atthi, sīha, pariyāyo, yena maṁ pariyāyena sammā vadamāno vadeyya—

(Pāli only)
1123

किरियवादोki·ri·ya·vā·do समणोsa·ma·ṇo गोतमोgo·ta·mo किरियायki·ri·yā·ya धम्मंdham·maṃ देसेति,de·se·ti तेनte·na चca सावकेsā·va·ke विनेतीति।vi·ne·tī·ti

kiriyavādo samaṇo gotamo kiriyāya dhammaṁ deseti, tena ca sāvake vinetīti.

(Pāli only)
1124

अत्थि,at·thi सीह,sī·ha परियायो,pa·ri·yā·yo येनye·na मंmaṃ परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na सम्माsam·mā वदमानोva·da·mā·no वदेय्य—va·dey·ya

Atthi, sīha, pariyāyo, yena maṁ pariyāyena sammā vadamāno vadeyya—

(Pāli only)
1125

उच्छेदवादोuc·che·da·vā·do समणोsa·ma·ṇo गोतमोgo·ta·mo उच्छेदायuc·che·dā·ya धम्मंdham·maṃ देसेति,de·se·ti तेनte·na चca सावकेsā·va·ke विनेतीति।vi·ne·tī·ti

ucchedavādo samaṇo gotamo ucchedāya dhammaṁ deseti, tena ca sāvake vinetīti.

(Pāli only)
1126

अत्थि,at·thi सीह,sī·ha परियायो,pa·ri·yā·yo येनye·na मंmaṃ परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na सम्माsam·mā वदमानोva·da·mā·no वदेय्य—va·dey·ya

Atthi, sīha, pariyāyo, yena maṁ pariyāyena sammā vadamāno vadeyya—

(Pāli only)
1127

जेगुच्छीje·guc·chī समणोsa·ma·ṇo गोतमो,go·ta·mo जेगुच्छितायje·guc·chi·tā·ya धम्मंdham·maṃ देसेति,de·se·ti तेनte·na चca सावकेsā·va·ke विनेतीति।vi·ne·tī·ti

jegucchī samaṇo gotamo, jegucchitāya dhammaṁ deseti, tena ca sāvake vinetīti.

(Pāli only)
1128

अत्थि,at·thi सीह,sī·ha परियायो,pa·ri·yā·yo येनye·na मंmaṃ परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na सम्माsam·mā वदमानोva·da·mā·no वदेय्य—va·dey·ya

Atthi, sīha, pariyāyo, yena maṁ pariyāyena sammā vadamāno vadeyya—

(Pāli only)
1129

वेनयिकोve·na·yi·ko समणोsa·ma·ṇo गोतमो,go·ta·mo विनयायvi·na·yā·ya धम्मंdham·maṃ देसेति,de·se·ti तेनte·na चca सावकेsā·va·ke विनेतीति।vi·ne·tī·ti

venayiko samaṇo gotamo, vinayāya dhammaṁ deseti, tena ca sāvake vinetīti.

(Pāli only)
1130

अत्थि,at·thi सीह,sī·ha परियायो,pa·ri·yā·yo येनye·na मंmaṃ परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na सम्माsam·mā वदमानोva·da·mā·no वदेय्य—va·dey·ya

Atthi, sīha, pariyāyo, yena maṁ pariyāyena sammā vadamāno vadeyya—

(Pāli only)
1131

तपस्सीta·pas·sī समणोsa·ma·ṇo गोतमो,go·ta·mo तपस्सितायta·pas·si·tā·ya धम्मंdham·maṃ देसेति,de·se·ti तेनte·na चca सावकेsā·va·ke विनेतीति।vi·ne·tī·ti

tapassī samaṇo gotamo, tapassitāya dhammaṁ deseti, tena ca sāvake vinetīti.

(Pāli only)
1132

अत्थि,at·thi सीह,sī·ha परियायो,pa·ri·yā·yo येनye·na मंmaṃ परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na सम्माsam·mā वदमानोva·da·mā·no वदेय्य—va·dey·ya

Atthi, sīha, pariyāyo, yena maṁ pariyāyena sammā vadamāno vadeyya—

(Pāli only)
1133

अपगब्भोa·pa·gab·bho समणोsa·ma·ṇo गोतमो,go·ta·mo अपगब्भतायa·pa·gab·bha·tā·ya धम्मंdham·maṃ देसेति,de·se·ti तेनte·na चca सावकेsā·va·ke विनेतीति।vi·ne·tī·ti

apagabbho samaṇo gotamo, apagabbhatāya dhammaṁ deseti, tena ca sāvake vinetīti.

(Pāli only)
1134

अत्थि,at·thi सीह,sī·ha परियायो,pa·ri·yā·yo येनye·na मंmaṃ परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na सम्माsam·mā वदमानोva·da·mā·no वदेय्य—va·dey·ya

Atthi, sīha, pariyāyo, yena maṁ pariyāyena sammā vadamāno vadeyya—

(Pāli only)
1135

अस्सत्थोas·sat·tho समणोsa·ma·ṇo गोतमो,go·ta·mo अस्सासायas·sā·sā·ya धम्मंdham·maṃ देसेति,de·se·ti तेनte·na चca सावकेsā·va·ke विनेतीति।vi·ne·tī·ti

assattho samaṇo gotamo, assāsāya dhammaṁ deseti, tena ca sāvake vinetīti.

(Pāli only)
1136

कतमोka·ta·mo च,ca सीह,sī·ha परियायो,pa·ri·yā·yo येनye·na मंmaṃ परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na सम्माsam·mā वदमानोva·da·mā·no वदेय्य—va·dey·ya

Katamo ca, sīha, pariyāyo, yena maṁ pariyāyena sammā vadamāno vadeyya—

(Pāli only)
1137

अकिरियवादोa·ki·ri·ya·vā·do समणोsa·ma·ṇo गोतमो,go·ta·mo अकिरियायa·ki·ri·yā·ya धम्मंdham·maṃ देसेति,de·se·ti तेनte·na चca सावकेsā·va·ke विनेतीति?vi·ne·tī·ti

akiriyavādo samaṇo gotamo, akiriyāya dhammaṁ deseti, tena ca sāvake vinetīti?

(Pāli only)
1138

अहञ्हि,a·hañ·hi सीह,sī·ha अकिरियंa·ki·ri·yaṃ वदामिva·dā·mi कायदुच्चरितस्सkā·ya·duc·ca·ri·tas·sa वचीदुच्चरितस्सva·cī·duc·ca·ri·tas·sa मनोदुच्चरितस्स;ma·no·duc·ca·ri·tas·sa

Ahañhi, sīha, akiriyaṁ vadāmi kāyaduccaritassa vacīduccaritassa manoduccaritassa;

I teach the non-doing of misconduct by body, speech, and mind.
1139

अनेकविहितानंa·ne·ka·vi·hi·tā·naṃ पापकानंpā·pa·kā·naṃ अकुसलानंa·ku·sa·lā·naṃ धम्मानंdham·mā·naṃ अकिरियंa·ki·ri·yaṃ वदामि।va·dā·mi

anekavihitānaṁ pāpakānaṁ akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ akiriyaṁ vadāmi.

I teach the non-doing of the various kinds of bad and unwholesome actions.
1140

अयंa·yaṃ खो,kho सीह,sī·ha परियायो,pa·ri·yā·yo येनye·na मंmaṃ परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na सम्माsam·mā वदमानोva·da·mā·no वदेय्य—va·dey·ya

Ayaṁ kho, sīha, pariyāyo, yena maṁ pariyāyena sammā vadamāno vadeyya—

(Pāli only)
1141

अकिरियवादोa·ki·ri·ya·vā·do समणोsa·ma·ṇo गोतमो,go·ta·mo अकिरियायa·ki·ri·yā·ya धम्मंdham·maṃ देसेति,de·se·ti तेनte·na चca सावकेsā·va·ke विनेतीति।vi·ne·tī·ti

akiriyavādo samaṇo gotamo, akiriyāya dhammaṁ deseti, tena ca sāvake vinetīti.

(Pāli only)
1142

कतमोka·ta·mo च,ca सीह,sī·ha परियायो,pa·ri·yā·yo येनye·na मंmaṃ परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na सम्माsam·mā वदमानोva·da·mā·no वदेय्य—va·dey·ya

Katamo ca, sīha, pariyāyo, yena maṁ pariyāyena sammā vadamāno vadeyya—

There’s also a way one could rightly say of me
1143

किरियवादोki·ri·ya·vā·do समणोsa·ma·ṇo गोतमो,go·ta·mo किरियायki·ri·yā·ya धम्मंdham·maṃ देसेति,de·se·ti तेनte·na चca सावकेsā·va·ke विनेतीति?vi·ne·tī·ti

kiriyavādo samaṇo gotamo, kiriyāya dhammaṁ deseti, tena ca sāvake vinetīti?

that I believe in action, that I teach action, and that I train my disciples in that. What’s that way?
1144

अहञ्हि,a·hañ·hi सीह,sī·ha किरियंki·ri·yaṃ वदामिva·dā·mi कायसुचरितस्सkā·ya·su·ca·ri·tas·sa वचीसुचरितस्सva·cī·su·ca·ri·tas·sa मनोसुचरितस्स,ma·no·su·ca·ri·tas·sa अनेकविहितानंa·ne·ka·vi·hi·tā·naṃ कुसलानंku·sa·lā·naṃ धम्मानंdham·mā·naṃ किरियंki·ri·yaṃ वदामि।va·dā·mi

Ahañhi, sīha, kiriyaṁ vadāmi kāyasucaritassa vacīsucaritassa manosucaritassa, anekavihitānaṁ kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ kiriyaṁ vadāmi.

I teach the doing of good conduct by body, speech, and mind. I teach the doing of the various kinds of good and wholesome actions.
1145

अयंa·yaṃ खो,kho सीह,sī·ha परियायो,pa·ri·yā·yo येनye·na मंmaṃ परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na सम्माsam·mā वदमानोva·da·mā·no वदेय्य—va·dey·ya

Ayaṁ kho, sīha, pariyāyo, yena maṁ pariyāyena sammā vadamāno vadeyya—

(Pāli only)
1146

किरियवादोki·ri·ya·vā·do समणोsa·ma·ṇo गोतमो,go·ta·mo किरियायki·ri·yā·ya धम्मंdham·maṃ देसेति,de·se·ti तेनte·na चca सावकेsā·va·ke विनेतीति।vi·ne·tī·ti

kiriyavādo samaṇo gotamo, kiriyāya dhammaṁ deseti, tena ca sāvake vinetīti.

(Pāli only)
1147

कतमोka·ta·mo च,ca सीह,sī·ha परियायो,pa·ri·yā·yo येनye·na मंmaṃ परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na सम्माsam·mā वदमानोva·da·mā·no वदेय्य—va·dey·ya

Katamo ca, sīha, pariyāyo, yena maṁ pariyāyena sammā vadamāno vadeyya—

There’s a way one could rightly say of me
1148

उच्छेदवादोuc·che·da·vā·do समणोsa·ma·ṇo गोतमो,go·ta·mo उच्छेदायuc·che·dā·ya धम्मंdham·maṃ देसेति,de·se·ti तेनte·na चca सावकेsā·va·ke विनेतीति?vi·ne·tī·ti

ucchedavādo samaṇo gotamo, ucchedāya dhammaṁ deseti, tena ca sāvake vinetīti?

that I’m an annihilationist, that I teach for the sake of annihilation, and that I train my disciples in that. What’s that way?
1149

अहञ्हि,a·hañ·hi सीह,sī·ha उच्छेदंuc·che·daṃ वदामिva·dā·mi रागस्सrā·gas·sa दोसस्सdo·sas·sa मोहस्स;mo·has·sa

Ahañhi, sīha, ucchedaṁ vadāmi rāgassa dosassa mohassa;

I teach the annihilation of sensual desire, ill will, and confusion.
1150

अनेकविहितानंa·ne·ka·vi·hi·tā·naṃ पापकानंpā·pa·kā·naṃ अकुसलानंa·ku·sa·lā·naṃ धम्मानंdham·mā·naṃ उच्छेदंuc·che·daṃ वदामि।va·dā·mi

anekavihitānaṁ pāpakānaṁ akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ ucchedaṁ vadāmi.

I teach the annihilation of the various kinds of bad and unwholesome qualities.
1151

अयंa·yaṃ खो,kho सीह,sī·ha परियायो,pa·ri·yā·yo येनye·na मंmaṃ परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na सम्माsam·mā वदमानोva·da·mā·no वदेय्य—va·dey·ya

Ayaṁ kho, sīha, pariyāyo, yena maṁ pariyāyena sammā vadamāno vadeyya—

(Pāli only)
1152

उच्छेदवादोuc·che·da·vā·do समणोsa·ma·ṇo गोतमोgo·ta·mo उच्छेदायuc·che·dā·ya धम्मंdham·maṃ देसेति,de·se·ti तेनte·na चca सावकेsā·va·ke विनेतीति।vi·ne·tī·ti

ucchedavādo samaṇo gotamo ucchedāya dhammaṁ deseti, tena ca sāvake vinetīti.

(Pāli only)
1153

कतमोka·ta·mo च,ca सीह,sī·ha परियायो,pa·ri·yā·yo येनye·na मंmaṃ परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na सम्माsam·mā वदमानोva·da·mā·no वदेय्य—va·dey·ya

Katamo ca, sīha, pariyāyo, yena maṁ pariyāyena sammā vadamāno vadeyya—

There’s a way one could rightly say of me
1154

जेगुच्छीje·guc·chī समणोsa·ma·ṇo गोतमो,go·ta·mo जेगुच्छितायje·guc·chi·tā·ya धम्मंdham·maṃ देसेति,de·se·ti तेनte·na चca सावकेsā·va·ke विनेतीति?vi·ne·tī·ti

jegucchī samaṇo gotamo, jegucchitāya dhammaṁ deseti, tena ca sāvake vinetīti?

that I’m disgusting, that I teach for the sake of disgust, and that I train my disciples in that. What’s that way?
1155

अहञ्हि,a·hañ·hi सीह,sī·ha जिगुच्छामिji·guc·chā·mi कायदुच्चरितेनkā·ya·duc·ca·ri·te·na वचीदुच्चरितेनva·cī·duc·ca·ri·te·na मनोदुच्चरितेन;ma·no·duc·ca·ri·te·na

Ahañhi, sīha, jigucchāmi kāyaduccaritena vacīduccaritena manoduccaritena;

I am disgusted by misconduct by body, speech, and mind.
1156

अनेकविहितानंa·ne·ka·vi·hi·tā·naṃ पापकानंpā·pa·kā·naṃ अकुसलानंa·ku·sa·lā·naṃ धम्मानंdham·mā·naṃ समापत्तियाsa·mā·pat·ti·yā जिगुच्छामि।ji·guc·chā·mi

anekavihitānaṁ pāpakānaṁ akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ samāpattiyā jigucchāmi.

I am disgusted by the various kinds of bad and unwholesome qualities.
1157

अयंa·yaṃ खो,kho सीह,sī·ha परियायो,pa·ri·yā·yo येनye·na मंmaṃ परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na सम्माsam·mā वदमानोva·da·mā·no वदेय्य—va·dey·ya

Ayaṁ kho, sīha, pariyāyo, yena maṁ pariyāyena sammā vadamāno vadeyya—

(Pāli only)
1158

जेगुच्छीje·guc·chī समणोsa·ma·ṇo गोतमो,go·ta·mo जेगुच्छितायje·guc·chi·tā·ya धम्मंdham·maṃ देसेति,de·se·ti तेनte·na चca सावकेsā·va·ke विनेतीति।vi·ne·tī·ti

jegucchī samaṇo gotamo, jegucchitāya dhammaṁ deseti, tena ca sāvake vinetīti.

(Pāli only)
1159

कतमोka·ta·mo च,ca सीह,sī·ha परियायो,pa·ri·yā·yo येनye·na मंmaṃ परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na सम्माsam·mā वदमानोva·da·mā·no वदेय्य—va·dey·ya

Katamo ca, sīha, pariyāyo, yena maṁ pariyāyena sammā vadamāno vadeyya—

There’s a way one could rightly say of me
1160

वेनयिकोve·na·yi·ko समणोsa·ma·ṇo गोतमो,go·ta·mo विनयायvi·na·yā·ya धम्मंdham·maṃ देसेति,de·se·ti तेनte·na चca सावकेsā·va·ke विनेतीति?vi·ne·tī·ti

venayiko samaṇo gotamo, vinayāya dhammaṁ deseti, tena ca sāvake vinetīti?

that I’m an exterminator, that I teach for the sake of extermination, and that I train my disciples in that. What’s that way?
1161

अहञ्हि,a·hañ·hi सीह,sī·ha विनयायvi·na·yā·ya धम्मंdham·maṃ देसेमिde·se·mi रागस्सrā·gas·sa दोसस्सdo·sas·sa मोहस्स;mo·has·sa

Ahañhi, sīha, vinayāya dhammaṁ desemi rāgassa dosassa mohassa;

I teach the extermination of sensual desire, ill will, and confusion,
1162

अनेकविहितानंa·ne·ka·vi·hi·tā·naṃ पापकानंpā·pa·kā·naṃ अकुसलानंa·ku·sa·lā·naṃ धम्मानंdham·mā·naṃ विनयायvi·na·yā·ya धम्मंdham·maṃ देसेमि।de·se·mi

anekavihitānaṁ pāpakānaṁ akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ vinayāya dhammaṁ desemi.

the extermination of the various kinds of bad and unwholesome qualities.
1163

अयंa·yaṃ खो,kho सीह,sī·ha परियायो,pa·ri·yā·yo येनye·na मंmaṃ परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na सम्माsam·mā वदमानोva·da·mā·no वदेय्य—va·dey·ya

Ayaṁ kho, sīha, pariyāyo, yena maṁ pariyāyena sammā vadamāno vadeyya—

(Pāli only)
1164

वेनयिकोve·na·yi·ko समणोsa·ma·ṇo गोतमो,go·ta·mo विनयायvi·na·yā·ya धम्मंdham·maṃ देसेति,de·se·ti तेनte·na चca सावकेsā·va·ke विनेतीति।vi·ne·tī·ti

venayiko samaṇo gotamo, vinayāya dhammaṁ deseti, tena ca sāvake vinetīti.

(Pāli only)
1165

कतमोka·ta·mo च,ca सीह,sī·ha परियायो,pa·ri·yā·yo येनye·na मंmaṃ परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na सम्माsam·mā वदमानोva·da·mā·no वदेय्य—va·dey·ya

Katamo ca, sīha, pariyāyo, yena maṁ pariyāyena sammā vadamāno vadeyya—

There’s a way one could rightly say of me
1166

तपस्सीta·pas·sī समणोsa·ma·ṇo गोतमो,go·ta·mo तपस्सितायta·pas·si·tā·ya धम्मंdham·maṃ देसेति,de·se·ti तेनte·na चca सावकेsā·va·ke विनेतीति?vi·ne·tī·ti

tapassī samaṇo gotamo, tapassitāya dhammaṁ deseti, tena ca sāvake vinetīti?

that I’m austere, that I teach for the sake of austerity, and that I train my disciples in that. What’s that way?
1167

तपनीयाहं,ta·pa·nī·yā·haṃ सीह,sī·ha पापकेpā·pa·ke अकुसलेa·ku·sa·le धम्मेdham·me वदामि—va·dā·mi

Tapanīyāhaṁ, sīha, pāpake akusale dhamme vadāmi—

I say that bad, unwholesome qualities—
1168

कायदुच्चरितंkā·ya·duc·ca·ri·taṃ वचीदुच्चरितंva·cī·duc·ca·ri·taṃ मनोदुच्चरितं।ma·no·duc·ca·ri·taṃ

kāyaduccaritaṁ vacīduccaritaṁ manoduccaritaṁ.

misconduct by body, speech, and mind—are to be disciplined.
1169

यस्सyas·sa खो,kho सीह,sī·ha तपनीयाta·pa·nī·yā पापकाpā·pa·kā अकुसलाa·ku·sa·lā धम्माdham·mā पहीनाpa·hī·nā उच्छिन्नमूलाuc·chin·na·mū·lā तालावत्थुकताtā·lā·vat·thu·ka·tā अनभावङ्कताa·na·bhā·vaṅ·ka·tā आयतिंā·ya·tiṃ अनुप्पादधम्मा,a·nup·pā·da·dham·mā तमहंta·ma·haṃ तपस्सीतिta·pas·sī·ti वदामि।va·dā·mi

Yassa kho, sīha, tapanīyā pāpakā akusalā dhammā pahīnā ucchinnamūlā tālāvatthukatā anabhāvaṅkatā āyatiṁ anuppādadhammā, tamahaṁ tapassīti vadāmi.

One who has abandoned them, cut them off at the root, made them like a palm stump, eradicated them, and made them incapable of reappearing in the future—such a one I call austere.
1170

तथागतस्सta·thā·ga·tas·sa खो,kho सीह,sī·ha तपनीयाta·pa·nī·yā पापकाpā·pa·kā अकुसलाa·ku·sa·lā धम्माdham·mā पहीनाpa·hī·nā उच्छिन्नमूलाuc·chin·na·mū·lā तालावत्थुकताtā·lā·vat·thu·ka·tā अनभावङ्कताa·na·bhā·vaṅ·ka·tā आयतिंā·ya·tiṃ अनुप्पादधम्मा।a·nup·pā·da·dham·mā

Tathāgatassa kho, sīha, tapanīyā pāpakā akusalā dhammā pahīnā ucchinnamūlā tālāvatthukatā anabhāvaṅkatā āyatiṁ anuppādadhammā.

Indeed the Buddha has abandoned the bad, unwholesome qualities that are to be disciplined, has cut them off at the root, made them like a palm stump, eradicated them, and made them incapable of reappearing in the future.
1171

अयंa·yaṃ खो,kho सीह,sī·ha परियायो,pa·ri·yā·yo येनye·na मंmaṃ परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na सम्माsam·mā वदमानोva·da·mā·no वदेय्यva·dey·ya तपस्सीta·pas·sī समणोsa·ma·ṇo गोतमोgo·ta·mo तपस्सितायta·pas·si·tā·ya धम्मंdham·maṃ देसेति,de·se·ti तेनte·na चca सावकेsā·va·ke विनेतीति।vi·ne·tī·ti

Ayaṁ kho, sīha, pariyāyo, yena maṁ pariyāyena sammā vadamāno vadeyya tapassī samaṇo gotamo tapassitāya dhammaṁ deseti, tena ca sāvake vinetīti.

(Pāli only)
1172

कतमोka·ta·mo च,ca सीह,sī·ha परियायो,pa·ri·yā·yo येनye·na मंmaṃ परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na सम्माsam·mā वदमानोva·da·mā·no वदेय्य—va·dey·ya

Katamo ca, sīha, pariyāyo, yena maṁ pariyāyena sammā vadamāno vadeyya—

There’s a way one could rightly say of me
1173

अपगब्भोa·pa·gab·bho समणोsa·ma·ṇo गोतमोgo·ta·mo अपगब्भतायa·pa·gab·bha·tā·ya धम्मंdham·maṃ देसेति,de·se·ti तेनte·na चca सावकेsā·va·ke विनेतीति?vi·ne·tī·ti

apagabbho samaṇo gotamo apagabbhatāya dhammaṁ deseti, tena ca sāvake vinetīti?

that I’ve withdrawn, that I teach for the sake of withdrawal, and that I train my disciples in that. What’s that way?
1174

यस्सyas·sa खो,kho सीह,sī·ha आयतिंā·ya·tiṃ गब्भसेय्याgab·bha·sey·yā पुनब्भवाभिनिब्बत्तिpu·nab·bha·vā·bhi·nib·bat·ti पहीनाpa·hī·nā उच्छिन्नमूलाuc·chin·na·mū·lā तालावत्थुकताtā·lā·vat·thu·ka·tā अनभावङ्कताa·na·bhā·vaṅ·ka·tā आयतिंā·ya·tiṃ अनुप्पादधम्मा,a·nup·pā·da·dham·mā तमहंta·ma·haṃ अपगब्भोतिa·pa·gab·bho·ti वदामि।va·dā·mi

Yassa kho, sīha, āyatiṁ gabbhaseyyā punabbhavābhinibbatti pahīnā ucchinnamūlā tālāvatthukatā anabhāvaṅkatā āyatiṁ anuppādadhammā, tamahaṁ apagabbhoti vadāmi.

One who has withdrawn from any future conception in a womb, any rebirth in a future life, who has cut it off at the root, made it like a palm stump, eradicated it, and made it incapable of reappearing in the future—such a one I call withdrawn.
1175

तथागतस्सta·thā·ga·tas·sa खो,kho सीह,sī·ha आयतिंā·ya·tiṃ गब्भसेय्याgab·bha·sey·yā पुनब्भवाभिनिब्बत्तिpu·nab·bha·vā·bhi·nib·bat·ti पहीनाpa·hī·nā उच्छिन्नमूलाuc·chin·na·mū·lā तालावत्थुकताtā·lā·vat·thu·ka·tā अनभावङ्कताa·na·bhā·vaṅ·ka·tā आयतिंā·ya·tiṃ अनुप्पादधम्मा।a·nup·pā·da·dham·mā

Tathāgatassa kho, sīha, āyatiṁ gabbhaseyyā punabbhavābhinibbatti pahīnā ucchinnamūlā tālāvatthukatā anabhāvaṅkatā āyatiṁ anuppādadhammā.

Indeed the Buddha’s future conception in a womb, his rebirth in a future life, is abandoned and cut off at the root, made like a palm stump, eradicated, and incapable of reappearing in the future.
1176

अयंa·yaṃ खो,kho सीह,sī·ha परियायो,pa·ri·yā·yo येनye·na मंmaṃ परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na सम्माsam·mā वदमानोva·da·mā·no वदेय्य—va·dey·ya

Ayaṁ kho, sīha, pariyāyo, yena maṁ pariyāyena sammā vadamāno vadeyya—

(Pāli only)
1177

अपगब्भोa·pa·gab·bho समणोsa·ma·ṇo गोतमो,go·ta·mo अपगब्भतायa·pa·gab·bha·tā·ya धम्मंdham·maṃ देसेति,de·se·ti तेनte·na चca सावकेsā·va·ke विनेतीति।vi·ne·tī·ti

apagabbho samaṇo gotamo, apagabbhatāya dhammaṁ deseti, tena ca sāvake vinetīti.

(Pāli only)
1178

कतमोka·ta·mo च,ca सीह,sī·ha परियायो,pa·ri·yā·yo येनye·na मंmaṃ परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na सम्माsam·mā वदमानोva·da·mā·no वदेय्य—va·dey·ya

Katamo ca, sīha, pariyāyo, yena maṁ pariyāyena sammā vadamāno vadeyya—

There’s a way one could rightly say of me
1179

अस्सत्थोas·sat·tho समणोsa·ma·ṇo गोतमोgo·ta·mo अस्सासायas·sā·sā·ya धम्मंdham·maṃ देसेति,de·se·ti तेनte·na चca सावकेsā·va·ke विनेतीति?vi·ne·tī·ti

assattho samaṇo gotamo assāsāya dhammaṁ deseti, tena ca sāvake vinetīti?

that I’m at ease, that I teach for the sake of ease, and that I train my disciples in that. What’s that way?
1180

अहञ्हि,a·hañ·hi सीह,sī·ha अस्सत्थोas·sat·tho परमेनpa·ra·me·na अस्सासेन,as·sā·se·na अस्सासायas·sā·sā·ya धम्मंdham·maṃ देसेमि,de·se·mi तेनte·na चca सावकेsā·va·ke विनेमि।vi·ne·mi

Ahañhi, sīha, assattho paramena assāsena, assāsāya dhammaṁ desemi, tena ca sāvake vinemi.

I’m at ease in the highest sense, I proclaim my Teaching for the sake of ease, and I train my disciples in that.”
1181

अयंa·yaṃ खो,kho सीह,sī·ha परियायो,pa·ri·yā·yo येनye·na मंmaṃ परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na सम्माsam·mā वदमानोva·da·mā·no वदेय्य—va·dey·ya

Ayaṁ kho, sīha, pariyāyo, yena maṁ pariyāyena sammā vadamāno vadeyya—

(Pāli only)
1182

अस्सत्थोas·sat·tho समणोsa·ma·ṇo गोतमोgo·ta·mo अस्सासायas·sā·sā·ya धम्मंdham·maṃ देसेति,de·se·ti तेनte·na चca सावकेsā·va·ke विनेती”ति।vi·ne·tī

assattho samaṇo gotamo assāsāya dhammaṁ deseti, tena ca sāvake vinetī”ti.

(Pāli only)
1183

एवंe·vaṃ वुत्तेvut·te सीहोsī·ho सेनापतिse·nā·pa·ti भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

Evaṁ vutte sīho senāpati bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

When the Buddha had finished, Sīha exclaimed,
1184

“अभिक्कन्तं,a·bhik·kan·taṃ भन्तेbhan·te …पे…pe

“abhikkantaṁ, bhante …pe…

“Wonderful, sir, wonderful! Just as one might set upright what’s overturned, or reveal what’s hidden, or show the way to one who’s lost, or bring a lamp into the dark so that one with eyes might see what’s there—just so has the Buddha made the Teaching clear in many ways. I go for refuge to the Buddha, the Teaching, and the Sangha of monks.
1185

उपासकंu·pā·sa·kaṃ मंmaṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā धारेतुdhā·re·tu अज्जतग्गेaj·ja·tag·ge पाणुपेतंpā·ṇu·pe·taṃ सरणंsa·ra·ṇaṃ गतन्”ति।ga·tan

upāsakaṁ maṁ bhagavā dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupetaṁ saraṇaṁ gatan”ti.

Please accept me as a lay follower who’s gone for refuge for life.”
1186

“अनुविच्चकारंa·nu·vic·ca·kā·raṃ खो,kho सीह,sī·ha करोहि;ka·ro·hi अनुविच्चकारोa·nu·vic·ca·kā·ro तुम्हादिसानंtum·hā·di·sā·naṃ ञातमनुस्सानंñā·ta·ma·nus·sā·naṃ साधुsā·dhu होती”ति।ho·tī

“Anuviccakāraṁ kho, sīha, karohi; anuviccakāro tumhādisānaṁ ñātamanussānaṁ sādhu hotī”ti.

“Consider it carefully, Sīha. It’s good for well-known people such as yourself to reflect carefully.”
1187

“इमिनापाहं,i·mi·nā·pā·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te भगवतोbha·ga·va·to भिय्योसोbhiy·yo·so मत्तायmat·tā·ya अत्तमनोat·ta·ma·no अभिरद्धो,a·bhi·rad·dho यंyaṃ मंmaṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā एवमाह—e·va·mā·ha

“Imināpāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavato bhiyyoso mattāya attamano abhiraddho, yaṁ maṁ bhagavā evamāha—

“Now I’m even more pleased with you, sir.
1188

‘अनुविच्चकारंa·nu·vic·ca·kā·raṃ खो,kho सीह,sī·ha करोहि;ka·ro·hi अनुविच्चकारोa·nu·vic·ca·kā·ro तुम्हादिसानंtum·hā·di·sā·naṃ ञातमनुस्सानंñā·ta·ma·nus·sā·naṃ साधुsā·dhu होती’ति।ho·tī

‘anuviccakāraṁ kho, sīha, karohi; anuviccakāro tumhādisānaṁ ñātamanussānaṁ sādhu hotī’ti.

(Pāli only)
1189

ममञ्हि,ma·mañ·hi भन्ते,bhan·te अञ्ञतित्थियाañ·ña·tit·thi·yā सावकंsā·va·kaṃ लभित्वाla·bhit·vā केवलकप्पंke·va·la·kap·paṃ वेसालिंve·sā·liṃ पटाकंpa·ṭā·kaṃ परिहरेय्युं—‘सीहोpa·ri·ha·rey·yuṃ खोkho अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ सेनापतिse·nā·pa·ti सावकत्तंsā·va·kat·taṃ उपगतो’ति।u·pa·ga·to

Mamañhi, bhante, aññatitthiyā sāvakaṁ labhitvā kevalakappaṁ vesāliṁ paṭākaṁ parihareyyuṁ—‘sīho kho amhākaṁ senāpati sāvakattaṁ upagato’ti.

Had I become a lay follower of another religion, they would’ve carried a banner all over Vesālī to proclaim it.
1190

अथa·tha चca पनpa·na मंmaṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā एवमाह—e·va·mā·ha

Atha ca pana maṁ bhagavā evamāha—

But you tell me
1191

‘अनुविच्चकारंa·nu·vic·ca·kā·raṃ खो,kho सीह,sī·ha करोहि;ka·ro·hi अनुविच्चकारोa·nu·vic·ca·kā·ro तुम्हादिसानंtum·hā·di·sā·naṃ ञातमनुस्सानंñā·ta·ma·nus·sā·naṃ साधुsā·dhu होती’ति।ho·tī

‘anuviccakāraṁ kho, sīha, karohi; anuviccakāro tumhādisānaṁ ñātamanussānaṁ sādhu hotī’ti.

to consider it carefully.
1192

एसाहं,e·sā·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te दुतियम्पिdu·ti·yam·pi भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ सरणंsa·ra·ṇaṃ गच्छामिgac·chā·mi धम्मञ्चdham·mañ·ca भिक्खुसङ्घञ्च।bhik·khu·saṅ·ghañ·ca

Esāhaṁ, bhante, dutiyampi bhagavantaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāmi dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañca.

For the second time, I go for refuge to the Buddha, the Teaching, and the Sangha of monks.
1193

उपासकंu·pā·sa·kaṃ मंmaṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā धारेतुdhā·re·tu अज्जतग्गेaj·ja·tag·ge पाणुपेतंpā·ṇu·pe·taṃ सरणंsa·ra·ṇaṃ गतन्”ति।ga·tan

Upāsakaṁ maṁ bhagavā dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupetaṁ saraṇaṁ gatan”ti.

Please accept me as a lay follower who’s gone for refuge for life.”
1194

“दीघरत्तंdī·gha·rat·taṃ खोkho ते,te सीह,sī·ha निगण्ठानंni·gaṇ·ṭhā·naṃ ओपानभूतंo·pā·na·bhū·taṃ कुलं,ku·laṃ येनye·na नेसंne·saṃ उपगतानंu·pa·ga·tā·naṃ पिण्डकंpiṇ·ḍa·kaṃ दातब्बंdā·tab·baṃ मञ्ञेय्यासी”ति।mañ·ñey·yā·sī

“Dīgharattaṁ kho te, sīha, nigaṇṭhānaṁ opānabhūtaṁ kulaṁ, yena nesaṁ upagatānaṁ piṇḍakaṁ dātabbaṁ maññeyyāsī”ti.

“For a long time, Sīha, your family has been a wellspring of support for the Jain ascetics. When they come to you, you should still consider giving them almsfood.”
1195

“इमिनापाहं,i·mi·nā·pā·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te भगवतोbha·ga·va·to भिय्योसोbhiy·yo·so मत्तायmat·tā·ya अत्तमनोat·ta·ma·no अभिरद्धो,a·bhi·rad·dho यंyaṃ मंmaṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā एवमाह—e·va·mā·ha

“Imināpāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavato bhiyyoso mattāya attamano abhiraddho, yaṁ maṁ bhagavā evamāha—

“Now I’m even more pleased with you, sir.
1196

‘दीघरत्तंdī·gha·rat·taṃ खोkho ते,te सीह,sī·ha निगण्ठानंni·gaṇ·ṭhā·naṃ ओपानभूतंo·pā·na·bhū·taṃ कुलं,ku·laṃ येनye·na नेसंne·saṃ उपगतानंu·pa·ga·tā·naṃ पिण्डकंpiṇ·ḍa·kaṃ दातब्बंdā·tab·baṃ मञ्ञेय्यासी’ति।mañ·ñey·yā·sī

‘dīgharattaṁ kho te, sīha, nigaṇṭhānaṁ opānabhūtaṁ kulaṁ, yena nesaṁ upagatānaṁ piṇḍakaṁ dātabbaṁ maññeyyāsī’ti.

(Pāli only)
1197

सुतंsu·taṃ मेme तं,taṃ भन्ते,bhan·te समणोsa·ma·ṇo गोतमोgo·ta·mo एवमाह—e·va·mā·ha

Sutaṁ me taṁ, bhante, samaṇo gotamo evamāha—

I had heard that you say
1198

‘मय्हमेवmay·ha·me·va दानंdā·naṃ दातब्बं,dā·tab·baṃ नna अञ्ञेसंañ·ñe·saṃ दानंdā·naṃ दातब्बं;dā·tab·baṃ मय्हमेवmay·ha·me·va सावकानंsā·va·kā·naṃ दानंdā·naṃ दातब्बं,dā·tab·baṃ नna अञ्ञेसंañ·ñe·saṃ सावकानंsā·va·kā·naṃ दानंdā·naṃ दातब्बं;dā·tab·baṃ

‘mayhameva dānaṁ dātabbaṁ, na aññesaṁ dānaṁ dātabbaṁ; mayhameva sāvakānaṁ dānaṁ dātabbaṁ, na aññesaṁ sāvakānaṁ dānaṁ dātabbaṁ;

that offerings should only be given to you and your disciples, not to anyone else,
1199

मय्हमेवmay·ha·me·va दिन्नंdin·naṃ महप्फलं,ma·hap·pha·laṃ नna अञ्ञेसंañ·ñe·saṃ दिन्नंdin·naṃ महप्फलं;ma·hap·pha·laṃ मय्हमेवmay·ha·me·va सावकानंsā·va·kā·naṃ दिन्नंdin·naṃ महप्फलं,ma·hap·pha·laṃ नna अञ्ञेसंañ·ñe·saṃ सावकानंsā·va·kā·naṃ दिन्नंdin·naṃ महप्फलन्’ति।ma·hap·pha·lan

mayhameva dinnaṁ mahapphalaṁ, na aññesaṁ dinnaṁ mahapphalaṁ; mayhameva sāvakānaṁ dinnaṁ mahapphalaṁ, na aññesaṁ sāvakānaṁ dinnaṁ mahapphalan’ti.

and only offerings given to you and your disciples are fruitful, not what’s given to others.
1200

अथa·tha चca पनpa·na मंmaṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā निगण्ठेसुपिni·gaṇ·ṭhe·su·pi दानेdā·ne समादपेति।sa·mā·da·pe·ti

Atha ca pana maṁ bhagavā nigaṇṭhesupi dāne samādapeti.

But in reality you encourage me to give to the Jain ascetics.
1201

अपिa·pi च,ca भन्ते,bhan·te मयमेत्थma·ya·met·tha कालंkā·laṃ जानिस्साम।jā·nis·sā·ma

Api ca, bhante, mayamettha kālaṁ jānissāma.

Indeed, I shall know the right time for that.
1202

एसाहं,e·sā·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te ततियम्पिta·ti·yam·pi भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ सरणंsa·ra·ṇaṃ गच्छामिgac·chā·mi धम्मञ्चdham·mañ·ca भिक्खुसङ्घञ्च।bhik·khu·saṅ·ghañ·ca

Esāhaṁ, bhante, tatiyampi bhagavantaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāmi dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañca.

For the third time, I go for refuge to the Buddha, the Teaching, and the Sangha of monks.
1203

उपासकंu·pā·sa·kaṃ मंmaṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā धारेतुdhā·re·tu अज्जतग्गेaj·ja·tag·ge पाणुपेतंpā·ṇu·pe·taṃ सरणंsa·ra·ṇaṃ गतन्”ति।ga·tan

Upāsakaṁ maṁ bhagavā dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupetaṁ saraṇaṁ gatan”ti.

Please accept me as a lay follower who’s gone for refuge for life.”
1204

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā सीहस्सsī·has·sa सेनापतिस्सse·nā·pa·tis·sa अनुपुब्बिंa·nu·pub·biṃ कथंka·thaṃ कथेसि,ka·the·si सेय्यथिदं—sey·ya·thi·daṃ

Atha kho bhagavā sīhassa senāpatissa anupubbiṁ kathaṁ kathesi, seyyathidaṁ—

The Buddha then gave Sīha a progressive talk—
1205

दानकथंdā·na·ka·thaṃ …पे…pe

dānakathaṁ …pe…

on generosity, morality, and heaven; on the downside, degradation, and defilement of worldly pleasures; and he revealed the benefits of renunciation. When the Buddha knew that his mind was ready, supple, without hindrances, joyful, and confident, he revealed the teaching unique to the Buddhas: suffering, its origin, its end, and the path. And just as a clean and stainless cloth absorbs dye properly, so too, while he was sitting right there, Sīha experienced the stainless vision of the Truth: “Anything that has a beginning has an end.” He had seen the Truth, had reached, understood, and penetrated it. He had gone beyond doubt and uncertainty, had attained to confidence, and had become independent of others in the Teacher’s instruction.
1206

अपरप्पच्चयोa·pa·rap·pac·ca·yo सत्थुसासनेsat·thu·sā·sa·ne भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

aparappaccayo satthusāsane bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

He then said to the Buddha,
1207

“अधिवासेतुa·dhi·vā·se·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te भगवाbha·ga·vā स्वातनायsvā·ta·nā·ya भत्तंbhat·taṃ सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ भिक्खुसङ्घेना”ति।bhik·khu·saṅ·ghe·nā

“adhivāsetu me, bhante, bhagavā svātanāya bhattaṁ saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghenā”ti.

“Sir, Please accept tomorrow’s meal from me together with the Sangha of monks.”
1208

अधिवासेसिa·dhi·vā·se·si भगवाbha·ga·vā तुण्हीभावेन।tuṇ·hī·bhā·ve·na

Adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvena.

The Buddha consented by remaining silent.
1209

अथa·tha खोkho सीहोsī·ho सेनापतिse·nā·pa·ti भगवतोbha·ga·va·to अधिवासनंa·dhi·vā·sa·naṃ विदित्वाvi·dit·vā उट्ठायासनाuṭ·ṭhā·yā·sa·nā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā पदक्खिणंpa·dak·khi·ṇaṃ कत्वाkat·vā पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

Atha kho sīho senāpati bhagavato adhivāsanaṁ viditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pakkāmi.

Knowing that the Buddha had consented, Sīha got up from his seat, bowed down, circumambulated the Buddha with his right side toward him, and left.
1210

अथa·tha खोkho सीहोsī·ho सेनापतिse·nā·pa·ti अञ्ञतरंañ·ña·ta·raṃ पुरिसंpu·ri·saṃ आणापेसि—ā·ṇā·pe·si

Atha kho sīho senāpati aññataraṁ purisaṁ āṇāpesi—

Sīha then told a man,
1211

“गच्छ,gac·cha भणे,bha·ṇe पवत्तमंसंpa·vat·ta·maṃ·saṃ जानाही”ति।jā·nā·hī

“gaccha, bhaṇe, pavattamaṁsaṁ jānāhī”ti.

“Go and get some meat.”
1212

अथa·tha खोkho सीहोsī·ho सेनापतिse·nā·pa·ti तस्साtas·sā रत्तियाrat·ti·yā अच्चयेनac·ca·ye·na पणीतंpa·ṇī·taṃ खादनीयंkhā·da·nī·yaṃ भोजनीयंbho·ja·nī·yaṃ पटियादापेत्वाpa·ṭi·yā·dā·pet·vā भगवतोbha·ga·va·to कालंkā·laṃ आरोचापेसि—“कालो,ā·ro·cā·pe·si भन्ते,bhan·te निट्ठितंniṭ·ṭhi·taṃ भत्तन्”ति।bhat·tan

Atha kho sīho senāpati tassā rattiyā accayena paṇītaṁ khādanīyaṁ bhojanīyaṁ paṭiyādāpetvā bhagavato kālaṁ ārocāpesi—“kālo, bhante, niṭṭhitaṁ bhattan”ti.

The following morning Sīha had various kinds of fine foods prepared. He then had the Buddha informed that the meal was ready.
1213

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā पुब्बण्हसमयंpub·baṇ·ha·sa·ma·yaṃ निवासेत्वाni·vā·set·vā पत्तचीवरमादायpat·ta·cī·va·ra·mā·dā·ya येनye·na सीहस्सsī·has·sa सेनापतिस्सse·nā·pa·tis·sa निवेसनंni·ve·sa·naṃ तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā पञ्ञत्तेpañ·ñat·te आसनेā·sa·ne निसीदिni·sī·di सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ भिक्खुसङ्घेन।bhik·khu·saṅ·ghe·na

Atha kho bhagavā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya yena sīhassa senāpatissa nivesanaṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghena.

The Buddha robed up, took his bowl and robe, and went to General Sīha’s house where he sat down on the prepared seat together with the Sangha of monks.
1214

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na सम्बहुलाsam·ba·hu·lā निगण्ठाni·gaṇ·ṭhā वेसालियंve·sā·li·yaṃ रथिकायra·thi·kā·ya रथिकंra·thi·kaṃ सिङ्घाटकेनsiṅ·ghā·ṭa·ke·na सिङ्घाटकंsiṅ·ghā·ṭa·kaṃ बाहाbā·hā पग्गय्हpag·gay·ha कन्दन्ति—kan·dan·ti

Tena kho pana samayena sambahulā nigaṇṭhā vesāliyaṁ rathikāya rathikaṁ siṅghāṭakena siṅghāṭakaṁ bāhā paggayha kandanti—

Just then a number of Jain ascetics were walking around Vesālī, from street to street, from intersection to intersection, waiving their arms and calling out,
1215

“अज्जaj·ja सीहेनsī·he·na सेनापतिनाse·nā·pa·ti·nā थूलंthū·laṃ पसुंpa·suṃ वधित्वाva·dhit·vā समणस्सsa·ma·ṇas·sa गोतमस्सgo·ta·mas·sa भत्तंbhat·taṃ कतं,ka·taṃ तंtaṃ समणोsa·ma·ṇo गोतमोgo·ta·mo जानंjā·naṃ उद्दिस्सकतंud·dis·sa·ka·taṃ मंसंmaṃ·saṃ परिभुञ्जतिpa·ri·bhuñ·ja·ti पटिच्चकम्मन्”ति।pa·ṭic·ca·kam·man

“ajja sīhena senāpatinā thūlaṁ pasuṁ vadhitvā samaṇassa gotamassa bhattaṁ kataṁ, taṁ samaṇo gotamo jānaṁ uddissakataṁ maṁsaṁ paribhuñjati paṭiccakamman”ti.

“General Sīha has killed a large animal and made a meal for the ascetic Gotama. The ascetic Gotama is eating that meat, knowing that the animal was killed for his sake!”
1216

अथa·tha खोkho अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro पुरिसोpu·ri·so येनye·na सीहोsī·ho सेनापतिse·nā·pa·ti तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā सीहस्सsī·has·sa सेनापतिस्सse·nā·pa·tis·sa उपकण्णकेu·pa·kaṇ·ṇa·ke आरोचेसि—ā·ro·ce·si

Atha kho aññataro puriso yena sīho senāpati tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā sīhassa senāpatissa upakaṇṇake ārocesi—

A certain man went up to Sīha and whispered to him what the Jains were doing.
1217

“यग्घे,yag·ghe भन्ते,bhan·te जानेय्यासि,jā·ney·yā·si एतेe·te सम्बहुलाsam·ba·hu·lā निगण्ठाni·gaṇ·ṭhā वेसालियंve·sā·li·yaṃ रथिकायra·thi·kā·ya रथिकंra·thi·kaṃ सिङ्घाटकेनsiṅ·ghā·ṭa·ke·na सिङ्घाटकंsiṅ·ghā·ṭa·kaṃ बाहाbā·hā पग्गय्हpag·gay·ha कन्दन्ति—kan·dan·ti

“yagghe, bhante, jāneyyāsi, ete sambahulā nigaṇṭhā vesāliyaṁ rathikāya rathikaṁ siṅghāṭakena siṅghāṭakaṁ bāhā paggayha kandanti—

(Pāli only)
1218

‘अज्जaj·ja सीहेनsī·he·na सेनापतिनाse·nā·pa·ti·nā थूलंthū·laṃ पसुंpa·suṃ वधित्वाva·dhit·vā समणस्सsa·ma·ṇas·sa गोतमस्सgo·ta·mas·sa भत्तंbhat·taṃ कतं,ka·taṃ तंtaṃ समणोsa·ma·ṇo गोतमोgo·ta·mo जानंjā·naṃ उद्दिस्सकतंud·dis·sa·ka·taṃ मंसंmaṃ·saṃ परिभुञ्जतिpa·ri·bhuñ·ja·ti पटिच्चकम्मन्’”ति।pa·ṭic·ca·kam·man

‘ajja sīhena senāpatinā thūlaṁ pasuṁ vadhitvā samaṇassa gotamassa bhattaṁ kataṁ, taṁ samaṇo gotamo jānaṁ uddissakataṁ maṁsaṁ paribhuñjati paṭiccakamman’”ti.

(Pāli only)
1219

“अलं,a·laṃ अय्यो,ay·yo दीघरत्तम्पिdī·gha·rat·tam·pi तेte आयस्मन्ताā·yas·man·tā अवण्णकामाa·vaṇ·ṇa·kā·mā बुद्धस्स,bud·dhas·sa अवण्णकामाa·vaṇ·ṇa·kā·mā धम्मस्स,dham·mas·sa अवण्णकामाa·vaṇ·ṇa·kā·mā सङ्घस्स;saṅ·ghas·sa

“Alaṁ, ayyo, dīgharattampi te āyasmantā avaṇṇakāmā buddhassa, avaṇṇakāmā dhammassa, avaṇṇakāmā saṅghassa;

Sīha said, “Forget about it. For a long time those venerables have wanted to disparage the Buddha, the Teaching, and the Sangha of monks.
1220

नna चca पनpa·na तेte आयस्मन्ताā·yas·man·tā जिरिदन्तिji·ri·dan·ti तंtaṃ भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ असताa·sa·tā तुच्छाtuc·chā मुसाmu·sā अभूतेनa·bhū·te·na अब्भाचिक्खन्ता;ab·bhā·cik·khan·tā

na ca pana te āyasmantā jiridanti taṁ bhagavantaṁ asatā tucchā musā abhūtena abbhācikkhantā;

They’ll grow old and still keep on misrepresenting the Buddha with lies.
1221

नna चca मयंma·yaṃ जीवितहेतुपिjī·vi·ta·he·tu·pi सञ्चिच्चsañ·cic·ca पाणंpā·ṇaṃ जीविताjī·vi·tā वोरोपेय्यामा”ति।vo·ro·pey·yā·mā

na ca mayaṁ jīvitahetupi sañcicca pāṇaṁ jīvitā voropeyyāmā”ti.

Besides, I wouldn’t kill a living being even for the sake of my life.”
1222

अथa·tha खोkho सीहोsī·ho सेनापतिse·nā·pa·ti बुद्धप्पमुखंbud·dhap·pa·mu·khaṃ भिक्खुसङ्घंbhik·khu·saṅ·ghaṃ पणीतेनpa·ṇī·te·na खादनीयेनkhā·da·nī·ye·na भोजनीयेनbho·ja·nī·ye·na सहत्थाsa·hat·thā सन्तप्पेत्वाsan·tap·pet·vā सम्पवारेत्वाsam·pa·vā·ret·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ भुत्ताविंbhut·tā·viṃ ओनीतपत्तपाणिंo·nī·ta·pat·ta·pā·ṇiṃ एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di

Atha kho sīho senāpati buddhappamukhaṁ bhikkhusaṅghaṁ paṇītena khādanīyena bhojanīyena sahatthā santappetvā sampavāretvā bhagavantaṁ bhuttāviṁ onītapattapāṇiṁ ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

Sīha then personally served various kinds of fine foods to the Sangha of monks headed by the Buddha. When the Buddha had finished his meal, Sīha sat down to one side.
1223

एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नंni·sin·naṃ खोkho सीहंsī·haṃ सेनापतिंse·nā·pa·tiṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā धम्मियाdham·mi·yā कथायka·thā·ya सन्दस्सेत्वाsan·das·set·vā समादपेत्वाsa·mā·da·pet·vā समुत्तेजेत्वाsa·mut·te·jet·vā सम्पहंसेत्वाsam·pa·haṃ·set·vā उट्ठायासनाuṭ·ṭhā·yā·sa·nā पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho sīhaṁ senāpatiṁ bhagavā dhammiyā kathāya sandassetvā samādapetvā samuttejetvā sampahaṁsetvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmi.

The Buddha instructed, inspired, and gladdened him with a teaching. He then got up from his seat and left.
1224

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ निदानेni·dā·ne एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ पकरणेpa·ka·ra·ṇe धम्मिंdham·miṃ कथंka·thaṃ कत्वाkat·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

Atha kho bhagavā etasmiṁ nidāne etasmiṁ pakaraṇe dhammiṁ kathaṁ katvā bhikkhū āmantesi—

Soon afterwards the Buddha gave a teaching and addressed the monks:
1225

“न,na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve जानंjā·naṃ उद्दिस्सकतंud·dis·sa·ka·taṃ मंसंmaṃ·saṃ परिभुञ्जितब्बं।pa·ri·bhuñ·ji·tab·baṃ

“na, bhikkhave, jānaṁ uddissakataṁ maṁsaṁ paribhuñjitabbaṁ.

“You shouldn’t eat meat when you know the animal was killed for your sake.
1226

योyo परिभुञ्जेय्य,pa·ri·bhuñ·jey·ya आपत्तिā·pat·ti दुक्कटस्स।duk·ka·ṭas·sa

Yo paribhuñjeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassa.

If you do, you commit an offense of wrong conduct.
1227

अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve तिकोटिपरिसुद्धंti·ko·ṭi·pa·ri·sud·dhaṃ मच्छमंसं—अदिट्ठंmac·cha·maṃ·saṃ अस्सुतंas·su·taṃ अपरिसङ्कितन्”ति।a·pa·ri·saṅ·ki·tan

Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, tikoṭiparisuddhaṁ macchamaṁsaṁ—adiṭṭhaṁ assutaṁ aparisaṅkitan”ti.

I allow you to eat meat and fish that’s pure in three respects: you haven’t seen, heard, or suspected that the animal was killed for your sake.”
1228

20। कप्पियभूमिअनुजाननkap·pi·ya·bhū·mi·a·nu·jā·na·na

20. Kappiyabhūmianujānana

20. The allowance for a food-storage area
1229

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na वेसालीve·sā·lī सुभिक्खाsu·bhik·khā होतिho·ti सुसस्साsu·sas·sā सुलभपिण्डा,su·la·bha·piṇ·ḍā सुकराsu·ka·rā उञ्छेनuñ·che·na पग्गहेनpag·ga·he·na यापेतुं।yā·pe·tuṃ

Tena kho pana samayena vesālī subhikkhā hoti susassā sulabhapiṇḍā, sukarā uñchena paggahena yāpetuṁ.

Some time later in Vesālī, there was plenty of food, the crops were abundant, and there was no problem getting by on almsfood.
1230

अथa·tha खोkho भगवतोbha·ga·va·to रहोगतस्सra·ho·ga·tas·sa पटिसल्लीनस्सpa·ṭi·sal·lī·nas·sa एवंe·vaṃ चेतसोce·ta·so परिवितक्कोpa·ri·vi·tak·ko उदपादि—u·da·pā·di

Atha kho bhagavato rahogatassa paṭisallīnassa evaṁ cetaso parivitakko udapādi—

Then, while the Buddha was reflecting in private, he thought,
1231

“यानिyā·ni तानिtā·ni मयाma·yā भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ अनुञ्ञातानिa·nuñ·ñā·tā·ni दुब्भिक्खेdub·bhik·khe दुस्सस्सेdus·sas·se दुल्लभपिण्डेdul·la·bha·piṇ·ḍe अन्तोan·to वुट्ठंvuṭ·ṭhaṃ अन्तोan·to पक्कंpak·kaṃ सामंsā·maṃ पक्कंpak·kaṃ उग्गहितपटिग्गहितकंug·ga·hi·ta·pa·ṭig·ga·hi·ta·kaṃ ततोta·to नीहटंnī·ha·ṭaṃ पुरेभत्तंpu·re·bhat·taṃ पटिग्गहितंpa·ṭig·ga·hi·taṃ वनट्ठंva·naṭ·ṭhaṃ पोक्खरट्ठं,pok·kha·raṭ·ṭhaṃ अज्जापिaj·jā·pi नुnu खोkho तानिtā·ni भिक्खूbhik·khū परिभुञ्जन्ती”ति।pa·ri·bhuñ·jan·tī

“yāni tāni mayā bhikkhūnaṁ anuññātāni dubbhikkhe dussasse dullabhapiṇḍe anto vuṭṭhaṁ anto pakkaṁ sāmaṁ pakkaṁ uggahitapaṭiggahitakaṁ tato nīhaṭaṁ purebhattaṁ paṭiggahitaṁ vanaṭṭhaṁ pokkharaṭṭhaṁ, ajjāpi nu kho tāni bhikkhū paribhuñjantī”ti.

“Those things I allowed the monks when there was a shortage of food, the crops were meager, and it was hard to get by on alms—that is, what’s been stored indoors in a monastery, what’s been cooked indoors in a monastery, what’s been cooked by the monks themselves, what’s been received after picking it up, what’s been brought out, what’s been received before the meal, what’s come from the forest or a lotus pond—do the monks still make use of these?”
1232

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā सायन्हसमयंsā·yan·ha·sa·ma·yaṃ पटिसल्लानाpa·ṭi·sal·lā·nā वुट्ठितोvuṭ·ṭhi·to आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ आनन्दंā·nan·daṃ आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

Atha kho bhagavā sāyanhasamayaṁ paṭisallānā vuṭṭhito āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi—

When the Buddha had come out from seclusion, he asked Venerable Ānanda about this.
1233

“यानिyā·ni तानि,tā·ni आनन्द,ā·nan·da मयाma·yā भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ अनुञ्ञातानिa·nuñ·ñā·tā·ni दुब्भिक्खेdub·bhik·khe दुस्सस्सेdus·sas·se दुल्लभपिण्डेdul·la·bha·piṇ·ḍe अन्तोan·to वुट्ठंvuṭ·ṭhaṃ अन्तोan·to पक्कंpak·kaṃ सामंsā·maṃ पक्कंpak·kaṃ उग्गहितपटिग्गहितकंug·ga·hi·ta·pa·ṭig·ga·hi·ta·kaṃ ततोta·to नीहटंnī·ha·ṭaṃ पुरेभत्तंpu·re·bhat·taṃ पटिग्गहितंpa·ṭig·ga·hi·taṃ वनट्ठंva·naṭ·ṭhaṃ पोक्खरट्ठं,pok·kha·raṭ·ṭhaṃ अज्जापिaj·jā·pi नुnu खोkho तानिtā·ni भिक्खूbhik·khū परिभुञ्जन्ती”ति?pa·ri·bhuñ·jan·tī

“yāni tāni, ānanda, mayā bhikkhūnaṁ anuññātāni dubbhikkhe dussasse dullabhapiṇḍe anto vuṭṭhaṁ anto pakkaṁ sāmaṁ pakkaṁ uggahitapaṭiggahitakaṁ tato nīhaṭaṁ purebhattaṁ paṭiggahitaṁ vanaṭṭhaṁ pokkharaṭṭhaṁ, ajjāpi nu kho tāni bhikkhū paribhuñjantī”ti?

(Pāli only)
1234

“परिभुञ्जन्ति,pa·ri·bhuñ·jan·ti भगवा”ति।bha·ga·vā

“Paribhuñjanti, bhagavā”ti.

He replied, “They do, sir.”
1235

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ निदानेni·dā·ne एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ पकरणेpa·ka·ra·ṇe धम्मिंdham·miṃ कथंka·thaṃ कत्वाkat·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

Atha kho bhagavā etasmiṁ nidāne etasmiṁ pakaraṇe dhammiṁ kathaṁ katvā bhikkhū āmantesi—

Soon afterwards the Buddha gave a teaching and addressed the monks:
1236

“यानिyā·ni तानि,tā·ni भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve मयाma·yā भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ अनुञ्ञातानिa·nuñ·ñā·tā·ni दुब्भिक्खेdub·bhik·khe दुस्सस्सेdus·sas·se दुल्लभपिण्डेdul·la·bha·piṇ·ḍe अन्तोan·to वुट्ठंvuṭ·ṭhaṃ अन्तोan·to पक्कंpak·kaṃ सामंsā·maṃ पक्कंpak·kaṃ उग्गहितपटिग्गहितकंug·ga·hi·ta·pa·ṭig·ga·hi·ta·kaṃ ततोta·to नीहटंnī·ha·ṭaṃ पुरेभत्तंpu·re·bhat·taṃ पटिग्गहितंpa·ṭig·ga·hi·taṃ वनट्ठंva·naṭ·ṭhaṃ पोक्खरट्ठं,pok·kha·raṭ·ṭhaṃ तानाहंtā·nā·haṃ अज्जतग्गेaj·ja·tag·ge पटिक्खिपामि।pa·ṭik·khi·pā·mi

“yāni tāni, bhikkhave, mayā bhikkhūnaṁ anuññātāni dubbhikkhe dussasse dullabhapiṇḍe anto vuṭṭhaṁ anto pakkaṁ sāmaṁ pakkaṁ uggahitapaṭiggahitakaṁ tato nīhaṭaṁ purebhattaṁ paṭiggahitaṁ vanaṭṭhaṁ pokkharaṭṭhaṁ, tānāhaṁ ajjatagge paṭikkhipāmi.

“Those things I allowed you when there was a shortage of food, the crops were meager, and it was hard to get by on alms, I prohibit from today onward.
1237

न,na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अन्तोan·to वुट्ठंvuṭ·ṭhaṃ अन्तोan·to पक्कंpak·kaṃ सामंsā·maṃ पक्कंpak·kaṃ उग्गहितपटिग्गहितकंug·ga·hi·ta·pa·ṭig·ga·hi·ta·kaṃ परिभुञ्जितब्बं।pa·ri·bhuñ·ji·tab·baṃ

Na, bhikkhave, anto vuṭṭhaṁ anto pakkaṁ sāmaṁ pakkaṁ uggahitapaṭiggahitakaṁ paribhuñjitabbaṁ.

You shouldn’t eat what’s been stored indoors in a monastery, what’s been cooked indoors in a monastery, what’s been cooked by yourselves, or what’s been received after picking it up.
1238

योyo परिभुञ्जेय्य,pa·ri·bhuñ·jey·ya आपत्तिā·pat·ti दुक्कटस्स।duk·ka·ṭas·sa

Yo paribhuñjeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassa.

If you do, you commit an offense of wrong conduct.
1239

नna च,ca भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve ततोta·to नीहटंnī·ha·ṭaṃ पुरेभत्तंpu·re·bhat·taṃ पटिग्गहितंpa·ṭig·ga·hi·taṃ वनट्ठंva·naṭ·ṭhaṃ पोक्खरट्ठंpok·kha·raṭ·ṭhaṃ भुत्ताविनाbhut·tā·vi·nā पवारितेनpa·vā·ri·te·na अनतिरित्तंa·na·ti·rit·taṃ परिभुञ्जितब्बं।pa·ri·bhuñ·ji·tab·baṃ

Na ca, bhikkhave, tato nīhaṭaṁ purebhattaṁ paṭiggahitaṁ vanaṭṭhaṁ pokkharaṭṭhaṁ bhuttāvinā pavāritena anatirittaṁ paribhuñjitabbaṁ.

If you have finished your meal and refused an invitation to eat more, you shouldn’t eat non-leftovers that have been brought out, that have been received before the meal, or that have come from the forest or a lotus pond.
1240

योyo परिभुञ्जेय्य,pa·ri·bhuñ·jey·ya यथाधम्मोya·thā·dham·mo कारेतब्बो”ति।kā·re·tab·bo

Yo paribhuñjeyya, yathādhammo kāretabbo”ti.

If you do, you should be dealt with according to the rule.”
1241

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na जानपदाjā·na·pa·dā मनुस्साma·nus·sā बहुंba·huṃ लोणम्पि,lo·ṇam·pi तेलम्पि,te·lam·pi तण्डुलम्पि,taṇ·ḍu·lam·pi खादनीयम्पिkhā·da·nī·yam·pi सकटेसुsa·ka·ṭe·su आरोपेत्वाā·ro·pet·vā बहारामकोट्ठकेba·hā·rā·ma·koṭ·ṭha·ke सकटपरिवट्टंsa·ka·ṭa·pa·ri·vaṭ·ṭaṃ करित्वाka·rit·vā अच्छन्ति—“यदाac·chan·ti पटिपाटिंpa·ṭi·pā·ṭiṃ लभिस्साम,la·bhis·sā·ma तदाta·dā भत्तंbhat·taṃ करिस्सामा”ति।ka·ris·sā·mā

Tena kho pana samayena jānapadā manussā bahuṁ loṇampi, telampi, taṇḍulampi, khādanīyampi sakaṭesu āropetvā bahārāmakoṭṭhake sakaṭaparivaṭṭaṁ karitvā acchanti—“yadā paṭipāṭiṁ labhissāma, tadā bhattaṁ karissāmā”ti.

At that time people from the country loaded much salt, oil, rice, and fresh food onto carts, brought them to outside the monastery gatehouse, and waited for their turn to cook a meal.
1242

महाma·hā चca मेघोme·gho उग्गतोug·ga·to होति।ho·ti

Mahā ca megho uggato hoti.

Just then a storm was approaching.
1243

अथa·tha खोkho तेte मनुस्साma·nus·sā येनायस्माye·nā·yas·mā आनन्दोā·nan·do तेनुपसङ्कमिंसु,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·miṃ·su उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ आनन्दंā·nan·daṃ एतदवोचुं—“इध,e·ta·da·vo·cuṃ भन्तेbhan·te आनन्द,ā·nan·da बहुंba·huṃ लोणम्पि,lo·ṇam·pi तेलम्पि,te·lam·pi तण्डुलम्पि,taṇ·ḍu·lam·pi खादनीयम्पिkhā·da·nī·yam·pi सकटेसुsa·ka·ṭe·su आरोपिताā·ro·pi·tā तिट्ठन्ति,tiṭ·ṭhan·ti महाma·hā चca मेघोme·gho उग्गतो;ug·ga·to कथंka·thaṃ नुnu खो,kho भन्तेbhan·te आनन्द,ā·nan·da पटिपज्जितब्बन्”ति?pa·ṭi·paj·ji·tab·ban

Atha kho te manussā yenāyasmā ānando tenupasaṅkamiṁsu, upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ etadavocuṁ—“idha, bhante ānanda, bahuṁ loṇampi, telampi, taṇḍulampi, khādanīyampi sakaṭesu āropitā tiṭṭhanti, mahā ca megho uggato; kathaṁ nu kho, bhante ānanda, paṭipajjitabban”ti?

Those people went to Venerable Ānanda and told him what was happening, adding, “What should we do now?”
1244

अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā आनन्दोā·nan·do भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसि।ā·ro·ce·si

Atha kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesi.

Ānanda told the Buddha, who said,
1245

“तेनte·na हानन्द,hā·nan·da सङ्घोsaṅ·gho पच्चन्तिमंpac·can·ti·maṃ विहारंvi·hā·raṃ कप्पियभूमिंkap·pi·ya·bhū·miṃ सम्मन्नित्वाsam·man·nit·vā तत्थtat·tha वासेतु,vā·se·tu यंyaṃ सङ्घोsaṅ·gho आकङ्खतिā·kaṅ·kha·ti विहारंvi·hā·raṃ वाvā अड्ढयोगंaḍ·ḍha·yo·gaṃ वाvā पासादंpā·sā·daṃ वाvā हम्मियंham·mi·yaṃ वाvā गुहंgu·haṃ वा।vā

“Tena hānanda, saṅgho paccantimaṁ vihāraṁ kappiyabhūmiṁ sammannitvā tattha vāsetu, yaṁ saṅgho ākaṅkhati vihāraṁ vā aḍḍhayogaṁ vā pāsādaṁ vā hammiyaṁ vā guhaṁ vā.

“Well then, Ānanda, the Sangha should designate a building at the edge of the monastery as a food-storage area and then store the food there—whether a dwelling, a stilt house, or a cave.
1246

एवञ्चe·vañ·ca पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सम्मन्नितब्बा।sam·man·ni·tab·bā

Evañca pana, bhikkhave, sammannitabbā.

And it should be done like this.
1247

ब्यत्तेनbyat·te·na भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā पटिबलेनpa·ṭi·ba·le·na सङ्घोsaṅ·gho ञापेतब्बो—ñā·pe·tab·bo

Byattena bhikkhunā paṭibalena saṅgho ñāpetabbo—

A competent and capable monk should inform the Sangha:
1248

‘सुणातुsu·ṇā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

‘Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho.

‘Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen.
1249

यदिya·di सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa पत्तकल्लं,pat·ta·kal·laṃ सङ्घोsaṅ·gho इत्थन्नामंit·than·nā·maṃ विहारंvi·hā·raṃ कप्पियभूमिंkap·pi·ya·bhū·miṃ सम्मन्नेय्य।sam·man·ney·ya

Yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṁ, saṅgho itthannāmaṁ vihāraṁ kappiyabhūmiṁ sammanneyya.

If the Sangha is ready, it should designate such-and-such a dwelling as a food-storage area.
1250

एसाe·sā ञत्ति।ñat·ti

Esā ñatti.

This is the motion.
1251

सुणातुsu·ṇā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho.

Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen.
1252

सङ्घोsaṅ·gho इत्थन्नामंit·than·nā·maṃ विहारंvi·hā·raṃ कप्पियभूमिंkap·pi·ya·bhū·miṃ सम्मन्नति।sam·man·na·ti

Saṅgho itthannāmaṁ vihāraṁ kappiyabhūmiṁ sammannati.

The Sangha designates such-and-such a dwelling as a food-storage area.
1253

यस्सायस्मतोyas·sā·yas·ma·to खमतिkha·ma·ti इत्थन्नामस्सit·than·nā·mas·sa विहारस्सvi·hā·ras·sa कप्पियभूमियाkap·pi·ya·bhū·mi·yā सम्मुति,sam·mu·ti सोso तुण्हस्स;tuṇ·has·sa

Yassāyasmato khamati itthannāmassa vihārassa kappiyabhūmiyā sammuti, so tuṇhassa;

Any monk who approves of designating such-and-such a dwelling as a food-storage area should remain silent.
1254

यस्सyas·sa नक्खमति,nak·kha·ma·ti सोso भासेय्य।bhā·sey·ya

yassa nakkhamati, so bhāseyya.

Any monk who doesn’t approve should speak up.
1255

सम्मतोsam·ma·to सङ्घेनsaṅ·ghe·na इत्थन्नामोit·than·nā·mo विहारोvi·hā·ro कप्पियभूमि।kap·pi·ya·bhū·mi

Sammato saṅghena itthannāmo vihāro kappiyabhūmi.

The Sangha has designated such-and-such a dwelling as a food-storage area.
1256

खमतिkha·ma·ti सङ्घस्स,saṅ·ghas·sa तस्माtas·mā तुण्ही,tuṇ·hī एवमेतंe·va·me·taṃ धारयामी’”ति।dhā·ra·yā·mī

Khamati saṅghassa, tasmā tuṇhī, evametaṁ dhārayāmī’”ti.

The Sangha approves and is therefore silent. I will remember it thus.’”
1257

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na मनुस्साma·nus·sā तत्थेवtat·the·va सम्मुतियाsam·mu·ti·yā कप्पियभूमियाkap·pi·ya·bhū·mi·yā यागुयोyā·gu·yo पचन्ति,pa·can·ti भत्तानिbhat·tā·ni पचन्ति,pa·can·ti सूपानिsū·pā·ni सम्पादेन्ति,sam·pā·den·ti मंसानिmaṃ·sā·ni कोट्टेन्ति,koṭ·ṭen·ti कट्ठानिkaṭ·ṭhā·ni फालेन्ति।phā·len·ti

Tena kho pana samayena manussā tattheva sammutiyā kappiyabhūmiyā yāguyo pacanti, bhattāni pacanti, sūpāni sampādenti, maṁsāni koṭṭenti, kaṭṭhāni phālenti.

Soon afterwards people used the designated food-storage area for various purposes: to cook congee and rice, to prepare curries, to chop meat, and to split firewood.
1258

अस्सोसिas·so·si खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā रत्तियाrat·ti·yā पच्चूससमयंpac·cū·sa·sa·ma·yaṃ पच्चुट्ठायpac·cuṭ·ṭhā·ya उच्चासद्दंuc·cā·sad·daṃ महासद्दंma·hā·sad·daṃ काकोरवसद्दं,kā·ko·ra·va·sad·daṃ सुत्वानsut·vā·na आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ आनन्दंā·nan·daṃ आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

Assosi kho bhagavā rattiyā paccūsasamayaṁ paccuṭṭhāya uccāsaddaṁ mahāsaddaṁ kākoravasaddaṁ, sutvāna āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi—

Getting up early in the morning, the Buddha heard loud noises, like the cawing of crows. He asked Venerable Ānanda what was going on,
1259

“किंkiṃ नुnu खोkho सो,so आनन्द,ā·nan·da उच्चासद्दोuc·cā·sad·do महासद्दोma·hā·sad·do काकोरवसद्दो”ति?kā·ko·ra·va·sad·do

“kiṁ nu kho so, ānanda, uccāsaddo mahāsaddo kākoravasaddo”ti?

(Pāli only)
1260

“एतरहि,e·ta·ra·hi भन्ते,bhan·te मनुस्साma·nus·sā तत्थेवtat·the·va सम्मुतियाsam·mu·ti·yā कप्पियभूमियाkap·pi·ya·bhū·mi·yā यागुयोyā·gu·yo पचन्ति,pa·can·ti भत्तानिbhat·tā·ni पचन्ति,pa·can·ti सूपानिsū·pā·ni सम्पादेन्ति,sam·pā·den·ti मंसानिmaṃ·sā·ni कोट्टेन्ति,koṭ·ṭen·ti कट्ठानिkaṭ·ṭhā·ni फालेन्ति।phā·len·ti

“Etarahi, bhante, manussā tattheva sammutiyā kappiyabhūmiyā yāguyo pacanti, bhattāni pacanti, sūpāni sampādenti, maṁsāni koṭṭenti, kaṭṭhāni phālenti.

and Ānanda told him.
1261

सोso एसो,e·so भगवा,bha·ga·vā उच्चासद्दोuc·cā·sad·do महासद्दोma·hā·sad·do काकोरवसद्दो”ति।kā·ko·ra·va·sad·do

So eso, bhagavā, uccāsaddo mahāsaddo kākoravasaddo”ti.

(Pāli only)
1262

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ निदानेni·dā·ne एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ पकरणेpa·ka·ra·ṇe धम्मिंdham·miṃ कथंka·thaṃ कत्वाkat·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

Atha kho bhagavā etasmiṁ nidāne etasmiṁ pakaraṇe dhammiṁ kathaṁ katvā bhikkhū āmantesi—

Soon afterwards the Buddha gave a teaching and addressed the monks:
1263

“न,na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सम्मुतिsam·mu·ti कप्पियभूमिkap·pi·ya·bhū·mi परिभुञ्जितब्बा।pa·ri·bhuñ·ji·tab·bā

“na, bhikkhave, sammuti kappiyabhūmi paribhuñjitabbā.

“You shouldn’t use a designated food-storage area.
1264

योyo परिभुञ्जेय्य,pa·ri·bhuñ·jey·ya आपत्तिā·pat·ti दुक्कटस्स।duk·ka·ṭas·sa

Yo paribhuñjeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassa.

If you do, you commit an offense of wrong conduct.
1265

अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve तिस्सोtis·so कप्पियभूमियो—kap·pi·ya·bhū·mi·yo

Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, tisso kappiyabhūmiyo—

I allow three places as food-storage areas:
1266

उस्सावनन्तिकंus·sā·va·nan·ti·kaṃ गोनिसादिकंgo·ni·sā·di·kaṃ गहपतिन्”ति।ga·ha·pa·tin

ussāvanantikaṁ gonisādikaṁ gahapatin”ti.

a building made according to a proclamation, a cow stall, and a building given for the purpose by a householder.”
1267

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na आयस्माā·yas·mā यसोजोya·so·jo गिलानोgi·lā·no होति।ho·ti

Tena kho pana samayena āyasmā yasojo gilāno hoti.

Soon afterwards Venerable Yasoja was sick.
1268

तस्सत्थायtas·sat·thā·ya भेसज्जानिbhe·saj·jā·ni आहरियन्ति।ā·ha·ri·yan·ti

Tassatthāya bhesajjāni āhariyanti.

People brought him tonics
1269

तानिtā·ni भिक्खूbhik·khū बहिba·hi वासेन्ति।vā·sen·ti

Tāni bhikkhū bahi vāsenti.

and the monks stored them outside.
1270

उक्कपिण्डकापिuk·ka·piṇ·ḍa·kā·pi खादन्ति,khā·dan·ti चोरापिco·rā·pi हरन्ति।ha·ran·ti

Ukkapiṇḍakāpi khādanti, corāpi haranti.

Vermin ate them and thieves stole them.
1271

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
1272

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सम्मुतिंsam·mu·tiṃ कप्पियभूमिंkap·pi·ya·bhū·miṃ परिभुञ्जितुं।pa·ri·bhuñ·ji·tuṃ

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, sammutiṁ kappiyabhūmiṁ paribhuñjituṁ.

“I allow you to use a designated food-storage area.
1273

अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve चतस्सोca·tas·so कप्पियभूमियो—kap·pi·ya·bhū·mi·yo

Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, catasso kappiyabhūmiyo—

I allow four places as food-storage areas:
1274

उस्सावनन्तिकंus·sā·va·nan·ti·kaṃ गोनिसादिकंgo·ni·sā·di·kaṃ गहपतिंga·ha·pa·tiṃ सम्मुतिन्”ति।sam·mu·tin

ussāvanantikaṁ gonisādikaṁ gahapatiṁ sammutin”ti.

a building made according to a proclamation, a cow stall, a building given for the purpose by a householder, and a building designated by the Sangha.”
1275

सीहभाणवारोsī·ha·bhā·ṇa·vā·ro निट्ठितोniṭ·ṭhi·to चतुत्थो।ca·tut·tho

Sīhabhāṇavāro niṭṭhito catuttho.

The fourth section for recitation on Sīha is finished.
1276

21। मेण्डकगहपतिवत्थुmeṇ·ḍa·ka·ga·ha·pa·ti·vat·thu

21. Meṇḍakagahapativatthu

21. The account of the householder Meṇḍaka
1277

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na भद्दियनगरेbhad·di·ya·na·ga·re मेण्डकोmeṇ·ḍa·ko गहपतिga·ha·pa·ti पटिवसति।pa·ṭi·va·sa·ti

Tena kho pana samayena bhaddiyanagare meṇḍako gahapati paṭivasati.

At that time in the town of Bhaddiya there was a householder called Meṇḍaka
1278

तस्सtas·sa एवरूपोe·va·rū·po इद्धानुभावोid·dhā·nu·bhā·vo होति—ho·ti

Tassa evarūpo iddhānubhāvo hoti—

who had supernormal powers.
1279

सीसंsī·saṃ नहायित्वाna·hā·yit·vā धञ्ञागारंdhañ·ñā·gā·raṃ सम्मज्जापेत्वाsam·maj·jā·pet·vā बहिद्वारेba·hid·vā·re निसीदति,ni·sī·da·ti अन्तलिक्खाan·ta·lik·khā धञ्ञस्सdhañ·ñas·sa धाराdhā·rā ओपतित्वाo·pa·tit·vā धञ्ञागारंdhañ·ñā·gā·raṃ पूरेति।pū·re·ti

sīsaṁ nahāyitvā dhaññāgāraṁ sammajjāpetvā bahidvāre nisīdati, antalikkhā dhaññassa dhārā opatitvā dhaññāgāraṁ pūreti.

He would wash his hair, sweep out his granary, and sit down outside the door. A shower of grain would then fall out of the sky and fill his granary.
1280

भरियायbha·ri·yā·ya एवरूपोe·va·rū·po इद्धानुभावोid·dhā·nu·bhā·vo होति—ho·ti

Bhariyāya evarūpo iddhānubhāvo hoti—

His wife, too, had supernormal powers.
1281

एकंयेवe·kaṃ·ye·va आळ्हकथालिकंā·ḷha·ka·thā·li·kaṃ उपनिसीदित्वाu·pa·ni·sī·dit·vā एकञ्चe·kañ·ca सूपभिञ्जनकंsū·pa·bhiñ·ja·na·kaṃ दासकम्मकरपोरिसंdā·sa·kam·ma·ka·ra·po·ri·saṃ भत्तेनbhat·te·na परिविसति,pa·ri·vi·sa·ti नna तावtā·va तंtaṃ खिय्यतिkhiy·ya·ti यावyā·va साsā नna वुट्ठाति।vuṭ·ṭhā·ti

ekaṁyeva āḷhakathālikaṁ upanisīditvā ekañca sūpabhiñjanakaṁ dāsakammakaraporisaṁ bhattena parivisati, na tāva taṁ khiyyati yāva sā na vuṭṭhāti.

She would sit down next to a pot of rice and a pot of curry and serve a meal to the slaves, servants, and workers. The food would not be exhausted until she got up.
1282

पुत्तस्सput·tas·sa एवरूपोe·va·rū·po इद्धानुभावोid·dhā·nu·bhā·vo होति—ho·ti

Puttassa evarūpo iddhānubhāvo hoti—

His son, too, had supernormal powers.
1283

एकंयेवe·kaṃ·ye·va सहस्सथविकंsa·has·sa·tha·vi·kaṃ गहेत्वाga·het·vā दासकम्मकरपोरिसस्सdā·sa·kam·ma·ka·ra·po·ri·sas·sa छमासिकंcha·mā·si·kaṃ वेतनंve·ta·naṃ देति,de·ti नna तावtā·va तंtaṃ खिय्यतिkhiy·ya·ti यावस्सyā·vas·sa हत्थगता।hat·tha·ga·tā

ekaṁyeva sahassathavikaṁ gahetvā dāsakammakaraporisassa chamāsikaṁ vetanaṁ deti, na tāva taṁ khiyyati yāvassa hatthagatā.

He would get a bag containing a thousand coins and give the slaves, servants, and workers their wages for six months. That purse would not go empty as long as he held it.
1284

सुणिसायsu·ṇi·sā·ya एवरूपोe·va·rū·po इद्धानुभावोid·dhā·nu·bhā·vo होति—ho·ti

Suṇisāya evarūpo iddhānubhāvo hoti—

His daughter-in-law, too, had supernormal powers.
1285

एकंयेवe·kaṃ·ye·va चतुदोणिकंca·tu·do·ṇi·kaṃ पिटकंpi·ṭa·kaṃ उपनिसीदित्वाu·pa·ni·sī·dit·vā दासकम्मकरपोरिसस्सdā·sa·kam·ma·ka·ra·po·ri·sas·sa छमासिकंcha·mā·si·kaṃ भत्तंbhat·taṃ देति,de·ti नna तावtā·va तंtaṃ खिय्यतिkhiy·ya·ti यावyā·va साsā नna वुट्ठाति।vuṭ·ṭhā·ti

ekaṁyeva catudoṇikaṁ piṭakaṁ upanisīditvā dāsakammakaraporisassa chamāsikaṁ bhattaṁ deti, na tāva taṁ khiyyati yāva sā na vuṭṭhāti.

She would sit down next to a four-liter basket and give out rice for six months to the slaves, servants, and workers. The rice would not be exhausted until she got up.
1286

दासस्सdā·sas·sa एवरूपोe·va·rū·po इद्धानुभावोid·dhā·nu·bhā·vo होति—ho·ti

Dāsassa evarūpo iddhānubhāvo hoti—

Even his slave had supernormal powers.
1287

एकेनe·ke·na नङ्गलेनnaṅ·ga·le·na कसन्तस्सka·san·tas·sa सत्तsat·ta सीतायोsī·tā·yo गच्छन्ति।gac·chan·ti

ekena naṅgalena kasantassa satta sītāyo gacchanti.

While plowing with a single plow, he made seven furrows.
1288

अस्सोसिas·so·si खोkho राजाrā·jā मागधोmā·ga·dho सेनियोse·ni·yo बिम्बिसारो—bim·bi·sā·ro

Assosi kho rājā māgadho seniyo bimbisāro—

King Seniya Bimbisāra of Magadha
1289

“अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ किरki·ra विजितेvi·ji·te भद्दियनगरेbhad·di·ya·na·ga·re मेण्डकोmeṇ·ḍa·ko गहपतिga·ha·pa·ti पटिवसति।pa·ṭi·va·sa·ti

“amhākaṁ kira vijite bhaddiyanagare meṇḍako gahapati paṭivasati.

heard that within his kingdom, in the town of Bhaddiya, there was a householder called Meṇḍaka with all these abilities.
1290

तस्सtas·sa एवरूपोe·va·rū·po इद्धानुभावो—id·dhā·nu·bhā·vo

Tassa evarūpo iddhānubhāvo—

(Pāli only)
1291

सीसंsī·saṃ नहायित्वाna·hā·yit·vā धञ्ञागारंdhañ·ñā·gā·raṃ सम्मज्जापेत्वाsam·maj·jā·pet·vā बहिद्वारेba·hid·vā·re निसीदति,ni·sī·da·ti अन्तलिक्खाan·ta·lik·khā धञ्ञस्सdhañ·ñas·sa धाराdhā·rā ओपतित्वाo·pa·tit·vā धञ्ञागारंdhañ·ñā·gā·raṃ पूरेति।pū·re·ti

sīsaṁ nahāyitvā dhaññāgāraṁ sammajjāpetvā bahidvāre nisīdati, antalikkhā dhaññassa dhārā opatitvā dhaññāgāraṁ pūreti.

(Pāli only)
1292

भरियायbha·ri·yā·ya एवरूपोe·va·rū·po इद्धानुभावो—id·dhā·nu·bhā·vo

Bhariyāya evarūpo iddhānubhāvo—

(Pāli only)
1293

एकंयेवe·kaṃ·ye·va आळ्हकथालिकंā·ḷha·ka·thā·li·kaṃ उपनिसीदित्वाu·pa·ni·sī·dit·vā एकञ्चe·kañ·ca सूपभिञ्जनकंsū·pa·bhiñ·ja·na·kaṃ दासकम्मकरपोरिसंdā·sa·kam·ma·ka·ra·po·ri·saṃ भत्तेनbhat·te·na परिविसति,pa·ri·vi·sa·ti नna तावtā·va तंtaṃ खिय्यतिkhiy·ya·ti यावyā·va साsā नna वुट्ठाति।vuṭ·ṭhā·ti

ekaṁyeva āḷhakathālikaṁ upanisīditvā ekañca sūpabhiñjanakaṁ dāsakammakaraporisaṁ bhattena parivisati, na tāva taṁ khiyyati yāva sā na vuṭṭhāti.

(Pāli only)
1294

पुत्तस्सput·tas·sa एवरूपोe·va·rū·po इद्धानुभावो—id·dhā·nu·bhā·vo

Puttassa evarūpo iddhānubhāvo—

(Pāli only)
1295

एकंयेवe·kaṃ·ye·va सहस्सथविकंsa·has·sa·tha·vi·kaṃ गहेत्वाga·het·vā दासकम्मकरपोरिसस्सdā·sa·kam·ma·ka·ra·po·ri·sas·sa छमासिकंcha·mā·si·kaṃ वेतनंve·ta·naṃ देति,de·ti नna तावtā·va तंtaṃ खिय्यतिkhiy·ya·ti यावस्सyā·vas·sa हत्थगता।hat·tha·ga·tā

ekaṁyeva sahassathavikaṁ gahetvā dāsakammakaraporisassa chamāsikaṁ vetanaṁ deti, na tāva taṁ khiyyati yāvassa hatthagatā.

(Pāli only)
1296

सुणिसायsu·ṇi·sā·ya एवरूपोe·va·rū·po इद्धानुभावो—id·dhā·nu·bhā·vo

Suṇisāya evarūpo iddhānubhāvo—

(Pāli only)
1297

एकंयेवe·kaṃ·ye·va चतुदोणिकंca·tu·do·ṇi·kaṃ पिटकंpi·ṭa·kaṃ उपनिसीदित्वाu·pa·ni·sī·dit·vā दासकम्मकरपोरिसस्सdā·sa·kam·ma·ka·ra·po·ri·sas·sa छमासिकंcha·mā·si·kaṃ भत्तंbhat·taṃ देति,de·ti नna तावtā·va तंtaṃ खिय्यतिkhiy·ya·ti यावyā·va साsā नna वुट्ठाति।vuṭ·ṭhā·ti

ekaṁyeva catudoṇikaṁ piṭakaṁ upanisīditvā dāsakammakaraporisassa chamāsikaṁ bhattaṁ deti, na tāva taṁ khiyyati yāva sā na vuṭṭhāti.

(Pāli only)
1298

दासस्सdā·sas·sa एवरूपोe·va·rū·po इद्धानुभावो—id·dhā·nu·bhā·vo

Dāsassa evarūpo iddhānubhāvo—

(Pāli only)
1299

एकेनe·ke·na नङ्गलेनnaṅ·ga·le·na कसन्तस्सka·san·tas·sa सत्तsat·ta सीतायोsī·tā·yo गच्छन्ती”ति।gac·chan·tī

ekena naṅgalena kasantassa satta sītāyo gacchantī”ti.

(Pāli only)
1300

अथa·tha खोkho राजाrā·jā मागधोmā·ga·dho सेनियोse·ni·yo बिम्बिसारोbim·bi·sā·ro अञ्ञतरंañ·ña·ta·raṃ सब्बत्थकंsab·bat·tha·kaṃ महामत्तंma·hā·mat·taṃ आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

Atha kho rājā māgadho seniyo bimbisāro aññataraṁ sabbatthakaṁ mahāmattaṁ āmantesi—

The king told the official in charge of practical affairs about this,
1301

“अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ किर,ki·ra भणे,bha·ṇe विजितेvi·ji·te भद्दियनगरेbhad·di·ya·na·ga·re मेण्डकोmeṇ·ḍa·ko गहपतिga·ha·pa·ti पटिवसति।pa·ṭi·va·sa·ti

“amhākaṁ kira, bhaṇe, vijite bhaddiyanagare meṇḍako gahapati paṭivasati.

(Pāli only)
1302

तस्सtas·sa एवरूपोe·va·rū·po इद्धानुभावो—id·dhā·nu·bhā·vo

Tassa evarūpo iddhānubhāvo—

(Pāli only)
1303

सीसंsī·saṃ नहायित्वाna·hā·yit·vā धञ्ञागारंdhañ·ñā·gā·raṃ सम्मज्जापेत्वाsam·maj·jā·pet·vā बहिद्वारेba·hid·vā·re निसीदति,ni·sī·da·ti अन्तलिक्खाan·ta·lik·khā धञ्ञस्सdhañ·ñas·sa धाराdhā·rā ओपतित्वाo·pa·tit·vā धञ्ञागारंdhañ·ñā·gā·raṃ पूरेति।pū·re·ti

sīsaṁ nahāyitvā dhaññāgāraṁ sammajjāpetvā bahidvāre nisīdati, antalikkhā dhaññassa dhārā opatitvā dhaññāgāraṁ pūreti.

(Pāli only)
1304

भरियायbha·ri·yā·ya …पे…pe

Bhariyāya …pe…

(Pāli only)
1305

पुत्तस्सput·tas·sa …

puttassa …

(Pāli only)
1306

सुणिसायsu·ṇi·sā·ya …

suṇisāya …

(Pāli only)
1307

दासस्सdā·sas·sa एवरूपोe·va·rū·po इद्धानुभावो,id·dhā·nu·bhā·vo एकेनe·ke·na नङ्गलेनnaṅ·ga·le·na कसन्तस्सka·san·tas·sa सत्तsat·ta सीतायोsī·tā·yo गच्छन्तीति।gac·chan·tī·ti

dāsassa evarūpo iddhānubhāvo, ekena naṅgalena kasantassa satta sītāyo gacchantīti.

(Pāli only)
1308

गच्छ,gac·cha भणे,bha·ṇe जानाहि।jā·nā·hi

Gaccha, bhaṇe, jānāhi.

adding, “Go and investigate it.
1309

यथाya·thā मयाma·yā सामंsā·maṃ दिट्ठो,diṭ·ṭho एवंe·vaṃ तवta·va दिट्ठोdiṭ·ṭho भविस्सती”ति।bha·vis·sa·tī

Yathā mayā sāmaṁ diṭṭho, evaṁ tava diṭṭho bhavissatī”ti.

If you see it, it will be as if I see it myself.”
1310

“एवं,e·vaṃ देवा”तिde·vā खोkho सोso महामत्तोma·hā·mat·to रञ्ञोrañ·ño मागधस्सmā·ga·dhas·sa सेनियस्सse·ni·yas·sa बिम्बिसारस्सbim·bi·sā·ras·sa पटिस्सुणित्वाpa·ṭis·su·ṇit·vā चतुरङ्गिनियाca·tu·raṅ·gi·ni·yā सेनायse·nā·ya येनye·na भद्दियंbhad·di·yaṃ तेनte·na पायासि।pā·yā·si

“Evaṁ, devā”ti kho so mahāmatto rañño māgadhassa seniyassa bimbisārassa paṭissuṇitvā caturaṅginiyā senāya yena bhaddiyaṁ tena pāyāsi.

Saying, “Yes, sir,” he set out for Bhaddiya with the fourfold army.
1311

अनुपुब्बेनa·nu·pub·be·na येनye·na भद्दियंbhad·di·yaṃ येनye·na मेण्डकोmeṇ·ḍa·ko गहपतिga·ha·pa·ti तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā मेण्डकंmeṇ·ḍa·kaṃ गहपतिंga·ha·pa·tiṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

Anupubbena yena bhaddiyaṁ yena meṇḍako gahapati tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā meṇḍakaṁ gahapatiṁ etadavoca—

When he eventually arrived, he went up to Meṇḍaka and said,
1312

“अहञ्हि,a·hañ·hi गहपति,ga·ha·pa·ti रञ्ञाrañ·ñā आणत्तो—ā·ṇat·to

“ahañhi, gahapati, raññā āṇatto—

“I’ve been told by the king
1313

‘अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ किर,ki·ra भणे,bha·ṇe विजितेvi·ji·te भद्दियनगरेbhad·di·ya·na·ga·re मेण्डकोmeṇ·ḍa·ko गहपतिga·ha·pa·ti पटिवसति,pa·ṭi·va·sa·ti तस्सtas·sa एवरूपोe·va·rū·po इद्धानुभावो,id·dhā·nu·bhā·vo सीसंsī·saṃ नहायित्वाna·hā·yit·vā …पे…pe

‘amhākaṁ kira, bhaṇe, vijite bhaddiyanagare meṇḍako gahapati paṭivasati, tassa evarūpo iddhānubhāvo, sīsaṁ nahāyitvā …pe…

to investigate your supernormal powers.
1314

भरियायbha·ri·yā·ya …

bhariyāya …

(Pāli only)
1315

पुत्तस्सput·tas·sa …

puttassa …

(Pāli only)
1316

सुणिसायsu·ṇi·sā·ya …

suṇisāya …

(Pāli only)
1317

दासस्सdā·sas·sa एवरूपोe·va·rū·po इद्धानुभावो,id·dhā·nu·bhā·vo एकेनe·ke·na नङ्गलेनnaṅ·ga·le·na कसन्तस्सka·san·tas·sa सत्तsat·ta सीतायोsī·tā·yo गच्छन्तीति,gac·chan·tī·ti गच्छ,gac·cha भणे,bha·ṇe जानाहि।jā·nā·hi

dāsassa evarūpo iddhānubhāvo, ekena naṅgalena kasantassa satta sītāyo gacchantīti, gaccha, bhaṇe, jānāhi.

(Pāli only)
1318

यथाya·thā मयाma·yā सामंsā·maṃ दिट्ठो,diṭ·ṭho एवंe·vaṃ तवta·va दिट्ठोdiṭ·ṭho भविस्सती’ति।bha·vis·sa·tī

Yathā mayā sāmaṁ diṭṭho, evaṁ tava diṭṭho bhavissatī’ti.

(Pāli only)
1319

पस्सामpas·sā·ma ते,te गहपति,ga·ha·pa·ti इद्धानुभावन्”ति।id·dhā·nu·bhā·van

Passāma te, gahapati, iddhānubhāvan”ti.

Please show them to me.”
1320

अथa·tha खोkho मेण्डकोmeṇ·ḍa·ko गहपतिga·ha·pa·ti सीसंsī·saṃ नहायित्वाna·hā·yit·vā धञ्ञागारंdhañ·ñā·gā·raṃ सम्मज्जापेत्वाsam·maj·jā·pet·vā बहिद्वारेba·hid·vā·re निसीदि,ni·sī·di अन्तलिक्खाan·ta·lik·khā धञ्ञस्सdhañ·ñas·sa धाराdhā·rā ओपतित्वाo·pa·tit·vā धञ्ञागारंdhañ·ñā·gā·raṃ पूरेसि।pū·re·si

Atha kho meṇḍako gahapati sīsaṁ nahāyitvā dhaññāgāraṁ sammajjāpetvā bahidvāre nisīdi, antalikkhā dhaññassa dhārā opatitvā dhaññāgāraṁ pūresi.

Meṇḍaka then washed his hair, swept out his granary, and sat down outside the door. A shower of grain fell out of the sky and filled his granary.
1321

“दिट्ठोdiṭ·ṭho ते,te गहपति,ga·ha·pa·ti इद्धानुभावो।id·dhā·nu·bhā·vo

“Diṭṭho te, gahapati, iddhānubhāvo.

“Good.
1322

भरियायbha·ri·yā·ya तेte इद्धानुभावंid·dhā·nu·bhā·vaṃ पस्सिस्सामा”ति।pas·sis·sā·mā

Bhariyāya te iddhānubhāvaṁ passissāmā”ti.

Now show me your wife’s supernormal powers.”
1323

अथa·tha खोkho मेण्डकोmeṇ·ḍa·ko गहपतिga·ha·pa·ti भरियंbha·ri·yaṃ आणापेसि—ā·ṇā·pe·si

Atha kho meṇḍako gahapati bhariyaṁ āṇāpesi—

Meṇḍaka told his wife,
1324

“तेनte·na हिhi चतुरङ्गिनिंca·tu·raṅ·gi·niṃ सेनंse·naṃ भत्तेनbhat·te·na परिविसा”ति।pa·ri·vi·sā

“tena hi caturaṅginiṁ senaṁ bhattena parivisā”ti.

“Please serve a meal to the fourfold army.”
1325

अथa·tha खोkho मेण्डकस्सmeṇ·ḍa·kas·sa गहपतिस्सga·ha·pa·tis·sa भरियाbha·ri·yā एकंयेवe·kaṃ·ye·va आळ्हकथालिकंā·ḷha·ka·thā·li·kaṃ उपनिसीदित्वाu·pa·ni·sī·dit·vā एकञ्चe·kañ·ca सूपभिञ्जनकंsū·pa·bhiñ·ja·na·kaṃ चतुरङ्गिनिंca·tu·raṅ·gi·niṃ सेनंse·naṃ भत्तेनbhat·te·na परिविसि,pa·ri·vi·si नna तावtā·va तंtaṃ खिय्यति,khiy·ya·ti यावyā·va साsā नna वुट्ठाति।vuṭ·ṭhā·ti

Atha kho meṇḍakassa gahapatissa bhariyā ekaṁyeva āḷhakathālikaṁ upanisīditvā ekañca sūpabhiñjanakaṁ caturaṅginiṁ senaṁ bhattena parivisi, na tāva taṁ khiyyati, yāva sā na vuṭṭhāti.

She sat down next to a pot of rice and a pot of curry and served a meal to the fourfold army. The food was not exhausted until she got up.
1326

“दिट्ठोdiṭ·ṭho ते,te गहपति,ga·ha·pa·ti भरियायपिbha·ri·yā·ya·pi इद्धानुभावो।id·dhā·nu·bhā·vo

“Diṭṭho te, gahapati, bhariyāyapi iddhānubhāvo.

“Good.
1327

पुत्तस्सput·tas·sa तेte इद्धानुभावंid·dhā·nu·bhā·vaṃ पस्सिस्सामा”ति।pas·sis·sā·mā

Puttassa te iddhānubhāvaṁ passissāmā”ti.

Now show me your son’s supernormal powers.”
1328

अथa·tha खोkho मेण्डकोmeṇ·ḍa·ko गहपतिga·ha·pa·ti पुत्तंput·taṃ आणापेसि—ā·ṇā·pe·si

Atha kho meṇḍako gahapati puttaṁ āṇāpesi—

Meṇḍaka told his son,
1329

“तेनte·na हिhi चतुरङ्गिनियाca·tu·raṅ·gi·ni·yā सेनायse·nā·ya छमासिकंcha·mā·si·kaṃ वेतनंve·ta·naṃ देही”ति।de·hī

“tena hi caturaṅginiyā senāya chamāsikaṁ vetanaṁ dehī”ti.

“Please give wages for six months to the fourfold army.”
1330

अथa·tha खोkho मेण्डकस्सmeṇ·ḍa·kas·sa गहपतिस्सga·ha·pa·tis·sa पुत्तोput·to एकंयेवe·kaṃ·ye·va सहस्सथविकंsa·has·sa·tha·vi·kaṃ गहेत्वाga·het·vā चतुरङ्गिनियाca·tu·raṅ·gi·ni·yā सेनायse·nā·ya छमासिकंcha·mā·si·kaṃ वेतनंve·ta·naṃ अदासि,a·dā·si नna तावtā·va तंtaṃ खिय्यति,khiy·ya·ti यावस्सyā·vas·sa हत्थगता।hat·tha·ga·tā

Atha kho meṇḍakassa gahapatissa putto ekaṁyeva sahassathavikaṁ gahetvā caturaṅginiyā senāya chamāsikaṁ vetanaṁ adāsi, na tāva taṁ khiyyati, yāvassa hatthagatā.

He got a bag containing a thousand coins and gave the fourfold army its wages for six months. That purse did not go empty as long as he held it.
1331

“दिट्ठोdiṭ·ṭho ते,te गहपति,ga·ha·pa·ti पुत्तस्सपिput·tas·sa·pi इद्धानुभावो।id·dhā·nu·bhā·vo

“Diṭṭho te, gahapati, puttassapi iddhānubhāvo.

“Good.
1332

सुणिसायsu·ṇi·sā·ya तेte इद्धानुभावंid·dhā·nu·bhā·vaṃ पस्सिस्सामा”ति।pas·sis·sā·mā

Suṇisāya te iddhānubhāvaṁ passissāmā”ti.

Now show me your daughter-in-law’s supernormal powers.”
1333

अथa·tha खोkho मेण्डकोmeṇ·ḍa·ko गहपतिga·ha·pa·ti सुणिसंsu·ṇi·saṃ आणापेसि—ā·ṇā·pe·si

Atha kho meṇḍako gahapati suṇisaṁ āṇāpesi—

Meṇḍaka told his daughter-in-law,
1334

“तेनte·na हिhi चतुरङ्गिनियाca·tu·raṅ·gi·ni·yā सेनायse·nā·ya छमासिकंcha·mā·si·kaṃ भत्तंbhat·taṃ देही”ति।de·hī

“tena hi caturaṅginiyā senāya chamāsikaṁ bhattaṁ dehī”ti.

“Please give rice for six months to the fourfold army.”
1335

अथa·tha खोkho मेण्डकस्सmeṇ·ḍa·kas·sa गहपतिस्सga·ha·pa·tis·sa सुणिसाsu·ṇi·sā एकंयेवe·kaṃ·ye·va चतुदोणिकंca·tu·do·ṇi·kaṃ पिटकंpi·ṭa·kaṃ उपनिसीदित्वाu·pa·ni·sī·dit·vā चतुरङ्गिनियाca·tu·raṅ·gi·ni·yā सेनायse·nā·ya छमासिकंcha·mā·si·kaṃ भत्तंbhat·taṃ अदासि,a·dā·si नna तावtā·va तंtaṃ खिय्यतिkhiy·ya·ti यावyā·va साsā नna वुट्ठाति।vuṭ·ṭhā·ti

Atha kho meṇḍakassa gahapatissa suṇisā ekaṁyeva catudoṇikaṁ piṭakaṁ upanisīditvā caturaṅginiyā senāya chamāsikaṁ bhattaṁ adāsi, na tāva taṁ khiyyati yāva sā na vuṭṭhāti.

She sat down next to a four-liter basket and gave rice for six months to the fourfold army. The rice was not exhausted until she got up.
1336

“दिट्ठोdiṭ·ṭho ते,te गहपति,ga·ha·pa·ti सुणिसायपिsu·ṇi·sā·ya·pi इद्धानुभावो।id·dhā·nu·bhā·vo

“Diṭṭho te, gahapati, suṇisāyapi iddhānubhāvo.

“Good.
1337

दासस्सdā·sas·sa तेte इद्धानुभावंid·dhā·nu·bhā·vaṃ पस्सिस्सामा”ति।pas·sis·sā·mā

Dāsassa te iddhānubhāvaṁ passissāmā”ti.

Now show me your slave’s supernormal powers.”
1338

“मय्हंmay·haṃ खो,kho सामि,sā·mi दासस्सdā·sas·sa इद्धानुभावोid·dhā·nu·bhā·vo खेत्तेkhet·te पस्सितब्बो”ति।pas·si·tab·bo

“Mayhaṁ kho, sāmi, dāsassa iddhānubhāvo khette passitabbo”ti.

“Sir, we have to go to the field to see that.”
1339

“अलं,a·laṃ गहपति,ga·ha·pa·ti दिट्ठोdiṭ·ṭho तेte दासस्सपिdā·sas·sa·pi इद्धानुभावो”ति।id·dhā·nu·bhā·vo

“Alaṁ, gahapati, diṭṭho te dāsassapi iddhānubhāvo”ti.

“Forget about it, then. I consider it as seen.”
1340

अथa·tha खोkho सोso महामत्तोma·hā·mat·to चतुरङ्गिनियाca·tu·raṅ·gi·ni·yā सेनायse·nā·ya पुनदेवpu·na·de·va राजगहंrā·ja·ga·haṃ पच्चागञ्छि।pac·cā·gañ·chi

Atha kho so mahāmatto caturaṅginiyā senāya punadeva rājagahaṁ paccāgañchi.

That official then returned to Rājagaha with the fourfold army
1341

येनye·na राजाrā·jā मागधोmā·ga·dho सेनियोse·ni·yo बिम्बिसारोbim·bi·sā·ro तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā रञ्ञोrañ·ño मागधस्सmā·ga·dhas·sa सेनियस्सse·ni·yas·sa बिम्बिसारस्सbim·bi·sā·ras·sa एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसि।ā·ro·ce·si

Yena rājā māgadho seniyo bimbisāro tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā rañño māgadhassa seniyassa bimbisārassa etamatthaṁ ārocesi.

and told the king what had happened.
1342

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā वेसालियंve·sā·li·yaṃ यथाभिरन्तंya·thā·bhi·ran·taṃ विहरित्वाvi·ha·rit·vā येनye·na भद्दियंbhad·di·yaṃ तेनte·na चारिकंcā·ri·kaṃ पक्कामिpak·kā·mi महताma·ha·tā भिक्खुसङ्घेनbhik·khu·saṅ·ghe·na सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ अड्ढतेलसेहिaḍ·ḍha·te·la·se·hi भिक्खुसतेहि।bhik·khu·sa·te·hi

Atha kho bhagavā vesāliyaṁ yathābhirantaṁ viharitvā yena bhaddiyaṁ tena cārikaṁ pakkāmi mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ aḍḍhatelasehi bhikkhusatehi.

When the Buddha had stayed at Vesālī for as long as he liked, he set out wandering toward Bhaddiya with a large sangha of twelve-hundred and fifty monks.
1343

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā अनुपुब्बेनa·nu·pub·be·na चारिकंcā·ri·kaṃ चरमानोca·ra·mā·no येनye·na भद्दियंbhad·di·yaṃ तदवसरि।ta·da·va·sa·ri

Atha kho bhagavā anupubbena cārikaṁ caramāno yena bhaddiyaṁ tadavasari.

When he eventually arrived,
1344

तत्रtat·ra सुदंsu·daṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā भद्दियेbhad·di·ye विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti जातियाjā·ti·yā वने।va·ne

Tatra sudaṁ bhagavā bhaddiye viharati jātiyā vane.

he stayed in the Jātiyā Grove.
1345

अस्सोसिas·so·si खोkho मेण्डकोmeṇ·ḍa·ko गहपति—ga·ha·pa·ti

Assosi kho meṇḍako gahapati—

Meṇḍaka heard:
1346

“समणोsa·ma·ṇo खलुkha·lu भोbho गोतमोgo·ta·mo सक्यपुत्तोsak·ya·put·to सक्यकुलाsak·ya·ku·lā पब्बजितोpab·ba·ji·to भद्दियंbhad·di·yaṃ अनुप्पत्तोa·nup·pat·to भद्दियेbhad·di·ye विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti जातियाjā·ti·yā वने।va·ne

“samaṇo khalu bho gotamo sakyaputto sakyakulā pabbajito bhaddiyaṁ anuppatto bhaddiye viharati jātiyā vane.

“Sir, the ascetic Gotama, the Sakyan, who has gone forth from the Sakyan clan, has arrived at Bhaddiya and is staying in the Jātiyā Grove with a large sangha of twelve-hundred and fifty monks.
1347

तंtaṃ खोkho पनpa·na भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ गोतमंgo·ta·maṃ एवंe·vaṃ कल्याणोkal·yā·ṇo कित्तिसद्दोkit·ti·sad·do अब्भुग्गतो—ab·bhug·ga·to

Taṁ kho pana bhagavantaṁ gotamaṁ evaṁ kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggato—

That good Gotama has a fine reputation:
1348

‘इतिपिi·ti·pi सोso भगवाbha·ga·vā अरहंa·ra·haṃ सम्मासम्बुद्धोsam·mā·sam·bud·dho विज्जाचरणसम्पन्नोvij·jā·ca·ra·ṇa·sam·pan·no सुगतोsu·ga·to लोकविदूlo·ka·vi·dū अनुत्तरोa·nut·ta·ro पुरिसदम्मसारथिpu·ri·sa·dam·ma·sā·ra·thi सत्थाsat·thā देवमनुस्सानंde·va·ma·nus·sā·naṃ बुद्धोbud·dho भगवा’।bha·ga·vā

‘itipi so bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā’.

‘He is a Buddha, perfected and fully awakened, complete in insight and conduct, happy, knower of the world, supreme leader of trainable people, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, a Buddha.
1349

सोso इमंi·maṃ लोकंlo·kaṃ सदेवकंsa·de·va·kaṃ समारकंsa·mā·ra·kaṃ सब्रह्मकंsab·rah·ma·kaṃ सस्समणब्राह्मणिंsas·sa·ma·ṇab·rāh·ma·ṇiṃ पजंpa·jaṃ सदेवमनुस्संsa·de·va·ma·nus·saṃ सयंsa·yaṃ अभिञ्ञाa·bhiñ·ñā सच्छिकत्वाsac·chi·kat·vā पवेदेति।pa·ve·de·ti

So imaṁ lokaṁ sadevakaṁ samārakaṁ sabrahmakaṁ sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṁ pajaṁ sadevamanussaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedeti.

With his own insight he has seen this world with its gods, its lords of death, and its supreme beings, this society with its monastics and brahmins, its gods and humans, and he makes it known to others.
1350

सोso धम्मंdham·maṃ देसेतिde·se·ti आदिकल्याणंā·di·kal·yā·ṇaṃ मज्झेकल्याणंmaj·jhe·kal·yā·ṇaṃ परियोसानकल्याणंpa·ri·yo·sā·na·kal·yā·ṇaṃ सात्थंsāt·thaṃ सब्यञ्जनंsab·yañ·ja·naṃ केवलपरिपुण्णंke·va·la·pa·ri·puṇ·ṇaṃ परिसुद्धंpa·ri·sud·dhaṃ ब्रह्मचरियंbrah·ma·ca·ri·yaṃ पकासेति।pa·kā·se·ti

So dhammaṁ deseti ādikalyāṇaṁ majjhekalyāṇaṁ pariyosānakalyāṇaṁ sātthaṁ sabyañjanaṁ kevalaparipuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ pakāseti.

He has a Teaching that’s good in the beginning, good in the middle, and good in the end. It has a true goal and is well articulated. He sets out a perfectly complete and pure spiritual life.’
1351

साधुsā·dhu खोkho पनpa·na तथारूपानंta·thā·rū·pā·naṃ अरहतंa·ra·ha·taṃ दस्सनंdas·sa·naṃ होती”ति।ho·tī

Sādhu kho pana tathārūpānaṁ arahataṁ dassanaṁ hotī”ti.

It’s good to see such perfected ones.”
1352

अथa·tha खोkho मेण्डकोmeṇ·ḍa·ko गहपतिga·ha·pa·ti भद्रानिbhad·rā·ni भद्रानिbhad·rā·ni यानानिyā·nā·ni योजापेत्वाyo·jā·pet·vā भद्रंbhad·raṃ भद्रंbhad·raṃ यानंyā·naṃ अभिरुहित्वाa·bhi·ru·hit·vā भद्रेहिbhad·re·hi भद्रेहिbhad·re·hi यानेहिyā·ne·hi भद्दियाbhad·di·yā निय्यासिniy·yā·si भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ दस्सनाय।das·sa·nā·ya

Atha kho meṇḍako gahapati bhadrāni bhadrāni yānāni yojāpetvā bhadraṁ bhadraṁ yānaṁ abhiruhitvā bhadrehi bhadrehi yānehi bhaddiyā niyyāsi bhagavantaṁ dassanāya.

Meṇḍaka then had his best carriages harnessed, mounted one of them, and set out from Bhaddiya to visit the Buddha.
1353

अद्दसंसुad·da·saṃ·su खोkho सम्बहुलाsam·ba·hu·lā तित्थियाtit·thi·yā मेण्डकंmeṇ·ḍa·kaṃ गहपतिंga·ha·pa·tiṃ दूरतोवdū·ra·to·va आगच्छन्तं,ā·gac·chan·taṃ दिस्वानdis·vā·na मेण्डकंmeṇ·ḍa·kaṃ गहपतिंga·ha·pa·tiṃ एतदवोचुं—e·ta·da·vo·cuṃ

Addasaṁsu kho sambahulā titthiyā meṇḍakaṁ gahapatiṁ dūratova āgacchantaṁ, disvāna meṇḍakaṁ gahapatiṁ etadavocuṁ—

A number of monastics from other religions saw Meṇḍaka coming, and they said to him,
1354

“कहंka·haṃ त्वं,tvaṃ गहपति,ga·ha·pa·ti गच्छसी”ति?gac·cha·sī

“kahaṁ tvaṁ, gahapati, gacchasī”ti?

“Where are you going, householder?”
1355

“गच्छामहं,gac·chā·ma·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ समणंsa·ma·ṇaṃ गोतमंgo·ta·maṃ दस्सनाया”ति।das·sa·nā·yā

“Gacchāmahaṁ, bhante, bhagavantaṁ samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāyā”ti.

“I’m going to visit the Buddha, sir, the ascetic Gotama.”
1356

“किंkiṃ पनpa·na त्वं,tvaṃ गहपति,ga·ha·pa·ti किरियवादोki·ri·ya·vā·do समानोsa·mā·no अकिरियवादंa·ki·ri·ya·vā·daṃ समणंsa·ma·ṇaṃ गोतमंgo·ta·maṃ दस्सनायdas·sa·nā·ya उपसङ्कमिस्ससि?u·pa·saṅ·ka·mis·sa·si

“Kiṁ pana tvaṁ, gahapati, kiriyavādo samāno akiriyavādaṁ samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissasi?

“But why visit the ascetic Gotama who believes that actions don’t have results when you believe that they do?
1357

समणोsa·ma·ṇo हि,hi गहपति,ga·ha·pa·ti गोतमोgo·ta·mo अकिरियवादोa·ki·ri·ya·vā·do अकिरियायa·ki·ri·yā·ya धम्मंdham·maṃ देसेति,de·se·ti तेनte·na चca सावकेsā·va·ke विनेती”ति।vi·ne·tī

Samaṇo hi, gahapati, gotamo akiriyavādo akiriyāya dhammaṁ deseti, tena ca sāvake vinetī”ti.

For the ascetic Gotama believes in inaction, teaches that, and trains his disciples in that.”
1358

अथa·tha खोkho मेण्डकस्सmeṇ·ḍa·kas·sa गहपतिस्सga·ha·pa·tis·sa एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

Atha kho meṇḍakassa gahapatissa etadahosi—

Meṇḍaka thought,
1359

“निस्संसयंnis·saṃ·sa·yaṃ खोkho सोso भगवाbha·ga·vā अरहंa·ra·haṃ सम्मासम्बुद्धोsam·mā·sam·bud·dho भविस्सति,bha·vis·sa·ti यथयिमेya·tha·yi·me तित्थियाtit·thi·yā उसूयन्ती”ति।u·sū·yan·tī

“nissaṁsayaṁ kho so bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho bhavissati, yathayime titthiyā usūyantī”ti.

“No doubt he must be a Buddha, a Perfected and fully Awakened One, since these monastics of other religions are jealous.”
1360

यावतिकाyā·va·ti·kā यानस्सyā·nas·sa भूमि,bhū·mi यानेनyā·ne·na गन्त्वाgan·tvā यानाyā·nā पच्चोरोहित्वाpac·co·ro·hit·vā पत्तिकोवpat·ti·ko·va येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di

Yāvatikā yānassa bhūmi, yānena gantvā yānā paccorohitvā pattikova yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

He then went by carriage as far as the ground would allow, dismounted, and then approached the Buddha on foot. After bowing down to the Buddha, he sat down,
1361

एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नस्सni·sin·nas·sa खोkho मेण्डकस्सmeṇ·ḍa·kas·sa गहपतिस्सga·ha·pa·tis·sa भगवाbha·ga·vā अनुपुब्बिंa·nu·pub·biṃ कथंka·thaṃ कथेसि,ka·the·si सेय्यथिदं—sey·ya·thi·daṃ

Ekamantaṁ nisinnassa kho meṇḍakassa gahapatissa bhagavā anupubbiṁ kathaṁ kathesi, seyyathidaṁ—

and the Buddha gave him a progressive talk—
1362

दानकथंdā·na·ka·thaṃ …पे…pe

dānakathaṁ …pe…

on generosity, morality, and heaven; on the downside, degradation, and defilement of worldly pleasures; and he revealed the benefits of renunciation. When the Buddha knew that his mind was ready, supple, without hindrances, joyful, and confident, he revealed the teaching unique to the Buddhas: suffering, its origin, its end, and the path. And just as a clean and stainless cloth absorbs dye properly, so too, while he was sitting right there, Meṇḍaka experienced the stainless vision of the Truth: “Anything that has a beginning has an end.” He had seen the Truth, had reached, understood, and penetrated it. He had gone beyond doubt and uncertainty, had attained to confidence, and had become independent of others in the Teacher’s instruction.
1363

अपरप्पच्चयोa·pa·rap·pac·ca·yo सत्थुसासनेsat·thu·sā·sa·ne भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

aparappaccayo satthusāsane bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

He then said to the Buddha,
1364

“अभिक्कन्तं,a·bhik·kan·taṃ भन्तेbhan·te …पे…pe

“abhikkantaṁ, bhante …pe…

“Wonderful, sir, wonderful! Just as one might set upright what’s overturned, or reveal what’s hidden, or show the way to one who’s lost, or bring a lamp into the dark so that one with eyes might see what’s there—just so has the Buddha made the Teaching clear in many ways. I go for refuge to the Buddha, the Teaching, and the Sangha of monks.
1365

उपासकंu·pā·sa·kaṃ मंmaṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā धारेतुdhā·re·tu अज्जतग्गेaj·ja·tag·ge पाणुपेतंpā·ṇu·pe·taṃ सरणंsa·ra·ṇaṃ गतं।ga·taṃ

upāsakaṁ maṁ bhagavā dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupetaṁ saraṇaṁ gataṁ.

Please accept me as a lay follower who’s gone for refuge for life.
1366

अधिवासेतुa·dhi·vā·se·tu चca मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te भगवाbha·ga·vā स्वातनायsvā·ta·nā·ya भत्तंbhat·taṃ सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ भिक्खुसङ्घेना”ति।bhik·khu·saṅ·ghe·nā

Adhivāsetu ca me, bhante, bhagavā svātanāya bhattaṁ saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghenā”ti.

And please accept tomorrow’s meal from me together with the Sangha of monks.”
1367

अधिवासेसिa·dhi·vā·se·si भगवाbha·ga·vā तुण्हीभावेन।tuṇ·hī·bhā·ve·na

Adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvena.

The Buddha consented by remaining silent.
1368

अथa·tha खोkho मेण्डकोmeṇ·ḍa·ko गहपतिga·ha·pa·ti भगवतोbha·ga·va·to अधिवासनंa·dhi·vā·sa·naṃ विदित्वाvi·dit·vā उट्ठायासनाuṭ·ṭhā·yā·sa·nā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā पदक्खिणंpa·dak·khi·ṇaṃ कत्वाkat·vā पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

Atha kho meṇḍako gahapati bhagavato adhivāsanaṁ viditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pakkāmi.

Knowing that the Buddha had consented, Meṇḍaka got up from his seat, bowed down, circumambulated the Buddha with his right side toward him, and left.
1369

अथa·tha खोkho मेण्डकोmeṇ·ḍa·ko गहपतिga·ha·pa·ti तस्साtas·sā रत्तियाrat·ti·yā अच्चयेनac·ca·ye·na पणीतंpa·ṇī·taṃ खादनीयंkhā·da·nī·yaṃ भोजनीयंbho·ja·nī·yaṃ पटियादापेत्वाpa·ṭi·yā·dā·pet·vā भगवतोbha·ga·va·to कालंkā·laṃ आरोचापेसि—“कालो,ā·ro·cā·pe·si भन्ते,bhan·te निट्ठितंniṭ·ṭhi·taṃ भत्तन्”ति।bhat·tan

Atha kho meṇḍako gahapati tassā rattiyā accayena paṇītaṁ khādanīyaṁ bhojanīyaṁ paṭiyādāpetvā bhagavato kālaṁ ārocāpesi—“kālo, bhante, niṭṭhitaṁ bhattan”ti.

The following morning Meṇḍaka had various kinds of fine foods prepared and then had the Buddha informed that the meal was ready.
1370

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā पुब्बण्हसमयंpub·baṇ·ha·sa·ma·yaṃ निवासेत्वाni·vā·set·vā पत्तचीवरमादायpat·ta·cī·va·ra·mā·dā·ya येनye·na मेण्डकस्सmeṇ·ḍa·kas·sa गहपतिस्सga·ha·pa·tis·sa निवेसनंni·ve·sa·naṃ तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā पञ्ञत्तेpañ·ñat·te आसनेā·sa·ne निसीदिni·sī·di सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ भिक्खुसङ्घेन।bhik·khu·saṅ·ghe·na

Atha kho bhagavā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya yena meṇḍakassa gahapatissa nivesanaṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghena.

The Buddha robed up, took his bowl and robe, and went to Meṇḍaka’s house where he sat down on the prepared seat together with the Sangha of monks.
1371

अथa·tha खोkho मेण्डकस्सmeṇ·ḍa·kas·sa गहपतिस्सga·ha·pa·tis·sa भरियाbha·ri·yā चca पुत्तोput·to चca सुणिसाsu·ṇi·sā चca दासोdā·so चca येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमिंसु,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·miṃ·su उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदिंसु।ni·sī·diṃ·su

Atha kho meṇḍakassa gahapatissa bhariyā ca putto ca suṇisā ca dāso ca yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu.

Then Meṇḍaka’s wife, son, daughter-in-law, and slave approached the Buddha, bowed, and sat down.
1372

तेसंte·saṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā अनुपुब्बिंa·nu·pub·biṃ कथंka·thaṃ कथेसि,ka·the·si सेय्यथिदं—sey·ya·thi·daṃ

Tesaṁ bhagavā anupubbiṁ kathaṁ kathesi, seyyathidaṁ—

The Buddha gave them a progressive talk,
1373

दानकथंdā·na·ka·thaṃ …पे…pe

dānakathaṁ …pe…

just as he had done to Meṇḍaka. They, too, experienced the stainless vision of the Truth,
1374

अपरप्पच्चयाa·pa·rap·pac·ca·yā सत्थुसासनेsat·thu·sā·sa·ne भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोचुं—e·ta·da·vo·cuṃ

aparappaccayā satthusāsane bhagavantaṁ etadavocuṁ—

and they expressed their appreciation in the same way
1375

“अभिक्कन्तं,a·bhik·kan·taṃ भन्तेbhan·te …पे…pe

“abhikkantaṁ, bhante …pe…

(Pāli only)
1376

एतेe·te मयं,ma·yaṃ भन्ते,bhan·te भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ सरणंsa·ra·ṇaṃ गच्छामgac·chā·ma धम्मञ्चdham·mañ·ca भिक्खुसङ्घञ्च।bhik·khu·saṅ·ghañ·ca

ete mayaṁ, bhante, bhagavantaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāma dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañca.

(Pāli only)
1377

उपासकेu·pā·sa·ke नोno भगवाbha·ga·vā धारेतुdhā·re·tu अज्जतग्गेaj·ja·tag·ge पाणुपेतेpā·ṇu·pe·te सरणंsa·ra·ṇaṃ गते”ति।ga·te

Upāsake no bhagavā dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupete saraṇaṁ gate”ti.

and became lay followers.
1378

अथa·tha खोkho मेण्डकोmeṇ·ḍa·ko गहपतिga·ha·pa·ti बुद्धप्पमुखंbud·dhap·pa·mu·khaṃ भिक्खुसङ्घंbhik·khu·saṅ·ghaṃ पणीतेनpa·ṇī·te·na खादनीयेनkhā·da·nī·ye·na भोजनीयेनbho·ja·nī·ye·na सहत्थाsa·hat·thā सन्तप्पेत्वाsan·tap·pet·vā सम्पवारेत्वाsam·pa·vā·ret·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ भुत्ताविंbhut·tā·viṃ ओनीतपत्तपाणिंo·nī·ta·pat·ta·pā·ṇiṃ एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नोni·sin·no खोkho मेण्डकोmeṇ·ḍa·ko गहपतिga·ha·pa·ti भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

Atha kho meṇḍako gahapati buddhappamukhaṁ bhikkhusaṅghaṁ paṇītena khādanīyena bhojanīyena sahatthā santappetvā sampavāretvā bhagavantaṁ bhuttāviṁ onītapattapāṇiṁ ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho meṇḍako gahapati bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

Meṇḍaka then personally served various kinds of fine foods to the Sangha of monks headed by the Buddha. When the Buddha had finished his meal, Meṇḍaka sat down to one side and said,
1379

“याव,yā·va भन्ते,bhan·te भगवाbha·ga·vā भद्दियेbhad·di·ye विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti तावtā·va अहंa·haṃ बुद्धप्पमुखस्सbud·dhap·pa·mu·khas·sa भिक्खुसङ्घस्सbhik·khu·saṅ·ghas·sa धुवभत्तेना”ति।dhu·va·bhat·te·nā

“yāva, bhante, bhagavā bhaddiye viharati tāva ahaṁ buddhappamukhassa bhikkhusaṅghassa dhuvabhattenā”ti.

“Sir, as long as you’re staying in Bhaddiya, I would like to offer a regular meal to the Sangha of monks headed by the Buddha.”
1380

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā मेण्डकंmeṇ·ḍa·kaṃ गहपतिंga·ha·pa·tiṃ धम्मियाdham·mi·yā कथायka·thā·ya सन्दस्सेत्वाsan·das·set·vā समादपेत्वाsa·mā·da·pet·vā समुत्तेजेत्वाsa·mut·te·jet·vā सम्पहंसेत्वाsam·pa·haṃ·set·vā उट्ठायासनाuṭ·ṭhā·yā·sa·nā पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

Atha kho bhagavā meṇḍakaṁ gahapatiṁ dhammiyā kathāya sandassetvā samādapetvā samuttejetvā sampahaṁsetvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmi.

The Buddha then instructed, inspired, and gladdened him with a teaching, after which he got up from his seat and left.
1381

22। पञ्चगोरसादिअनुजाननpañ·ca·go·ra·sā·di·a·nu·jā·na·na

22. Pañcagorasādianujānana

22. The allowance for the five products of a cow, etc.
1382

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā भद्दियेbhad·di·ye यथाभिरन्तंya·thā·bhi·ran·taṃ विहरित्वाvi·ha·rit·vā मेण्डकंmeṇ·ḍa·kaṃ गहपतिंga·ha·pa·tiṃ अनापुच्छाa·nā·puc·chā येनye·na अङ्गुत्तरापोaṅ·gut·ta·rā·po तेनte·na चारिकंcā·ri·kaṃ पक्कामिpak·kā·mi महताma·ha·tā भिक्खुसङ्घेनbhik·khu·saṅ·ghe·na सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ अड्ढतेलसेहिaḍ·ḍha·te·la·se·hi भिक्खुसतेहि।bhik·khu·sa·te·hi

Atha kho bhagavā bhaddiye yathābhirantaṁ viharitvā meṇḍakaṁ gahapatiṁ anāpucchā yena aṅguttarāpo tena cārikaṁ pakkāmi mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ aḍḍhatelasehi bhikkhusatehi.

When the Buddha had stayed at Bhaddiya for as long as he liked, he set out wandering toward Aṅguttarāpa with a large sangha of twelve-hundred and fifty monks. He had not informed Meṇḍaka.
1383

अस्सोसिas·so·si खोkho मेण्डकोmeṇ·ḍa·ko गहपति—ga·ha·pa·ti

Assosi kho meṇḍako gahapati—

When Meṇḍaka heard about it,
1384

“भगवाbha·ga·vā किरki·ra येनye·na अङ्गुत्तरापोaṅ·gut·ta·rā·po तेनte·na चारिकंcā·ri·kaṃ पक्कन्तोpak·kan·to महताma·ha·tā भिक्खुसङ्घेनbhik·khu·saṅ·ghe·na सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ अड्ढतेलसेहिaḍ·ḍha·te·la·se·hi भिक्खुसतेही”ति।bhik·khu·sa·te·hī

“bhagavā kira yena aṅguttarāpo tena cārikaṁ pakkanto mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ aḍḍhatelasehi bhikkhusatehī”ti.

(Pāli only)
1385

अथa·tha खोkho मेण्डकोmeṇ·ḍa·ko गहपतिga·ha·pa·ti दासेdā·se चca कम्मकरेkam·ma·ka·re चca आणापेसि—ā·ṇā·pe·si

Atha kho meṇḍako gahapati dāse ca kammakare ca āṇāpesi—

he told his slaves and workers,
1386

“तेनte·na हि,hi भणे,bha·ṇe बहुंba·huṃ लोणम्पि,lo·ṇam·pi तेलम्पि,te·lam·pi तण्डुलम्पि,taṇ·ḍu·lam·pi खादनीयम्पिkhā·da·nī·yam·pi सकटेसुsa·ka·ṭe·su आरोपेत्वाā·ro·pet·vā आगच्छथ,ā·gac·cha·tha अड्ढतेलसानिaḍ·ḍha·te·la·sā·ni चca गोपालकसतानिgo·pā·la·ka·sa·tā·ni अड्ढतेलसानिaḍ·ḍha·te·la·sā·ni चca धेनुसतानिdhe·nu·sa·tā·ni आदायā·dā·ya आगच्छन्तु,ā·gac·chan·tu यत्थyat·tha भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ पस्सिस्सामpas·sis·sā·ma तत्थtat·tha तरुणेनta·ru·ṇe·na खीरेनkhī·re·na भोजेस्सामा”ति।bho·jes·sā·mā

“tena hi, bhaṇe, bahuṁ loṇampi, telampi, taṇḍulampi, khādanīyampi sakaṭesu āropetvā āgacchatha, aḍḍhatelasāni ca gopālakasatāni aḍḍhatelasāni ca dhenusatāni ādāya āgacchantu, yattha bhagavantaṁ passissāma tattha taruṇena khīrena bhojessāmā”ti.

“Load lots of salt, oil, rice, and fresh food onto the carts, and bring along twelve-hundred and fifty cowherds and twelve-hundred and fifty dairy cows. We’ll give the Buddha fresh milk wherever we see him.”
1387

अथa·tha खोkho मेण्डकोmeṇ·ḍa·ko गहपतिga·ha·pa·ti भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अन्तरामग्गेan·ta·rā·mag·ge कन्तारेkan·tā·re सम्भावेसि।sam·bhā·ve·si

Atha kho meṇḍako gahapati bhagavantaṁ antarāmagge kantāre sambhāvesi.

Meṇḍaka caught up with the Buddha while he was crossing a wilderness area.
1388

अथa·tha खोkho मेण्डकोmeṇ·ḍa·ko गहपतिga·ha·pa·ti येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ अट्ठासि।aṭ·ṭhā·si

Atha kho meṇḍako gahapati yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi.

Meṇḍaka approached the Buddha, bowed down,
1389

एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ ठितोṭhi·to खोkho मेण्डकोmeṇ·ḍa·ko गहपतिga·ha·pa·ti भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

Ekamantaṁ ṭhito kho meṇḍako gahapati bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

and said,
1390

“अधिवासेतुa·dhi·vā·se·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te भगवाbha·ga·vā स्वातनायsvā·ta·nā·ya भत्तंbhat·taṃ सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ भिक्खुसङ्घेना”ति।bhik·khu·saṅ·ghe·nā

“adhivāsetu me, bhante, bhagavā svātanāya bhattaṁ saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghenā”ti.

“Sir, please accept tomorrow’s meal from me together with the Sangha of monks.”
1391

अधिवासेसिa·dhi·vā·se·si भगवाbha·ga·vā तुण्हीभावेन।tuṇ·hī·bhā·ve·na

Adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvena.

The Buddha consented by remaining silent.
1392

अथa·tha खोkho मेण्डकोmeṇ·ḍa·ko गहपतिga·ha·pa·ti भगवतोbha·ga·va·to अधिवासनंa·dhi·vā·sa·naṃ विदित्वाvi·dit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā पदक्खिणंpa·dak·khi·ṇaṃ कत्वाkat·vā पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

Atha kho meṇḍako gahapati bhagavato adhivāsanaṁ viditvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pakkāmi.

Knowing that the Buddha had consented, Meṇḍaka bowed down, circumambulated the Buddha with his right side toward him, and left.
1393

अथa·tha खोkho मेण्डकोmeṇ·ḍa·ko गहपतिga·ha·pa·ti तस्साtas·sā रत्तियाrat·ti·yā अच्चयेनac·ca·ye·na पणीतंpa·ṇī·taṃ खादनीयंkhā·da·nī·yaṃ भोजनीयंbho·ja·nī·yaṃ पटियादापेत्वाpa·ṭi·yā·dā·pet·vā भगवतोbha·ga·va·to कालंkā·laṃ आरोचापेसि—“कालो,ā·ro·cā·pe·si भन्ते,bhan·te निट्ठितंniṭ·ṭhi·taṃ भत्तन्”ति।bhat·tan

Atha kho meṇḍako gahapati tassā rattiyā accayena paṇītaṁ khādanīyaṁ bhojanīyaṁ paṭiyādāpetvā bhagavato kālaṁ ārocāpesi—“kālo, bhante, niṭṭhitaṁ bhattan”ti.

The following morning Meṇḍaka had various kinds of fine foods prepared and then had the Buddha informed that the meal was ready.
1394

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā पुब्बण्हसमयंpub·baṇ·ha·sa·ma·yaṃ निवासेत्वाni·vā·set·vā पत्तचीवरमादायpat·ta·cī·va·ra·mā·dā·ya येनye·na मेण्डकस्सmeṇ·ḍa·kas·sa गहपतिस्सga·ha·pa·tis·sa परिवेसनाpa·ri·ve·sa·nā तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā पञ्ञत्तेpañ·ñat·te आसनेā·sa·ne निसीदिni·sī·di सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ भिक्खुसङ्घेन।bhik·khu·saṅ·ghe·na

Atha kho bhagavā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya yena meṇḍakassa gahapatissa parivesanā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghena.

The Buddha robed up, took his bowl and robe, and went to Meṇḍaka’s meal offering where he sat down on the prepared seat together with the Sangha of monks.
1395

अथa·tha खोkho मेण्डकोmeṇ·ḍa·ko गहपतिga·ha·pa·ti अड्ढतेलसानिaḍ·ḍha·te·la·sā·ni गोपालकसतानिgo·pā·la·ka·sa·tā·ni आणापेसि—ā·ṇā·pe·si

Atha kho meṇḍako gahapati aḍḍhatelasāni gopālakasatāni āṇāpesi—

Meṇḍaka told the twelve-hundred and fifty cowherds,
1396

“तेनte·na हि,hi भणे,bha·ṇe एकमेकंe·ka·me·kaṃ धेनुंdhe·nuṃ गहेत्वाga·het·vā एकमेकस्सe·ka·me·kas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no उपतिट्ठथu·pa·tiṭ·ṭha·tha तरुणेनta·ru·ṇe·na खीरेनkhī·re·na भोजेस्सामा”ति।bho·jes·sā·mā

“tena hi, bhaṇe, ekamekaṁ dhenuṁ gahetvā ekamekassa bhikkhuno upatiṭṭhatha taruṇena khīrena bhojessāmā”ti.

“Listen, bring one cow for each and every monk and give them fresh milk.”
1397

अथa·tha खोkho मेण्डकोmeṇ·ḍa·ko गहपतिga·ha·pa·ti बुद्धप्पमुखंbud·dhap·pa·mu·khaṃ भिक्खुसङ्घंbhik·khu·saṅ·ghaṃ पणीतेनpa·ṇī·te·na खादनीयेनkhā·da·nī·ye·na भोजनीयेनbho·ja·nī·ye·na सहत्थाsa·hat·thā सन्तप्पेसिsan·tap·pe·si सम्पवारेसि,sam·pa·vā·re·si तरुणेनta·ru·ṇe·na चca खीरेन।khī·re·na

Atha kho meṇḍako gahapati buddhappamukhaṁ bhikkhusaṅghaṁ paṇītena khādanīyena bhojanīyena sahatthā santappesi sampavāresi, taruṇena ca khīrena.

Meṇḍaka then personally served various kinds of fine foods to the Sangha of monks headed by the Buddha, and he gave them fresh milk.
1398

भिक्खूbhik·khū कुक्कुच्चायन्ताkuk·kuc·cā·yan·tā खीरंkhī·raṃ नna पटिग्गण्हन्ति।pa·ṭig·gaṇ·han·ti

Bhikkhū kukkuccāyantā khīraṁ na paṭiggaṇhanti.

Being afraid of wrongdoing, the monks did not accept.
1399

“पटिग्गण्हथ,pa·ṭig·gaṇ·ha·tha भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve परिभुञ्जथा”ति।pa·ri·bhuñ·ja·thā

“Paṭiggaṇhatha, bhikkhave, paribhuñjathā”ti.

The Buddha said, “Accept, monks, and drink.”
1400

अथa·tha खोkho मेण्डकोmeṇ·ḍa·ko गहपतिga·ha·pa·ti बुद्धप्पमुखंbud·dhap·pa·mu·khaṃ भिक्खुसङ्घंbhik·khu·saṅ·ghaṃ पणीतेनpa·ṇī·te·na खादनीयेनkhā·da·nī·ye·na भोजनीयेनbho·ja·nī·ye·na सहत्थाsa·hat·thā सन्तप्पेत्वाsan·tap·pet·vā सम्पवारेत्वाsam·pa·vā·ret·vā तरुणेनta·ru·ṇe·na चca खीरेनkhī·re·na भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ भुत्ताविंbhut·tā·viṃ ओनीतपत्तपाणिंo·nī·ta·pat·ta·pā·ṇiṃ एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di

Atha kho meṇḍako gahapati buddhappamukhaṁ bhikkhusaṅghaṁ paṇītena khādanīyena bhojanīyena sahatthā santappetvā sampavāretvā taruṇena ca khīrena bhagavantaṁ bhuttāviṁ onītapattapāṇiṁ ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

When the Buddha had finished his meal, Meṇḍaka sat down to one side,
1401

एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नोni·sin·no खोkho मेण्डकोmeṇ·ḍa·ko गहपतिga·ha·pa·ti भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho meṇḍako gahapati bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

and said,
1402

“सन्ति,san·ti भन्ते,bhan·te मग्गाmag·gā कन्तारा,kan·tā·rā अप्पोदकाap·po·da·kā अप्पभक्खा,ap·pa·bhak·khā नna सुकराsu·ka·rā अपाथेय्येनa·pā·they·ye·na गन्तुं।gan·tuṃ

“santi, bhante, maggā kantārā, appodakā appabhakkhā, na sukarā apātheyyena gantuṁ.

“Sir, there are wilderness roads where there is little water and little food, where it’s not easy to travel without provisions.
1403

साधु,sā·dhu भन्ते,bhan·te भगवाbha·ga·vā भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ पाथेय्यंpā·they·yaṃ अनुजानातू”ति।a·nu·jā·nā·tū

Sādhu, bhante, bhagavā bhikkhūnaṁ pātheyyaṁ anujānātū”ti.

Please allow provisions.”
1404

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā मेण्डकंmeṇ·ḍa·kaṃ गहपतिंga·ha·pa·tiṃ धम्मियाdham·mi·yā कथायka·thā·ya सन्दस्सेत्वाsan·das·set·vā समादपेत्वाsa·mā·da·pet·vā समुत्तेजेत्वाsa·mut·te·jet·vā सम्पहंसेत्वाsam·pa·haṃ·set·vā उट्ठायासनाuṭ·ṭhā·yā·sa·nā पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

Atha kho bhagavā meṇḍakaṁ gahapatiṁ dhammiyā kathāya sandassetvā samādapetvā samuttejetvā sampahaṁsetvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmi.

The Buddha then instructed, inspired, and gladdened Meṇḍaka with a teaching, after which he got up from his seat and left.
1405

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ निदानेni·dā·ne एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ पकरणेpa·ka·ra·ṇe धम्मिंdham·miṃ कथंka·thaṃ कत्वाkat·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

Atha kho bhagavā etasmiṁ nidāne etasmiṁ pakaraṇe dhammiṁ kathaṁ katvā bhikkhū āmantesi—

Soon afterwards the Buddha gave a teaching and addressed the monks:
1406

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve पञ्चpañ·ca गोरसे—go·ra·se

“anujānāmi, bhikkhave, pañca gorase—

“I allow five products from cows:
1407

खीरं,khī·raṃ दधिं,da·dhiṃ तक्कं,tak·kaṃ नवनीतं,na·va·nī·taṃ सप्पिं।sap·piṃ

khīraṁ, dadhiṁ, takkaṁ, navanītaṁ, sappiṁ.

milk, curd, buttermilk, butter, and ghee.
1408

सन्ति,san·ti भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve मग्गाmag·gā कन्ताराkan·tā·rā अप्पोदकाap·po·da·kā अप्पभक्खा,ap·pa·bhak·khā नna सुकराsu·ka·rā अपाथेय्येनa·pā·they·ye·na गन्तुं।gan·tuṃ

Santi, bhikkhave, maggā kantārā appodakā appabhakkhā, na sukarā apātheyyena gantuṁ.

There are wilderness roads where there’s little water and little food, where it’s not easy to travel without provisions.
1409

अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve पाथेय्यंpā·they·yaṃ परियेसितुंpa·ri·ye·si·tuṃ तण्डुलोtaṇ·ḍu·lo तण्डुलत्थिकेन,taṇ·ḍu·lat·thi·ke·na मुग्गोmug·go मुग्गत्थिकेन,mug·gat·thi·ke·na मासोmā·so मासत्थिकेन,mā·sat·thi·ke·na लोणंlo·ṇaṃ लोणत्थिकेन,lo·ṇat·thi·ke·na गुळोgu·ḷo गुळत्थिकेन,gu·ḷat·thi·ke·na तेलंte·laṃ तेलत्थिकेन,te·lat·thi·ke·na सप्पिsap·pi सप्पित्थिकेन।sap·pit·thi·ke·na

Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, pātheyyaṁ pariyesituṁ taṇḍulo taṇḍulatthikena, muggo muggatthikena, māso māsatthikena, loṇaṁ loṇatthikena, guḷo guḷatthikena, telaṁ telatthikena, sappi sappitthikena.

I allow you to look for provisions: whatever you need of rice, mung beans, black gram, salt, sugar, oil, and ghee.
1410

सन्ति,san·ti भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve मनुस्सा,ma·nus·sā सद्धाsad·dhā पसन्ना,pa·san·nā तेte कप्पियकारकानंkap·pi·ya·kā·ra·kā·naṃ हत्थेhat·the हिरञ्ञंhi·rañ·ñaṃ उपनिक्खिपन्ति—u·pa·nik·khi·pan·ti

Santi, bhikkhave, manussā, saddhā pasannā, te kappiyakārakānaṁ hatthe hiraññaṁ upanikkhipanti—

There are people who have faith and confidence. They may deposit money with an attendant, saying,
1411

‘इमिनाi·mi·nā अय्यस्सay·yas·sa यंyaṃ कप्पियंkap·pi·yaṃ तंtaṃ देथा’ति।de·thā

‘iminā ayyassa yaṁ kappiyaṁ taṁ dethā’ti.

“With this, please get something allowable for the venerable.”
1412

अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve यंyaṃ ततोta·to कप्पियंkap·pi·yaṃ तंtaṃ सादितुं;sā·di·tuṃ

Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, yaṁ tato kappiyaṁ taṁ sādituṁ;

I allow you to consent to anything allowable from that fund.
1413

नna त्वेवाहं,tve·vā·haṃ भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve केनचिke·na·ci परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na जातरूपरजतंjā·ta·rū·pa·ra·ja·taṃ सादितब्बंsā·di·tab·baṃ परियेसितब्बन्तिpa·ri·ye·si·tab·ban·ti वदामी”ति।va·dā·mī

na tvevāhaṁ, bhikkhave, kenaci pariyāyena jātarūparajataṁ sāditabbaṁ pariyesitabbanti vadāmī”ti.

But I say that under no circumstances should you look for or consent to gold, silver, or money.”
1414

23। केणियजटिलवत्थुke·ṇi·ya·ja·ṭi·la·vat·thu

23. Keṇiyajaṭilavatthu

23. The account of Keṇiya the dreadlocked ascetic
1415

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā अनुपुब्बेनa·nu·pub·be·na चारिकंcā·ri·kaṃ चरमानोca·ra·mā·no येनye·na आपणंā·pa·ṇaṃ तदवसरि।ta·da·va·sa·ri

Atha kho bhagavā anupubbena cārikaṁ caramāno yena āpaṇaṁ tadavasari.

Wandering on, the Buddha eventually arrived at Āpaṇa.
1416

अस्सोसिas·so·si खोkho केणियोke·ṇi·yo जटिलो—ja·ṭi·lo

Assosi kho keṇiyo jaṭilo—

Keṇiya the dreadlocked ascetic heard,
1417

“समणोsa·ma·ṇo खलुkha·lu भोbho गोतमोgo·ta·mo सक्यपुत्तोsak·ya·put·to सक्यकुलाsak·ya·ku·lā पब्बजितोpab·ba·ji·to आपणंā·pa·ṇaṃ अनुप्पत्तो,a·nup·pat·to तंtaṃ खोkho पनpa·na भवन्तंbha·van·taṃ गोतमंgo·ta·maṃ एवंe·vaṃ कल्याणोkal·yā·ṇo कित्तिसद्दोkit·ti·sad·do अब्भुग्गतोab·bhug·ga·to …पे…pe

“samaṇo khalu bho gotamo sakyaputto sakyakulā pabbajito āpaṇaṁ anuppatto, taṁ kho pana bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ evaṁ kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggato …pe…

“The ascetic Gotama, the Sakyan, who’s gone forth from the Sakyan clan, has arrived at Āpaṇa.” And he heard about the Buddha’s qualities just as Meṇḍaka had.
1418

साधुsā·dhu खोkho पनpa·na तथारूपानंta·thā·rū·pā·naṃ अरहतंa·ra·ha·taṃ दस्सनंdas·sa·naṃ होती”ति।ho·tī

sādhu kho pana tathārūpānaṁ arahataṁ dassanaṁ hotī”ti.

(Pāli only)
1419

अथa·tha खोkho केणियस्सke·ṇi·yas·sa जटिलस्सja·ṭi·las·sa एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

Atha kho keṇiyassa jaṭilassa etadahosi—

He thought,
1420

“किंkiṃ नुnu खोkho अहंa·haṃ समणस्सsa·ma·ṇas·sa गोतमस्सgo·ta·mas·sa हरापेय्यन्”ति।ha·rā·pey·yan

“kiṁ nu kho ahaṁ samaṇassa gotamassa harāpeyyan”ti.

“What should I take to the ascetic Gotama?”
1421

अथa·tha खोkho केणियस्सke·ṇi·yas·sa जटिलस्सja·ṭi·las·sa एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

Atha kho keṇiyassa jaṭilassa etadahosi—

And it occurred to him,
1422

“येपिye·pi खोkho तेte ब्राह्मणानंbrāh·ma·ṇā·naṃ पुब्बकाpub·ba·kā इसयोi·sa·yo मन्तानंman·tā·naṃ कत्तारोkat·tā·ro मन्तानंman·tā·naṃ पवत्तारो,pa·vat·tā·ro येसमिदंye·sa·mi·daṃ एतरहिe·ta·ra·hi ब्राह्मणाbrāh·ma·ṇā पोराणंpo·rā·ṇaṃ मन्तपदंman·ta·pa·daṃ गीतंgī·taṃ पवुत्तंpa·vut·taṃ समिहितं,sa·mi·hi·taṃ तदनुगायन्तिta·da·nu·gā·yan·ti तदनुभासन्ति,ta·da·nu·bhā·san·ti भासितमनुभासन्ति,bhā·si·ta·ma·nu·bhā·san·ti वाचितमनुवाचेन्ति,vā·ci·ta·ma·nu·vā·cen·ti सेय्यथिदं—sey·ya·thi·daṃ

“yepi kho te brāhmaṇānaṁ pubbakā isayo mantānaṁ kattāro mantānaṁ pavattāro, yesamidaṁ etarahi brāhmaṇā porāṇaṁ mantapadaṁ gītaṁ pavuttaṁ samihitaṁ, tadanugāyanti tadanubhāsanti, bhāsitamanubhāsanti, vācitamanuvācenti, seyyathidaṁ—

“There are those ancient sages of the brahmins, the creators and teachers of the Vedas,
1423

अट्ठकोaṭ·ṭha·ko वामकोvā·ma·ko वामदेवोvā·ma·de·vo वेस्सामित्तोves·sā·mit·to यमतग्गिya·ma·tag·gi अङ्गीरसोaṅ·gī·ra·so भारद्वाजोbhā·rad·vā·jo वासेट्ठोvā·seṭ·ṭho कस्सपोkas·sa·po भगु,bha·gu रत्तूपरताrat·tū·pa·ra·tā विरताvi·ra·tā विकालभोजना,vi·kā·la·bho·ja·nā तेte एवरूपानिe·va·rū·pā·ni पानानिpā·nā·ni सादियिंसु।sā·di·yiṃ·su

aṭṭhako vāmako vāmadevo vessāmitto yamataggi aṅgīraso bhāradvājo vāseṭṭho kassapo bhagu, rattūparatā viratā vikālabhojanā, te evarūpāni pānāni sādiyiṁsu.

that is, Aṭṭhaka, Vāmaka, Vāmadeva, Vessāmitta, Yamataggi, Aṅgīrasa, Bhāradvāja, Vāseṭṭha, Kassapa, and Bhagu. The brahmins at present still sing and proclaim the ancient verses that they sang, proclaimed, and collected. Now those ancient sages abstained from eating at night and at the wrong time, yet they consented to certain drinks.
1424

समणोपिsa·ma·ṇo·pi गोतमोgo·ta·mo रत्तूपरतोrat·tū·pa·ra·to विरतोvi·ra·to विकालभोजना,vi·kā·la·bho·ja·nā अरहतिa·ra·ha·ti समणोपिsa·ma·ṇo·pi गोतमोgo·ta·mo एवरूपानिe·va·rū·pā·ni पानानिpā·nā·ni सादियितुन्”तिsā·di·yi·tun

Samaṇopi gotamo rattūparato virato vikālabhojanā, arahati samaṇopi gotamo evarūpāni pānāni sādiyitun”ti

The ascetic Gotama also abstains from eating at night and at the wrong time. It would be appropriate for him to consent to the same drinks.”
1425

पहूतंpa·hū·taṃ पानंpā·naṃ पटियादापेत्वाpa·ṭi·yā·dā·pet·vā काजेहिkā·je·hi गाहापेत्वाgā·hā·pet·vā येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवताbha·ga·va·tā सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ सम्मोदि;sam·mo·di

pahūtaṁ pānaṁ paṭiyādāpetvā kājehi gāhāpetvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodi;

He then had a large quantity of drinks prepared. Lifting them with carrying poles, he went to the Buddha. He exchanged pleasantries with the Buddha
1426

सम्मोदनीयंsam·mo·da·nī·yaṃ कथंka·thaṃ सारणीयंsā·ra·ṇī·yaṃ वीतिसारेत्वाvī·ti·sā·ret·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ अट्ठासि।aṭ·ṭhā·si

sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi.

(Pāli only)
1427

एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ ठितोṭhi·to खोkho केणियोke·ṇi·yo जटिलोja·ṭi·lo भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

Ekamantaṁ ṭhito kho keṇiyo jaṭilo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

and said,
1428

“पटिग्गण्हातुpa·ṭig·gaṇ·hā·tu मेme भवंbha·vaṃ गोतमोgo·ta·mo पानन्”ति।pā·nan

“paṭiggaṇhātu me bhavaṁ gotamo pānan”ti.

“Good Gotama, please accept these drinks.”
1429

“तेनte·na हि,hi केणिय,ke·ṇi·ya भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ देही”ति।de·hī

“Tena hi, keṇiya, bhikkhūnaṁ dehī”ti.

“Please give them to the monks, Keṇiya.”
1430

अथa·tha खोkho केणियोke·ṇi·yo जटिलोja·ṭi·lo भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ देति।de·ti

Atha kho keṇiyo jaṭilo bhikkhūnaṁ deti.

He did,
1431

भिक्खूbhik·khū कुक्कुच्चायन्ताkuk·kuc·cā·yan·tā नna पटिग्गण्हन्ति।pa·ṭig·gaṇ·han·ti

Bhikkhū kukkuccāyantā na paṭiggaṇhanti.

but being afraid of wrongdoing, the monks did not accept them.
1432

“पटिग्गण्हथ,pa·ṭig·gaṇ·ha·tha भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve परिभुञ्जथा”ति।pa·ri·bhuñ·ja·thā

“Paṭiggaṇhatha, bhikkhave, paribhuñjathā”ti.

The Buddha said, “Accept, monks, and drink.”
1433

अथa·tha खोkho केणियोke·ṇi·yo जटिलोja·ṭi·lo बुद्धप्पमुखंbud·dhap·pa·mu·khaṃ भिक्खुसङ्घंbhik·khu·saṅ·ghaṃ पहूतेहिpa·hū·te·hi पानेहिpā·ne·hi सहत्थाsa·hat·thā सन्तप्पेत्वाsan·tap·pet·vā सम्पवारेत्वाsam·pa·vā·ret·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ धोतहत्थंdho·ta·hat·thaṃ ओनीतपत्तपाणिंo·nī·ta·pat·ta·pā·ṇiṃ एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di

Atha kho keṇiyo jaṭilo buddhappamukhaṁ bhikkhusaṅghaṁ pahūtehi pānehi sahatthā santappetvā sampavāretvā bhagavantaṁ dhotahatthaṁ onītapattapāṇiṁ ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

Keṇiya then personally served that large quantity of drinks to the Sangha of monks headed by the Buddha. When the Buddha was finished, Keṇiya sat down to one side.
1434

एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नंni·sin·naṃ खोkho केणियंke·ṇi·yaṃ जटिलंja·ṭi·laṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā धम्मियाdham·mi·yā कथायka·thā·ya सन्दस्सेसिsan·das·se·si समादपेसिsa·mā·da·pe·si समुत्तेजेसिsa·mut·te·je·si सम्पहंसेसि।sam·pa·haṃ·se·si

Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho keṇiyaṁ jaṭilaṁ bhagavā dhammiyā kathāya sandassesi samādapesi samuttejesi sampahaṁsesi.

The Buddha instructed, inspired, and gladdened him with a teaching,
1435

अथa·tha खोkho केणियोke·ṇi·yo जटिलोja·ṭi·lo भगवताbha·ga·va·tā धम्मियाdham·mi·yā कथायka·thā·ya सन्दस्सितोsan·das·si·to समादपितोsa·mā·da·pi·to समुत्तेजितोsa·mut·te·ji·to सम्पहंसितोsam·pa·haṃ·si·to भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

Atha kho keṇiyo jaṭilo bhagavatā dhammiyā kathāya sandassito samādapito samuttejito sampahaṁsito bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

and Keṇiya said,
1436

“अधिवासेतुa·dhi·vā·se·tu मेme भवंbha·vaṃ गोतमोgo·ta·mo स्वातनायsvā·ta·nā·ya भत्तंbhat·taṃ सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ भिक्खुसङ्घेना”ति।bhik·khu·saṅ·ghe·nā

“adhivāsetu me bhavaṁ gotamo svātanāya bhattaṁ saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghenā”ti.

“Good Gotama, please accept tomorrow’s meal from me together with the Sangha of monks.”
1437

“महाma·hā खो,kho केणिय,ke·ṇi·ya भिक्खुसङ्घोbhik·khu·saṅ·gho अड्ढतेलसानिaḍ·ḍha·te·la·sā·ni भिक्खुसतानि,bhik·khu·sa·tā·ni त्वञ्चtvañ·ca ब्राह्मणेसुbrāh·ma·ṇe·su अभिप्पसन्नो”ति।a·bhip·pa·san·no

“Mahā kho, keṇiya, bhikkhusaṅgho aḍḍhatelasāni bhikkhusatāni, tvañca brāhmaṇesu abhippasanno”ti.

“The Sangha is large, Keṇiya. There are twelve hundred and fifty monks. And you have faith in the brahmins.”
1438

दुतियम्पिdu·ti·yam·pi खोkho केणियोke·ṇi·yo जटिलोja·ṭi·lo भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

Dutiyampi kho keṇiyo jaṭilo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

Keṇiya acknowledged what the Buddha had said,
1439

“किञ्चापिkiñ·cā·pi खो,kho भोbho गोतम,go·ta·ma महाma·hā भिक्खुसङ्घोbhik·khu·saṅ·gho अड्ढतेलसानिaḍ·ḍha·te·la·sā·ni भिक्खुसतानि,bhik·khu·sa·tā·ni अहञ्चa·hañ·ca ब्राह्मणेसुbrāh·ma·ṇe·su अभिप्पसन्नो,a·bhip·pa·san·no अधिवासेतुa·dhi·vā·se·tu मेme भवंbha·vaṃ गोतमोgo·ta·mo स्वातनायsvā·ta·nā·ya भत्तंbhat·taṃ सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ भिक्खुसङ्घेना”ति।bhik·khu·saṅ·ghe·nā

“kiñcāpi kho, bho gotama, mahā bhikkhusaṅgho aḍḍhatelasāni bhikkhusatāni, ahañca brāhmaṇesu abhippasanno, adhivāsetu me bhavaṁ gotamo svātanāya bhattaṁ saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghenā”ti.

but repeated his invitation a second time.
1440

“महाma·hā खो,kho केणिय,ke·ṇi·ya भिक्खुसङ्घोbhik·khu·saṅ·gho अड्ढतेलसानिaḍ·ḍha·te·la·sā·ni भिक्खुसतानि,bhik·khu·sa·tā·ni त्वञ्चtvañ·ca ब्राह्मणेसुbrāh·ma·ṇe·su अभिप्पसन्नो”ति।a·bhip·pa·san·no

“Mahā kho, keṇiya, bhikkhusaṅgho aḍḍhatelasāni bhikkhusatāni, tvañca brāhmaṇesu abhippasanno”ti.

The Buddha replied as before,
1441

ततियम्पिta·ti·yam·pi खोkho केणियोke·ṇi·yo जटिलोja·ṭi·lo भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

Tatiyampi kho keṇiyo jaṭilo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

and Keṇiya repeated his invitation a third time.
1442

“किञ्चापिkiñ·cā·pi खो,kho भोbho गोतम,go·ta·ma महाma·hā भिक्खुसङ्घोbhik·khu·saṅ·gho अड्ढतेलसानिaḍ·ḍha·te·la·sā·ni भिक्खुसतानि,bhik·khu·sa·tā·ni अहञ्चa·hañ·ca ब्राह्मणेसुbrāh·ma·ṇe·su अभिप्पसन्नो,a·bhip·pa·san·no अधिवासेतुa·dhi·vā·se·tu भवंbha·vaṃ गोतमोgo·ta·mo स्वातनायsvā·ta·nā·ya भत्तंbhat·taṃ सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ भिक्खुसङ्घेना”ति।bhik·khu·saṅ·ghe·nā

“kiñcāpi kho, bho gotama, mahā bhikkhusaṅgho aḍḍhatelasāni bhikkhusatāni, ahañca brāhmaṇesu abhippasanno, adhivāsetu bhavaṁ gotamo svātanāya bhattaṁ saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghenā”ti.

(Pāli only)
1443

अधिवासेसिa·dhi·vā·se·si भगवाbha·ga·vā तुण्हीभावेन।tuṇ·hī·bhā·ve·na

Adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvena.

The Buddha then consented by remaining silent.
1444

अथa·tha खोkho केणियोke·ṇi·yo जटिलोja·ṭi·lo भगवतोbha·ga·va·to अधिवासनंa·dhi·vā·sa·naṃ विदित्वाvi·dit·vā उट्ठायासनाuṭ·ṭhā·yā·sa·nā पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

Atha kho keṇiyo jaṭilo bhagavato adhivāsanaṁ viditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmi.

Knowing that the Buddha had consented, Keṇiya got up from his seat and left.
1445

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ निदानेni·dā·ne एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ पकरणेpa·ka·ra·ṇe धम्मिंdham·miṃ कथंka·thaṃ कत्वाkat·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

Atha kho bhagavā etasmiṁ nidāne etasmiṁ pakaraṇe dhammiṁ kathaṁ katvā bhikkhū āmantesi—

Soon afterwards the Buddha gave a teaching and addressed the monks:
1446

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अट्ठaṭ·ṭha पानानि—pā·nā·ni

“anujānāmi, bhikkhave, aṭṭha pānāni—

“I allow eight kinds of drinks:
1447

अम्बपानंam·ba·pā·naṃ जम्बुपानंjam·bu·pā·naṃ चोचपानंco·ca·pā·naṃ मोचपानंmo·ca·pā·naṃ मधूकपानंma·dhū·ka·pā·naṃ मुद्दिकपानंmud·di·ka·pā·naṃ सालूकपानंsā·lū·ka·pā·naṃ फारुसकपानं।phā·ru·sa·ka·pā·naṃ

ambapānaṁ jambupānaṁ cocapānaṁ mocapānaṁ madhūkapānaṁ muddikapānaṁ sālūkapānaṁ phārusakapānaṁ.

mango drinks, rose-apple drinks, drinks from bananas with seeds, drinks from seedless bananas, licorice drinks, grape drinks, drinks made from lotus tubers, and falsa fruit drinks.
1448

अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सब्बंsab·baṃ फलरसंpha·la·ra·saṃ ठपेत्वाṭha·pet·vā धञ्ञफलरसं।dhañ·ña·pha·la·ra·saṃ

Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, sabbaṁ phalarasaṁ ṭhapetvā dhaññaphalarasaṁ.

I allow juice from all fruits, except grain.
1449

अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सब्बंsab·baṃ पत्तरसंpat·ta·ra·saṃ ठपेत्वाṭha·pet·vā डाकरसं।ḍā·ka·ra·saṃ

Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, sabbaṁ pattarasaṁ ṭhapetvā ḍākarasaṁ.

I allow juice from all leaves, except the leaves of potherbs.
1450

अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सब्बंsab·baṃ पुप्फरसंpup·pha·ra·saṃ ठपेत्वाṭha·pet·vā मधूकपुप्फरसं।ma·dhū·ka·pup·pha·ra·saṃ

Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, sabbaṁ puppharasaṁ ṭhapetvā madhūkapuppharasaṁ.

I allow juice from all flowers, except licorice flowers.
1451

अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve उच्छुरसन्”ति।uc·chu·ra·san

Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, ucchurasan”ti.

I allow sugarcane juice.”
1452

अथa·tha खोkho केणियोke·ṇi·yo जटिलोja·ṭi·lo तस्साtas·sā रत्तियाrat·ti·yā अच्चयेनac·ca·ye·na सकेsa·ke अस्समेas·sa·me पणीतंpa·ṇī·taṃ खादनीयंkhā·da·nī·yaṃ भोजनीयंbho·ja·nī·yaṃ पटियादापेत्वाpa·ṭi·yā·dā·pet·vā भगवतोbha·ga·va·to कालंkā·laṃ आरोचापेसि—“कालो,ā·ro·cā·pe·si भोbho गोतम,go·ta·ma निट्ठितंniṭ·ṭhi·taṃ भत्तन्”ति।bhat·tan

Atha kho keṇiyo jaṭilo tassā rattiyā accayena sake assame paṇītaṁ khādanīyaṁ bhojanīyaṁ paṭiyādāpetvā bhagavato kālaṁ ārocāpesi—“kālo, bho gotama, niṭṭhitaṁ bhattan”ti.

The following morning Keṇiya had various kinds of fine foods prepared in his own hermitage and then had the Buddha informed that the meal was ready.
1453

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā पुब्बण्हसमयंpub·baṇ·ha·sa·ma·yaṃ निवासेत्वाni·vā·set·vā पत्तचीवरमादायpat·ta·cī·va·ra·mā·dā·ya येनye·na केणियस्सke·ṇi·yas·sa जटिलस्सja·ṭi·las·sa अस्समोas·sa·mo तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā पञ्ञत्तेpañ·ñat·te आसनेā·sa·ne निसीदिni·sī·di सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ भिक्खुसङ्घेन।bhik·khu·saṅ·ghe·na

Atha kho bhagavā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya yena keṇiyassa jaṭilassa assamo tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghena.

The Buddha robed up, took his bowl and robe, and went to Keṇiya’s hermitage where he sat down on the prepared seat together with the Sangha of monks.
1454

अथa·tha खोkho केणियोke·ṇi·yo जटिलोja·ṭi·lo बुद्धप्पमुखंbud·dhap·pa·mu·khaṃ भिक्खुसङ्घंbhik·khu·saṅ·ghaṃ पणीतेनpa·ṇī·te·na खादनीयेनkhā·da·nī·ye·na भोजनीयेनbho·ja·nī·ye·na सहत्थाsa·hat·thā सन्तप्पेत्वाsan·tap·pet·vā सम्पवारेत्वाsam·pa·vā·ret·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ भुत्ताविंbhut·tā·viṃ ओनीतपत्तपाणिंo·nī·ta·pat·ta·pā·ṇiṃ एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di

Atha kho keṇiyo jaṭilo buddhappamukhaṁ bhikkhusaṅghaṁ paṇītena khādanīyena bhojanīyena sahatthā santappetvā sampavāretvā bhagavantaṁ bhuttāviṁ onītapattapāṇiṁ ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

Keṇiya then personally served various kinds of fine foods to the Sangha of monks headed by the Buddha. When the Buddha had finished his meal, Keṇiya sat down to one side,
1455

एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नंni·sin·naṃ खोkho केणियंke·ṇi·yaṃ जटिलंja·ṭi·laṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā इमाहिi·mā·hi गाथाहिgā·thā·hi अनुमोदि—a·nu·mo·di

Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho keṇiyaṁ jaṭilaṁ bhagavā imāhi gāthāhi anumodi—

and the Buddha expressed his appreciation with these verses:
1456

“अग्गिहुत्तमुखाag·gi·hut·ta·mu·khā यञ्ञा,yañ·ñā

“Aggihuttamukhā yaññā,

“Sacrifice is the best fire worship,
1457

सावित्तीsā·vit·tī छन्दसोchan·da·so मुखं;mu·khaṃ

sāvittī chandaso mukhaṁ;

Sāvittī the best meter;
1458

राजाrā·jā मुखंmu·khaṃ मनुस्सानं,ma·nus·sā·naṃ

Rājā mukhaṁ manussānaṁ,

A king is the best of humans,
1459

नदीनंna·dī·naṃ सागरोsā·ga·ro मुखं।mu·khaṃ

nadīnaṁ sāgaro mukhaṁ.

The ocean the chief of rivers.
1460

नक्खत्तानंnak·khat·tā·naṃ मुखंmu·khaṃ चन्दो,can·do

Nakkhattānaṁ mukhaṁ cando,

The moon is the best in the night sky,
1461

आदिच्चोā·dic·co तपतंta·pa·taṃ मुखं;mu·khaṃ

ādicco tapataṁ mukhaṁ;

The sun the best of all that shines.
1462

पुञ्ञंpuñ·ñaṃ आकङ्खमानानं,ā·kaṅ·kha·mā·nā·naṃ

Puññaṁ ākaṅkhamānānaṁ,

But for those making offerings, desiring merit,
1463

सङ्घोsaṅ·gho वेve यजतंya·ja·taṃ मुखन्”ति।mu·khan

saṅgho ve yajataṁ mukhan”ti.

The Sangha is indeed the best.”
1464

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā केणियंke·ṇi·yaṃ जटिलंja·ṭi·laṃ इमाहिi·mā·hi गाथाहिgā·thā·hi अनुमोदित्वाa·nu·mo·dit·vā उट्ठायासनाuṭ·ṭhā·yā·sa·nā पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

Atha kho bhagavā keṇiyaṁ jaṭilaṁ imāhi gāthāhi anumoditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmi.

And the Buddha got up from his seat and left.
1465

24। रोजमल्लवत्थुro·ja·mal·la·vat·thu

24. Rojamallavatthu

24. The account of Roja the Mallian
1466

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā आपणेā·pa·ṇe यथाभिरन्तंya·thā·bhi·ran·taṃ विहरित्वाvi·ha·rit·vā येनye·na कुसिनाराku·si·nā·rā तेनte·na चारिकंcā·ri·kaṃ पक्कामिpak·kā·mi महताma·ha·tā भिक्खुसङ्घेनbhik·khu·saṅ·ghe·na सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ अड्ढतेलसेहिaḍ·ḍha·te·la·se·hi भिक्खुसतेहि।bhik·khu·sa·te·hi

Atha kho bhagavā āpaṇe yathābhirantaṁ viharitvā yena kusinārā tena cārikaṁ pakkāmi mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ aḍḍhatelasehi bhikkhusatehi.

When the Buddha had stayed at Āpaṇa for as long as he liked, he set out wandering toward Kusinārā with a large sangha of twelve-hundred and fifty monks.
1467

अस्सोसुंas·so·suṃ खोkho कोसिनारकाko·si·nā·ra·kā मल्ला—“भगवाmal·lā किरki·ra कुसिनारंku·si·nā·raṃ आगच्छतिā·gac·cha·ti महताma·ha·tā भिक्खुसङ्घेनbhik·khu·saṅ·ghe·na सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ अड्ढतेलसेहिaḍ·ḍha·te·la·se·hi भिक्खुसतेही”ति।bhik·khu·sa·te·hī

Assosuṁ kho kosinārakā mallā—“bhagavā kira kusināraṁ āgacchati mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ aḍḍhatelasehi bhikkhusatehī”ti.

When the Mallians of Kusinārā heard that the Buddha was coming,
1468

तेte सङ्गरंsaṅ·ga·raṃ अकंसु—“योa·kaṃ·su भगवतोbha·ga·va·to पच्चुग्गमनंpac·cug·ga·ma·naṃ नna करिस्सति,ka·ris·sa·ti पञ्चसतानिस्सpañ·ca·sa·tā·nis·sa दण्डो”ति।daṇ·ḍo

Te saṅgaraṁ akaṁsu—“yo bhagavato paccuggamanaṁ na karissati, pañcasatānissa daṇḍo”ti.

they made an agreement that whoever did not go out to meet the Buddha would be fined five hundred coins.
1469

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na रोजोro·jo मल्लोmal·lo आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to आनन्दस्सā·nan·das·sa सहायोsa·hā·yo होति।ho·ti

Tena kho pana samayena rojo mallo āyasmato ānandassa sahāyo hoti.

At that time Venerable Ānanda had a friend called Roja the Mallian.
1470

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā अनुपुब्बेनa·nu·pub·be·na चारिकंcā·ri·kaṃ चरमानोca·ra·mā·no येनye·na कुसिनाराku·si·nā·rā तदवसरि।ta·da·va·sa·ri

Atha kho bhagavā anupubbena cārikaṁ caramāno yena kusinārā tadavasari.

As the Buddha was approaching Kusinārā,
1471

अथa·tha खोkho कोसिनारकाko·si·nā·ra·kā मल्लाmal·lā भगवतोbha·ga·va·to पच्चुग्गमनंpac·cug·ga·ma·naṃ अकंसु।a·kaṃ·su

Atha kho kosinārakā mallā bhagavato paccuggamanaṁ akaṁsu.

the Mallians, including Roja, went out to meet him.
1472

अथa·tha खोkho रोजोro·jo मल्लोmal·lo भगवतोbha·ga·va·to पच्चुग्गमनंpac·cug·ga·ma·naṃ करित्वाka·rit·vā येनायस्माye·nā·yas·mā आनन्दोā·nan·do तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ आनन्दंā·nan·daṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ अट्ठासि।aṭ·ṭhā·si

Atha kho rojo mallo bhagavato paccuggamanaṁ karitvā yenāyasmā ānando tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi.

Roja then went to Ānanda and bowed,
1473

एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ ठितंṭhi·taṃ खोkho रोजंro·jaṃ मल्लंmal·laṃ आयस्माā·yas·mā आनन्दोā·nan·do एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

Ekamantaṁ ṭhitaṁ kho rojaṁ mallaṁ āyasmā ānando etadavoca—

and Ānanda said to him,
1474

“उळारंu·ḷā·raṃ खोkho तेte इदं,i·daṃ आवुसोā·vu·so रोज,ro·ja यंyaṃ त्वंtvaṃ भगवतोbha·ga·va·to पच्चुग्गमनंpac·cug·ga·ma·naṃ अकासी”ति।a·kā·sī

“uḷāraṁ kho te idaṁ, āvuso roja, yaṁ tvaṁ bhagavato paccuggamanaṁ akāsī”ti.

“It’s noble of you to come out to meet the Buddha.”
1475

“नाहं,nā·haṃ भन्तेbhan·te आनन्द,ā·nan·da बहुकतोba·hu·ka·to बुद्धेbud·dhe वाvā धम्मेdham·me वाvā सङ्घेsaṅ·ghe वा;vā

“Nāhaṁ, bhante ānanda, bahukato buddhe vā dhamme vā saṅghe vā;

“I’m not doing this out of respect for the Buddha, the Teaching, or the Sangha.
1476

अपिa·pi चca ञातीहिñā·tī·hi सङ्गरोsaṅ·ga·ro कतो—‘योka·to भगवतोbha·ga·va·to पच्चुग्गमनंpac·cug·ga·ma·naṃ नna करिस्सति,ka·ris·sa·ti पञ्चसतानिस्सpañ·ca·sa·tā·nis·sa दण्डो’ति;daṇ·ḍo

api ca ñātīhi saṅgaro kato—‘yo bhagavato paccuggamanaṁ na karissati, pañcasatānissa daṇḍo’ti;

I’m doing it
1477

सोso खोkho अहं,a·haṃ भन्तेbhan·te आनन्द,ā·nan·da ञातीनंñā·tī·naṃ दण्डभयाdaṇ·ḍa·bha·yā एवाहंe·vā·haṃ भगवतोbha·ga·va·to पच्चुग्गमनंpac·cug·ga·ma·naṃ अकासिन्”ति।a·kā·sin

so kho ahaṁ, bhante ānanda, ñātīnaṁ daṇḍabhayā evāhaṁ bhagavato paccuggamanaṁ akāsin”ti.

because I would get fined by the Mallians if I didn’t.”
1478

अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā आनन्दोā·nan·do अनत्तमनोa·nat·ta·ma·no अहोसिa·ho·si “कथञ्हिka·thañ·hi नामnā·ma रोजोro·jo मल्लोmal·lo एवंe·vaṃ वक्खती”ति?vak·kha·tī

Atha kho āyasmā ānando anattamano ahosi “kathañhi nāma rojo mallo evaṁ vakkhatī”ti?

Ānanda was disappointed with his friend.
1479

अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā आनन्दोā·nan·do येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di

Atha kho āyasmā ānando yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

He went to the Buddha, bowed, sat down,
1480

एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नोni·sin·no खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā आनन्दोā·nan·do भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā ānando bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

and said,
1481

“अयं,a·yaṃ भन्ते,bhan·te रोजोro·jo मल्लोmal·lo अभिञ्ञातोa·bhiñ·ñā·to ञातमनुस्सो।ñā·ta·ma·nus·so

“ayaṁ, bhante, rojo mallo abhiññāto ñātamanusso.

“Sir, Roja the Mallian is a well-known person.
1482

महत्थिकोma·hat·thi·ko खोkho पनpa·na एवरूपानंe·va·rū·pā·naṃ ञातमनुस्सानंñā·ta·ma·nus·sā·naṃ इमस्मिंi·mas·miṃ धम्मविनयेdham·ma·vi·na·ye पसादो।pa·sā·do

Mahatthiko kho pana evarūpānaṁ ñātamanussānaṁ imasmiṁ dhammavinaye pasādo.

It’s of great benefit when such well-known people gain confidence in this spiritual path.
1483

साधु,sā·dhu भन्ते,bhan·te भगवाbha·ga·vā तथाta·thā करोतु,ka·ro·tu यथाya·thā रोजोro·jo मल्लोmal·lo इमस्मिंi·mas·miṃ धम्मविनयेdham·ma·vi·na·ye पसीदेय्या”ति।pa·sī·dey·yā

Sādhu, bhante, bhagavā tathā karotu, yathā rojo mallo imasmiṁ dhammavinaye pasīdeyyā”ti.

Sir, please inspire confidence in Roja.”
1484

“नna खोkho तं,taṃ आनन्द,ā·nan·da दुक्करंduk·ka·raṃ तथागतेन,ta·thā·ga·te·na यथाya·thā रोजोro·jo मल्लोmal·lo इमस्मिंi·mas·miṃ धम्मविनयेdham·ma·vi·na·ye पसीदेय्या”ति।pa·sī·dey·yā

“Na kho taṁ, ānanda, dukkaraṁ tathāgatena, yathā rojo mallo imasmiṁ dhammavinaye pasīdeyyā”ti.

“That’s not difficult for the Buddha, Ānanda.”
1485

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā रोजंro·jaṃ मल्लंmal·laṃ मेत्तेनmet·te·na चित्तेनcit·te·na फरित्वाpha·rit·vā उट्ठायासनाuṭ·ṭhā·yā·sa·nā विहारंvi·hā·raṃ पाविसि।pā·vi·si

Atha kho bhagavā rojaṁ mallaṁ mettena cittena pharitvā uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṁ pāvisi.

The Buddha then suffused Roja with a mind of loving kindness, before getting up from his seat and entering his dwelling.
1486

अथa·tha खोkho रोजोro·jo मल्लोmal·lo भगवतोbha·ga·va·to मेत्तेनmet·te·na चित्तेनcit·te·na फुट्ठो,phuṭ·ṭho सेय्यथापिsey·ya·thā·pi नामnā·ma गाविंgā·viṃ तरुणवच्छो;ta·ru·ṇa·vac·cho

Atha kho rojo mallo bhagavato mettena cittena phuṭṭho, seyyathāpi nāma gāviṁ taruṇavaccho;

When Roja was suffused with loving kindness, he acted just like a young calf looking for its mother:
1487

एवमेवe·va·me·va विहारेनvi·hā·re·na विहारंvi·hā·raṃ परिवेणेनpa·ri·ve·ṇe·na परिवेणंpa·ri·ve·ṇaṃ उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū पुच्छति—puc·cha·ti

evameva vihārena vihāraṁ pariveṇena pariveṇaṁ upasaṅkamitvā bhikkhū pucchati—

he went from dwelling to dwelling, from yard to yard, asking,
1488

“कहंka·haṃ नुnu खो,kho भन्ते,bhan·te एतरहिe·ta·ra·hi सोso भगवाbha·ga·vā विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti अरहंa·ra·haṃ सम्मासम्बुद्धो,sam·mā·sam·bud·dho दस्सनकामाdas·sa·na·kā·mā हिhi मयंma·yaṃ तंtaṃ भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अरहन्तंa·ra·han·taṃ सम्मासम्बुद्धन्”ति।sam·mā·sam·bud·dhan

“kahaṁ nu kho, bhante, etarahi so bhagavā viharati arahaṁ sammāsambuddho, dassanakāmā hi mayaṁ taṁ bhagavantaṁ arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhan”ti.

“Venerables, where’s the Buddha staying, the Perfected and fully Awakened One? I wish to see him.”
1489

“एसावुसोe·sā·vu·so रोज,ro·ja विहारोvi·hā·ro संवुतद्वारो,saṃ·vu·tad·vā·ro तेनte·na अप्पसद्दोap·pa·sad·do उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā अतरमानोa·ta·ra·mā·no आळिन्दंā·ḷin·daṃ पविसित्वाpa·vi·sit·vā उक्कासित्वाuk·kā·sit·vā अग्गळंag·ga·ḷaṃ आकोटेहि,ā·ko·ṭe·hi विवरिस्सतिvi·va·ris·sa·ti तेte भगवाbha·ga·vā द्वारन्”ति।dvā·ran

“Esāvuso roja, vihāro saṁvutadvāro, tena appasaddo upasaṅkamitvā ataramāno āḷindaṁ pavisitvā ukkāsitvā aggaḷaṁ ākoṭehi, vivarissati te bhagavā dvāran”ti.

“In that dwelling, Roja, with the closed door. Go there quietly and slowly, enter the porch, clear your throat, and knock on the door. The Buddha will then open the door for you.”
1490

अथa·tha खोkho रोजोro·jo मल्लोmal·lo येनye·na सोso विहारोvi·hā·ro संवुतद्वारो,saṃ·vu·tad·vā·ro तेनte·na अप्पसद्दोap·pa·sad·do उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā अतरमानोa·ta·ra·mā·no आळिन्दंā·ḷin·daṃ पविसित्वाpa·vi·sit·vā उक्कासित्वाuk·kā·sit·vā अग्गळंag·ga·ḷaṃ आकोटेसि।ā·ko·ṭe·si विवरिvi·va·ri भगवाbha·ga·vā द्वारं।dvā·raṃ

Atha kho rojo mallo yena so vihāro saṁvutadvāro, tena appasaddo upasaṅkamitvā ataramāno āḷindaṁ pavisitvā ukkāsitvā aggaḷaṁ ākoṭesi. Vivari bhagavā dvāraṁ.

Roja did just that, and the Buddha opened the door for him.
1491

अथa·tha खोkho रोजोro·jo मल्लोmal·lo विहारंvi·hā·raṃ पविसित्वाpa·vi·sit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di

Atha kho rojo mallo vihāraṁ pavisitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

He entered the dwelling, bowed, and sat down.
1492

एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नस्सni·sin·nas·sa खोkho रोजस्सro·jas·sa मल्लस्सmal·las·sa भगवाbha·ga·vā अनुपुब्बिंa·nu·pub·biṃ कथंka·thaṃ कथेसि,ka·the·si सेय्यथिदं—sey·ya·thi·daṃ

Ekamantaṁ nisinnassa kho rojassa mallassa bhagavā anupubbiṁ kathaṁ kathesi, seyyathidaṁ—

The Buddha then gave him a progressive talk—
1493

दानकथंdā·na·ka·thaṃ …पे…pe

dānakathaṁ …pe…

on generosity, morality, and heaven; on the downside, degradation, and defilement of worldly pleasures; and he revealed the benefits of renunciation. When the Buddha knew that his mind was ready, supple, without hindrances, joyful, and confident, he revealed the teaching unique to the Buddhas: suffering, its origin, its end, and the path. And just as a clean and stainless cloth absorbs dye properly, so too, while he was sitting right there, Roja experienced the stainless vision of the Truth: “Anything that has a beginning has an end.” He had seen the Truth, had reached, understood, and penetrated it. He had gone beyond doubt and uncertainty, had attained to confidence, and had become independent of others in the Teacher’s instruction.
1494

अपरप्पच्चयोa·pa·rap·pac·ca·yo सत्थुसासनेsat·thu·sā·sa·ne भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

aparappaccayo satthusāsane bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

He then said to the Buddha,
1495

“साधु,sā·dhu भन्ते,bhan·te अय्याay·yā ममञ्ञेवma·mañ·ñe·va पटिग्गण्हेय्युंpa·ṭig·gaṇ·hey·yuṃ चीवरपिण्डपातसेनासनगिलानप्पच्चयभेसज्जपरिक्खारं,cī·va·ra·piṇ·ḍa·pā·ta·se·nā·sa·na·gi·lā·nap·pac·ca·ya·bhe·saj·ja·pa·rik·khā·raṃ नोno अञ्ञेसन्”ति।añ·ñe·san

“sādhu, bhante, ayyā mamaññeva paṭiggaṇheyyuṁ cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhāraṁ, no aññesan”ti.

“Sir, please have the venerables accept robe-cloth, almsfood, dwellings, and medicinal supplies from me, and not from others.”
1496

“येसंye·saṃ खो,kho रोज,ro·ja सेक्खेनsek·khe·na ञाणेनñā·ṇe·na सेक्खेनsek·khe·na दस्सनेनdas·sa·ne·na धम्मोdham·mo दिट्ठोdiṭ·ṭho सेय्यथापिsey·ya·thā·pi तया,ta·yā तेसम्पिte·sam·pi एवंe·vaṃ होति—ho·ti

“Yesaṁ kho, roja, sekkhena ñāṇena sekkhena dassanena dhammo diṭṭho seyyathāpi tayā, tesampi evaṁ hoti—

“Roja, those who have seen the Truth with a trainee’s knowledge and vision, as you have, think like this.
1497

‘अहोa·ho नूनnū·na अय्याay·yā अम्हाकञ्ञेवam·hā·kañ·ñe·va पटिग्गण्हेय्युंpa·ṭig·gaṇ·hey·yuṃ चीवरपिण्डपातसेनासनगिलानप्पच्चयभेसज्जपरिक्खारं,cī·va·ra·piṇ·ḍa·pā·ta·se·nā·sa·na·gi·lā·nap·pac·ca·ya·bhe·saj·ja·pa·rik·khā·raṃ नोno अञ्ञेसन्’ति।añ·ñe·san

‘aho nūna ayyā amhākaññeva paṭiggaṇheyyuṁ cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhāraṁ, no aññesan’ti.

(Pāli only)
1498

तेनte·na हि,hi रोज,ro·ja तवta·va चेवce·va पटिग्गहिस्सन्तिpa·ṭig·ga·his·san·ti अञ्ञेसञ्चा”ति।añ·ñe·sañ·cā

Tena hi, roja, tava ceva paṭiggahissanti aññesañcā”ti.

But listen, Roja, the monks will have to receive both from you and others.”
1499

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na कुसिनारायंku·si·nā·rā·yaṃ पणीतानंpa·ṇī·tā·naṃ भत्तानंbhat·tā·naṃ भत्तपटिपाटिbhat·ta·pa·ṭi·pā·ṭi अट्ठिताaṭ·ṭhi·tā होति।ho·ti

Tena kho pana samayena kusinārāyaṁ paṇītānaṁ bhattānaṁ bhattapaṭipāṭi aṭṭhitā hoti.

At this time in Kusinārā there was a succession of fine meals.
1500

अथa·tha खोkho रोजस्सro·jas·sa मल्लस्सmal·las·sa पटिपाटिंpa·ṭi·pā·ṭiṃ अलभन्तस्सa·la·bhan·tas·sa एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

Atha kho rojassa mallassa paṭipāṭiṁ alabhantassa etadahosi—

Not being able to get a turn, Roja thought,
1501

“यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ भत्तग्गंbhat·tag·gaṃ ओलोकेय्यं,o·lo·key·yaṃ यंyaṃ भत्तग्गेbhat·tag·ge नास्स,nās·sa तंtaṃ पटियादेय्यन्”ति।pa·ṭi·yā·dey·yan

“yannūnāhaṁ bhattaggaṁ olokeyyaṁ, yaṁ bhattagge nāssa, taṁ paṭiyādeyyan”ti.

“Why don’t I inspect the dining hall and then prepare whatever is lacking?”
1502

अथa·tha खोkho रोजोro·jo मल्लोmal·lo भत्तग्गंbhat·tag·gaṃ ओलोकेन्तोo·lo·ken·to द्वेdve नाद्दस—nād·da·sa

Atha kho rojo mallo bhattaggaṁ olokento dve nāddasa—

When he did, he saw that two things were missing:
1503

डाकञ्चḍā·kañ·ca पिट्ठखादनीयञ्च।piṭ·ṭha·khā·da·nī·yañ·ca

ḍākañca piṭṭhakhādanīyañca.

potherbs and fresh food made of flour.
1504

अथa·tha खोkho रोजोro·jo मल्लोmal·lo येनायस्माye·nā·yas·mā आनन्दोā·nan·do तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ आनन्दंā·nan·daṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

Atha kho rojo mallo yenāyasmā ānando tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ etadavoca—

He then went to Venerable Ānanda and told him what he had been thinking,
1505

“इधi·dha मे,me भन्तेbhan·te आनन्द,ā·nan·da पटिपाटिंpa·ṭi·pā·ṭiṃ अलभन्तस्सa·la·bhan·tas·sa एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

“idha me, bhante ānanda, paṭipāṭiṁ alabhantassa etadahosi—

(Pāli only)
1506

‘यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ भत्तग्गंbhat·tag·gaṃ ओलोकेय्यं,o·lo·key·yaṃ यंyaṃ भत्तग्गेbhat·tag·ge नास्स,nās·sa तंtaṃ पटियादेय्यन्’ति।pa·ṭi·yā·dey·yan

‘yannūnāhaṁ bhattaggaṁ olokeyyaṁ, yaṁ bhattagge nāssa, taṁ paṭiyādeyyan’ti.

(Pāli only)
1507

सोso खोkho अहं,a·haṃ भन्तेbhan·te आनन्द,ā·nan·da भत्तग्गंbhat·tag·gaṃ ओलोकेन्तोo·lo·ken·to द्वेdve नाद्दसं—nād·da·saṃ

So kho ahaṁ, bhante ānanda, bhattaggaṁ olokento dve nāddasaṁ—

(Pāli only)
1508

डाकञ्चḍā·kañ·ca पिट्ठखादनीयञ्च।piṭ·ṭha·khā·da·nī·yañ·ca

ḍākañca piṭṭhakhādanīyañca.

(Pāli only)
1509

सचाहं,sa·cā·haṃ भन्तेbhan·te आनन्द,ā·nan·da पटियादेय्यंpa·ṭi·yā·dey·yaṃ डाकञ्चḍā·kañ·ca पिट्ठखादनीयञ्च,piṭ·ṭha·khā·da·nī·yañ·ca पटिग्गण्हेय्यpa·ṭig·gaṇ·hey·ya मेme भगवा”ति?bha·ga·vā

Sacāhaṁ, bhante ānanda, paṭiyādeyyaṁ ḍākañca piṭṭhakhādanīyañca, paṭiggaṇheyya me bhagavā”ti?

adding, “Venerable Ānanda, if I were to prepare potherbs and fresh food made of flour, would the Buddha accept it?”
1510

“तेनte·na हि,hi रोज,ro·ja भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ पटिपुच्छिस्सामी”ति।pa·ṭi·puc·chis·sā·mī

“Tena hi, roja, bhagavantaṁ paṭipucchissāmī”ti.

“Well, Roja, let me ask the Buddha.”
1511

अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā आनन्दोā·nan·do भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसि।ā·ro·ce·si

Atha kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesi.

Venerable Ānanda told the Buddha, who said,
1512

“तेनte·na हानन्द,hā·nan·da पटियादेतू”ति।pa·ṭi·yā·de·tū

“Tena hānanda, paṭiyādetū”ti.

“Allow it to be prepared, Ānanda.”
1513

“तेनte·na हि,hi रोज,ro·ja पटियादेही”ति।pa·ṭi·yā·de·hī

“Tena hi, roja, paṭiyādehī”ti.

Ānanda passed the message on to Roja.
1514

अथa·tha खोkho रोजोro·jo मल्लोmal·lo तस्साtas·sā रत्तियाrat·ti·yā अच्चयेनac·ca·ye·na पहूतंpa·hū·taṃ डाकञ्चḍā·kañ·ca पिट्ठखादनीयञ्चpiṭ·ṭha·khā·da·nī·yañ·ca पटियादापेत्वाpa·ṭi·yā·dā·pet·vā भगवतोbha·ga·va·to उपनामेसि—u·pa·nā·me·si

Atha kho rojo mallo tassā rattiyā accayena pahūtaṁ ḍākañca piṭṭhakhādanīyañca paṭiyādāpetvā bhagavato upanāmesi—

The following morning Roja prepared many potherbs and much fresh food made with flour and brought it to the Buddha, saying,
1515

“पटिग्गण्हातुpa·ṭig·gaṇ·hā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te भगवाbha·ga·vā डाकञ्चḍā·kañ·ca पिट्ठखादनीयञ्चा”ति।piṭ·ṭha·khā·da·nī·yañ·cā

“paṭiggaṇhātu me, bhante, bhagavā ḍākañca piṭṭhakhādanīyañcā”ti.

“Sir, please accept the potherbs and the fresh food made with flour.”
1516

“तेनte·na हि,hi रोज,ro·ja भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ देही”ति।de·hī

“Tena hi, roja, bhikkhūnaṁ dehī”ti.

“Well then, Roja, give it to the monks.”
1517

अथa·tha खोkho रोजोro·jo मल्लोmal·lo भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ देति।de·ti

Atha kho rojo mallo bhikkhūnaṁ deti.

He did,
1518

भिक्खूbhik·khū कुक्कुच्चायन्ताkuk·kuc·cā·yan·tā नna पटिग्गण्हन्ति।pa·ṭig·gaṇ·han·ti

Bhikkhū kukkuccāyantā na paṭiggaṇhanti.

but being afraid of wrongdoing, they did not accept.
1519

“पटिग्गण्हथ,pa·ṭig·gaṇ·ha·tha भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve परिभुञ्जथा”ति।pa·ri·bhuñ·ja·thā

“Paṭiggaṇhatha, bhikkhave, paribhuñjathā”ti.

The Buddha said, “Accept, monks, and eat.”
1520

अथa·tha खोkho रोजोro·jo मल्लोmal·lo बुद्धप्पमुखंbud·dhap·pa·mu·khaṃ भिक्खुसङ्घंbhik·khu·saṅ·ghaṃ पहूतेहिpa·hū·te·hi डाकेहिḍā·ke·hi चca पिट्ठखादनीयेहिpiṭ·ṭha·khā·da·nī·ye·hi चca सहत्थाsa·hat·thā सन्तप्पेत्वाsan·tap·pet·vā सम्पवारेत्वाsam·pa·vā·ret·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ धोतहत्थंdho·ta·hat·thaṃ ओनीतपत्तपाणिंo·nī·ta·pat·ta·pā·ṇiṃ एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di

Atha kho rojo mallo buddhappamukhaṁ bhikkhusaṅghaṁ pahūtehi ḍākehi ca piṭṭhakhādanīyehi ca sahatthā santappetvā sampavāretvā bhagavantaṁ dhotahatthaṁ onītapattapāṇiṁ ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

Roja then personally served many potherbs and much fresh food made with flour to the Sangha of monks headed by the Buddha. When the Buddha had finished his meal, Roja sat down to one side.
1521

एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नंni·sin·naṃ खोkho रोजंro·jaṃ मल्लंmal·laṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā धम्मियाdham·mi·yā कथायka·thā·ya सन्दस्सेत्वाsan·das·set·vā समादपेत्वाsa·mā·da·pet·vā समुत्तेजेत्वाsa·mut·te·jet·vā सम्पहंसेत्वाsam·pa·haṃ·set·vā उट्ठायासनाuṭ·ṭhā·yā·sa·nā पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho rojaṁ mallaṁ bhagavā dhammiyā kathāya sandassetvā samādapetvā samuttejetvā sampahaṁsetvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmi.

The Buddha instructed, inspired, and gladdened him with a teaching, after which he got up from his seat and left.
1522

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ निदानेni·dā·ne एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ पकरणेpa·ka·ra·ṇe धम्मिंdham·miṃ कथंka·thaṃ कत्वाkat·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

Atha kho bhagavā etasmiṁ nidāne etasmiṁ pakaraṇe dhammiṁ kathaṁ katvā bhikkhū āmantesi—

Soon afterwards the Buddha gave a teaching and addressed the monks:
1523

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सब्बञ्चsab·bañ·ca डाकंḍā·kaṃ सब्बञ्चsab·bañ·ca पिट्ठखादनीयन्”ति।piṭ·ṭha·khā·da·nī·yan

“anujānāmi, bhikkhave, sabbañca ḍākaṁ sabbañca piṭṭhakhādanīyan”ti.

“I allow all potherbs and all fresh food made of flour.”
1524

25। वुड्ढपब्बजितवत्थुvuḍ·ḍha·pab·ba·ji·ta·vat·thu

25. Vuḍḍhapabbajitavatthu

25. The account of the one who had gone forth when old
1525

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā कुसिनारायंku·si·nā·rā·yaṃ यथाभिरन्तंya·thā·bhi·ran·taṃ विहरित्वाvi·ha·rit·vā येनye·na आतुमाā·tu·mā तेनte·na चारिकंcā·ri·kaṃ पक्कामिpak·kā·mi महताma·ha·tā भिक्खुसङ्घेनbhik·khu·saṅ·ghe·na सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ अड्ढतेलसेहिaḍ·ḍha·te·la·se·hi भिक्खुसतेहि।bhik·khu·sa·te·hi

Atha kho bhagavā kusinārāyaṁ yathābhirantaṁ viharitvā yena ātumā tena cārikaṁ pakkāmi mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ aḍḍhatelasehi bhikkhusatehi.

When the Buddha had stayed at Kusinārā for as long as he liked, he set out wandering toward Ātumā with a large sangha of twelve-hundred and fifty monks.
1526

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro वुड्ढपब्बजितोvuḍ·ḍha·pab·ba·ji·to आतुमायंā·tu·mā·yaṃ पटिवसतिpa·ṭi·va·sa·ti नहापितपुब्बो।na·hā·pi·ta·pub·bo

Tena kho pana samayena aññataro vuḍḍhapabbajito ātumāyaṁ paṭivasati nahāpitapubbo.

At that time at Ātumā there was a monk who was previously a barber and who had gone forth when old.
1527

तस्सtas·sa द्वेdve दारकाdā·ra·kā होन्ति,hon·ti मञ्जुकाmañ·ju·kā पटिभानेय्यका,pa·ṭi·bhā·ney·ya·kā दक्खाdak·khā परियोदातसिप्पाpa·ri·yo·dā·ta·sip·pā सकेsa·ke आचरियकेā·ca·ri·ya·ke नहापितकम्मे।na·hā·pi·ta·kam·me

Tassa dve dārakā honti, mañjukā paṭibhāneyyakā, dakkhā pariyodātasippā sake ācariyake nahāpitakamme.

He had two boys, sweet-voiced and articulate, who were skilled barbers.
1528

अस्सोसिas·so·si खोkho सोso वुड्ढपब्बजितो—“भगवाvuḍ·ḍha·pab·ba·ji·to किरki·ra आतुमंā·tu·maṃ आगच्छतिā·gac·cha·ti महताma·ha·tā भिक्खुसङ्घेनbhik·khu·saṅ·ghe·na सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ अड्ढतेलसेहिaḍ·ḍha·te·la·se·hi भिक्खुसतेही”ति।bhik·khu·sa·te·hī

Assosi kho so vuḍḍhapabbajito—“bhagavā kira ātumaṁ āgacchati mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ aḍḍhatelasehi bhikkhusatehī”ti.

The monk who had gone forth when old heard that the Buddha was coming to Ātumā,
1529

अथa·tha खोkho सोso वुड्ढपब्बजितोvuḍ·ḍha·pab·ba·ji·to तेte दारकेdā·ra·ke एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

Atha kho so vuḍḍhapabbajito te dārake etadavoca—

and he said to those boys,
1530

“भगवाbha·ga·vā किर,ki·ra ताता,tā·tā आतुमंā·tu·maṃ आगच्छतिā·gac·cha·ti महताma·ha·tā भिक्खुसङ्घेनbhik·khu·saṅ·ghe·na सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ अड्ढतेलसेहिaḍ·ḍha·te·la·se·hi भिक्खुसतेहि।bhik·khu·sa·te·hi

“bhagavā kira, tātā, ātumaṁ āgacchati mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ aḍḍhatelasehi bhikkhusatehi.

“The Buddha is coming to Ātumā with a large sangha of twelve-hundred and fifty monks.
1531

गच्छथgac·cha·tha तुम्हे,tum·he ताता,tā·tā खुरभण्डंkhu·ra·bhaṇ·ḍaṃ आदायā·dā·ya नाळियावापकेनnā·ḷi·yā·vā·pa·ke·na अनुघरकंa·nu·gha·ra·kaṃ अनुघरकंa·nu·gha·ra·kaṃ आहिण्डथ,ā·hiṇ·ḍa·tha लोणम्पि,lo·ṇam·pi तेलम्पि,te·lam·pi तण्डुलम्पि,taṇ·ḍu·lam·pi खादनीयम्पिkhā·da·nī·yam·pi संहरथ,saṃ·ha·ra·tha भगवतोbha·ga·va·to आगतस्सā·ga·tas·sa यागुपानंyā·gu·pā·naṃ करिस्सामा”ति।ka·ris·sā·mā

Gacchatha tumhe, tātā, khurabhaṇḍaṁ ādāya nāḷiyāvāpakena anugharakaṁ anugharakaṁ āhiṇḍatha, loṇampi, telampi, taṇḍulampi, khādanīyampi saṁharatha, bhagavato āgatassa yāgupānaṁ karissāmā”ti.

Now go and get the barber equipment, and then go from house to house with a box and collect salt, oil, rice, and fresh food. When the Buddha has arrived, we’ll make a congee drink.”
1532

“एवं,e·vaṃ ताता”तिtā·tā खोkho तेte दारकाdā·ra·kā तस्सtas·sa वुड्ढपब्बजितस्सvuḍ·ḍha·pab·ba·ji·tas·sa पटिस्सुणित्वाpa·ṭis·su·ṇit·vā खुरभण्डंkhu·ra·bhaṇ·ḍaṃ आदायā·dā·ya नाळियावापकेनnā·ḷi·yā·vā·pa·ke·na अनुघरकंa·nu·gha·ra·kaṃ अनुघरकंa·nu·gha·ra·kaṃ आहिण्डन्ति,ā·hiṇ·ḍan·ti लोणम्पि,lo·ṇam·pi तेलम्पि,te·lam·pi तण्डुलम्पि,taṇ·ḍu·lam·pi खादनीयम्पिkhā·da·nī·yam·pi संहरन्ता।saṃ·ha·ran·tā

“Evaṁ, tātā”ti kho te dārakā tassa vuḍḍhapabbajitassa paṭissuṇitvā khurabhaṇḍaṁ ādāya nāḷiyāvāpakena anugharakaṁ anugharakaṁ āhiṇḍanti, loṇampi, telampi, taṇḍulampi, khādanīyampi saṁharantā.

Saying, “Yes,” they did just that.
1533

मनुस्साma·nus·sā तेte दारकेdā·ra·ke मञ्जुकेmañ·ju·ke पटिभानेय्यकेpa·ṭi·bhā·ney·ya·ke पस्सित्वाpas·sit·vā येपिye·pi नna कारापेतुकामाkā·rā·pe·tu·kā·mā तेपिte·pi कारापेन्ति,kā·rā·pen·ti कारापेत्वापिkā·rā·pet·vā·pi बहुंba·huṃ देन्ति।den·ti

Manussā te dārake mañjuke paṭibhāneyyake passitvā yepi na kārāpetukāmā tepi kārāpenti, kārāpetvāpi bahuṁ denti.

When people saw those sweet-voiced and articulate boys, they used their services even if they did not really want to. And they gave much in return.
1534

अथa·tha खोkho तेte दारकाdā·ra·kā बहुंba·huṃ लोणम्पि,lo·ṇam·pi तेलम्पि,te·lam·pi तण्डुलम्पि,taṇ·ḍu·lam·pi खादनीयम्पिkhā·da·nī·yam·pi संहरिंसु।saṃ·ha·riṃ·su

Atha kho te dārakā bahuṁ loṇampi, telampi, taṇḍulampi, khādanīyampi saṁhariṁsu.

Soon the boys had collected a large amount of salt, oil, rice, and fresh food.
1535

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā अनुपुब्बेनa·nu·pub·be·na चारिकंcā·ri·kaṃ चरमानोca·ra·mā·no येनye·na आतुमाā·tu·mā तदवसरि।ta·da·va·sa·ri

Atha kho bhagavā anupubbena cārikaṁ caramāno yena ātumā tadavasari.

When the Buddha eventually arrived at Ātumā,
1536

तत्रtat·ra सुदंsu·daṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā आतुमायंā·tu·mā·yaṃ विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti भुसागारे।bhu·sā·gā·re

Tatra sudaṁ bhagavā ātumāyaṁ viharati bhusāgāre.

he stayed in a dwelling made of husk.
1537

अथa·tha खोkho सोso वुड्ढपब्बजितोvuḍ·ḍha·pab·ba·ji·to तस्साtas·sā रत्तियाrat·ti·yā अच्चयेनac·ca·ye·na पहूतंpa·hū·taṃ यागुंyā·guṃ पटियादापेत्वाpa·ṭi·yā·dā·pet·vā भगवतोbha·ga·va·to उपनामेसि—u·pa·nā·me·si

Atha kho so vuḍḍhapabbajito tassā rattiyā accayena pahūtaṁ yāguṁ paṭiyādāpetvā bhagavato upanāmesi—

The following morning that monk who had gone forth when old had much congee prepared and brought it to the Buddha,
1538

“पटिग्गण्हातुpa·ṭig·gaṇ·hā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te भगवाbha·ga·vā यागुन्”ति।yā·gun

“paṭiggaṇhātu me, bhante, bhagavā yāgun”ti.

saying, “Sir, please accept the congee.”
1539

जानन्तापिjā·nan·tā·pi तथागताta·thā·ga·tā पुच्छन्तिpuc·chan·ti …पे…pe

Jānantāpi tathāgatā pucchanti …pe…

When Buddhas know what is going on, sometimes they ask and sometimes not. They know the right time to ask and when not to ask. Buddhas ask when it is beneficial, otherwise they do not, for Buddhas are incapable of doing what is unbeneficial. Buddhas question the monks for two reasons:
1540

सावकानंsā·va·kā·naṃ वाvā सिक्खापदंsik·khā·pa·daṃ पञ्ञपेस्सामाति।pañ·ña·pes·sā·mā·ti

sāvakānaṁ vā sikkhāpadaṁ paññapessāmāti.

to give a teaching or to lay down a training rule.
1541

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā तंtaṃ वुड्ढपब्बजितंvuḍ·ḍha·pab·ba·ji·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

Atha kho bhagavā taṁ vuḍḍhapabbajitaṁ etadavoca—

The Buddha then said to him,
1542

“कुतायं,ku·tā·yaṃ भिक्खु,bhik·khu यागू”ति?yā·gū

“kutāyaṁ, bhikkhu, yāgū”ti?

“Where does this congee come from?”
1543

अथa·tha खोkho सोso वुड्ढपब्बजितोvuḍ·ḍha·pab·ba·ji·to भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसि।ā·ro·ce·si

Atha kho so vuḍḍhapabbajito bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesi.

He told him,
1544

विगरहिvi·ga·ra·hi बुद्धोbud·dho भगवा—bha·ga·vā

Vigarahi buddho bhagavā—

and the Buddha rebuked him,
1545

“अननुच्छविकं,a·na·nuc·cha·vi·kaṃ मोघपुरिस,mo·gha·pu·ri·sa अननुलोमिकंa·na·nu·lo·mi·kaṃ अप्पतिरूपंap·pa·ti·rū·paṃ अस्सामणकंas·sā·ma·ṇa·kaṃ अकप्पियंa·kap·pi·yaṃ अकरणीयं।a·ka·ra·ṇī·yaṃ

“ananucchavikaṁ, moghapurisa, ananulomikaṁ appatirūpaṁ assāmaṇakaṁ akappiyaṁ akaraṇīyaṁ.

“It’s not suitable, foolish man, it’s not proper, it’s not worthy of a monastic, it’s not allowable, it’s not to be done.
1546

कथञ्हिka·thañ·hi नामnā·ma त्वं,tvaṃ मोघपुरिस,mo·gha·pu·ri·sa पब्बजितोpab·ba·ji·to अकप्पियेa·kap·pi·ye समादपेस्ससि।sa·mā·da·pes·sa·si

Kathañhi nāma tvaṁ, moghapurisa, pabbajito akappiye samādapessasi.

How can you who have gone forth encourage others in what’s unallowable?
1547

नेतं,ne·taṃ मोघपुरिस,mo·gha·pu·ri·sa अप्पसन्नानंap·pa·san·nā·naṃ वाvā पसादायpa·sā·dā·ya …पे…pe

Netaṁ, moghapurisa, appasannānaṁ vā pasādāya …pe…

This will affect people’s confidence …”
1548

विगरहित्वाvi·ga·ra·hit·vā धम्मिंdham·miṃ कथंka·thaṃ कत्वाkat·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

vigarahitvā dhammiṁ kathaṁ katvā bhikkhū āmantesi—

After rebuking him, he gave a teaching and addressed the monks:
1549

“न,na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve पब्बजितेनpab·ba·ji·te·na अकप्पियेa·kap·pi·ye समादपेतब्बं,sa·mā·da·pe·tab·baṃ योyo समादपेय्य,sa·mā·da·pey·ya आपत्तिā·pat·ti दुक्कटस्स।duk·ka·ṭas·sa

“na, bhikkhave, pabbajitena akappiye samādapetabbaṁ, yo samādapeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassa.

“You shouldn’t encourage others to do what’s unallowable. If you do, you commit an offense of wrong conduct.
1550

नna च,ca भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve नहापितपुब्बेनna·hā·pi·ta·pub·be·na खुरभण्डंkhu·ra·bhaṇ·ḍaṃ परिहरितब्बं।pa·ri·ha·ri·tab·baṃ

Na ca, bhikkhave, nahāpitapubbena khurabhaṇḍaṁ pariharitabbaṁ.

And if you were previously a barber, you shouldn’t carry barber equipment around.
1551

योyo परिहरेय्य,pa·ri·ha·rey·ya आपत्तिā·pat·ti दुक्कटस्सा”ति।duk·ka·ṭas·sā

Yo parihareyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā”ti.

If you do, you commit an offense of wrong conduct.”
1552

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā आतुमायंā·tu·mā·yaṃ यथाभिरन्तंya·thā·bhi·ran·taṃ विहरित्वाvi·ha·rit·vā येनye·na सावत्थिsā·vat·thi तेनte·na चारिकंcā·ri·kaṃ पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

Atha kho bhagavā ātumāyaṁ yathābhirantaṁ viharitvā yena sāvatthi tena cārikaṁ pakkāmi.

When the Buddha had stayed at Ātumā for as long as he liked, he set out wandering toward Sāvatthī.
1553

अनुपुब्बेनa·nu·pub·be·na चारिकंcā·ri·kaṃ चरमानोca·ra·mā·no येनye·na सावत्थिsā·vat·thi तदवसरि।ta·da·va·sa·ri

Anupubbena cārikaṁ caramāno yena sāvatthi tadavasari.

When he eventually arrived,
1554

तत्रtat·ra सुदंsu·daṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā सावत्थियंsā·vat·thi·yaṃ विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti जेतवनेje·ta·va·ne अनाथपिण्डिकस्सa·nā·tha·piṇ·ḍi·kas·sa आरामे।ā·rā·me

Tatra sudaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme.

he stayed in the Jeta Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s Monastery.
1555

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na सावत्थियंsā·vat·thi·yaṃ बहुंba·huṃ फलखादनीयंpha·la·khā·da·nī·yaṃ उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ होति।ho·ti

Tena kho pana samayena sāvatthiyaṁ bahuṁ phalakhādanīyaṁ uppannaṁ hoti.

At that time in Sāvatthī there was much fruit.
1556

अथa·tha खोkho भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

Atha kho bhikkhūnaṁ etadahosi—

The monks thought,
1557

“किंkiṃ नुnu खोkho भगवताbha·ga·va·tā फलखादनीयंpha·la·khā·da·nī·yaṃ अनुञ्ञातं,a·nuñ·ñā·taṃ किंkiṃ अननुञ्ञातन्”ति?a·na·nuñ·ñā·tan

“kiṁ nu kho bhagavatā phalakhādanīyaṁ anuññātaṁ, kiṁ ananuññātan”ti?

“Which fruits has the Buddha allowed and which not?”
1558

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

They told the Buddha.
1559

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सब्बंsab·baṃ फलखादनीयन्”ति।pha·la·khā·da·nī·yan

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, sabbaṁ phalakhādanīyan”ti.

“I allow all fruits.”
1560

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na सङ्घिकानिsaṅ·ghi·kā·ni बीजानिbī·jā·ni पुग्गलिकायpug·ga·li·kā·ya भूमियाbhū·mi·yā रोपियन्ति,ro·pi·yan·ti पुग्गलिकानिpug·ga·li·kā·ni बीजानिbī·jā·ni सङ्घिकायsaṅ·ghi·kā·ya भूमियाbhū·mi·yā रोपियन्ति।ro·pi·yan·ti

Tena kho pana samayena saṅghikāni bījāni puggalikāya bhūmiyā ropiyanti, puggalikāni bījāni saṅghikāya bhūmiyā ropiyanti.

On one occasion seeds belonging to the Sangha had been planted on land belonging to an individual and seeds belonging to an individual on land belonging to the Sangha.
1561

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

(Pāli only)
1562

“सङ्घिकानि,saṅ·ghi·kā·ni भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve बीजानिbī·jā·ni पुग्गलिकायpug·ga·li·kā·ya भूमियाbhū·mi·yā रोपितानिro·pi·tā·ni भागंbhā·gaṃ दत्वाdat·vā परिभुञ्जितब्बानि।pa·ri·bhuñ·ji·tab·bā·ni

“Saṅghikāni, bhikkhave, bījāni puggalikāya bhūmiyā ropitāni bhāgaṁ datvā paribhuñjitabbāni.

“If seeds belonging to the Sangha have been planted on land belonging to an individual, that person should be given a share, and the produce may then be eaten.
1563

पुग्गलिकानिpug·ga·li·kā·ni बीजानिbī·jā·ni सङ्घिकायsaṅ·ghi·kā·ya भूमियाbhū·mi·yā रोपितानिro·pi·tā·ni भागंbhā·gaṃ दत्वाdat·vā परिभुञ्जितब्बानी”ति।pa·ri·bhuñ·ji·tab·bā·nī

Puggalikāni bījāni saṅghikāya bhūmiyā ropitāni bhāgaṁ datvā paribhuñjitabbānī”ti.

If seeds belonging to an individual have been planted on land belonging to the Sangha, the Sangha should be given a share, and the produce may then be eaten.”
1564

26। चतुमहापदेसकथाca·tu·ma·hā·pa·de·sa·ka·thā

26. Catumahāpadesakathā

26. Discussion of the four great standards
1565

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ किस्मिञ्चिkis·miñ·ci किस्मिञ्चिkis·miñ·ci ठानेṭhā·ne कुक्कुच्चंkuk·kuc·caṃ उप्पज्जति—up·paj·ja·ti

Tena kho pana samayena bhikkhūnaṁ kismiñci kismiñci ṭhāne kukkuccaṁ uppajjati—

At that time the monks were anxious about all sorts of matters, thinking,
1566

“किंkiṃ नुnu खोkho भगवताbha·ga·va·tā अनुञ्ञातं,a·nuñ·ñā·taṃ किंkiṃ अननुञ्ञातन्”ति?a·na·nuñ·ñā·tan

“kiṁ nu kho bhagavatā anuññātaṁ, kiṁ ananuññātan”ti?

“What has the Buddha allowed and what hasn’t he allowed?”
1567

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

They told the Buddha.
1568

“यं,yaṃ भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve मयाma·yā ‘इदंi·daṃ नna कप्पती’तिkap·pa·tī अप्पटिक्खित्तंap·pa·ṭik·khit·taṃ तञ्चेtañ·ce अकप्पियंa·kap·pi·yaṃ अनुलोमेति,a·nu·lo·me·ti कप्पियंkap·pi·yaṃ पटिबाहति,pa·ṭi·bā·ha·ti तंtaṃ वोvo नna कप्पति।kap·pa·ti

“Yaṁ, bhikkhave, mayā ‘idaṁ na kappatī’ti appaṭikkhittaṁ tañce akappiyaṁ anulometi, kappiyaṁ paṭibāhati, taṁ vo na kappati.

“If I haven’t specifically prohibited something, then it’s unallowable to you if it’s similar to what’s unallowable and opposed to what’s allowable.
1569

यं,yaṃ भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve मयाma·yā ‘इदंi·daṃ नna कप्पती’तिkap·pa·tī अप्पटिक्खित्तंap·pa·ṭik·khit·taṃ तञ्चेtañ·ce कप्पियंkap·pi·yaṃ अनुलोमेति,a·nu·lo·me·ti अकप्पियंa·kap·pi·yaṃ पटिबाहति,pa·ṭi·bā·ha·ti तंtaṃ वोvo कप्पति।kap·pa·ti

Yaṁ, bhikkhave, mayā ‘idaṁ na kappatī’ti appaṭikkhittaṁ tañce kappiyaṁ anulometi, akappiyaṁ paṭibāhati, taṁ vo kappati.

If I haven’t specifically prohibited something, then it’s allowable to you if it’s similar to what’s allowable and opposed to what’s unallowable.
1570

यं,yaṃ भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve मयाma·yā ‘इदंi·daṃ कप्पती’तिkap·pa·tī अननुञ्ञातंa·na·nuñ·ñā·taṃ तञ्चेtañ·ce अकप्पियंa·kap·pi·yaṃ अनुलोमेति,a·nu·lo·me·ti कप्पियंkap·pi·yaṃ पटिबाहति,pa·ṭi·bā·ha·ti तंtaṃ वोvo नna कप्पति।kap·pa·ti

Yaṁ, bhikkhave, mayā ‘idaṁ kappatī’ti ananuññātaṁ tañce akappiyaṁ anulometi, kappiyaṁ paṭibāhati, taṁ vo na kappati.

If I haven’t specifically allowed something, then it’s unallowable to you if it’s similar to what’s unallowable and opposed to what’s allowable.
1571

यं,yaṃ भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve मयाma·yā ‘इदंi·daṃ कप्पती’तिkap·pa·tī अननुञ्ञातं,a·na·nuñ·ñā·taṃ तञ्चेtañ·ce कप्पियंkap·pi·yaṃ अनुलोमेति,a·nu·lo·me·ti अकप्पियंa·kap·pi·yaṃ पटिबाहति,pa·ṭi·bā·ha·ti तंtaṃ वोvo कप्पती”ति।kap·pa·tī

Yaṁ, bhikkhave, mayā ‘idaṁ kappatī’ti ananuññātaṁ, tañce kappiyaṁ anulometi, akappiyaṁ paṭibāhati, taṁ vo kappatī”ti.

If I haven’t specifically allowed something, then it’s allowable to you if it’s similar to what’s allowable and opposed to what’s unallowable.”
1572

अथa·tha खोkho भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

Atha kho bhikkhūnaṁ etadahosi—

Then the monks thought,
1573

“कप्पतिkap·pa·ti नुnu खोkho यावकालिकेनyā·va·kā·li·ke·na यामकालिकं,yā·ma·kā·li·kaṃ नna नुnu खोkho कप्पति?kap·pa·ti

“kappati nu kho yāvakālikena yāmakālikaṁ, na nu kho kappati?

“Are post-midday tonics mixed with ordinary food allowable or unallowable?
1574

कप्पतिkap·pa·ti नुnu खोkho यावकालिकेनyā·va·kā·li·ke·na सत्ताहकालिकं,sat·tā·ha·kā·li·kaṃ नna नुnu खोkho कप्पति?kap·pa·ti

Kappati nu kho yāvakālikena sattāhakālikaṁ, na nu kho kappati?

Are seven-day tonics mixed with ordinary food allowable or unallowable?
1575

कप्पतिkap·pa·ti नुnu खोkho यावकालिकेनyā·va·kā·li·ke·na यावजीविकं,yā·va·jī·vi·kaṃ नna नुnu खोkho कप्पति?kap·pa·ti

Kappati nu kho yāvakālikena yāvajīvikaṁ, na nu kho kappati?

Are lifetime tonics mixed with ordinary food allowable or unallowable?
1576

कप्पतिkap·pa·ti नुnu खोkho यामकालिकेनyā·ma·kā·li·ke·na सत्ताहकालिकं,sat·tā·ha·kā·li·kaṃ नna नुnu खोkho कप्पति?kap·pa·ti

Kappati nu kho yāmakālikena sattāhakālikaṁ, na nu kho kappati?

Are seven-day tonics mixed with post-midday tonics allowable or unallowable?
1577

कप्पतिkap·pa·ti नुnu खोkho यामकालिकेनyā·ma·kā·li·ke·na यावजीविकं,yā·va·jī·vi·kaṃ नna नुnu खोkho कप्पति?kap·pa·ti

Kappati nu kho yāmakālikena yāvajīvikaṁ, na nu kho kappati?

Are lifetime tonics mixed with post-midday tonics allowable or unallowable?
1578

कप्पतिkap·pa·ti नुnu खोkho सत्ताहकालिकेनsat·tā·ha·kā·li·ke·na यावजीविकं,yā·va·jī·vi·kaṃ नna नुnu खोkho कप्पती”ति?kap·pa·tī

Kappati nu kho sattāhakālikena yāvajīvikaṁ, na nu kho kappatī”ti?

Are lifetime tonics mixed with seven-day tonics allowable or unallowable?”
1579

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

They told the Buddha.
1580

“यावकालिकेन,yā·va·kā·li·ke·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve यामकालिकं,yā·ma·kā·li·kaṃ तदहुta·da·hu पटिग्गहितंpa·ṭig·ga·hi·taṃ कालेkā·le कप्पति,kap·pa·ti विकालेvi·kā·le नna कप्पति।kap·pa·ti

“Yāvakālikena, bhikkhave, yāmakālikaṁ, tadahu paṭiggahitaṁ kāle kappati, vikāle na kappati.

“When mixed with ordinary food, post-midday tonics are allowable before midday on the day they are received, but not after midday.
1581

यावकालिकेन,yā·va·kā·li·ke·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सत्ताहकालिकं,sat·tā·ha·kā·li·kaṃ तदहुta·da·hu पटिग्गहितंpa·ṭig·ga·hi·taṃ कालेkā·le कप्पति,kap·pa·ti विकालेvi·kā·le नna कप्पति।kap·pa·ti

Yāvakālikena, bhikkhave, sattāhakālikaṁ, tadahu paṭiggahitaṁ kāle kappati, vikāle na kappati.

When mixed with ordinary food, seven-day tonics are allowable before midday on the day they are received, but not after midday.
1582

यावकालिकेन,yā·va·kā·li·ke·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve यावजीविकं,yā·va·jī·vi·kaṃ तदहुta·da·hu पटिग्गहितंpa·ṭig·ga·hi·taṃ कालेkā·le कप्पति,kap·pa·ti विकालेvi·kā·le नna कप्पति।kap·pa·ti

Yāvakālikena, bhikkhave, yāvajīvikaṁ, tadahu paṭiggahitaṁ kāle kappati, vikāle na kappati.

When mixed with ordinary food, lifetime tonics are allowable before midday on the day they are received, but not after midday.
1583

यामकालिकेन,yā·ma·kā·li·ke·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सत्ताहकालिकं,sat·tā·ha·kā·li·kaṃ तदहुta·da·hu पटिग्गहितंpa·ṭig·ga·hi·taṃ यामेyā·me कप्पति,kap·pa·ti यामातिक्कन्तेyā·mā·tik·kan·te नna कप्पति।kap·pa·ti

Yāmakālikena, bhikkhave, sattāhakālikaṁ, tadahu paṭiggahitaṁ yāme kappati, yāmātikkante na kappati.

When mixed with post-midday tonics, seven-day tonics are allowable after midday on the day they are received, but not beyond dawn.
1584

यामकालिकेन,yā·ma·kā·li·ke·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve यावजीविकं,yā·va·jī·vi·kaṃ तदहुta·da·hu पटिग्गहितंpa·ṭig·ga·hi·taṃ यामेyā·me कप्पति,kap·pa·ti यामातिक्कन्तेyā·mā·tik·kan·te नna कप्पति।kap·pa·ti

Yāmakālikena, bhikkhave, yāvajīvikaṁ, tadahu paṭiggahitaṁ yāme kappati, yāmātikkante na kappati.

When mixed with post-midday tonics, lifetime tonics are allowable after midday on the day they are received, but not beyond dawn.
1585

सत्ताहकालिकेन,sat·tā·ha·kā·li·ke·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve यावजीविकंyā·va·jī·vi·kaṃ पटिग्गहितं,pa·ṭig·ga·hi·taṃ सत्ताहंsat·tā·haṃ कप्पति,kap·pa·ti सत्ताहातिक्कन्तेsat·tā·hā·tik·kan·te नna कप्पती”ति।kap·pa·tī

Sattāhakālikena, bhikkhave, yāvajīvikaṁ paṭiggahitaṁ, sattāhaṁ kappati, sattāhātikkante na kappatī”ti.

When mixed with seven-day tonics, lifetime tonics are allowable for seven days, but not beyond.”
1586

भेसज्जक्खन्धकोbhe·saj·jak·khan·dha·ko छट्ठो।chaṭ·ṭho

Bhesajjakkhandhako chaṭṭho.

The sixth chapter on medicines is finished.
1587

तस्सुद्दानंtas·sud·dā·naṃ

Tassuddānaṁ

This is the summary:
1588

सारदिकेsā·ra·di·ke विकालेपि,vi·kā·le·pi

Sāradike vikālepi,

“In autumn, also after midday,
1589

वसंva·saṃ मूलेmū·le पिट्ठेहिpiṭ·ṭhe·hi च;ca

vasaṁ mūle piṭṭhehi ca;

Fat, about root, and with flours;
1590

कसावेहिka·sā·ve·hi पण्णंpaṇ·ṇaṃ फलं,pha·laṃ

Kasāvehi paṇṇaṁ phalaṁ,

With bitter, leaf, fruit,
1591

जतुja·tu लोणंlo·ṇaṃ छकणञ्च।cha·ka·ṇañ·ca

jatu loṇaṁ chakaṇañca.

Gum, salt, and detergent.
1592

चुण्णंcuṇ·ṇaṃ चालिनिcā·li·ni मंसञ्च,maṃ·sañ·ca

Cuṇṇaṁ cālini maṁsañca,

Powder, sieve, and meat,
1593

अञ्जनंañ·ja·naṃ उपपिसनी;u·pa·pi·sa·nī

añjanaṁ upapisanī;

Ointment, scented;
1594

अञ्जनीañ·ja·nī उच्चापारुता,uc·cā·pā·ru·tā

Añjanī uccāpārutā,

Ointment box, luxurious, uncovered,
1595

सलाकाsa·lā·kā सलाकठानिं।sa·lā·ka·ṭhā·niṃ

salākā salākaṭhāniṁ.

Ointment stick, ointment stick case.
1596

थविकंसबद्धकंtha·vi·kaṃ·sa·bad·dha·kaṃ सुत्तं,sut·taṃ

Thavikaṁsabaddhakaṁ suttaṁ,

Bag, shoulder strap, string,
1597

मुद्धनितेलनत्थुmud·dha·ni·te·la·nat·thu च;ca

Muddhanitelanatthu ca;

Head oil, and nose;
1598

नत्थुकरणीnat·thu·ka·ra·ṇī धूमञ्च,dhū·mañ·ca

Natthukaraṇī dhūmañca,

Nose dropper, and smoke,
1599

नेत्तञ्चापिधनत्थवि।net·tañ·cā·pi·dha·nat·tha·vi

Nettañcāpidhanatthavi.

And tube, lid, bag.
1600

तेलपाकेसुte·la·pā·ke·su मज्जञ्च,maj·jañ·ca

Telapākesu majjañca,

In a concoction of oil, and alcohol,
1601

अतिक्खित्तंa·tik·khit·taṃ अब्भञ्जनं;ab·bhañ·ja·naṃ

atikkhittaṁ abbhañjanaṁ;

Too much, external use;
1602

तुम्बंtum·baṃ सेदंse·daṃ सम्भारञ्च,sam·bhā·rañ·ca

Tumbaṁ sedaṁ sambhārañca,

Vessel, sweat, and herbs,
1603

महाma·hā भङ्गोदकंbhaṅ·go·da·kaṃ तथा।ta·thā

mahā bhaṅgodakaṁ tathā.

Heavy, and so hemp water.
1604

दककोट्ठंda·ka·koṭ·ṭhaṃ लोहितञ्च,lo·hi·tañ·ca

Dakakoṭṭhaṁ lohitañca,

Bathtub, and blood,
1605

विसाणंvi·sā·ṇaṃ पादब्भञ्जनं;pā·dab·bhañ·ja·naṃ

visāṇaṁ pādabbhañjanaṁ;

Horn, salve for the feet;
1606

पज्जंpaj·jaṃ सत्थंsat·thaṃ कसावञ्च,ka·sā·vañ·ca

Pajjaṁ satthaṁ kasāvañca,

Foot salve, knife, and bitter,
1607

तिलकक्कंti·la·kak·kaṃ कबळिकं।ka·ba·ḷi·kaṃ

tilakakkaṁ kabaḷikaṁ.

Sesame paste, flour paste.
1608

चोळंco·ḷaṃ सासपकुट्टञ्च,sā·sa·pa·kuṭ·ṭañ·ca

Coḷaṁ sāsapakuṭṭañca,

Cloth, and mustard powder,
1609

धूमdhū·ma सक्खरिकायsak·kha·ri·kā·ya च;ca

dhūma sakkharikāya ca;

Smoke, and with a razor;
1610

वणतेलंva·ṇa·te·laṃ विकासिकं,vi·kā·si·kaṃ

Vaṇatelaṁ vikāsikaṁ,

Sore oil, bandage,
1611

विकटञ्चvi·ka·ṭañ·ca पटिग्गहं।pa·ṭig·ga·haṃ

vikaṭañca paṭiggahaṁ.

And foul, receiving.
1612

गूथंgū·thaṃ करोन्तोka·ron·to लोळिञ्च,lo·ḷiñ·ca

Gūthaṁ karonto loḷiñca,

Feces, excreting, and mixture,
1613

खारंkhā·raṃ मुत्तहरीतकं;mut·ta·ha·rī·ta·kaṃ

khāraṁ muttaharītakaṁ;

Lye, chebulic myrobalan in urine;
1614

गन्धाgan·dhā विरेचनञ्चेव,vi·re·ca·nañ·ce·va

Gandhā virecanañceva,

Scented, and purgative,
1615

अच्छाकटंac·chā·ka·ṭaṃ कटाकटं।ka·ṭā·ka·ṭaṃ

acchākaṭaṁ kaṭākaṭaṁ.

Clear congee, mung-bean broth, oily mung-bean broth.
1616

पटिच्छादनिpa·ṭic·chā·da·ni पब्भारा,pab·bhā·rā

Paṭicchādani pabbhārā,

Meat broth, hillside,
1617

आरामā·rā·ma सत्ताहेनsat·tā·he·na च;ca

ārāma sattāhena ca;

Monastery, and with seven days;
1618

गुळंgu·ḷaṃ मुग्गंmug·gaṃ सोवीरञ्च,so·vī·rañ·ca

Guḷaṁ muggaṁ sovīrañca,

Sugar, mung beans, and purgative,
1619

सामंपाकाsā·maṃ·pā·kā पुनापचे।pu·nā·pa·ce

sāmaṁpākā punāpace.

Cooking oneself, reheating.
1620

पुनानुञ्ञासिpu·nā·nuñ·ñā·si दुब्भिक्खे,dub·bhik·khe

Punānuññāsi dubbhikkhe,

He allowed again, when short of food,
1621

फलञ्चpha·lañ·ca तिलखादनी;ti·la·khā·da·nī

phalañca tilakhādanī;

And fruit, sesame, fresh food;
1622

पुरेभत्तंpu·re·bhat·taṃ कायडाहो,kā·ya·ḍā·ho

Purebhattaṁ kāyaḍāho,

Before eating, fever,
1623

निब्बत्तञ्चnib·bat·tañ·ca भगन्दलं।bha·gan·da·laṃ

nibbattañca bhagandalaṁ.

And removed, hemorrhoids.
1624

वत्थिकम्मञ्चvat·thi·kam·mañ·ca सुप्पिञ्च,sup·piñ·ca

Vatthikammañca suppiñca,

And enema, and Suppi,
1625

मनुस्समंसमेवma·nus·sa·maṃ·sa·me·va च;ca

manussamaṁsameva ca;

And human flesh;
1626

हत्थिअस्साhat·thi·as·sā सुनखोsu·na·kho च,ca

Hatthiassā sunakho ca,

Elephant, horse, and dog,
1627

अहिa·hi सीहञ्चsī·hañ·ca दीपिकं।dī·pi·kaṃ

ahi sīhañca dīpikaṁ.

Snake, lion, leopard.
1628

अच्छतरच्छमंसञ्च,ac·cha·ta·rac·cha·maṃ·sañ·ca

Acchataracchamaṁsañca,

Bear, and hyena flesh,
1629

पटिपाटिpa·ṭi·pā·ṭi चca यागुyā·gu च;ca

paṭipāṭi ca yāgu ca;

And turn, and congee;
1630

तरुणंta·ru·ṇaṃ अञ्ञत्रañ·ñat·ra गुळं,gu·ḷaṃ

Taruṇaṁ aññatra guḷaṁ,

Recent, apart from, sugar,
1631

सुनिधावसथागारं।su·ni·dhā·va·sa·thā·gā·raṃ

sunidhāvasathāgāraṁ.

Sunidha, guesthouse.
1632

गङ्गाgaṅ·gā कोटिसच्चकथा,ko·ṭi·sac·ca·ka·thā

Gaṅgā koṭisaccakathā,

Ganges, Koṭi, speaking the truths,
1633

अम्बपालीam·ba·pā·lī चca लिच्छवी;lic·cha·vī

ambapālī ca licchavī;

And Ambapālī, Licchavī;
1634

उद्दिस्सud·dis·sa कतंka·taṃ सुभिक्खं,su·bhik·khaṃ

Uddissa kataṁ subhikkhaṁ,

Killed for, plenty of food,
1635

पुनदेवpu·na·de·va पटिक्खिपि।pa·ṭik·khi·pi

punadeva paṭikkhipi.

He prohibited again.
1636

मेघोme·gho यसोya·so मेण्डकोmeṇ·ḍa·ko च,ca

Megho yaso meṇḍako ca,

Storm, Yasa, and Meṇḍaka,
1637

गोरसंgo·ra·saṃ पाथेय्यकेनpā·they·ya·ke·na च;ca

Gorasaṁ pātheyyakena ca;

Product of a cow, and with provisions;
1638

केणिke·ṇi अम्बोam·bo जम्बुjam·bu चोच,co·ca

Keṇi ambo jambu coca,

Keṇi, mango, rose apple, bananas with seeds,
1639

मोचमधुमुद्दिकसालुकं।mo·ca·ma·dhu·mud·di·ka·sā·lu·kaṃ

Mocamadhumuddikasālukaṁ.

Seedless bananas, licorice, grapes, lotus tubers.
1640

फारुसकाphā·ru·sa·kā डाकपिट्ठं,ḍā·ka·piṭ·ṭhaṃ

Phārusakā ḍākapiṭṭhaṁ,

Falsa fruit, potherbs, flour,
1641

आतुमायंā·tu·mā·yaṃ नहापितो;na·hā·pi·to

ātumāyaṁ nahāpito;

At Ātuma, barber;
1642

सावत्थियंsā·vat·thi·yaṃ फलंpha·laṃ बीजं,bī·jaṃ

Sāvatthiyaṁ phalaṁ bījaṁ,

At Sāvatthī, fruit, seed,
1643

किस्मिंkis·miṃ ठानेṭhā·ne चca कालिकेति।kā·li·ke·ti

kismiṁ ṭhāne ca kāliketi.

And about all sorts of matters, in the time period.”
1644

इमम्हिi·mam·hi खन्धकेkhan·dha·ke वत्थूvat·thū एकसतंe·ka·sa·taṃ छवत्थु।cha·vat·thu

Imamhi khandhake vatthū ekasataṁ chavatthu.

In this chapter there are one hundred and six topics.
1645

भेसज्जक्खन्धकोbhe·saj·jak·khan·dha·ko निट्ठितो।niṭ·ṭhi·to

Bhesajjakkhandhako niṭṭhito.

The chapter on medicines is finished.

Sources. Sanskrit: Satyavedaḥ, the New Testament in Sanskrit (Calcutta Baptist Missionaries, 1851; J. Wenger’s revision of W. Carey’s version). Digital text © 2018 SanskritBible.in, via eBible.org, licensed CC BY-SA 4.0; changed here: arranged by verse and every word linked to the dictionary (links made automatically). Old Testament Sanskrit: the Old Testament in Sanskrit, Calcutta Baptist Mission Press, 1848–1852 (public domain), read by OCR from the Internet Archive scans of the Boston University School of Theology copy; unproofread, with machine clean-up only. Pāli Canon: Mahāsaṅgīti Tipiṭaka Buddhavasse 2500 (based on the Vipassana Research Institute’s Chaṭṭha Saṅgāyana edition), from SuttaCentral bilara-data, CC0; Devanagari and pronunciation made automatically from the Roman text. Pāli English: Bhikkhu Sujato (suttas) and Bhikkhu Brahmali (Vinaya), SuttaCentral, CC0. Pāli word meanings: the Pali Text Society’s Pali-English Dictionary (Rhys Davids & Stede), corrected reprint © The Pali Text Society, CC BY-NC 3.0, digital text from BuddhaDust; word matching automatic. English: King James Version (1769), public domain; words the translators added are in italics. Word meanings and pronunciations: Monier-Williams, Sanskrit–English Dictionary (1872), via this site’s Sanskrit dictionary (CC BY-SA 4.0); English↔Sanskrit word matches made automatically and may need checking.